1mrk505222-Uen B en Technical Reference Manual Red670 1.2

Relion 670 series
Line differential protection RED670

Technical reference manual
Document ID: 1MRK 505 222-UEN

Issued: September 2011
Revision: B
Product version: 1.2
Copyright 2011 ABB. All rights reserved
Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC
directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low
voltage directive. The IED is designed in accordance with the international
standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction.....................................................................31
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................31
About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................31
About the technical reference manual.........................................32
This manual.................................................................................33
Introduction.............................................................................33
Principle of operation..............................................................33
Input and output signals.........................................................36
Function block........................................................................36
Setting parameters.................................................................36
Technical data........................................................................37
Intended audience.......................................................................37
Related documents......................................................................37
Revision notes.............................................................................38
Section 2
Analog inputs..................................................................39
Introduction.......................................................................................39
Operation principle...........................................................................39
Function block..................................................................................40
Setting parameters...........................................................................41
Section 3
Local HMI.......................................................................47
Human machine interface ................................................................47
Small size HMI..................................................................................49
Small............................................................................................49
Design.........................................................................................49
Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................51
Medium........................................................................................51
Design.........................................................................................51
Keypad.............................................................................................53
LED...................................................................................................54
Introduction..................................................................................54
Status indication LEDs................................................................54
Indication LEDs...........................................................................54
Local HMI related functions..............................................................55
Introduction..................................................................................55
General setting parameters.........................................................56
Status LEDs.................................................................................56
Design....................................................................................56
Function block........................................................................56
1
Table of contents

Indication LEDs...........................................................................57
Introduction.............................................................................57
Design....................................................................................57
Function block........................................................................64
Setting parameters.................................................................64
Section 4
Basic IED functions........................................................67

Authorization.....................................................................................67
Principle of operation...................................................................67
Authorization handling in the IED...........................................68
Self supervision with internal event list.............................................69
Introduction..................................................................................69
Internal signals.......................................................................71
Run-time model......................................................................73
Function block.............................................................................74
Output signals..............................................................................74
Setting parameters......................................................................74
Technical data.............................................................................75
Time synchronization........................................................................75
Introduction..................................................................................75
General concepts...................................................................75
Real-time clock (RTC) operation............................................78
Synchronization alternatives..................................................79
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization.....................82
Function block.............................................................................82
Output signals..............................................................................82
Technical data.............................................................................86
Parameter setting groups.................................................................86
Introduction..................................................................................86
Function block.............................................................................87
Input and output signals..............................................................88
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK.....................................................88
Introduction..................................................................................89
Function block.............................................................................89
2
Table of contents
Test mode functionality TEST..........................................................90

Introduction..................................................................................90
Function block.............................................................................92
IED identifiers...................................................................................93
Introduction..................................................................................93
Product information..........................................................................94
Introduction..................................................................................94
Factory defined settings..............................................................94
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI................................................95
Introduction..................................................................................95
Function block.............................................................................95
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ...........................................96
Introduction..................................................................................96
Function block.............................................................................97
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI....................................................98
Introduction..................................................................................98
Function block.............................................................................98
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI...............................................99
Introduction..................................................................................99
Frequency values........................................................................99
Function block...........................................................................100
Input and output signals............................................................101
Setting parameters....................................................................102
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM..............................................104
Introduction................................................................................104
Principle of operation.................................................................104
Function block...........................................................................105
Authority status ATHSTAT.............................................................106
Introduction................................................................................106
3
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................106
Output signals............................................................................106
Denial of service DOS....................................................................107
Introduction................................................................................107
Function blocks..........................................................................107
Signals.......................................................................................108
Settings......................................................................................108
Section 5
Differential protection...................................................109
Line differential protection..............................................................109
Introduction................................................................................109
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF,
L6CPDIF...............................................................................109
Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone
transformers LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF....................................111
Analog signal transfer for line differential protection............111
Algorithm and logic...............................................................112
Time synchronization...........................................................118
Analog signal communication for line differential
protection..............................................................................120
Open CT detection feature...................................................123
Binary signal transfer............................................................124
Line differential coordination function LDLPDIF ..................125
Function block...........................................................................125
Technical data...........................................................................143
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF .....................143
Identification..............................................................................143
Introduction................................................................................144
Logic diagram.......................................................................144
Function block...........................................................................145
Technical data...........................................................................146
Additional security logic for differential protection STSGGIO ........146
Introduction................................................................................146
Function block...........................................................................151
4
Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................153
Section 6
Impedance protection ..................................................155

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR...................................................155
Identification..............................................................................155
Introduction................................................................................155
Full scheme measurement...................................................156
Impedance characteristic.....................................................157
Minimum operating current...................................................161
Measuring principles............................................................161
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics......................................................................164
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................166
Function block...........................................................................169
Technical data...........................................................................174
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for
series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR.......174
Introduction................................................................................175
Directionality for series compensation..................................183
Function block...........................................................................188
Technical data...........................................................................194
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS......................................................................................194
Identification..............................................................................194
Introduction................................................................................195
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................197
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................199
Three-phase faults...............................................................201
Load encroachment..............................................................201
5
Table of contents
Minimum operate currents....................................................206

Function block...........................................................................211
Technical data...........................................................................214
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic
ZMHPDIS ......................................................................................214
Introduction................................................................................214
Basic operation characteristics.............................................217
Theory of operation..............................................................218
Function block...........................................................................230
Technical data...........................................................................233
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS..................................................................234
Introduction................................................................................234
Directional lines....................................................................240
Function block...........................................................................245
Technical data...........................................................................248
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and
additional distance protection directional function for earth
faults ZDMRDIR, ZDARDIR...........................................................248
Introduction................................................................................249
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR.............................................................................249
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults ZDARDIR ..........................................................252
Function block...........................................................................254
6
Table of contents
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC................................256
Introduction................................................................................256
Fault inception detection......................................................257
Function block...........................................................................258
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment
FMPSPDIS.....................................................................................259
Introduction................................................................................260
The phase selection function................................................260
Function block...........................................................................271
Technical data...........................................................................273
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR................................273
Introduction................................................................................274
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics......................................................................282
Function block...........................................................................287
Technical data...........................................................................292
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS............................................................................292
Introduction................................................................................293
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................295
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................297
Three-phase faults...............................................................299
Load encroachment..............................................................299
Minimum operate currents....................................................304
Function block...........................................................................309
7
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................312
Power swing detection ZMRPSB ...................................................312
Introduction................................................................................312
Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................314
Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................314
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................315
Basic detection logic.............................................................315
Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................318
Function block...........................................................................319
Technical data...........................................................................321
Power swing logic ZMRPSL ..........................................................321
Introduction................................................................................321
Communication and tripping logic........................................321
Blocking logic.......................................................................322
Function block...........................................................................324
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM ......................................................325
Introduction................................................................................325
Function block...........................................................................329
Technical data...........................................................................330
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
ZCVPSOF ......................................................................................331
Introduction................................................................................331
Function block...........................................................................333
Technical data...........................................................................334
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ...................................................334
Introduction................................................................................334
Function block...........................................................................337
8
Table of contents
Section 7
Current protection.........................................................341
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC ..................341
Introduction................................................................................341
Function block...........................................................................342
Technical data...........................................................................343
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC ......................343
Introduction................................................................................343
Function block...........................................................................348
Technical data...........................................................................355
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................356
Introduction................................................................................356
Function block...........................................................................357
Technical data...........................................................................358
Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC ....................358
Introduction................................................................................358
Operating quantity within the function..................................359
Internal polarizing.................................................................360
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................362
Base quantities within the protection....................................362
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................362
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................363
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................364
Second harmonic blocking element.....................................366
Switch on to fault feature......................................................368
Function block...........................................................................370
Technical data...........................................................................377
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................377
Introduction................................................................................378
9
Table of contents
Operating quantity within the function..................................378

Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................379
External polarizing for negative sequence function..............380
Base quantities within the function.......................................380
Internal negative sequence protection structure..................381
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................381
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................382
Function block...........................................................................385
Technical data...........................................................................391
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE .....................................................................................391
Introduction................................................................................391
Function inputs.....................................................................393
Function block...........................................................................399
Technical data...........................................................................403
Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR ...............404
Introduction................................................................................404
Function block...........................................................................407
Technical data...........................................................................408
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF ..............................................408
Introduction................................................................................409
Function block...........................................................................412
Technical data...........................................................................414
Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................415
Introduction................................................................................415
Function block...........................................................................416
Technical data...........................................................................417
Pole discordance protection CCRPLD ..........................................417
Introduction................................................................................418
10
Table of contents
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................421
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................421
Function block...........................................................................421
Technical data...........................................................................423
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP...............................423
Introduction................................................................................423
Low pass filtering..................................................................426
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................426
Function block...........................................................................427
Technical data...........................................................................429
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................430
Introduction................................................................................430
Low pass filtering..................................................................433
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................433
Function block...........................................................................434
Technical data...........................................................................437
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC .............................................437
Introduction................................................................................437
Function block...........................................................................438
Technical data...........................................................................439
Section 8
Voltage protection........................................................441
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................441
Introduction................................................................................441
Measurement principle.........................................................442
Time delay............................................................................442
Blocking................................................................................447
Design..................................................................................448
Function block...........................................................................450
11
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................453
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................454
Introduction................................................................................454
Time delay............................................................................455
Blocking................................................................................461
Design..................................................................................461
Function block...........................................................................463
Technical data...........................................................................466
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................466
Introduction................................................................................466
Time delay............................................................................467
Blocking................................................................................472
Design..................................................................................472
Function block...........................................................................473
Technical data...........................................................................476
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ............................................476
Introduction................................................................................476
Measured voltage.................................................................479
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................480
Cooling.................................................................................484
Overexcitation protection function measurands...................484
Overexcitation alarm............................................................485
Logic diagram.......................................................................485
Function block...........................................................................486
Technical data...........................................................................488
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................488
Introduction................................................................................488
Function block...........................................................................490
Technical data...........................................................................491
12
Table of contents
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................491

Introduction................................................................................491
Function block...........................................................................493
Technical data...........................................................................494
Section 9
Frequency protection....................................................495
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF .............................................495
Introduction................................................................................495
Time delay............................................................................496
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................496
Blocking................................................................................498
Design..................................................................................498
Function block...........................................................................499
Technical data...........................................................................500
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................500
Introduction................................................................................501
Time delay............................................................................501
Blocking................................................................................502
Design..................................................................................502
Function block...........................................................................503
Technical data...........................................................................504
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................504
Introduction................................................................................504
Time delay............................................................................505
Blocking................................................................................505
Design..................................................................................506
Function block...........................................................................507
Technical data...........................................................................508
13
Table of contents
Section 10 Multipurpose protection................................................509

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC..........................509
Introduction................................................................................509
Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................509
Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................512
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................512
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................517
Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................518
Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................518
Logic diagram.......................................................................518
Function block...........................................................................523
Technical data...........................................................................533
Section 11 Secondary system supervision.....................................535

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF ............................................535
Introduction................................................................................535
Function block...........................................................................537
Technical data...........................................................................538
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF...............................................538
Introduction................................................................................538
Zero and negative sequence detection................................539
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................543
Dead line detection...............................................................545
Main logic.............................................................................545
Function block...........................................................................549
Technical data...........................................................................550
Section 12 Control..........................................................................553
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN......................................................................................553
Introduction................................................................................553
Basic functionality.................................................................554
Logic diagrams.....................................................................554
14
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................563
Technical data...........................................................................569
Autorecloser SMBRREC ...............................................................569
Introduction................................................................................570
Logic Diagrams....................................................................570
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................570
Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................570
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a
reclosing cycle......................................................................571
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............572
Long trip signal.....................................................................572
Time sequence diagrams.....................................................579
Function block...........................................................................582
Technical data...........................................................................586
Apparatus control APC...................................................................586
Introduction................................................................................586
Error handling............................................................................587
Bay control QCBAY...................................................................589
Introduction...........................................................................589
Principle of operation............................................................589
Function block......................................................................591
Input and output signals.......................................................591
Setting parameters...............................................................592
Local/Remote switch.................................................................592
Introduction...........................................................................592
Function block......................................................................594
Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................595
Introduction...........................................................................596
Function block......................................................................601
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................602
Introduction...........................................................................603
15
Table of contents
Function block......................................................................607
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................608
Introduction...........................................................................608
Function block......................................................................612
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................613
Introduction...........................................................................614
Function block......................................................................616
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................618
Introduction...........................................................................618
Function block......................................................................620
Interlocking ....................................................................................622
Introduction................................................................................622
Logical node for interlocking SCILO .........................................625
Introduction...........................................................................625
Logic diagram.......................................................................625
Function block......................................................................626
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................626
Introduction...........................................................................627
Function block......................................................................627
Logic diagram.......................................................................627
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS..........................628
Introduction...........................................................................628
Function block......................................................................629
Logic diagram.......................................................................630
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................632
Introduction...........................................................................633
Function block......................................................................633
16
Table of contents
Logic diagram.......................................................................634
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................635
Introduction...........................................................................635
Function block......................................................................636
Logic diagram.......................................................................637
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH .....................................................642
Introduction...........................................................................642
Function blocks....................................................................643
Logic diagrams.....................................................................645
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ...........................................654
Introduction...........................................................................654
Function block......................................................................655
Logic diagrams.....................................................................657
Input and output signals ......................................................660
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ..........................................663
Introduction...........................................................................663
Function block......................................................................664
Logic diagram.......................................................................665
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................672
Introduction...........................................................................673
Function block......................................................................674
Logic diagram.......................................................................675
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................678
Introduction...........................................................................678
Logic diagram.......................................................................678
Function block......................................................................679
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGGIO.....................................................................679
Introduction................................................................................679
Functionality and behaviour ................................................681
Graphical display..................................................................681
Function block...........................................................................683
Selector mini switch VSGGIO.........................................................685
Introduction................................................................................685
17
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................686
Generic double point function block DPGGIO................................687
Introduction................................................................................687
Function block...........................................................................688
Settings......................................................................................688
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO.........................688
Introduction................................................................................688
Function block...........................................................................689
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS..........690
Introduction................................................................................691
Function block...........................................................................692
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD....................................707
Introduction................................................................................707
Function block...........................................................................708
Section 13 Scheme communication...............................................711

Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent
protection ZCPSCH .......................................................................711
Introduction................................................................................711
Blocking scheme..................................................................712
Permissive underreaching scheme......................................712
Permissive overreaching scheme........................................713
Unblocking scheme..............................................................713
Intertrip scheme....................................................................714
Simplified logic diagram.......................................................714
Function block...........................................................................716
Technical data...........................................................................717
18
Table of contents
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance

protection ZC1PPSCH ...................................................................718
Introduction................................................................................718
Blocking scheme..................................................................719
Permissive underreach scheme...........................................719
Permissive overreach scheme.............................................720
Intertrip scheme....................................................................720
Simplified logic diagram.......................................................721
Function block...........................................................................722
Technical data...........................................................................724
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance
protection ZCRWPSCH .................................................................724
Introduction................................................................................724
Current reversal logic...........................................................725
Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................725
Function block...........................................................................727
Technical data...........................................................................728
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL...............................................728
Introduction................................................................................729
Zone extension.....................................................................729
Loss-of-Load acceleration....................................................730
Function block...........................................................................730
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
protection ECPSCH .......................................................................732
Introduction................................................................................732
Blocking scheme..................................................................733
Permissive under/overreaching scheme..............................733
Function block...........................................................................736
Technical data...........................................................................738
19
Table of contents
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH...............................................738
Introduction................................................................................738
Directional comparison logic function...................................739
Fault current reversal logic...................................................739
Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................740
Function block...........................................................................741
Technical data...........................................................................742
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
segregated communication ZC1WPSCH ......................................743
Introduction................................................................................743
Current reversal logic ..........................................................743
Function block...........................................................................745
Technical data...........................................................................747
Direct transfer trip logic...................................................................747
Introduction................................................................................748
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC......749
Introduction...........................................................................749
Function block......................................................................752
Technical data......................................................................753
Compensated over and undervoltage protection
COUVGAPC..............................................................................754
Introduction...........................................................................754
Function block......................................................................756
Technical data......................................................................758
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC......................758
Introduction...........................................................................759
Function block......................................................................760
Technical data......................................................................761
20
Table of contents
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC..............................................761

Introduction...........................................................................761
Function block......................................................................762
Technical data......................................................................763
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV...........763
Introduction...........................................................................763
Function block......................................................................764
Technical data......................................................................765
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV..................765
Introduction...........................................................................765
Function block......................................................................766
Technical data......................................................................767
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC...........767
Introduction...........................................................................767
Function block......................................................................768
Technical data......................................................................769
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC..................769
Introduction...........................................................................769
Function block......................................................................770
Technical data......................................................................771
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC.......................................771
Introduction...........................................................................771
Function block......................................................................772
Technical data......................................................................773
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC.....................................773
21
Table of contents
Introduction...........................................................................773
Function block......................................................................774
Technical data......................................................................775
Section 14 Logic.............................................................................777
Tripping logic SMPPTRC ...............................................................777
Introduction................................................................................777
Logic diagram.......................................................................779
Function block...........................................................................782
Technical data...........................................................................784
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO............................................................784
Introduction................................................................................784
Function block...........................................................................786
Configurable logic blocks................................................................788
Introduction................................................................................788
Inverter function block INV........................................................788
OR function block OR................................................................789
AND function block AND...........................................................790
Timer function block TIMER......................................................790
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER..................................791
Exclusive OR function block XOR.............................................791
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY...................................792
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY.................792
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.................793
Controllable gate function block GATE......................................794
Settable timer function block TIMERSET..................................795
Technical data...........................................................................796
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN............................................796
Function block...........................................................................797
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................798
Introduction................................................................................798
22
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................798
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node
representation B16IFCVI................................................................799
Introduction................................................................................799
Function block...........................................................................800
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16..........................................801
Introduction................................................................................801
Function block...........................................................................802
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
representation IB16FCVB...............................................................803
Introduction................................................................................803
Function block...........................................................................804
Section 15 Monitoring.....................................................................807
Measurements................................................................................807
Introduction................................................................................808
Measurement supervision....................................................809
Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................813
Phase current measurement CMMXU.................................818
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU..............................................................819
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI..................................................................................819
Function block...........................................................................819
Technical data...........................................................................837
Event counter CNTGGIO................................................................837
Identification..............................................................................837
Introduction................................................................................837
Reporting..............................................................................838
23
Table of contents
Design..................................................................................838
Function block...........................................................................839
Input signals..............................................................................839
Technical data...........................................................................840
Event function EVENT....................................................................840
Introduction................................................................................840
Function block...........................................................................842
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP.....................................845
Introduction................................................................................845
Function block...........................................................................846
Fault locator LMBRFLO..................................................................847
Introduction................................................................................848
Measuring Principle..............................................................849
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....849
The non-compensated impedance model............................853
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................854
Function block...........................................................................854
Technical data...........................................................................856
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP................................856
Introduction................................................................................856
Function block...........................................................................857
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.......................................................857
Introduction................................................................................858
Function block...........................................................................865
Technical data...........................................................................878
Event list.........................................................................................878
Introduction................................................................................878
24
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................879
Input signals..............................................................................879
Technical data...........................................................................879
Indications......................................................................................879
Introduction................................................................................879
Function block...........................................................................881
Input signals..............................................................................881
Technical data...........................................................................881
Event recorder ...............................................................................881
Introduction................................................................................881
Function block...........................................................................882
Input signals..............................................................................882
Technical data...........................................................................882
Trip value recorder.........................................................................882
Introduction................................................................................882
Function block...........................................................................883
Input signals..............................................................................884
Technical data...........................................................................884
Disturbance recorder......................................................................884
Introduction................................................................................884
Memory and storage............................................................885
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................886
Function block...........................................................................887
Technical data...........................................................................887
Section 16 Metering.......................................................................889
Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO..........................................................889
Introduction................................................................................889
Function block...........................................................................891
Technical data...........................................................................893
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
ETPMMTR......................................................................................893
Introduction................................................................................893
Function block...........................................................................894
25
Table of contents

Section 17 Station communication.................................................897

Overview.........................................................................................897
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................897
Introduction................................................................................897
Technical data...........................................................................898
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO,
SP16GGIO................................................................................898
Introduction...........................................................................898
Function block......................................................................898
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO.......900
Function block......................................................................900
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication..............901
Introduction...........................................................................901
Function block......................................................................903
Output signals......................................................................903
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.....................................903
Introduction................................................................................903
Consequence on accuracy for power measurement
functions when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE
communication..........................................................................906
Function block...........................................................................907
Output signals............................................................................907
Technical data...........................................................................908
LON communication protocol.........................................................908
Introduction................................................................................908
Technical data...........................................................................927
SPA communication protocol.........................................................927
Introduction................................................................................927
26
Table of contents
Communication ports...........................................................935
Design.......................................................................................935
Technical data...........................................................................936
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................936
Introduction................................................................................936
General.................................................................................936
Communication ports...........................................................946
Function block...........................................................................946
Technical data...........................................................................957
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.........................................................................957
Function block...........................................................................957
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..........................................960
Function block...........................................................................960
Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV,
MULTICMDSND.............................................................................961
Introduction................................................................................962
Design.......................................................................................962
General.................................................................................962
Function block...........................................................................963
Section 18 Remote communication................................................967

Binary signal transfer......................................................................967
Introduction................................................................................967
Function block...........................................................................969
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit..............974
Function block...........................................................................974
27
Table of contents
Section 19 IED hardware...............................................................975

Overview.........................................................................................975
Variants of case and local HMI display size..............................975
Case from the rear side.............................................................978
Hardware modules.........................................................................982
Overview....................................................................................982
Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................983
Introduction...........................................................................983
Functionality.........................................................................983
Design..................................................................................984
Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................986
Introduction...........................................................................986
Functionality.........................................................................986
Design..................................................................................986
Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................988
Introduction...........................................................................988
Functionality.........................................................................988
Block diagram.......................................................................989
Power supply module (PSM).....................................................990
Introduction...........................................................................990
Design..................................................................................990
Technical data......................................................................990
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI).............................991
Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................991
Introduction...........................................................................991
Design..................................................................................991
Technical data......................................................................992
Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization (ADM) .............................................................993
Introduction...........................................................................993
Design..................................................................................993
Binary input module (BIM).........................................................995
Introduction...........................................................................995
Design..................................................................................995
Technical data......................................................................999
Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................999
Introduction...........................................................................999
Design..................................................................................999
Technical data....................................................................1001
Static binary output module (SOM).........................................1002
Introduction.........................................................................1002
Design................................................................................1002
Technical data....................................................................1004
28
Table of contents
Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1005

Introduction.........................................................................1005
Design................................................................................1006
Technical data....................................................................1008
mA input module (MIM)...........................................................1009
Introduction.........................................................................1009
Design................................................................................1009
Technical data....................................................................1010
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ......................1011
Introduction.........................................................................1011
Design................................................................................1011
Technical data....................................................................1012
Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................1013
Introduction.........................................................................1013
Design................................................................................1013
Technical data....................................................................1015
Optical ethernet module (OEM)...............................................1015
Introduction.........................................................................1015
Functionality.......................................................................1015
Design................................................................................1015
Technical data....................................................................1016
Line data communication module (LDCM)..............................1016
Introduction.........................................................................1016
Design................................................................................1017
Technical data....................................................................1018
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)............1019
Introduction.........................................................................1019
Design................................................................................1019
Functionality.......................................................................1021
Technical data....................................................................1022
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)...............................1022
Introduction.........................................................................1022
Design................................................................................1022
Technical data....................................................................1023
GPS antenna...........................................................................1023
Introduction.........................................................................1023
Design................................................................................1023
Technical data....................................................................1025
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B...........................1026
Introduction.........................................................................1026
Design................................................................................1026
Technical data....................................................................1027
Dimensions...................................................................................1028
29
Table of contents
Case without rear cover...........................................................1028

Case with rear cover................................................................1030
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1032
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions.................................1033
Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1034
External resistor unit for high impedance differential
protection.................................................................................1034
Mounting alternatives...................................................................1035
Flush mounting........................................................................1035
Overview............................................................................1035
Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1037
19 panel rack mounting..........................................................1038
Overview............................................................................1038
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting...............1039
Wall mounting..........................................................................1039
Overview............................................................................1039
Mounting procedure for wall mounting...............................1040
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................1041
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting...............................................1041
Overview............................................................................1041
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting..........1042
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case...........1042
Side-by-side flush mounting....................................................1043
Overview............................................................................1043
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting.........1044
Technical data..............................................................................1044
Enclosure.................................................................................1044
Connection system..................................................................1045
Influencing factors...................................................................1045
Type tests according to standard............................................1046
Section 20 Labels.........................................................................1049
Labels on IED...............................................................................1049
Section 21 Connection diagrams.................................................1053

Section 22 Inverse time characteristics........................................1069
Application....................................................................................1069
Principle of operation....................................................................1072
Mode of operation....................................................................1072
Inverse characteristics..................................................................1077
Section 23 Glossary.....................................................................1103
30
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter

This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides
information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.
1.1
Introduction to the technical reference manual
1.1.1
About the complete set of manuals for an IED
Decommissioning
deinstalling & disposal
Maintenance
Operation
Commissioning
Installing
Engineering
Planning & purchase
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Engineeringmanual
Installation and
Commissioning manual
Operators manual
Application manual
Technical reference
manual
IEC09000744-1-en.vsd
IEC09000744 V1 EN
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting

guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual
should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function
could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings.
The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality
descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,
setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference
31
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,

installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on
how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as
a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical
and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and
configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section
numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned.
The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the
protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The
operators manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to
view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.
The Engineering Manual (EM) contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs
using the different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to
set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also
recommends a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI
functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850 and DNP3.
1.1.2
About the technical reference manual

The following chapters are included in the technical reference manual.
Local HMI describes the control panel on the IED and explains display
characteristics, control keys and various local HMI features.
Basic IED functions presents functions for all protection types that are
included in all IEDs, for example, time synchronization, self supervision with
event list, test mode and other general functions.
Differential protection describes differential functions and restricted earth fault
protection.
Impedance protection describes functions for distance zones with their
quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment, power
swing detection and similar.
Current protection describes functions, for example, over current protection,
breaker failure protection and pole discordance.
Voltage protection describes functions for under voltage and over voltage
protection and residual over voltage protection.
Frequency protection describes functions for over frequency, under frequency
and rate of change of frequency protection.
Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current
and voltage.
Secondary system supervision describes current based functions for current
circuit supervision and fuse failure supervision.
Control describes control functions, for example, synchronization and
energizing check and other product specific functions.
Scheme communication describes functions related to current reversal and
weak end infeed logic.
32
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1.1.3
Logic describes trip logic and related functions.

Monitoring describes measurement related functions that are used to provide
data regarding relevant quantities, events and faults, for example.
Metering describes pulse counter logic.
Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general,
including the use of IEC 61850 and horizontal communication via GOOSE.
Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the
associated hardware.
Hardware describes the IED and its components.
Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information
regarding connections to and from the IED.
Inverse time characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse
time curves and their effects.
Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical
documentation.
This manual
The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where
applicable). The different sections are outlined below.
1.1.3.1
Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.
1.1.3.2
Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms
and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered
by dashed lines.
Signal names
Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two
dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated
name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality
of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal
BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows:
BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from
the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed.
33
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Input and output signals

In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the
outer border of the diagram.
Input and output signals can be configured using the ACT tool. They can be
connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and
outputs. Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples
output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.
Setting parameters
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their
values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the
symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes.
Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
Internal signals
Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the
frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and
continues, see figure 1.
BLKTR
TEST
TEST
&
Block TUV=Yes
>1
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK
VTSU
BLOCK-int.
STUL1N
&
BLOCK-int.
&
STUL2N
BLOCK-int.
STUL3N
&
>1
&
TRIP
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
xx04000375.vsd
IEC04000375 V1 EN
Figure 1:
Logic diagram example with -int signals
34
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
External signals
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram
have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.
STZMPP-cont.
>1
STCND
STNDL1L2-cont.
&
1L1L2
STNDL2L3-cont.
&
1L2L3
1L3L1
1L1N
1L2N
&
STNDL3L1-cont.
&
STNDL1N-cont.
&
STNDL2N-cont.
STNDL3N-cont.
&
1L3N
STNDPE-cont.
>1
>1
1--VTSZ
&
>1
1--BLOCK
1--STND
BLK-cont.
xx04000376.vsd
IEC04000376 V1 EN
Figure 2:
Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal
STNDL1N-cont.
>1
STNDL2N-cont.
STNDL3N-cont.
STNDL1L2-cont.
>1
&
15 ms
t
STL1
&
15 ms
t
STL2
&
15 ms
t
STL3
&
15 ms
t
START
STNDL2L3-cont.
STNDL3L1-cont.
>1
>1
BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd
IEC04000377 V1 EN
Figure 3:
Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal
35
Section 1
Introduction
1.1.3.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of
two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second
column contains the description of the signal.
1.1.3.4
Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically.
Input signals are always on the left hand side and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available.
These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme and
are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but
described in the settings table.
The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block
symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set a signal name of
their own in PCM600.
The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block
symbol given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to
another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid
application configuration.
IEC 61850 - 8 -1
Logical Node
Mandatory
signal (*)
Inputs
Outputs
PCGGIO
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT
INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
^SCAL_VAL
en05000511-1-en.vsd
User defined
name (^)
Diagram
Number
IEC05000511 V2 EN
Figure 4:
1.1.3.5
Example of a function block
Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the
function in question.
36
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1.1.3.6
Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the
function or hardware described.
1.1.4
Intended audience
General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning
personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.
Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in
the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a
basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.
1.1.5
Related documents
Documents related to RED670
Identity number
Operators manual
1MRK 505 223-UEN
Installation and commissioning manual
1MRK 505 224-UEN
1MRK 505 222-UEN
Application manual
1MRK 505 225-UEN
Product guide customized
1MRK 505 226-BEN
Product guide pre-configured
1MRK 505 228-BEN
Product guide IEC 61850-9-2
1MRK 505 204-BEN
Sample specification
SA2005-001281
Connection and Installation components
1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST
1MRK 512 001-BEN
Accessories for 670 series IEDs
1MRK 514 012-BEN
670 series SPA and signal list
1MRK 500 092-WEN
IEC 61850 Data objects list for 670 series
1MRK 500 091-WEN
Engineering manual 670 series
1MRK 511 240-UEN
Communication set-up for Relion 670 series
1MRK 505 260-UEN
More information can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation.
37
Section 1
Introduction
1.1.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Revision notes
Revision
Description
Minor corrections made
Minor corrections made
38
Section 2
Analog inputs
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 2
Analog inputs
2.1
Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary
system quantities. Set values are done in primary quantities as well and it is
important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers
properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degree and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.
2.2
Operation principle
The direction of a current to the IED depends on the connection of the CT. The
main CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point to
the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED.
Directional conventions for current or power, for example
Positive value of current or power means quantity direction into the object.
Negative value of current or power means quantity direction out from the object.
Directional conventions for directional functions (see figure 5)
39
Section 2
Analog inputs
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Forward means direction into the object.

Reverse means direction out from the object.
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN
Figure 5:
Internal convention of the directionality in the IED
The correct setting of the primary CT direction
CTStarPoint is set to FromObject or ToObject.

Positive quantities flow towards the object.
Direction is defined as Forward and looks towards the object.
The ratios of the main CTs and VTs must be known to use primary system
quantities for settings and calculation in the IED, The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with this information.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool.
2.3
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.
The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool
they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.
40
Section 2
Analog inputs
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
2.4
Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED type.
Table 1:
AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name
PhaseAngleRef
Values (Range)
TRM40-Ch1
TRM40-Ch2
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-L1I
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
TRM40-Ch1
Description
Reference channel for phase angle
presentation
41
Section 2
Analog inputs
Table 2:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec10
1 - 10
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint11
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec11
1 - 10
Table continues on next page

42
Section 2
Analog inputs
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTprim11
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint12
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec12
1 - 10
CTprim12
1 - 99999
3000
Table 3:
TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim8
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
43
Section 2
Analog inputs
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Step
Default
Table 4:
TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Table 5:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
44
Section 2
Analog inputs
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim8
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Step
Default
Table 6:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
45
Section 2
Analog inputs
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CTStarPoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
46
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 3
Local HMI
About this chapter

This chapter describes the structure and use of local HMI, which is the control
panel at the IED.
3.1
Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a small and a medium sized
model. The difference between the two models is the size of the LCD. The small
size LCD can display seven lines of text and the medium size LCD can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page. Up to 12 single line
diagram pages can be defined, depending on the product capability.
The local HMI is divided into zones with different functionality.
Status indication LEDs.

Alarm indication LEDs, which consist of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with
user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from PCM600.
Liquid crystal display (LCD).
Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for
selection between local and remote control and reset.
Isolated RJ45 communication port.
47
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC05000055-LITEN V1 EN
Figure 6:
Small, alpha numeric HMI
IEC05000056-LITEN V1 EN
Figure 7:
Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects
48
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3.2
Small size HMI
3.2.1
Small
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 case. The LCD on the
small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per
line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and
time. The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.
3.2.2
Design
The local HMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of
the small local HMI are shown in figure 8
49
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
en05000055.eps
IEC05000055-CALLOUT V1 EN
Figure 8:
Small graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
50
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3.3
Medium size graphic HMI
3.3.1
Medium
The following case sizes can be equipped with the medium size LCD:
1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
This is a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28
lines with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD
is required.
3.3.2
Design
The different parts of the medium size local HMI are shown in figure 9. The local
HMI exists in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the
keypad operation buttons and the yellow LED designation.
51
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
en05000056.eps
IEC05000056-CALLOUT V1 EN
Figure 9:
Medium size graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
52
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3.4
Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look
and feel in all IEDs. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys
function is identical.
IEC05000153 V1 EN
Figure 10:
The HMI keypad.
Table 7 describes the HMI keys that are used to operate the IED.
Table 7:
Key
HMI keys on the front of the IED

Function
Press to close or energize a breaker or disconnector.
IEC05000101 V1 EN
Press to open a breaker or disconnector.

IEC05000102 V1 EN
Press to open two sub menus: Key operation and IED information.
IEC05000103 V1 EN
Press to clear entries, cancel commands or edit.

IEC05000104 V1 EN
Press to open the main menu and to move to the default screen.
IEC05000105 V1 EN
Press to set the IED in local or remote control mode.

IEC05000106 V1 EN
Press to open the reset screen.

IEC05000107 V1 EN
Press to start the editing mode and confirm setting changes, when in editing mode.
IEC05000108 V1 EN
53
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Key
Function
Press to navigate forward between screens and move right in editing mode.
IEC05000109 V1 EN
Press to navigate backwards between screens and move left in editing mode.
IEC05000110 V1 EN
Press to move up in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
IEC05000111 V1 EN
Press to move down in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
IEC05000112 V1 EN
3.5
LED
3.5.1
Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that
events may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to
something that has occurred and needs some sort of action.
3.5.2
Status indication LEDs

The three LEDs above the LCD provide information as shown in the table below.
LED Indication
Information
Green:
Steady
In service
Flashing
Internal failure
Dark
No power supply
Yellow:
Steady
Dist. rep. triggered
Flashing
Terminal in test mode
Red:
Steady
3.5.3
Trip command issued
Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in 670 series. Its main
purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or
alarm signals.
54
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs are located on the right
hand side of the front panel. Alarm LEDs are located on the right of the LCD
screen and show steady or flashing light.
Steady light indicates normal operation.

Flashing light indicates alarm.
Alarm LEDs can be configured in PCM600 and depend on the binary logic.
Therefore they can not be configured on the local HMI.
Typical examples of alarm LEDs
Bay controller failure

CB close blocked
Interlocking bypassed
Differential protection trip
SF6 Gas refill
Position error
CB spring charge alarm
Oil temperature alarm
Thermal overload trip
The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been
established between the IED and a computer.
The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or
remote control of the IED is active.
3.6
Local HMI related functions
3.6.1
Introduction
The local HMI can be adapted to the application configuration and to user preferences.
Function block LocalHMI

Function block LEDGEN
Setting parameters
55
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3.6.2
Table 8:
Name
General setting parameters

SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Language
English
OptionalLanguage
English
Local HMI language
DisplayTimeout
10 - 120
Min
10
60
Local HMI display timeout
AutoRepeat
Off
On
On
Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not (Off)
ContrastLevel
-10 - 20
Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen
0-0
Default screen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
Sort order of event list
SymbolFont
IEC
ANSI
IEC
Symbol font for Single Line Diagram
3.6.3
Status LEDs
3.6.3.1
Design
The function block LocalHMI controls and supplies information about the status of
the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of local HMI are
configured with PCM600.
The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration
logic.
See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.
3.6.3.2
Function block
LocalHMI
CLRLEDS
HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC05000773 V2 EN
Figure 11:
3.6.3.3
LocalHMI function block

Table 9:
Name
CLRLEDS
LocalHMI Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
56
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 10:
LocalHMI Output signals
Name
Type
Description
HMI-ON
BOOLEAN
Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S
BOOLEAN
Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S
BOOLEAN
Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F
BOOLEAN
Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE
BOOLEAN
A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared
LEDSCLRD
BOOLEAN
Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not

active
3.6.4
Indication LEDs
3.6.4.1
Introduction
The function block LEDGEN controls and supplies information about the status of
the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LEDGEN are configured with
PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the Signal
Matrix Tool in PCM600.
LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red.

LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow.
Each indication LED on the local HMI can be set individually to operate in six
different sequences
Two sequences operate as follow type.

Four sequences operate as latch type.
Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a

protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with
reset functionality.
Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as signaling
system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flashing (-F). See the technical
reference manual for more information.
3.6.4.2
Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in
some of the modes of LEDGEN. The latest LED picture appears immediately after
the IED is successfully restarted.
Operating modes
Collecting mode
57
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is
suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.
Re-starting mode
In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous
active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one
disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched
sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a
new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the
reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has
elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI
From function input
Active indications can be acknowledged or reset manually. Manual

acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function
is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledged or reset
is performed via the reset button and menus on the local HMI. See the
operator's manual for more information.
Active indications can also be acknowledged or reset from an input,

RESET, to the function. This input can, for example, be configured to a
binary input operated from an external push button. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the
button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment or reset only affects
indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.
Automatic reset
Automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequences
The operating sequences can be of type Follow or Latched.
For the Follow type the LED follows the input signal completely.
For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until
it is reset.
58
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Figure 12 show the function of available sequences that are selectable for each
LED separately.
The acknowledgment or reset function is not applicable for sequence 1 and 2

(Follow type).
Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in
collecting mode.
Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode.
Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode.
The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F =
Flashing.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the
selected sequence diagrams.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics as shown in figure 12.
= No indication
= Steady light
= Flash
en05000506.vsd
IEC05000506 V1 EN
Figure 12:
Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN
Figure 13:
Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing
instead of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if
59
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after
acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Figure 14:
Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing
light have been alternated.
Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the
activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The
difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be
affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has
been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED
is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235 V2 EN
Figure 15:
Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the
positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing
60
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent
in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Definition of a disturbance
A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is
activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals
for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals
have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the
tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be
issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this
functionality is shown in figure 16.
From
disturbance
length control
per LED
set to
sequence 6
New
disturbance
tRestart
t
&
&
1
&
en01000237.vsd
IEC01000237 V1 EN
Figure 16:
Activation of new disturbance
In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal
each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the
definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is
shown i diagram in figure 17.
Activating signal
To LED
AND
tMax
To disturbance
length control
t
en05000507.vsd
IEC05000507 V1 EN
Figure 17:
Length control of activating signals
Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
61
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 18:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance
Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240 V2 EN
Figure 19:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances
62
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Figure 20 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first
one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Figure 20:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 21 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242 V2 EN
Figure 21:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

63
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3.6.4.3
Function block
LEDGEN
BLOCK
RESET
LEDTEST
NEWIND
ACK
IEC05000508 V2 EN
Figure 22:
3.6.4.4
LEDGEN function block

Table 11:
LEDGEN Input signals
Name
Type
Input to block the operation of the LED-unit
RESET
BOOLEAN
Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the

LED-unit
LEDTEST
BOOLEAN
Input for external LED test
LEDGEN Output signals
Name
Table 13:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 12:
3.6.4.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
NEWIND
BOOLEAN
A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs
ACK
BOOLEAN
A pulse is provided when the LEDs are

acknowledged
Setting parameters
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation mode for the LED function
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Defines the disturbance length
tMax
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Maximum time for the definition of a

disturbance
SeqTypeLED1
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for LED 1
SeqTypeLED2
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
64
Section 3
Local HMI
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SeqTypeLED3
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED8
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
sequence type for LED 8
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED11
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
65
Section 3
Local HMI
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SeqTypeLED12
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
66
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 4
Basic IED functions
About this chapter

This chapter presents functions that are basic to all 670 series IEDs. Typical
functions in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.
4.1
Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:
4.1.1
local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in
Table 14.
Be sure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required
when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:
Table 14:
R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights
Pre-defined user types
Access rights
Guest
Super User
SPA Guest
System
Operator
Protection
Engineer
Design
Engineer
User
Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change

setting group, control settings,
limit supervision)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Advanced setting possibilities (for

example protection settings)
R/W
R/W
R/W
Basic control possibilities (process

control, no bypass)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W

67
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Access rights
Guest
Super User
SPA Guest
System
Operator
Protection
Engineer
Design
Engineer
User
Administrator
Advanced control possibilities

(process control including interlock
trigg)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Basic command handling (for

example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Advanced command handling (for

example clear disturbance record)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Basic configuration possibilities (I/

O-configuration in SMT)
R/W
R/W
R/W
Advanced configuration
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
R/W
R/W
R/W
File loading (database loading

from XML-file)
R/W
R/W
R/W
File dumping (database dumping

to XML-file)
R/W
R/W
R/W
File transfer (FTP file transfer)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file

transfer)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer)
R/W
R/W
Database access for normal user
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
User administration (user

management FTP File Transfer)
R/W
R/W
User administration (user

management SPA File Transfer)
R/W
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management
Tool (UMT) within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local
HMI on the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on
local HMI.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names
and passwords.
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group

to be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.
4.1.1.1
Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the
IED until a user has been created with the User Management Tool.
68
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No
user defined!
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to
60 minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the User Management Tool and
downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or
when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log
on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the
user can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and
down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E
key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following
character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password.
After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and
press the E key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes
it right or presses Cancel.
4.2
Self supervision with internal event list
4.2.1
Introduction
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal
system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The
internal events are saved in an internal event list.
4.2.2
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
69
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600.
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm
contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of
this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 24 and
a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 23
IEC04000520 V1 EN
Figure 23:
Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact
70
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IO fail
OR
IO stopped
Set
Reset
IO started
e.g. BIM 1 Error
e.g. IOM2 Error

e.g. IO (n) Error
OR
Internal
FAIL
OR
LON ERROR
FTF fatal error
OR
Watchdog
NUMFAIL
RTE fatal error

RTE Appl-fail
RTE OK
OR
Reset
IEC61850 not ready

RTCERROR
Internal
WARN
Set
OR
RTCERROR
Set
RTC OK
Reset
TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset
OR
Set
Reset
SYNCH OK
Settings changed
NUMWARNING
TIMESYNCHERROR
SETCHGD
1 second pulse
en04000519-1.vsd
IEC04000519 V2 EN
Figure 24:
Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block
Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The
signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for
other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.
4.2.2.1
Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.
Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 15.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 16.
Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 17.
71
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 15:
Self-supervision's standard internal signals
Name of signal
Description
FAIL
Internal Fail status
WARNING
Internal Warning status
NUMFAIL
CPU module Fail status
NUMWARNING
CPU module Warning status
RTCERROR
Real Time Clock status
TIMESYNCHERROR
Time Synchronization status
RTEERROR
Runtime Execution Error status
IEC61850ERROR
IEC 61850 Error status
WATCHDOG
SW Watchdog Error status
LMDERROR
LON/Mip Device Error status
APPERROR
Runtime Application Error status
SETCHGD
Settings changed
SETGRPCHGD
Setting groups changed
FTFERROR
Fault Tolerant Filesystem status
Table 16:
Card
Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Name of signal
Description
PSM
PSM-Error
Power Supply Module Error status
ADOne
ADOne-Error
Analog In Module Error status
BIM
BIM-Error
Binary In Module Error status
BOM
BOM-Error
Binary Out Module Error status
IOM
IOM-Error
In/Out Module Error status
MIM
MIM-Error
Millampere Input Module Error status
LDCM
LDCM-Error
Line Differential Communication Error status
Table 17:
Explanations of internal signals
Name of signal
Reasons for activation
FAIL
This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; NUMFAIL, LMDERROR, WATCHDOG,
APPERROR, RTEERROR, FTFERROR, or any of the HW
dependent signals
WARNING

signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR,
TIMESYNCHERROR
NUMFAIL

signals are active; WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR,
FTFERROR
NUMWARNING

signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR
This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the
real time clock.

72
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name of signal
4.2.2.2
Reasons for activation
TIMESYNCHERROR
This signal will be active when the source of the time

synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a
time reset.
RTEERROR
This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some

actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading
of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting
groups, loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR
This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed
in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example
WATCHDOG
This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under
too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
LMDERROR
LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error

state.
APPERROR
This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads

are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can
be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
SETCHGD
This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event

list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD
This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event

list if any setting groups are changed.
FTFERROR
This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup
file are corrupted and can not be recovered.
Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure
25.
ADx
Adx_Low
x1
u1
x2
Adx_High
Adx
Controller
x1
u1
x2
en05000296-2-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V2 EN
Figure 25:
Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.
73
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with
different amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under
normal conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical.
An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it
improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller
function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the
validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU,
that is the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times
higherADx_HI.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be
informed and an alarm will be given.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
4.2.3
Function block
IEC09000787 V1 EN
Figure 26:
4.2.4
Output signals
Table 18:
Name
4.2.5
INTERRSIG function block
INTERRSIG Output signals

Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
Internal fail
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Internal warning
CPUFAIL
BOOLEAN
CPU fail
CPUWARN
BOOLEAN
CPU warning
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
74
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.2.6
Technical data
Table 19:
Self supervision with internal event list
Data
Value
Recording manner
Continuous, event controlled
List size
1000 events, first in-first out
4.3
Time synchronization
4.3.1
Introduction
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare event- and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station
automation system possible. A common source shall be used for IED and merging
unit when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time
synchronization source.
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
General concepts
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called
the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, that is how much the
clock gains or loses time. A disciplined (trained) clock knows its own faults and
tries to compensate for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization)
The time system is based on a software clock, which can be adjusted from external
time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control modules will be
timed from a hardware clock, which runs independently from the software clock.
See figure 27.
75
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
External
Synchronization
sources
Time tagging and general synchronisation
Off
LON
SPA
Min. pulse
GPS
SNTP
DNP
Communication
TimeRegulator
(Setting,
see
technical
reference
manual)
Events
Protection
and control
functions
SW-time
Connected when GPS-time is
used for differential protection
IRIG-B
PPS
Off
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
TimeRegulator
(fast or slow)
Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
HW-time
A/D
converter
Diff.communication
Transducers*
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC08000287 V2 EN
Figure 27:
Design of time system (clock synchronization)
All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status
signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running
hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the
event recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently.
The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus,
there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock and the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock
synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an
automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start-up or at interruptions/
disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting fast or slow is also available on the
local HMI.
If a GPS clock is used for other 670 series IEDs than line differential RED670, the
hardware and software clocks are not synchronized
76
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Fast clock synchronization mode

At startup and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signal, the clock
deviation between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be
substantial. A new startup is also required after for example maintenance of the
auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is >16us, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock is automatically using a fast mode to synchronize
the clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, i.e.
big time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation
between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16us has been reached.
Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast
mode or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.
Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is normally used,
which prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating
from the differential protection requirement of correct timing.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical

structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides
synchronization to lower levels.
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
IEC09000342 V1 EN
Figure 28:
Synchronization principle
A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors, which give the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:
77
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.3.2.2
The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.
Real-time clock at power off
During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed realtime clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the
power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days,
and after this time the time will be lost completely.
Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure
The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS)
gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as
fine:
If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an

offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly
for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in
the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 100
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a
safe state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the
threshold, the clock is adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed.
With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it takes 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to
remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of
the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.
Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized
for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.
78
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Time-out on synchronization sources
All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must

receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR).
Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a
TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
4.3.2.3
Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the
synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED
as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a
binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing
time in the IEDs.
Synchronization via SNTP
SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an

IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to
operate properly, there must be an SNTP-server present, preferably in the same
station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives 1 ms accuracy
for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP server requirements
The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than
4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its
task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with
SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either
synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization.
Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server
in a redundant configuration is not recommended.
Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)
On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages
are sent.
Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time,
that is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the IED, but instead the offset between
the local time in the IED and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in
events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the IED acts as it is synchronized from
various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a local time for each 103
session.
The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).
79
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Synchronization via Built-in-GPS
The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the
global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time
synchronization Module (GTM).
Synchronization via binary input
The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This
signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the
IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the
substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a
simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the
IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and
timers available in the IED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute
after the last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):
Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.

Maximum pulse length is optional.
Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
80
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
a
b
c
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN
Figure 29:
Binary minute pulses
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse.
The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is
less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the
minute pulse will not be accepted.
Binary synchronization example
An IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied
to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and
the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a
minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the
first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be
rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and
will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border.
After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is
set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time.
If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift
by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the
first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due
to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the time offset
is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the
time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If
the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes.
Synchronization via IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second
are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers
stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
81
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic
BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be
supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via
either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means
a number in the range of 1-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIGB module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz
modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the
BNC connector.
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains
information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time
within the year, and year information has to come from PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the timezone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time
plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.
4.3.2.4
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization

For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate
from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.
4.3.3
Function block
TIMEERR
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
IEC05000425 V2 EN
Figure 30:
4.3.4
TIMEERR function block
Output signals
Table 20:
Name
TIMEERR Output signals

Type
Description
TSYNCERR
BOOLEAN
Time synchronization error
RTCERR
BOOLEAN
Real time clock error
82
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.3.5
Setting parameters
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time
Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 21:
TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
Off
Coarse time synchronization source
FineSyncSource
Off
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
Off
Fine time synchronization source
SyncMaster
Off
SNTP-Server
Off
Activate IED as synchronization master
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Fast
Fast
Adjust rate for time synchronization
HWSyncSrc
Off
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
Off
Hardware time synchronization source
AppSynch
NoSynch
Synch
NoSynch
Time synchronization mode for

application
SyncAccLevel
Class T5 (1us)
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
Unspecified
Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Table 22:
SYNCHBIN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ModulePosition
3 - 16
Hardware position of IO module for time

synchronization
BinaryInput
1 - 16
Binary input number for time

synchronization
BinDetection
PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Positive or negative edge detection
83
Section 4
Basic IED functions
Table 23:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
SYNCHSNTP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Redundant server IP-address
Table 24:
Name
DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
Month in year when daylight time starts
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time starts
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when daylight time starts
UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 172800
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when

daylight time starts
84
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 25:
DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
Month in year when daylight time ends
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time ends
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 172800
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when

daylight time ends
Table 26:
TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
NoHalfHourUTC
Table 27:
-24 - 24
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
0
Description
Number of half-hours from UTC
SYNCHIRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344 standard
85
Section 4
Basic IED functions
4.3.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 28:
Time synchronization, time tagging
Function
Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values
1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse

synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
1.0 ms typically
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled

measurement values
1.0 ms typically
4.4
Parameter setting groups
4.4.1
Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize the IED operation for different system
conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can
cope with a variety of system scenarios.
4.4.2
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of
these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are
available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active
setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower
order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and
group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.
86
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1
+RL2
IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
IOx-Bly5
ACTGRP5
GRP5
IOx-Bly6
ACTGRP6
GRP6
SETCHGD
en05000119.vsd
IEC05000119 V2 EN
Figure 31:
Connection of the function to external circuits
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.
SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used
will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.
4.4.3
Function block
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
ACTGRP5
GRP5
ACTGRP6
GRP6
SETCHGD
IEC05000433 V2 EN
Figure 32:
ActiveGroup function block
SETGRPS
MAXSETGR
IEC05000716 V2 EN
Figure 33:
SETGRPS function block
87
Section 4
Basic IED functions
4.4.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 29:
ActiveGroup Input signals
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP3
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP4
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP5
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP6
BOOLEAN
ActiveGroup Output signals
Name
Table 31:
Name
t
Table 32:
Name
Description
ACTGRP1
Table 30:
4.4.5
Default
Type
Description
GRP1
BOOLEAN
Setting group 1 is active
GRP2
BOOLEAN
GRP3
BOOLEAN
GRP4
BOOLEAN
GRP5
BOOLEAN
GRP6
BOOLEAN
SETCHGD
BOOLEAN
Pulse when setting changed
Setting parameters
ActiveGroup Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.0 - 10.0
Unit
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Description
Pulse length of pulse when setting
changed
SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
SettingGroup1
ActiveSettingGroup
MAXSETGR
1-6
No
Max number of setting groups 1-6
4.5
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK
88
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.5.1
Introduction
Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
4.5.2
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED
state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Set system time
Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input
4.5.3
Function
Activated
Deactivated
Function block
CHNGLCK
LOCK
IEC09000946 V1 EN
Figure 34:
4.5.4
CHNGLCK function block

Table 33:
Name
LOCK
CHNGLCK Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Parameter change lock
89
Section 4
Basic IED functions
4.5.5
Table 34:
Name
Operation
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
LockHMI and Com
LockHMI,
EnableCom
EnableHMI,
LockCom
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
LockHMI and Com
4.6
Test mode functionality TEST
4.6.1
Introduction
Description
Operation mode of change lock
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE function is activated, protection

functions in the IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock the
protection functions individually from the local HMI or the Parameter Setting tool
to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes
normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed
and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection
functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will
be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be
changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
4.6.2
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by
configuration, activating the input signal of the function block TESTMODE.

setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block
TESTMODE is activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE
shows the generator of the Test mode: On state input from configuration
(OUTPUT output is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING output is
activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality
and event signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode
(output ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 35. When leaving the test
90
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 4
Basic IED functions
mode, that is entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is
set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured
values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so
no outputs will be activated.
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the
IED will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also
functions that were unblocked before the change. During the reentering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked
for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is
only valid if the IED is put in TEST mode by a binary input, not by
local HMI.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions
when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24
contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.
Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE
function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in
figure 35.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example
during a maintenance test.
91
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN
Figure 35:
4.6.3
Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection

function.
Function block
TESTMODE
INPUT
ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT
IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN
Figure 36:
4.6.4
TESTMODE function block

Table 35:
Name
INPUT
TESTMODE Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Sets terminal in test mode when active
92
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 36:
TESTMODE Output signals
Name
4.6.5
Table 37:
Type
Description
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT
BOOLEAN
Test input is active
SETTING
BOOLEAN
Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
NOEVENT
BOOLEAN
Event disabled during testmode
Setting parameters
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TestMode
Off
On
Off
Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off)
EventDisable
Off
On
Off
Event disable during testmode
CmdTestBit
Off
On
Off
Command bit for test required or not

during testmode
4.7
IED identifiers
4.7.1
Introduction
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
4.7.2
Table 38:
Setting parameters
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
93
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.8
Product information
4.8.1
Introduction
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set,
settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:
IEDProdType
ProductDef
FirmwareVer
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
4.8.2
Setting parameters
4.8.3
Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and
very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between
different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings
can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are
found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
IEDProdType
ProductDef
Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0
FirmwareVer
Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
Describes the firmware version. Example: 1.4.51

Firmware versions numbers are running independently from the
release production numbers. For every release numbers (like 1.5.0.17)
there can be one or more firmware versions, depending on the small
issues corrected in between releases.
IEDMainFunType
94
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128

(meaning line protection).
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
4.9
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI
4.9.1
Introduction
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought
in for one IED configuration.
4.9.2
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 37, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to
BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user
defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/
output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.
4.9.3
Function block
SMBI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6
^VIN7
^VIN8
^VIN9
^VIN10
^BI1
^BI2
^BI3
^BI4
^BI5
^BI6
^BI7
^BI8
^BI9
^BI10
IEC05000434 V2 EN
Figure 37:
SMBI function block
95
Section 4
Basic IED functions
4.9.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 39:
SMBI Input signals
Name
Type
Default
Description
VIn1
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn2
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn3
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn4
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn5
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn6
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn7
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn8
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn9
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
VIn10
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
Table 40:
SMBI Output signals
Name
Type
Description
BI1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
BI2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
BI3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
BI4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
BI5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
BI6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
BI7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
BI8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
BI9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
BI10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
4.10
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO
4.10.1
Introduction
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the
Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs
are sent from one IED configuration.
96
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.10.2
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 38, receives
logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real
(hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are
BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The
name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected
between physical IO and the SMBO.
It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs
are connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix
Tool. If SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all
the physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause
malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.
4.10.3
Function block
SMBO
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
^BO1
^BO2
^BO3
^BO4
^BO5
^BO6
^BO7
^BO8
^BO9
^BO10
IEC05000439 V2 EN
Figure 38:
4.10.4
SMBO function block

Table 41:
Name
SMBO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BO1
BOOLEAN
Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2
BOOLEAN
BO3
BOOLEAN
BO4
BOOLEAN
BO5
BOOLEAN
BO6
BOOLEAN
BO7
BOOLEAN
BO8
BOOLEAN
BO9
BOOLEAN
BO10
BOOLEAN
97
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.11
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI
4.11.1
Introduction
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are
brought in for one IED configuration.
4.11.2
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 39, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and
makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named
AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags
will be represented in SMT.
The outputs on SMMI are normally connected to the IEC61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function for further use of the mA signals.
4.11.3
Function block
SMMI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AI5
AI6
IEC05000440 V2 EN
Figure 39:
4.11.4
SMMI function block

Table 42:
Name
SMMI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
VIn1
REAL
SMT connected milliampere input
VIn2
REAL
VIn3
REAL
VIn4
REAL
VIn5
REAL
VIn6
REAL
98
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 43:
SMMI Output signals
Name
Type
Description
AI1
REAL
Analog milliampere input 1
AI2
REAL
AI3
REAL
AI4
REAL
AI5
REAL
AI6
REAL
4.12
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI
4.12.1
Introduction
Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI (or the pre-processing function) is
used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or the
Application Configuration tool. Signal Matrix tool represents the way analog
inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
4.12.2
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog
signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 41
and figure 42. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog
signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc.
244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset all outputs to 0.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the, in SMT, connected input to
GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. AIN is always the neutral
current, calculated residual sum or the signal connected to GRPxN. Note that
function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input
is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be
connected to AI3P.
4.12.3
Frequency values
The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive
sequence voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid
or not. If positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is
blocked. IntBlockLevel, is set in % of UBase/3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence
voltage. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1,
99
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence

voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is
Ph-Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 40 to make
SMAI calculating a positive sequence voltage (that is input voltage/3).
IEC10000060 V1 EN
Figure 40:
Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is
available, the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI
ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all
three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and
the frequency functions will not work properly.
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be
used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection
(SAPFRC) due to that all other information except frequency and
positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.
4.12.4
Function block
SMAI1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
^GRP1L1
^GRP1L2
^GRP1L3
^GRP1N
TYPE
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
IEC05000705 V2 EN
Figure 41:
SMAI1 function block
100
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
SMAI2
BLOCK
^GRP2L1
^GRP2L2
^GRP2L3
^GRP2N
TYPE
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
IEC07000130 V2 EN
Figure 42:
4.12.5
SMAI2 function block

Table 44:
Name
SMAI1 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 1
DFTSPFC
REAL
20.0
Number of samples per fundamental cycle used

for DFT calculation
GRP1L1
STRING
Sample input to be used for group 1 phase L1

calculations
GRP1L2
STRING

calculations
GRP1L3
STRING

calculations
GRP1N
STRING
Sample input to be used for group 1 residual

calculations
Table 45:
Name
SMAI1 Output signals

Type
Description
SPFCOUT
REAL
Number of samples per fundamental cycle from

internal DFT reference function
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 1 analog input 1
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
AIN
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance

recorder
101
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 46:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 2
GRP2L1
STRING

calculations
GRP2L2
STRING

calculations
GRP2L3
STRING

calculations
GRP2N
STRING
Sample input to be used for group 2 residual

calculations
Table 47:
Name
4.12.6
SMAI2 Input signals
SMAI2 Output signals

Type
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
AIN
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance

recorder
Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default
value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal
nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.
102
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 48:
SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference for external output
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage, 2=Current
Table 49:
SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of

UBase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
103
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 50:
SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage, 2=Current
Table 51:
Name
SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of

UBase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
4.13
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM
4.13.1
Introduction
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might
need it.
4.13.2
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.
104
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.13.3
Function block
3PHSUM
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
G1AI3P*
G2AI3P*
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC05000441 V2 EN
Figure 43:
4.13.4
3PHSUM function block

Table 52:
3PHSUM Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Block
DFTSPFC
REAL
Number of samples per fundamental cycle used

for DFT calculation
G1AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
G2AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 53:
3PHSUM Output signals
Name
4.13.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
Group analog input 3-phase group
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 1 analog input
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default
value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Table 54:
3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
105
Section 4
Basic IED functions
Table 55:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FreqMeasMinVal
5 - 200
10
Amplitude limit for frequency calculation

in % of Ubase
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
4.14
Authority status ATHSTAT
4.14.1
Introduction
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
4.14.2
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it
was blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC
61850 station bus.
4.14.3
Function block
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC06000503 V2 EN
Figure 44:
4.14.4
ATHSTAT function block
Output signals
Table 56:
Name
ATHSTAT Output signals

Type
Description
USRBLKED
BOOLEAN
At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON
BOOLEAN
At least one user is logged on
106
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
4.14.5
Setting parameters
4.15
Denial of service DOS
4.15.1
Introduction
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic.
The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so
that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
4.15.2
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD)
measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not
jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load.
The function has the following outputs:
4.15.3
LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication
Function blocks
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000749 V1 EN
Figure 45:
DOSFRNT function block
DOSOEMAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000750 V1 EN
Figure 46:
DOSOEMAB function block
107
Section 4
Basic IED functions
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
DOSOEMCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000751 V1 EN
Figure 47:
4.15.4
Signals
Table 57:
Name
DOSFRNT Output signals

Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
Ethernet link status
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Frame rate is higher than throttle state
Table 58:
Name
DOSOEMAB Output signals

Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Table 59:
Name
4.15.5
DOSOEMCD function block
DOSOEMCD Output signals

Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
108
Section 5
Differential protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 5
About this chapter

This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in
differential protection.
5.1
Line differential protection

Function description
Line differential protection, 3 CT sets,

2-3 line ends
IEC 61850
identification
L3CPDIF
IEC 60617
identification
3Id/I>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87L
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
Line differential protection, 6 CT sets,

3-5 line ends
L6CPDIF
3Id/I>
87L
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
Line differential protection 3 CT sets,

with in-zone transformers, 2-3 line ends
LT3CPDIF
3Id/I>
87LT
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
Line differential protection 6 CT sets,

with in-zone transformers, 3-5 line ends
LT6CPDIF
Line differential logic
LDLPDIF
3Id/I>
87LT
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
87L
5.1.1
Introduction
5.1.1.1
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF

Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff's law and compares the currents
entering and leaving the protected multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overhead
109
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
power lines, power transformers and cables. It offers phase-segregated true current
differential protection with high sensitivity and provides phase selection
information for single-pole tripping.
The three terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or
without 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well as three terminal lines
with single breaker arrangements at all terminals.
Protected zone
Comm. Channel
IED
IED
IEC05000039 V2 EN
Figure 48:
Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line
The six terminal versions are used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1 1/2
circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as multi terminal lines with up to
five terminals.
Protected zone
Comm. Channel
IED
IED
Comm. Channel
Comm. Channel
IED
IEC05000040 V2 EN
Figure 49:
Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1 1/2 breaker

arrangements
The current differential algorithm provides high sensitivity for internal faults, at the
same time as it has excellent stability for external faults. Current samples from all
CTs are exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent
to one IED (master-slave mode) for evaluation.
A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the bias current is the
highest phase current in any line end giving a secure through fault stability even
with heavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained evaluation, an unrestrained
high differential current setting can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with
very high currents.
A special feature with this function is that applications with small power
transformers (rated current less than 50 % of the differential current setting)
connected as line taps (that is, as "shunt" power transformers), without
measurements of currents in the tap, can be handled. The normal load current is
110
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
here considered to be negligible, and special measures need only to be taken in the
event of a short circuit on the LV side of the transformer. In this application, the
tripping of the differential protection can be time delayed for low differential
currents to achieve coordination with down stream over current IEDs.
A line charging current compensation provides increased sensitivity of Line
differential protection.
5.1.1.2
Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers

LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF
Two two-winding power transformers, or one three-winding power transformer,
can be included in the line differential protection zone. Both two- and threewinding transformers are correctly represented with vector group compensations
made in the algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5th harmonic restraint and zerosequence current elimination.
Protected zone
Comm. Channel
IED
Comm. Channel
IED
Comm. Channel
IED
IEC05000042 V2 EN
Figure 50:
5.1.1.3
Example of application on a three-terminal line with a power

transformer in the protection zone
Analog signal transfer for line differential protection

The line differential communication can be arranged as a master-master system or
a master-slave system alternatively. In the former, current samples are exchanged
between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made in each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/
s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line
differential protection zone. In the latter, current samples are sent from all slave
IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip signals are sent to
the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is
only needed between the master, and each one of the slave IEDs.
111
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Protected zone
IED
IED
Comm.
Channels
IED
IED
IED
IEC0500043_2_en.vsd
IEC05000043 V2 EN
Figure 51:
Five terminal lines with master-master system

Protected zone
RED
670
RED
670
Comm.
Channels
RED
670
RED
670
RED
670
en05000044.vsd
IEC05000044 V1 EN
Figure 52:
Five terminal line with master-slave system
Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from each other, must be
time coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed
correctly. In IED, it is possible to make this coordination in two different ways.
The echo method of time synchronizing is normally used whereas for applications
where transmit and receive times can differ, the optional built in GPS receivers can
be used.
The communication link is continuously monitored, and an automatic switchover
to a standby link is possible after a preset time.
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
Algorithm and logic

In Line differential protection function, measured current values from local and
remote line ends are evaluated in order to distinguish between internal or external
faults, or undisturbed conditions.
The local currents are fed to the IED via the Analog Input Modules and thereafter
they pass the Analog to Digital Converter, as shown in figure 53.
112
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Remote end
Local end
Remote end IED
LDCM
Local end IED
Analog Input
Module
A/D
Converter
LDCM
Current
samples from
local end
Current
samples from
remote end
Pre-processing
Block
Calculation of
CH1IL2RE
fundamental
frequency
differential
currents (3x)
& bias current
CH1IL2IM
Currents from
all ends as
phasors
Magnitudes of
differential
currents
Bias current
Trip by unrestrained differential protection

Differential
and bias currents
applied to
operate / bias -,
and unrestrained
Start L2
St L1 low sens
St L2 low sens
St L3 low sens
CH1IL2SM
CH1IL3SM
CH2IL1SM
Curr. samples
from all ends
Calculation
of
instantaneous
differential
currents
(3x)
2nd h. block
[samples]
Instantaneous
differential
currents
(samples)
Harmonic
analysis
( 2nd and 5th)
Output logic:
Start L3
characteristics
CH1IL1SM
5th h. block
- 2nd
- 5th
-
CH1INSIM
CH1INSRE
CH1INSIM
Neg. seq.
currents from
all ends
as phasors
Two to six
contributions
to neg. seq.
differential
current as
phasors
High sensitive
internal/external fault
discriminator
Cross block logic
- Decreased
sensitivity for
external faults
Internal fault
External fault
harmonic block
harmonic block
- Enhanced trip for

internal faults
CH1INSRE
Calculation
of
negative-sequence
differential
current
(1x)
TRIP
Start L1
Conditional trip for

simultaneous external
and internal faults
Conditional extra time

delay for trip signals
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRIPRES
TRIPUNRE
TRIPENHA
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
Information
[magnitude]
CH1IL1RE
CH1IL1IM
Trip commands
Line Diffferential Function
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
IEC05000294 V2 EN
Figure 53:
The principle for the line differential protection
The remote currents are received to the IED as samples via a communication link.
When entering the IED, they are processed in the Line Differential Communication
Module (LDCM) where they are time coordinated with the local current samples,
and interpolated in order to be comparable with the local samples.
113
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
In the Pre-Processing Block, the real and imaginary parts of the fundamental
frequency phase currents and negative sequence currents are derived. Together
with the current samples, they are then forwarded to the differential function block
where three different analyses are carried out.
The first analysis is the classical differential and bias current evaluation with the
characteristic as seen in figure 54. Line differential protection is phase segregated
where the differential current is the vectorial sum of all measured currents taken
separately for each phase. The bias current, on the other hand, is considered as the
greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all three phases. The
two slopes (SlopeSection1, SlopeSection2) and breakpoints (EndSection1,
EndSection2) can be set in PCM600 or via the local HMI.
Current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope
will give a start in that phase. The level IdMinHigh is a setting value that is used to
temporarily decrease the sensitivity in situations when:
the line is energized

when a fault is classified as external
when a tap transformer is switched in
There is also an unrestrained high differential current setting that can be used for
fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents.
114
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Operate current
[ in pu of IBase]
Operate
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate
IdMinHigh
conditionally
A
2
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2
Restrain
0
0
EndSection1
EndSection2
Restrain current
[ in pu of IBase]
en05000300.vsd
IEC05000300 V1 EN
Figure 54:
Description of the restrained-, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics
where:
slope = D Ioperate 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN
and where the restrained characteristic is defined

by the settings:
1.
IdMin
2.
EndSection1
3.
EndSection2
4.
5.
SlopeSection2
SlopeSection3
The second analysis is the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis on the differential current.
Occurrence of these harmonics over a level that is set separately for each one will
block tripping action from the biased slope evaluation.
115
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The third analysis is the negative sequence current analysis. Effectively this is a
fault discriminator that distinguishes between internal and external faults. It works
such that the phase angle of the negative sequence current from the local end is
compared with the phase angle of the sum of the negative sequence currents from
the remote ends. The characteristic for this fault discriminator is shown in
figure 55, where the directional characteristic is defined by the two setting
parameters IminNegSeq and NegSeqRoa.
90 deg
120 deg
If one or the
other of
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
is done, and
120 degrees
is mapped
Internal/external
fault boundary
NegSeqROA
(Relay
Operate
Angle)
180 deg
0 deg
IMinNegSeq
External
fault
region
Internal
fault
region
270 deg
en05000188-2-en.vsd
IEC05000188 V2 EN
Figure 55:
Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator
Reference direction of currents is considered to be towards the line. Thus, when

both currents to be compared have this direction, the phase difference between
them will ideally be zero. In the opposite case, when one current is entering and the
other is leaving the protected object, the phase difference will ideally be 180
degree. In case either the local or the sum of the remote negative sequence currents
or both is below the set level, the fault discriminator will not make any fault
classification and the value 120 degree is set. This value is then an indication that
negative sequence directional comparison has not been possible to make, and it
does not mean classification as external fault.
When a fault is classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, a
trip is issued under the condition that the dual slope restrained function has started ,
while a classification as external fault results in an increase of the restrained
characteristic trip values IdMinHigh.
116
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
With reference to figure 53, the outputs from the three analysis blocks are fed to
the output logic. Figure 56 shows a simplified block diagram of this output logic
where only trip commands and no alarm signals are shown for simplicity.
Trip unrestrained L1
OR
TRIP
Start L1
AND
OR
Start L2
AND
TRL1
OR
Start L3
OR
AND
TRL2
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
St L1 IdMinHigh
OR
OR
St L2 IdMinHigh
TRL3
AND
St L3 IdMinHigh
Internal fault
AND
NegSeqDiffEn
tIdMinHigh
t
AND
External fault
OR
Line energizing
Diff curr L1 2nd harm
AND
OR

AND
OR
Diff curr L1 5th harm
OR
OR
AND
th
Diff curr L2 5 harm
OR
OR
Diff curr L3 5th harm
OR
AND
CrossBlockEn
IEC05000295 V2 EN
Figure 56:
Simplified block diagram
Remembering that current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin
and the dual slope in figure 55 are said to give a start, the output logic can be
summarized as follows:
A start in one phase, gives a trip under the condition that the content of 2nd and
5th harmonic is below the set level for these harmonics. Otherwise it is blocked
117
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
as long as the harmonic is above the set level. However, when a line is
energized the current setting value IdMinHigh is used. Effectively this means
that the line A-B-C in figure 54 forms the characteristic.
Current values above the unrestrained limit gives a trip irrespective of any
presence of harmonics.
Classification of a fault as internal by the negative sequence fault
discriminator, will give a trip under the condition that a start has occurred in
that phase. This means that any harmonic blocking is then overridden.
However, occurrence of harmonics at the same time as the differential current
is below the level IdMinHigh, will block a trip even though the fault is
classified as internal. This latter condition is to prevent unwanted trips when
energizing a line tap transformer.
Classification of a fault as external by the negative sequence fault
discriminator will cause IdMinHigh to be used as the lower limit for the
restrained characteristic according to figure 54. Cross blocking will also be
activated in this situation.
Compensation for charging currents can be selected active or not by setting

ChargCurEnableYes or No. The compensation works such that the fundamental
frequency differential current that is measured under steady state undisturbed
conditions, is identified and then subtracted making the resulting differential
current zero (or close to zero). This action is made separately for each phase. The
magnitude of the subtracted pre-fault currents in Amperes can be read at any time
as the service value ICHARGE.
Values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated under disturbance
conditions. The updating process is resumed 50 ms after normal conditions have
been restored. Normal conditions are only considered if there are no start signals,
neither internal nor external fault is declared, the power system is symmetrical and
so on.
It is thus obvious that the change in charging current that the fault causes by
decreasing the system voltage is not considered in the algorithm, a matter that is
further discussed in the application manual.
Note that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, no matter what
their origin. Besides the true charging currents, the following currents are eliminated:
5.1.2.2
Small differential currents due to small errors (inequalities) of current

transformers.
Small differential currents because of off-nominal load tap changer positions
when a power transformer is included in the protected zone.
Load currents of tap loads included in the protected zone.
In a numerical line differential protection, current samples from protections located
geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the currents
118
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
from the different line ends can be compared without introducing irrelevant errors.
Accuracy requirements on this time coordination are extremely high.
As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum
amplitude error approximately around 3% whilst an inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a
maximum amplitude error of approximately 31%. The corresponding figures for a
60 Hz system are 4% and 38% respectively.
In Line differential protection, the time coordination is made with the so-called
echo method, which can be complemented with GPS synchronization as an option.
Each IED has an accurate local clock with a very small time drift. This clock
makes time tagging of telegrams, and the echo method is then used to find out the
time difference between the clocks in two ends of a power line.
Referring to figure 57, it works such that the transmission time to send a message
from station B to station A (T1 T2) and receive a message from A to B (T3
T4) is measured. The time instances T2 and T3 are taken with the local clock
reference of station A, and the time instances T1 and T4 are taken with the local
clock reference of station B.
T2
A
B
T1
T3
T4
en05000293.vsd
IEC05000293 V1 EN
Figure 57:
Measuring time differences
Calculation of the delay time one-way Td and the time difference t between the
clocks in A and B is then possible to do with equation 2 and equation 3, which are
only valid under the condition that the send and receive times are equal.
Td =
(T2 - T1 ) + (T4 - T3 )
2
EQUATION1358 V1 EN
Dt =
(Equation 2)
(T1 + T4 ) - (T2 + T3 )
2
EQUATION1359 V1 EN
(Equation 3)
t is calculated every time a telegram is received, and the time difference is then
used to adjust and interpolate the current measurements from the remote end before
the current differential algorithm is executed.
119
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The echo method without GPS, can be used in telecommunications transmission

networks with varying signal propagation delay as long as there is delay symmetry,
that is, the send and receive delays are equal. The delay variation can depend on
the signal going different routes in the network from time to other.
When the delay symmetry is lost, the expression for t given above is no longer
valid, and GPS synchronization of the local IED clocks must be used.
Including the optional GPS, means that there will be one GPS receiver module in
each IED, synchronizing its local IED clock. As GPS synchronization is very
accurate, in the order of 1 s, all IEDs in the same line differential scheme will
have the same clock reference. It is then possible to detect asymmetric transmission
time delay and compensate for it.
When the IED is equipped with GPS, this hardware is integrated in the IED.
Besides the GPS receiver itself, it also consists of filters and regulators for post
processing of the GPS time synch pulse, which is necessary to achieve a reliable
GPS synchronization. Especially short interruptions and spurious out of synch GPS
signals are handled securely in this way.
When GPS synchronization is used, an interruption in the GPS signal leads to
freewheeling during 8 seconds that is, during this time the synchronization benefits
from the stability in the local clocks. If the interruption persists more than 8
seconds, either fall back to the echo synchronization method or blocking of Line
differential protection function is made, as selected through setting parameter
GPSSyncErr.
For a description of the time synchronization function, refer to section "Time
synchronization".
5.1.2.3
Analog signal communication for line differential protection

Communication principle
For a two-terminal line, the current from the local CT needs to be communicated
over a 64 kbit/s channel to the remote line end, and the remote end current
communicated back on the same channel. If there is, for example, a three terminal
line another 64 kbit/s channel will be needed to exchange the same local current
with the third line end current.
In one-and-a-half breaker arrangements, there are two local currents meaning two
64 kbit/s channels to each remote substation. Alternatively, it is possible to add
together the two local currents before sending them and in that way reduce the
number of communication channels needed. This is achieved by selecting proper
setting for parameter TransmCurr (CT-SUM, CT-DIFF1 or CT-DIFF2). However,
information about bias currents is reduced if the alternative option is followed. For
further information and discussions on this matter, refer to the Application manual.
The communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave
system alternatively. Figure 58 shows a master-master system for a five-terminal
line. Here current samples are exchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is
120
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
made in each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/s communication channel is needed
between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone.
Protected zone
IED
IED
Comm. Channels
IED
IED
IED
IEC05000292 V2 EN
Figure 58:
5terminal line with master-master system
In the master-slave system, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one
master IED where the evaluation is made and trip signals are sent to the remote
ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only
needed between the master, and each one of the slave IEDs, as shown in figure 59.
Protected zone
IED
IED
Comm. Channels
IED
IED
IED
IEC05000291 V2 EN
Figure 59:
5terminal line with master-slave system
The master-slave configuration is achieved by setting parameter Operation in the

slaves to Off for Line differential protection function, and setting parameter
ChannelMode to On for the LDCMs in the slaves.
Test mode
Line differential protection function in one IED can be set in test mode. This can
block the trip outputs on that IED, and set the remote IEDs in a remote test mode,
so that injected currents can be echoed back phase shifted and with a settable
amplitude. The trip outputs in the remote IEDs can also be blocked automatically.
For further information, refer to the installation and commissioning manual.
Communication of current sampled values
The currents are sampled twenty times per power system cycle in the protection
terminals, but the communication exchange is made only once every 5 ms. This
121
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
means that at in each telegram sent, 5 consecutive current samples in a 50 Hz

system and 6 consecutive current samples in a 60 Hz system (three phases each
sampling instant) are included. Figure 60 shows the principle.
Current
sample
telegram
sent
Current
sample
telegram
sent
Current
sample
telegram
sent
Current
sample
telegram
sent
Current
sample
telegram
sent
Current
sample
telegram
sent
Current
sample
telegram
sent
10
15
20
25
30
35
Current
sample
telegram
sent
Time
(ms)
en05000290.vsd
IEC05000290 V1 EN
Figure 60:
Communication of current sampled values.
where:
x
is the current sampling moment
Redundant communication channels
With redundant communication channels, as shown in figure 61, both channels are
in operation continuously but with one of them favoured as a primary channel.
Telecom. Network
LD
CM
LD
CM
IEC05000289 V1 EN
Figure 61:
Telecom. Network
Primary
channel
Secondary redundant
channel
LD
CM
LD
CM
en05000289.vsd
Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDOM over
longer distances.
If communication is lost on the primary channel, switchover to the secondary

channel is made after a settable time delay RedChSwTime. Return of the primary
channel will cause a switchback after another settable time delay RedChRturnTime.
For a three-, four- or five-terminals line in a master-master configuration, a loss of
one communication channel will not cause the line differential protection to be
122
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
unserviceable. Instead it will automatically revert to a partial master-slave mode

with the two IEDs that have an unserviceable communication link between them,
will serve as slaves.
For more details about the remote communication see section "Remote
communication" and the application manual.
5.1.2.4
Open CT detection feature

Line differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature.
The open CT circuit condition creates unexpected operations for Line differential
protection under the normal load conditions. It is also possible to damage
secondary equipment due to high voltage produced from open CT circuit outputs.
Therefore, it is always a requirement from security and reliability points of view to
have open CT detection function to block Line differential protection function in
case of open CT conditions and at the same time, produce the alarm signal to the
operational personal to make quick remedy actions to correct the open CT condition.
The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature prevents mal-operation when
a loaded main CT connected to Line differential protection is by mistake open
circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect interruption
of one CT phase current at the time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one
set of CT are accidentally interrupted at the same time this feature cannot operate
and Line differential protection generates trip signal, if the false differential current
is sufficiently high. To ensure blocking of the differential protection for open CT
condition this algorithm must operate within 10 ms in order to be able to prevent
unwanted operation of Line differential protection under all loading conditions.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method,
similar to the waveform check which has been with advantage used by the Power
Transformer Differential Protection in order to detect the magnetizing inrush
condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the fact, that for an open
CT, the current in the phase with the open CT suddenly drops (at least
theoretically) to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the
other two phases continue as before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions,
that is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load. If the load
currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. The open
CT algorithm only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer is from
10% to 110% of the rated load. Outside this range an open CT condition is not
even looked for. The search for an open CT starts after 60 seconds (50 seconds in
60 Hz systems) since the bias current enters the 10110% range. The Open CT
detection feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0
(Off).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except of the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An
123
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to

operational personal for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When
the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT reconnected),
the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also a setting
(tOCTResetDelay). The task of this measure is to prevent an eventual maloperation after the reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT feature works only during normal loading condition. Thus, the open
CT feature must be automatically disabled for all external faults, big overloads and
inrush conditions.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the
defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates IED side, CT input
and phase in which open CT condition has been detected. These indications are
provided via the following outputs from Line differential protection function:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that open CT circuit

has been detected
Output OPENCTAL provides time delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has
been detected. Time delay is defined by setting parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding
which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2)
Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding
in which phase open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase L2;
3= Phase L3)
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further
open CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note
that once the open CT condition has been detected, it can be automatically reset
within the differential function. It is not possible to externally reset open CT
condition. To reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following
conditions must be fulfilled:
Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110%

Open CT condition in defective CT circuit has been rectified (for example,
current asymmetry disappears)
Above two conditions are fulfilled for longer time than defined by the setting
parameter tOCTResetDelay
After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for any other
open CT circuit within the protected zone.
5.1.2.5
Binary signal transfer

There is space for eight binary signals integrated in the telegram of the line
differential analog communication. For further information, refer to section
"Binary signal transfer".
124
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
5.1.2.6
Line differential coordination function LDLPDIF

Line differential coordination function (LDLPDIF) is a support function to Line
differential protection functions L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF , LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF.
The function gathers and coordinates local IED signals and the signals from remote
IEDs between the Line differential protection functions and the LDCM
communication module.
The function acts as the interface to and from Line differential protection.
5.1.3
Function block
L3CPDIF
I3P1*
I3P2*
I3P3*
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRIPRES
TRIPUNRE
TRIPENHA
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000252 V2 EN
Figure 62:
L3CPDIF function block
125
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
L6CPDIF
I3P1*
I3P2*
I3P3*
I3P4*
I3P5*
I3P6*
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRIPRES
TRIPUNRE
TRIPENHA
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000253 V2 EN
Figure 63:
L6CPDIF function block
LT3CPDIF
I3P1*
I3P2*
I3P3*
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRIPRES
TRIPUNRE
TRIPENHA
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000254 V2 EN
Figure 64:
LT3CPDIF function block
126
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
LT6CPDIF
I3P1*
I3P2*
I3P3*
I3P4*
I3P5*
I3P6*
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRIPRES
TRIPUNRE
TRIPENHA
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG
IEC06000255 V2 EN
Figure 65:
LT6CPDIF function block

LDLPDIF
CTFAIL
OUTSERV
BLOCK
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRLOCAL
TRLOCL1
TRLOCL2
TRLOCL3
TRREMOTE
DIFLBLKD
IEC05000394 V3 EN
Figure 66:
5.1.4
LDLPDIF function block

Table 60:
Name
L3CPDIF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P3
GROUP
SIGNAL
127
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 61:
Name
L3CPDIF Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
Trip by restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRIPENHA
BOOLEAN
Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection
START
BOOLEAN
Common, main, start output signal
STL1
BOOLEAN
Start signal from phase L1
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1
BOOLEAN
Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL3
BOOLEAN
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1
BOOLEAN
Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL3
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
An open CT was detected
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a

delay ...
IDL1
REAL
Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2
REAL
IDL3
REAL
IDL1MAG
REAL
Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current,

phase L1
IDL2MAG
REAL

phase L2
IDL3MAG
REAL

phase L3
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1,

L2, L3
IDNSMAG
REAL
Magnitude of the negative sequence differential

current
128
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 62:
Name
L6CPDIF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P3
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P4
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P5
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 63:
Name
L6CPDIF Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRIPENHA
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL1
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL2
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL3
BOOLEAN
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL1
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL2
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL3
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN

delay ...
IDL1
REAL
IDL2
REAL
129
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
IDL3
REAL
IDL1MAG
REAL

phase L1
IDL2MAG
REAL

phase L2
IDL3MAG
REAL

phase L3
IBIAS
REAL

L2, L3
IDNSMAG
REAL

current
Table 64:
Name
LT3CPDIF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 65:
Name
LT3CPDIF Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRIPENHA
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL1
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL2
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL3
BOOLEAN
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL1
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL2
BOOLEAN
130
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
BLK5HL3
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN

delay ...
IDL1
REAL
IDL2
REAL
IDL3
REAL
IDL1MAG
REAL

phase L1
IDL2MAG
REAL

phase L2
IDL3MAG
REAL

phase L3
IBIAS
REAL

L2, L3
IDNSMAG
REAL

current
Table 66:
Name
LT6CPDIF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P3
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P4
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P5
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 67:
Name
LT6CPDIF Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRIPENHA
BOOLEAN

131
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL1
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL2
BOOLEAN
BLK2HL3
BOOLEAN
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL1
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL2
BOOLEAN
BLK5HL3
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN

delay ...
IDL1
REAL
IDL2
REAL
IDL3
REAL
IDL1MAG
REAL

phase L1
IDL2MAG
REAL

phase L2
IDL3MAG
REAL

phase L3
IBIAS
REAL

L2, L3
IDNSMAG
REAL

current
Table 68:
Name
LDLPDIF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
CTFAIL
BOOLEAN
CT failure indication from local CT supervision
OUTSERV
BOOLEAN
Input for indicating that the terminal is out of service
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Table 69:
Name
LDLPDIF Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip from differential protection system
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN

132
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
5.1.5
Table 70:
Type
Description
TRL3
BOOLEAN
TRLOCAL
BOOLEAN
Trip from local differential function
TRLOCL1
BOOLEAN
Trip from local differential function in phase L1
TRLOCL2
BOOLEAN
TRLOCL3
BOOLEAN
TRREMOTE
BOOLEAN
Trip from remote differential function
DIFLBLKD
BOOLEAN
Local line differential function blocked
Setting parameters
L3CPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IdMin
0.20 - 2.00
IB
0.01
0.30
Oper - restr charact., section 1

sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
IB
0.01
0.80
Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of

IBase
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in

sec
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00
Unrestrained differential current limit,

multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn
Off
On
On
Off/On selection for internal / external

fault discriminator
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
1.0
60.0
Internal/external fault discriminator

Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple

of IBase
CrossBlockEn
No
Yes
No
Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
ChargCurEnable
Off
On
Off
Off/On selection for compensation of

charging currents
AddDelay
Off
On
Off
Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip

command
IMaxAddDelay
0.20 - 5.00
IB
0.01
1.00
Below limit, extra delay can be applied,

multiple of IBase
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
133
Section 5
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Def. Time
19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite

time delay.
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
1.00
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse

delays
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.15
Sustained differential current alarm,

factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Delay for alarm due to sustained

differential current, in s
Table 71:
Name
L3CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Unit
Step
Default
EndSection1
Values (Range)
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
Description
End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00

current IBase
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain

characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain

I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
10.0
Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental

harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0
Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental

0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable
Off
On
On
Open CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
1.000
Open CT: time in s to alarm after an

open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.

function is activated
134
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 72:
L3CPDIF Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfTerminals
2
3
Number of current terminals of the

protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal
No
Yes
No
2-nd local current connected to input

channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase
50.0 - 9999.9
0.1
3000.0
Base (reference) current of the

differential protection
Table 73:
L6CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Unit
Step
Default
Name
Values (Range)
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IdMin
0.20 - 2.00
IB
0.01
0.30

IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
IB
0.01
0.80

IBase
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000

sec
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00

multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn
Off
On
On

fault discriminator
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
1.0
60.0

IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04

of IBase
CrossBlockEn
No
Yes
No
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
10.0

I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0

ChargCurEnable
Off
On
Off

charging currents
AddDelay
Off
On
Off

command
IMaxAddDelay
0.20 - 5.00
IB
0.01
1.00

multiple of IBase
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
135
Section 5
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Def. Time

time delay.
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
1.00

delays
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.15

factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000

Table 74:
Name
L6CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Unit
Step
Default
EndSection1
Values (Range)
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
Description
current IBase
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00

current IBase
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0

SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0

0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable
Off
On
On
Open CT detection feature. Open

CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
1.000

open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250

136
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 75:
L6CPDIF Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfTerminals
2
3
4
5
6

protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal
No
Yes
No

channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase
50.0 - 9999.9
0.1
3000.0

Table 76:
LT3CPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IdMin
0.20 - 2.00
IB
0.01
0.30

IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
IB
0.01
0.80

IBase
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000

sec
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00

multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn
Off
On
On

fault discriminator
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
1.0
60.0

IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04

of IBase
CrossBlockEn
No
Yes
No
ChargCurEnable
Off
On
Off

charging currents
AddDelay
Off
On
Off

command
IMaxAddDelay
0.20 - 5.00
IB
0.01
1.00

multiple of IBase
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
137
Section 5
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Def. Time

time delay.
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
1.00

delays
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.15

factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000

Table 77:
Name
LT3CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Unit
Step
Default
EndSection1
Values (Range)
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
Description
current IBase
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00

current IBase
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0

SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0

I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
10.0

I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0

0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable
Off
On
On
Open CT detection feature. Open

CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
1.000

open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250

138
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 78:
LT3CPDIF Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfTerminals
2
3

protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal
No
Yes
No

channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase
50.0 - 9999.9
0.1
3000.0

ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off
On
Off
Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from

diff. and bias curr
TraAOnInpCh
No Transf A
1
2
3
No Transf A
Power transformer A applied on input

channel X
RatVoltW1TraA
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0
Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on

winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0

winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransA
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
0 [0 deg]
Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30

deg, 5 for 150 deg
ZerSeqPassTraA
No
Yes
No
Yes/No for capability of transf A to

transform zero seq curr
TraBOnInpCh
No Transf B
1
2
3
No Transf B
Power transformer B applied on input

channel X
RatVoltW1TraB
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0
Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on

RatVoltW2TraB
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0

ClockNumTransB
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
0 [0 deg]
Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30

deg, 2 for 60 deg
ZerSeqPassTraB
No
Yes
No
Yes/No for capability of transf B to

139
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 79:
LT6CPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IdMin
0.20 - 2.00
IB
0.01
0.30

IdMinHigh
0.20 - 10.00
IB
0.01
0.80

IBase
tIdMinHigh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000

sec
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00

multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn
Off
On
On

fault discriminator
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
1.0
60.0

IMinNegSeq
0.01 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04

of IBase
CrossBlockEn
No
Yes
No
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
10.0

I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
1.0
25.0

ChargCurEnable
Off
On
Off

charging currents
AddDelay
Off
On
Off
On/Off selection for delayed diff. trip

command
IMaxAddDelay
0.20 - 5.00
IB
0.01
1.00

multiple of IBase
tDefTime
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
0.000
tMinInv
0.001 - 6.000
0.001
0.010
CurveType
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Def. Time

time delay.
140
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Step
Default
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
1.00

delays
IdiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.15

factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000

Table 80:
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
LT6CPDIF Group settings (advanced)
Name
Unit
Step
Default
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25

current IBase
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00

current IBase
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0

SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0

0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.02
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
0.14
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
0.01 - 1000.00
0.01
1.00
OpenCTEnable
Off
On
On
Open CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
1.000

open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250

Table 81:
Values (Range)
Description
LT6CPDIF Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfTerminals
2
3
4
5
6

protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal
No
Yes
No

channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase
50.0 - 9999.9
0.1
3000.0

ZerSeqCurSubtr
Off
On
Off
Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from

diff. and bias curr
141
Section 5
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TraAOnInpCh
No Transf A
1
2
3
4
5
6
No Transf A
Power transformer A applied on input

channel X
RatVoltW1TraA
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0

RatVoltW2TraA
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0

ClockNumTransA
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
0 [0 deg]
Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30

deg, 5 for 150 deg
ZerSeqPassTraA
No
Yes
No
Yes/No for capability of transf A to

TraBOnInpCh
No Transf B
1
2
3
4
5
6
No Transf B
Power transformer B applied on input

channel X
RatVoltW1TraB
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0

RatVoltW2TraB
1.0 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
130.0

ClockNumTransB
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
0 [0 deg]
Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30

deg, 2 for 60 deg
ZerSeqPassTraB
No
Yes
No
Yes/No for capability of transf B to

142
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 82:
LDLPDIF Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
testModeSet
Off
On
Off
Test mode On/Off
ReleaseLocal
Block all
Release local
Block all
Release of local terminal for trip under

test mode
5.1.6
Technical data
Table 83:
L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum operate current
(20-200)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I >I r
SlopeSection2
(10.0-50.0)%
SlopeSection3
(30.0-100.0)%
EndSection 1
(20150)% of IBase
EndSection 2
(1001000)% of IBase
Unrestrained limit function
(1005000)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Second harmonic blocking
(5.0100.0)% of fundamental
2.0% of Ir
Fifth harmonic blocking
(5.0100.0)% of fundamental
6.0% of Ir
Inverse characteristics, see table

722, 723 and table 724
19 curve types
See table 722 and

table 723
Operate time
25 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id
Reset time
Critical impulse time
Charging current compensation
On/Off
5.2
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
5.2.1
Identification
1Ph High impedance differential

protection
IEC 61850
identification
HZPDIF
IEC 60617
identification
Id
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
143
Section 5
5.2.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF) function can be used
when the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT current summation by wiring, a series
resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are mounted externally connected
to the IED.
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars. Six single phase function
blocks are available to allow application for two three-phase zones busbar protection.
5.2.3
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF) function is based on
one current input with external stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors.
Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection
function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the IED function
operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied
stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value .
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
5.2.3.1
Logic diagram
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see figure 67. It is a simple one step IED
function with an additional lower alarm level. By activating inputs, the HZPDIF
function can either be blocked completely, or only the trip output.
IEC05000301 V1 EN
Figure 67:
Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF
144
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
5.2.4
Function block
HZPDIF
ISI*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
ALARM
MEASVOLT
IEC05000363 V2 EN
Figure 68:
5.2.5
HZPDIF function block

Table 84:
HZPDIF Input signals
Name
Type
Group signal for current input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
HZPDIF Output signals
Name
Table 86:
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 85:
5.2.6
Default
ISI
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
MEASVOLT
REAL
Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
Setting parameters
HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
U>Alarm
2 - 500
10
Alarm voltage level in volts on CT

secondary side
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip
5 - 900
100
Operate voltage level in volts on CT

secondary side
SeriesResistor
10 - 20000
ohm
250
Value of series resistor in Ohms
145
Section 5
5.2.7
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 87:
HZPDIF technical data
Function
5.3
Range or value
Operate voltage
(20-400) V
I=U/R
1.0% of Ir
Reset ratio
>95%
Maximum
continuous voltage
U>Trip2/series
Operate time
10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud
Reset time
resistor 200 W
Additional security logic for differential protection

STSGGIO
Additional security logic for differential
protection
5.3.1
Accuracy
IEC 61850
identification
STSGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
11
Introduction
Additional security logic for differential protection (STSGGIO ) can help the
security of the protection especially when the communication system is in
abnormal status or for example when there is unspecified asymmetry in the
communication link. It helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the
protection. STSGGIO is more sensitive than the main protection logic to always
release operation for all faults detected by the differential function. STSGGIO
consists of four sub functions:
Phase-to-phase current variation

Zero sequence current criterion
Low voltage criterion
Low current criterion
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and it calculates
the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current
variation function is major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup element.
Zero sequence criterions takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases the
security of protection during the high impedance fault conditions.
146
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages as
inputs. It increases the security of protection when the three-phase fault occurred
on the weak end side.
Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the
dependability during the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.
The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line
and protection is not working correctly.
Features:
5.3.2
Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the

protected system
Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection
Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high impedance faults and
three phase fault on weak side
It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element
Startup signal has a settable pulse time
Additional security logic for differential protection (STSGGIO) takes the current
samples, current RMS values, phase voltage values, phase-to-phase voltage values,
zero sequence current and remote side startup signals as inputs.
Startup signal becomes activated when any one of the current variation startup
signal, zero sequence current startup signal, voltage startup signal, and current
startup signal is activated.
Phase-to-phase current variation takes current samples and generates the startup
signal by comparing with the start value.
If the zero sequence current value is greater than the start value of zero sequence
current then the zero sequence current startup signal will be activated.
Voltage startup signal becomes activated when the any of phase voltage and line
voltage is less than the voltage start value and the remote startup signal has to be
activated.
Current startup signal becomes activated when the current value in all phases is
less than current start value.
Phase-to-phase current variation
Phase-to-phase current variation one is main startup element. It covers most of the
abnormal status of the system. The phase-to-phase current variation fails in high
impedance faults, three-phase fault on weak side and switch onto fault on unloaded
line because of low sensitivity in these cases.
147
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and the signal is
evaluated using the sampling value based algorithm.
The phase-to-phase current variation criterion is shown below:
DiFF > 1.8DIT + DI ZD

EQUATION2255 V1 EN
Where:
sampling value of phase-to-phase current variation
IZD
setting of fixed threshold, which corresponds to setting ICV>. The default value for
the setting is 0.2IBase, where IBase is the base current.
IT
float threshold
It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation
1 2T -1
DIT = | DiFF (t - n) |
T n =T
EQUATION2256 V1 EN
Where:
T
count of sample values in one cycle
i is calculated using the below formula:
Di (k ) = [i ( k ) - i (k - N )] - [i (k - N ) - i (k - 2 N )]
= i ( k ) - 2i ( k - N ) + i (k - 2 N )
EQUATION2257 V1 EN
N is the number of samples in one cycle.
148
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tCV
STCVL1L2
t
I3P
cont
tCV
Current variation
subfunction
STCVL2L3
tCV
STCVL3L1
OR
STCV
cont
IEC10000295 V1 EN
Figure 69:
Current variation logic diagram
tCV is the time setting for the change of current criterion. Phase current samples
are included in input signal I3P.
Zero sequence current criterion
Zero sequence criterion is mainly for detection of remote IED high resistance faults
or some gradual faults. The criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. Zero
sequence current is compared with I3I0> for the t3I0 time to generate the zero
sequence current startup signal.
I3P
a
b
I3IO>
BLK3I0
BLOCK
a>b
AND
t3I0
t
ST3I0
OR
IEC09000778 V2 EN
Figure 70:
Zero sequence current criterion logic diagram
Here I3I0> is the setting of the maximum possible non-faulted zero sequence
current for the protected line. The default value for this setting is 0.1 IBase where
IBase is the rated current of the CT.
t3I0 is the time setting for the zero sequence current criterion.
The zero sequence current criterion can be blocked by activating the BLK3I0 input
signal.
Low voltage criterion
149
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Low voltage criterion is mainly for detection of the three phase faults occurring on
weak side with pre fault no load condition. The low voltage criterion takes the
voltage phase values, voltage phase-to-phase values and remote startup signals as
inputs. The logic for low voltage criterion is shown below:
U3P (UPhN)
UPhN<
U3P (UPhPh)
UPhPh<
a<b
OR
a<b
tUV
REMSTUP (Recived)
AND
STUV
BLKUV
OR
BLOCK
IEC09000779 V2 EN
Figure 71:
Low voltage criterion logic diagram
Voltage phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase and voltage
phase-to-phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase-to-phase. If
any of the phase voltage and phase-to-phase voltages is below the set voltage levels
for some time duration (tUV) then the low voltage START signal becomes
activated after receiving the remote startup signal. Low voltage criterion can be
blocked by activating BLKUV input signal.
If there are more than one remote IED, all the startup signals of the remote ends are
logically OR to obtain the REMSTUP signal from the remote side as input.
Low current criterion
The current in each phase is compared to the set current level. If all currents are
below setting IUC<, the STUC output is activated after the set delay tUC.
I3P
IUC<
BLKUC
BLOCK
a<b
tUC
AND
STUC
OR
IEC09000780 V2 EN
Figure 72:
Low current criterion logic diagram
Security logic for differential protection
150
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The configuration for the additional security logic for differential protection is
shown in fig 73. The function will release tripping of the line differential protection
up to the end of timer tStUpReset.
Phase-phase
current variation
STCV
Zero sequence
current criterion
ST3IO
I0 >
tStUpReset
t
Low voltage
criterion
STUV
Low current
criterion
STUC
START
OR
ULOW <
Local side start-up

Send signal to
remote side
I0 <
REMSTUP
IEC10000296 V2 EN
Figure 73:
5.3.3
Additional security logic for differential protection. Logic diagram for

start up element.
Function block
STSGGIO
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKCV
BLKUC
BLK3I0
BLKUV
REMSTUP
START
STCVL1L2
STCVL2L3
STCVL3L1
STUC
ST3I0
STUV
IEC09000781 V1 EN
Figure 74:
5.3.4
STSGGIO function block

Table 88:
Name
STSGGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Common block signal
BLKCV
BOOLEAN
Block of ph to ph current variation criterion
BLKUC
BOOLEAN
Block of the low current criterion
151
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Block of zero sequence current criterion
BLKUV
BOOLEAN
Block of under voltage criterion
REMSTUP
BOOLEAN
Startup signal of remote end
Table 89:
STSGGIO Output signals
Name
5.3.5
Default
BLK3I0
Type
Description
START
BOOLEAN
General startup signal
STCVL1L2
BOOLEAN
Start signal for current variation criterion for

phase L1L2
STCVL2L3
BOOLEAN

phase L2L3
STCVL3L1
BOOLEAN

phase L3L1
STUC
BOOLEAN
Start signal for low current criterion
ST3I0
BOOLEAN
Start signal for zero sequence current criterion
STUV
BOOLEAN
Start signal for under voltage criterion
Setting parameters
Table 90:
STSGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for current in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400
Base setting for voltage in kV
tStUpReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
Reset delay for startup signal
OperationCV
Off
On
On
Operation current variation Off/On
ICV>
1 - 100
%IB
20
Fixed threshold for ph to ph current

variation criterion
OperationUC
Off
On
On
Operation low current criterion Off/On
IUC<
0 - 100
%IB
Start value for low current operation in %

of IBase
Operation3I0
Off
On
On
Operation zero sequence current

criterion Off/On
I3I0>
1 - 100
%IB
10
Start value for zero sequence current

criterion in % of IBase
OperationUV
Off
On
On
Operation under voltage criterion Off/On
UPhN<
1 - 100
%UB
60
Start value for phase voltage criterion in

% of UBase
UPhPh<
1 - 100
%UB
60
Start value for ph to ph voltage criterion

in % of UBase
152
Section 5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 91:
STSGGIO Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tCV
0.000 - 0.005
0.001
0.002
Time delay for phase to phase current

variation
tUC
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay for low current criterion
t3I0
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for zero sequence current

criterion
tUV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for low voltage criterion
HysAbsUV
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Hysteresis absolute value for low voltage

criterion in % of UBase
5.3.6
Step
Default
Description
Technical data
Table 92:
STSGGIOtechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current, zero sequence
(1-100)% of lBase
1,0% of Ir
Operate current, low operation
(1-100)% of lBase
1,0% of Ir
Operate voltage, phase to neutral
(1-100)% of UBase
0,5% of Ur
Operate voltage, phase to phase
(1-100)% of UBase
0,5% of Ur
Timers, general
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
10 ms typically at 0.5 to.2 x Iset
Impulse margin time
20 ms typically
Transient overreach
< 2% at = 100 ms
153
154
Section 6
Impedance protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 6
About this chapter

This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes
function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance
protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated
functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.
6.1
Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral

characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR
6.1.1
Identification
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic (zone 1)
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZMQPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN

characteristic (zone 2-5)
ZMQAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral
ZDRDIR
21
S00346 V1 EN
21D
Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN
6.1.2
Introduction
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
ZMQPDIS together with Phase selection with load encroachment FDPSPDIS has
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure75.
155
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X
Forward
operation
R
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 75:
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection

with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at
load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in
directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable,
together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines
and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multiterminal lines, and so on.
6.1.3
6.1.3.1
Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 76 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,
impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.
156
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
IEC05000458 V1 EN
Figure 76:
The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.
6.1.3.2
Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the nondirectional impedance characteristics presented in figure 77 and figure 78. The phaseto-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-tophase characteristic presents the per phase reach.
157
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X (Ohm/loop)
R1PE+Rn
RFPE
RFPE
X1PE+Xn
jN
RFPE
Xn =
X0PE-X1PE
3
Rn =
R0PE-R1PE
3
jN
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE
X1PE+Xn
RFPE
RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd
R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN
Figure 77:
Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop domain
158
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RFPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
X
0
PE
--1X
11FWPE
X
0
PE
X 0 PG X
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3 33
X1PP
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP
RFPP
X1PP
RFPP
2
R1PP
RFPP
2
en07000062.vsd
IEC07000062 V2 EN
Figure 78:
Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 79. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
159
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UL1
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1
Phase-to-earth
element
RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2
UL1
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP
IL2
(Arc resistance)
UL2
R1 + j X1
UL1
Three-phase
fault
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3
IL3
UL3
IEC08000282 V2 EN
Figure 79:
Fault loop model
The R1 and jX1 in figure 79 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPE and RFPP are the
eventual fault resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 79, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 80. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
160
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 80:
6.1.3.3
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones
Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
(ZMQPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three-phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPP.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir = Reverse.
6.1.3.4
Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
161
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 4 (example for a

phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 4)
EQUATION1222 V1 EN
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth
faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 5.
U L1
Z app = -----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 5)
EQUATION1223 V1 EN
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
KN =
Z0 - Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION 2105 V1 EN
Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN
Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0
is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0
is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1
is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1
is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
162
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The formula given in equation 5 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 6,
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN
(Equation 6)
in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN
(Equation 7)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN
(Equation 8)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN
(Equation 9)
where:
Re
designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im
designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0
designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rmmeasured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:
163
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
R m = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 10)
EQUATION357 V1 EN
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 Dt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------DRe ( I ) Im ( I ) DIm ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 11)
EQUATION358 V1 EN
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and
reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.
6.1.3.5
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance
quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 12 and equation 13 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg
0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 12)
EQUATION725 V2 EN
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
- ArgDir < arg
0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

I L1 L 2
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 13)
EQUATION726 V2 EN
where:
ArgDir
is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 81.
U1L1
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1M
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
IL1
is phase current in phase L1
U1L1L2
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U1L1L2M
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
IL1L2
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
164
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 81). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.
STDIR=
STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN
Figure 81:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in

Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
After 100ms the following occurs:
165
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
6.1.3.6
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones
The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-tophase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one
logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 82.
Two types of function block, ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMQPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMQAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately.
Input signal STCND is connected to FDPSPDIS function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR function.
166
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC99000557-TIFF V1 EN
Figure 82:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition
Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 83.
Figure 83:
Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

167
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 84.
STNDL1N
DIRL1N
AND
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N
AND
STNDL3N
OR
DIRL3N
AND
STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2
AND
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3
AND
STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1
STZMPE.
AND
OR
OR
AND
15 ms
t
STL1
AND
15 ms
t
STL2
AND
15 ms
t
STL3
AND
OR
STZMPP
AND
BLK
OR
AND
15 ms
t
START
IEC09000888 V1 EN
Figure 84:
Composition of start signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 85.
168
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Timer tPP=On
tPP
t
AND
STZMPP
OR
Timer tPE=On
AND
STZMPE
tPE
t
AND
OR
AND
15ms
TRIP
BLKTR
AND
STL1
AND
TRL1
STL2
AND
TRL2
STL3
AND
TRL3
en00000490.vsd
IEC09000887 V1 EN
Figure 85:
6.1.4
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone
Function block
ZMQPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC06000256 V2 EN
Figure 86:
ZMQPDIS function block
169
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ZMQAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC09000884 V1 EN
Figure 87:
ZMQAPDIS function block (zone 2 - 5)

ZDRDIR
I3P*
U3P*
STDIRCND
IEC10000007 V1 EN
Figure 88:
6.1.5
ZDRDIR function block

Table 93:
Name
ZMQPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
VTSZ
BOOLEAN
Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Blocks all trip outputs
STCND
INTEGER
External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND
INTEGER
External directional condition
Table 94:
Name
ZMQPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN
Non-directional start, issued from any phase or

loop
170
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 95:
Name
ZMQAPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
VTSZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 96:
Name
ZMQAPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN

loop
Table 97:
ZDRDIR Input signals
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
group connection for current abs 2
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
group connection for voltage abs 2
Table 98:
Name
STDIRCND
ZDRDIR Output signals

Type
INTEGER
Description
Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop
171
Section 6
6.1.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while
signals and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5
Table 99:
ZMQPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current, i.e. rated current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev
X1
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach
R1
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle
X0
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
100.00
Zero sequence reactance reach
R0
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero seq. resistance for zone

RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
RFPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OperationPP
Off
On
On
Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops
Timer tPP
Off
On
On
Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE
Off
On
On
Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth

loops
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops
IMinOpPE
10 - 1000
%IB
20
Minimum operate phase current for

Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN
5 - 1000
%IB
Minimum operate residual current for

Phase-Earth loops
172
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 100:
ZMQAPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

Forw / Rev
X1
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

X0
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
15.00

RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
OperationPP
Off
On
On
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

loops
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinOpPE
10 - 1000
%IB
20

Phase-Earth loops
Table 101:
ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for current level
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base setting for voltage level
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115
Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction
ArgDir
5 - 45
Deg
15
Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for

forward direction
173
Section 6
6.1.7
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 102:
ZMQPDIS Technical data
Function
6.2
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
Max 5 with selectable

direction
Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase
Minimum operate current, phaseto-phase and phase-to-earth
(10-1000)% of IBase
Positive sequence reactance
(0.10-3000.00) /
phase
Positive sequence resistance
(0.01-1000.00) /
phase
Zero sequence reactance
(0.10-9000.00) /
phase
2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Zero sequence resistance
(0.01-3000.00) /
phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
(0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase
(0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach
<5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30
Impedance zone timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
24 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated lines
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR
174
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC 61850
identification

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 1)
IEC 60617
identification
ZMCPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 2-5)
ZMCAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
Directional impedance quadrilateral,

including series compensation
ZDSRDIR
21D
Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN
6.2.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and
reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different
types and lengths.
Quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMCPDIS function has functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
X
Forward
operation
R
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 89:
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated
175
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function
prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to earth-faults on
heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.
6.2.2
6.2.2.1

which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 90 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
IEC05000458 V1 EN
Figure 90:
The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault
6.2.2.2
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines
(ZMCPDIS) include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-toearth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase faults.
176
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The distance measuring zone operates according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 91 and figure 92. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
X (Ohm/loop)
R1PE+RNFw
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
3
X
1RvPE
X
0
PG
X
1
RVPG
X 0 PE =
- XXNFw
1RVPE
XNRV
XNRV XNRv
==
33
X 1FwPE
XNFw =
XX0 PE
- X-1X
FWPE
0 PG
1FWPG
XNFW
XNFW==
3 3
X1FwPE+XNFw
jN
jN
RNFw =
R0 PE - R1PE
3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
X1RvPE+XNRv
jN
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
IEC09000625 V1 EN
Figure 91:
Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain
177
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RFRvPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFFwPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
X
0
PE
--1X
11FWPE
X
0
PE
X 0 PG X
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3 33
X1FwPP
j
jN
RFRvPP
RFFwPP
j
R (Ohm/phase)
X1RvPP
jN
RFRvPP
RFFwPP
IEC09000632 V1 EN
Figure 92:
Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
178
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UL1
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1
Phase-to-earth
element
RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2
UL1
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP
IL2
(Arc resistance)
UL2
R1 + j X1
UL1
Three-phase
fault
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3
IL3
UL3
IEC08000282 V2 EN
Figure 93:
Fault loop model
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
in figure 94. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach
is symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.
179
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 94:
6.2.2.3
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

The operation of Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
currents.
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.
6.2.2.4
180
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 14

(example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 14)
EQUATION1222 V1 EN
respective phase.
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults
(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 15.
U L1
Z app = -----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 15)
EQUATION1223 V1 EN
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN
KN =
is defined as:
Z0 - Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION 2105 V1 EN
Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN
Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0
X0
R1
X1
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the IED point. This results in the same
reactance X.
181
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The formula given in equation 15 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN
(Equation 16)

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN
(Equation 17)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN
(Equation 18)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN
(Equation 19)
where:
Re
Im
f0
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equal to:
182
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN
(Equation 20)
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN
(Equation 21)
6.2.2.5
Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated
line, a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the
memory must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory
control can not be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series
compensated network the polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an
impedance measurement criterion.
The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is
continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to
run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A nondirectional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.
At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases
are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.
The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the
accuracy of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network
is at a three phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition
can only be predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.
In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can
not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The
achieved direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is
blocked and kept until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored
until the fault is cleared).
183
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three
phase fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of
the polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited
to 100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance
measurement to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to
cover (with some margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.
quadrilateral, including series compensation (ZDSRDIR) function. Equation 22 and
equation 23 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-toearth fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg
U 1L1M
< ArgNeg Re s
I L1
(Equation 22)
EQUATION2004 V2 EN
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to:
- ArgDir < arg
U 1L1L 2 M
< ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
(Equation 23)
EQUATION2006 V2 EN
where:
ArgDir
U1L1M
IL1
U1L1L2M
IL1L2
degrees respectively, see figure 95, and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.
ZDSRDIR generates a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4.
184
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN
Figure 95:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

by 180 degrees.
6.2.2.6

The design of distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by Ln, where n represents the
corresponding phase number (L1, L2, and L3). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

above.
Two types of function block, ZMCPDIS and ZMCAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMCPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMCAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.
185
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.
Figure 96:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 97.
186
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Figure 97:
STNDL1N
DIRL1N
AND
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N
AND
STNDL3N
OR
DIRL3N
AND
STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2
AND
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3
AND
STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1
STZMPE.
AND
OR
OR
AND
15 ms
t
STL1
AND
15 ms
t
STL2
AND
15 ms
t
STL3
AND
OR
STZMPP
AND
BLK
OR
AND
15 ms
t
START
IEC09000888 V1 EN
Figure 98:
Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode
in figure 99.
187
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Timer tPP=On
STZMPP
AND
tPP
t
AND
tPE
t
Timer tPE=On
STZMPE
BLKTR
BLK
OR
15ms
OR
AND
TRIP
STL1
AND
TRL1
STL2
AND
TRL2
STL3
AND
TRL3
en00000490-3.vsd
IEC00000490 2 V1 EN
Figure 99:
6.2.3
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
Function block
ZMCPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC07000036 V2 EN
Figure 100:
ZMCPDIS function block
ZMCAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC09000890 V1 EN
Figure 101:
ZMCAPDIS function block
188
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ZDSRDIR
I3P*
U3P*
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
IEC07000035 V2 EN
Figure 102:
6.2.4
ZDSRDIR function block

Input and output signals is shown for zone 1, zone 2 - 5 are equal.
Table 103:
Name
ZMCPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
VTSZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 104:
Name
ZMCPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN

loop
189
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 105:
Name
ZMCAPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
VTSZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 106:
Name
ZMCAPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN

loop
Table 107:
ZDSRDIR Input signals
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for current
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for voltage
Table 108:
Name
ZDSRDIR Output signals

Type
Description
STFW
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction
STRV
BOOLEAN
Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND
INTEGER

measuring loop
190
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.2.5
Setting parameters
Settings for ZMCPDIS are valid for zone 1, while settings for
ZMCAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5
Table 109:
ZMCPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

Forw / Rev
OperationPP
Off
On
On
X1FwPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse
RFRvPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

loops
X1FwPE
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward
R1PE
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-E
X0PE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
100.00
Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
R0PE
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
47.00

characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse
RFRvPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
191
Section 6
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMinOpPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinOpPE
10 - 1000
%IB
20

Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN
5 - 1000
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
Table 110:
Name
ZMCAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

Forw / Rev
OperationPP
Off
On
On
X1FwPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1RvPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
RFRvPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

loops
X1FwPE
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PE
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-E
X0PE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
100.00
R0PE
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
47.00

RFFwPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
X1RvPE
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
RFRvPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
192
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinOpPE
10 - 1000
%IB
20

Phase-Earth loops
Table 111:
Step
Default
Description
ZDSRDIR Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperationSC
NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp
SeriesComp
Special directional criteria for voltage

reversal
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
130

forward direction
ArgDir
5 - 45
Deg
15

forward direction
INReleasePE
10 - 100
%IPh
20
3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth

measuring loops
INBlockPP
10 - 100
%IPh
40
3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase

measuring loops
OperationLdCh
Off
On
On
Operation of load discrimination

characteristic
RLdFw
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00
Forward resistive reach within the load

impedance area
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00
Reverse resistive reach within the load

impedance area
ArgLd
5 - 70
Deg
30
Load angle determining the load

impedance area
X1FwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
7.00

angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1RvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFRvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1FwPE
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
7.00

angle, Ph-E
X0FwPE
0.50 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,

forward
193
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Step
Default
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
20.00

RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
X1RvPE
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
X0RvPE
0.50 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,

reverse
RFRvPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
6.2.6
Unit
Description
Technical data
Table 112:
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS Technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
Max 5 with selectable direction

current, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph

and Ph-E
(10-1000)% of IBase
(0.10-3000.00) /phase
(0.10-1000.00) /phase
(0.01-9000.00) /phase
(0.01-3000.00) /phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E
(0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph
(0.10-3000.00) /loop

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Dynamic overreach
<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
24 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically
6.3
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

fixed angle FDPSPDIS
6.3.1
Identification
Phase selection with load
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
FDPSPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
194
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.3.2
Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get
permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be
used plays an important role in this matter.Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the
proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements
continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.
6.3.3
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection
with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS includes six
impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three
intended for phase-to-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the
combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.
continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare
them with the set values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier's recursive
filter, and separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring
elements.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS uses information
from the directional function to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse direction.
The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:
195
Section 6
1.
2.
3.
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

1.
2.
3.
Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function. There are outputs from FDPSPDIS that
indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for
example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FDPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 103.
X
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FW)
Reverse (RV)
en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN
Figure 103:
Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic FDPSPDIS
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function . It shall be connected to the STDIR output on
196
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ZDRDIR, directional measuring block. This information is also transferred to the

input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMQPDIS, distance
measuring block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR=
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2, binary code 192 means start in reverse direction in
phase L1 and L2A and B etc.
The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary
coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32
6.3.3.1
Phase-to-earth fault
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be
according to equation 24.
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase
selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS.
ZPHSn =
ULn
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN
(Equation 24)
where:
n
corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
The characteristic for FDPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 104. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the
first quadrant of 60.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 25 and equation 26.
197
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RN =
R0 - R1
3
(Equation 25)
EQUATION1256 V1 EN
XN =
X 0 - X1
3
(Equation 26)
EQUATION1257 V1 EN
X (ohm/loop)
Kr(X1+XN)
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE
60 deg
60 deg
X1+XN
Kr =
1
tan(60deg)
RFFwPE
RFRvPE
Kr(X1+XN)
en06000396.vsd
IEC06000396 V2 EN
Figure 104:
Characteristic of FDPSPDIS for phase-to-earth fault (setting

parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain (directional lines are drawn
as "line-dot-dot-line")
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 27 and equation 28.
3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN
(Equation 27)
198
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
(Equation 28)
EQUATION766 V1 EN
where:
IMinOpPE
is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phaseto-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax
6.3.3.2
is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be
according to equation 29.
ZPHS =
ULm - ULn
-2 ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN
(Equation 29)
ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 105.
199
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X (W /
phase)
0.5RFFwPP
0.5RFRvPP
KrX1
X1
0.5RFFwPP
60 deg
60 deg
R (W /
0.5RFRvPP
phase)
X1
Kr =
1
tan(60 deg)
KrX1
0.5RFRvPP
0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000047 V2 EN
Figure 105:
The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS at phase-to-phase

fault (setting parameters in italic, directional lines drawn as "line-dotdot-line"), ohm/phase domain
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 30 or equation 31.
3I 0 < IMinOpPE
(Equation 30)
EQUATION2109 V1 EN
3I 0 <
INBlockPP
Iph max
100
(Equation 31)
EQUATION2110 V1 EN
where:
IMinOpPE
is the minimum operation current for earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

Iphmax
is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
200
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.3.3.3
Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 29, equation 30 and equation 31 are used to release the
operation of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all
directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 106.
X (O/phase)
4 X1
3
90 deg
0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3
4 RFFwPP
6
R (O/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3
K3 = 2 / v(3)
30 deg
IEC05000671 V3 EN
Figure 106:
6.3.3.4
The characteristic of FDPSPDIS for three-phase fault (setting

parameters in italic)
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 107. As illustrated, the
resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.
201
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RLdFw
ArgLd
ArgLd
ArgLd
RLdRv
ArgLd
IEC09000042 V1 EN
Figure 107:
Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FDPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FDPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (see figure 108, left illustration).
When output signal STCNDLE is selected, the operation characteristic will be as
the right illustration in figure 108. The reach will in this case be limit by the
minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.
202
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STCNDZ
STCNDLE
IEC10000099-1en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN
Figure 108:
Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated
When FDPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 109. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is
highlighted in black.
203
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone
Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line
en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 109:
Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated
Figure 109 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 110. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90
degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to
quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach
around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load
encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
204
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X (W /
phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone
R (W /
phase)
IEC09000049 V1 EN
Figure 110:
Operating characteristic for FDPSPDIS in forward direction for threephase fault, ohm/phase domain
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 111. Since the load characteristic is based on the same
measurement as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral
characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault.
At the same time the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and
RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.
205
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 111:
Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases
There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.
6.3.3.5
Minimum operate currents

The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function (FDPSPDIS)
is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS
value of the current in phase Ln.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).
6.3.3.6

Figure 112 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toearth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
206
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is

available within the IED.
Load encroachment block
3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0
Iphmax
100
IRELPE
15 ms
t
&
&
Bool to
integer
BLOCK
3I 0 < IMinOpPE
OR
INBlockPP
3I 0 <
Iphmax
100
STPE
&
10 ms 20 ms
t
t
&
15 ms
t
STCNDLE
STPP
IRELPP
IEC09000149 V1 EN
Figure 112:
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 112. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.
Figure 113 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase
selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is, within
the characteristic.
207
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N
OR
15 ms
t
STNDPE
OR
15 ms
t
STNDL1
OR
15 ms
t
STNDL2
AND
OR
15 ms
t
STNDL3
AND
INDL1L2
IRELPE
ZML1N
ZML2N
ZML3N
ZML1L2
ZML2L3
ZML3L1
IRELPP
AND
AND
AND
INDL2L3
AND
INDL3L1
OR
15 ms
t
STNDPP
Figure 113:
Composition on non-directional phase selection signals
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 115 and figure 114. The directional criteria
appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high
phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 115) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 114) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 114 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which
is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be
configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and
this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone
measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.
208
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
INDL1N
DRVL1N
AND
INDL1L2
DRVL1L2
AND
OR
15 ms
t
STRVL1
OR
15 ms
t
STRVPE
OR
15 ms
t
STRVL2
INDL3L1
DRVL3L1
AND
INDL2N
DRVL2N
AND
INDL1L2
AND
INDL2L3
DRVL2L3
INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N
INDL1L2
INDL2L3
INDL3L1
AND
INDL3N
DRVL3N
AND
INDL2L3
Bool to
integer
15 ms
AND
OR
INDL3L1
AND
15 ms
OR
STCNDZ
STRVL3
STRVPP
Figure 114:
Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction
209
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
AND
INDL1N
DFWL1N
AND
AND
OR
15 ms
t
INDL1L2
DFWL1L2
AND
OR
INDL3L1
DFWL3L1
DFWL2N
OR
15 ms
t
STFWL1
15 ms
t
STFWPE
15 ms
t
STFWL2
15 ms
t
STFW2PH
AND
AND
INDL1L2
AND
OR
INDL2L3
DFWL2L3
STFW1PH
AND
AND
INDL2N
15 ms
t
AND
OR
15 ms
t
AND
INDL3N
DFWL3N
AND
AND
INDL2L3
AND
15 ms
t
STFWL3
15 ms
t
STFW3PH
15 ms
t
STFWPP
OR
INDL3L1
AND
AND
OR
IEC05000201 V2 EN
Figure 115:
Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction
Figure 116 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.
210
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
TimerPP=Off
tPP
t
AND
OR
TimerPE=Off
tPE
t
AND
AND
OR
TRIP
AND
STNDPP
STFWPP
OR
STRVPP
OR
STNDPE
STFWPE
START
OR
STRVPE
IEC08000441 1 V2 EN
Figure 116:
6.3.4
TRIP and START signal logic
Function block
FDPSPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND
TRIP
START
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE
IEC10000047 V1 EN
Figure 117:
FDPSPDIS function block

211
Section 6
6.3.5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 113:
Name
FDPSPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 114:
Name
FDPSPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip output
START
BOOLEAN
Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2
BOOLEAN
STFWL3
BOOLEAN
STFWPE
BOOLEAN
Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2
BOOLEAN
STRVL3
BOOLEAN
STRVPE
BOOLEAN
Earth fault detected in reverse direction
STNDL1
BOOLEAN
Non directional start in L1
STNDL2
BOOLEAN
STNDL3
BOOLEAN
STNDPE
BOOLEAN
Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE
BOOLEAN
Current conditions release of phase-earth

measuring elements
STPP
BOOLEAN
Current conditions release of phase-phase

measuring elements
STCNDZ
INTEGER
Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE
INTEGER
Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
212
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.3.6
Table 115:
Setting parameters
FDPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.01
400.00
INBlockPP
10 - 100
%IPh
40

measuring loops
INReleasePE
10 - 100
%IPh
20

measuring loops
RLdFw
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00

impedance area
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00

impedance area
ArgLd
5 - 70
Deg
30

impedance area
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
X0
0.50 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
120.00
RFFwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFRvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
RFRvPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
IMinOpPP
5 - 500
%IB
10
IMinOpPE
5 - 500
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
Table 116:
FDPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperationZ<
Off
On
On
Operation of impedance based

measurement
OperationI>
Off
On
Off
Operation of current based measurement
IPh>
10 - 2500
%IB
120
Start value for phase over-current

element
IN>
10 - 2500
%IB
20
Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current

element
TimerPP
Off
On
Off

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE
Off
On
Off

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay to trip, Ph-E
213
Section 6
6.3.7
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 117:
FDPSPDIS technical data
Function
6.4
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-500)% of IBase
Reactive reach, positive

sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, positive

sequence
(0.101000.00) /phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence
(0.509000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase

accuracy
Conditions:
degrees

faults, forward and reverse
(1.009000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-tophase faults, forward and reverse
(0.503000.00) /loop
Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho

characteristic ZMHPDIS
Full-scheme distance protection, mho

characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617 identification
ZMHPDIS
ANSI/IEEE
C37.2 device
number
21
S00346 V1 EN
6.4.1
Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme
protection for back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults. The full scheme
technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low
requirement on remote end communication. The five zones have fully independent
measuring and settings, which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.
The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the
protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement
for tripping is one-, two- and/or three-pole.
214
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
applications with single phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-toearth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see figure 118.
jX
Operation area
Operation area
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en07000117.vsd
IEC07000117 V1 EN
Figure 118:
Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable,
together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines
and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multiterminal lines and so on.
The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral impedance characteristic
together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual
lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end
faults.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offer effective solutions for
operating and monitoring all types of transmission and sub-transmission lines.
6.4.2
6.4.2.1

are executed in parallel.
215
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.
6.4.2.2
The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be
either forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic
alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics with reverse offset. The
operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 119 where zone 5 is selected
offset mho.
jx
X
Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3
Zs=0
Mho, zone2
R
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
Offset mho, zone5
IEC09000143 V1 EN
Figure 119:
Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance.
Instead of crossing the origin as for the mho to the left of figure 119, which is only
valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle
shown to the right of figure 119.
The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic
expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with
high loading and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a
section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the
setting parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment
216
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering
with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS,
where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load
encroachment from FMPSPDIS to the zone measurement is given in binary format
to the input signal LDCND.
6.4.2.3
Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.
Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirMode.
The operation for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase fault can be individually
switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is
possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to
Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by
20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring.
If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and
no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching
pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on
transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with
higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.
The offset mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by
the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from
the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal
to the input DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually
in polar coordinates.
The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding
arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.
Compensation for earth-return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth-return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE.
KNMag =
EQUATION1579 V1 EN
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
(Equation 32)
217
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
KNAng = arg
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
)
(Equation 33)
EQUATION1580 V1 EN
where
Z0
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase
Z1
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase
The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be
set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.
The function can be blocked in the following ways:
activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the
algorithm for high SIR values
activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function
or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In
both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the
input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS)
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been
detected by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be
connected to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the builtin resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while.
The input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC
for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when
permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
6.4.2.4
Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor
by more than 90 degrees, the function operates and gives a trip output.
218
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Mho
The plain mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 120. The condition for
deriving the angle is according to equation 34.
b = arg(U L1 L 2 - I L1 L 2 ZPP ) - arg(U pol )

(Equation 34)
EQUATION1789 V1 EN
where
U L1L2
is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2
EQUATION1790 V2
EN
I L1L2
is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2
EQUATION1791 V2
EN
ZPP
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault
Upol
is the polarizing voltage
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of
the mho circle for close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270
219
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IL1L2X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP
Upol
UL1L2
IL1L2R
en07000109.vsd
IEC07000109 V1 EN
Figure 120:
Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-toL2 fault
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has
the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater than or equal to 90
(figure 121). The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for L1-to-L2 fault can be defined according to equation 35.
U-(-IL1L2 ZRevPP)
b = arg
U -IL1L2 ZPP
(Equation 35)
EQUATION1792 V1 EN
where
is the UL1L2 voltage
EQUATION1800 V1 EN
ZRevPP
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction
220
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IL1L2jX
Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP

IL1L2 ZPP
U
Ucomp2 = U = IFZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R
- IL1L2 Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
IEC07000110 V1 EN
Figure 121:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase

L1-to-L2 fault.
Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction
When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria
beside the one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between
the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and
fourth quadrant. See figure 122. Operation occurs if 90270 and
ArgDirArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
is calculated according to equation 35
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the
mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) for information
about the mho directional element.
221
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IL1L2jX
ZPP
UL1L2
ArgNegRes
IL1L2
ArgDir
en07000111.vsd
IEC07000111 V1 EN
Figure 122:
Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase

L1-to-L2 fault
Offset mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 123.
The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.
Operation occurs if 90270 and 180 - ArgDir ArgNegRes + 180
The is derived according to equation 35 for the mho circle and is the angle
between the voltage and current.
222
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X
ZPP
ArgNegRes
IL1L2
ArgDir
UL1L2
ZRevPP
en06000469.eps
IEC06000469 V1 EN
Figure 123:
Operation characteristic for reverse phase L1-to-L2 fault
Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the
influence from the earth-return path.
For an earth fault in phase L1, the compensation voltage Ucomp can be derived, as
shown in figure 124.
Ucomp = U pol - I L1 Z loop

(Equation 36)
EQUATION1793 V1 EN
where
Upol
is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1-to- earth fault)
Zloop
is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
EQUATION1799 V1 EN
)
(Equation 37)
223
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
where
Z1
is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)
KN
is the zero-sequence compensator factor
The angle between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1-to-earth
fault is
b = arg [UL1 -(IL1 +3I0 KN ) ZPE ] - arg( Upol)
(Equation 38)
GUID-A9492CDF-D3B7-4DC5-8E06-6638BEE2540B V1 EN
where
UL1
is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1
IL1
is the phase current in faulty phase L1
IA
is the phase current in faulty phase A
3I0
is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
KN
EQUATION1593 V1 EN
EQUATION1594 V1 EN
the setting parameter for the zero sequence compensation consisting of the
magnitude KN and the angle KNAng.
Upol
is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage UL1
Vpol
is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA
IL1X
IL1ZN
Ucomp
IL1 Zloop
IL1ZPE
Upol
f
IL1 (Ref)
IL1R
en06000472_2.vsd
IEC06000472 V2 EN
Figure 124:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase

L1-to-earth fault
224
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Offset mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for
the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The
vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for
ZRevPP is AngZPE+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see
figure 125. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for L1-to-earth fault can be defined as
UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )
b = arg
UL1- IL1L ZPE
(Equation 41)
EQUATION1802 V1 EN
U L1
is the phase L1 voltage
EQUATION1
805 V1 EN
IL1L 2 jX
U comp1 = UL1 - I L1 ZPE
IL1 ZPE
UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 ZRevPE)

IL1L2 R
- I L1 Z Re vPe
en 06000465.vsd
IEC06000465 V1 EN
Figure 125:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1to-L2 fault

225
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Offset mho, forward direction

In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for
offset mho according to equation 41 and 90270, also the criteria that the angle
between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and
fourth quadrant. See figure 126. Operation occurs if 90270 and
ArgDirArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
is calculated according to equation 41
IL1 jX
UL1
ArgNegRes
IL1R
IL1
ArgDir
en 06000466.vsd
IEC06000466 V1 EN
Figure 126:
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1-toearth fault
Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the
normal offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the
fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The
operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir
and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 127.
The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-earth fault
is 90270 and 180-ArgdirArgNegRes+180.
226
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The is derived according to equation 41 for the offset mho circle and is the
angle between the voltage and current.
X
ZPE
ArgNegRes
IL
1
ArgDir
UL1
ZRevPE
en06000470.eps
IEC06000470 V1 EN
Figure 127:
6.4.2.5
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for L1-toearth fault

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-tophase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

above.
One type of function block, ZMHPDIS are used in the IED for zone 1 - 5.
227
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
FMPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
Input signal STCND is connected to FMPSPDIS function output signal
STCNDPHS.
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal
DIRCND must be configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR
function.
OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional
AND
AND
DirMode=Offset
STCND
T
F
AND
AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND
T
F
True
AND
Release
DIRCND
OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse
AND
BLKZ
BLOCK
OR
IEC11000216 V1 EN
Figure 128:
Simplified logic for release start signal
When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On) then start

signal STCND is also checked against LDCND signal.
Composition of the phase start signals is presented in figure 83.
228
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Release
STL1N
STL2N
STL3N
STPE
OR
AND
STL1
OR
AND
AND
STL2
OR
STL1L2
STL2L3
AND
AND
STL3
OR
STL3L1
AND
OR
OR
START
STPP
IEC11000217 V1 EN
Figure 129:
Composition of starting signals
in figure 85.
229
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Timer tPP=On
AND
STPP
tPP
t
OR
Timer tPE=On
AND
STPE
tPE
t
15ms
AND
BLKTRIP
TRIP
STL1
AND
TRL1
STL2
AND
TRL2
STL3
AND
TRL3
IEC11000218 V1 EN
Figure 130:
6.4.3
Function block
ZMHPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
CURR_INP*
VOLT_INP*
POL_VOLT*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKZMTD
BLKHSIR
BLKTRIP
BLKPE
BLKPP
DIRCND
STCND
LDCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TRPE
TRPP
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STPE
STPP
IEC06000423 V2 EN
Figure 131:
ZMHPDIS function block
230
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.4.4

Table 118:
Name
ZMHPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for current sample signals
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for voltage sample signals
CURR_INP
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for current signals
VOLT_INP
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for voltage signals
POL_VOLT
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for polarizing voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD
BOOLEAN
Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR
BOOLEAN
Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE
BOOLEAN
Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP
BOOLEAN
Blocks phase-to-phase operation
DIRCND
INTEGER
STCND
INTEGER
LDCND
INTEGER
External load condition (loop enabler)
Table 119:
Name
ZMHPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip General
TRL1
BOOLEAN
Trip phase L1
TRL2
BOOLEAN
Trip phase L2
TRL3
BOOLEAN
Trip phase L3
TRPE
BOOLEAN
Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP
BOOLEAN
Trip phase-to-phase
START
BOOLEAN
Start General
STL1
BOOLEAN
Start phase L1
STL2
BOOLEAN
Start phase L2
STL3
BOOLEAN
Start phase L3
STPE
BOOLEAN
Start phase-to-earth
STPP
BOOLEAN
Start phase-to-phase
231
Section 6
6.4.5
Table 120:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
ZMHPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off/On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
DirMode
Off
Offset
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction mode
LoadEncMode
Off
On
Off
Load encroachment mode Off/On
ReachMode
Overreach
Underreach
Overreach
Reach mode Over/Underreach
OpModePE
Off
On
On

loops
ZPE
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Positive sequence impedance setting for

Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE
10 - 90
Deg
80
Angle for positive sequence line

impedance for Phase-Earth loop
KN
0.00 - 3.00
0.01
0.80
Magnitud of earth return compensation

factor KN
KNAng
-180 - 180
Deg
-15
Angle for earth return compensation

factor KN
ZRevPE
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Reverse reach of the phase to earth

loop(magnitude)
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Delay time for operation of phase to

earth elements
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
%IB
20
Minimum operation phase to earth current
OpModePP
Off
On
On
ZPP
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Impedance setting reach for phase to

phase elements
ZAngPP
10 - 90
Deg
85
Angle for positive sequence line

impedance for Phase-Phase elements
ZRevPP
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Reverse reach of the phase to phase

loop(magnitude)
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Delay time for operation of phase to phase
IMinOpPP
10 - 30
%IB
20
Minimum operation phase to phase

current
232
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 121:
ZMHPDIS Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OffsetMhoDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Direction mode for offset mho
OpModetPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
OpModetPP
Off
On
On

Ph-ph
6.4.6
Technical data
Table 122:
ZMHPDIS technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones with selectable

directions
(1030)% of IBase
Positive sequence impedance,

phase-to-earth loop
(0.0053000.000) W/phase
Positive sequence impedance

angle, phase-to-earth loop
(1090) degrees
Reverse reach, phase-to-earth

loop (Magnitude)
(0.0053000.000) /phase

Conditions:
degrees
Magnitude of earth return

compensation factor KN
(0.003.00)
Angle for earth compensation

factor KN
(-180180) degrees
Dynamic overreach

with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
20 ms typically (with static

outputs)
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically
233
Section 6
6.5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS
IEC 61850
identification
Fullscheme distance protection,

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)
IEC 60617
identification
ZMMPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN
Fullscheme distance protection,

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)
ZMMAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
6.5.1
Introduction
The line distance protection is a , up to five zone protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for
each zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and
cables of different types and lengths.
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults functions
ZMMDPIS and ZMMAPDIS have functionality for load encroachment, which
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see
figure 75.
X
Forward
operation
R
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 132:
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection,

quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS
activated
234
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at
load exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.
6.5.2
6.5.2.1

The different fault loops within the IED are operating in parallel in the same
principle as a full scheme measurement.
Figure 133 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
Zone 5
en07000080.vsd
IEC07000080 V1 EN
Figure 133:
6.5.2.2
The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase

fault.
The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault
loop for each phase.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the nondirectional impedance characteristics presented in figure 134. The characteristic is
illustrated with the full loop reach.
235
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X (Ohm/loop)
R1PE+Rn
RFPE
RFPE
X1PE+Xn
jN
RFPE
Xn =
X0PE-X1PE
3
Rn =
R0PE-R1PE
3
jN
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE
X1PE+Xn
RFPE
RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd
R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN
Figure 134:
Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.
The fault loop reach may also be presented as in figure 135.

UL1
ILn
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1
Phase-to-earth
element
RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
en06000412.vsd
IEC06000412 V1 EN
Figure 135:
Fault loop model
236
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to convey
the fault resistance reach.
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward, Off or Reverse
direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is
illustrated in figure 136. It may be convenient to once again mention that the
impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and
reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
X
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 136:
6.5.2.3
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
currents.
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
Both current limits IMinOpPE and IMinOpIN are automatically
reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.
237
Section 6
6.5.2.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).
The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-earth fault follow equation
42
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner.
U L1
Z app = -----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 42)
EQUATION1223 V1 EN
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN
KN =
is defined as:
Z0 - Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION 2105 V1 EN
Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN
Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0
X0
R1
X1
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 42 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single line-to-earth fault,
238
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN
(Equation 43)

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN
(Equation 44)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN
(Equation 45)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN
(Equation 46)
where:
Re
Im
f0
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equal to:
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN
(Equation 47)
239
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
(Equation 48)
EQUATION358 V1 EN
6.5.2.5
Directional lines
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the Directional impedance
element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR function. Equation 49 is used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault.
- ArgDir < arg
0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 49)
EQUATION1617 V1 EN
where:
ArgDir
U1L1
U1L1M
IL1
degrees respectively (see figure 137) and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.
ZDMRDIR gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on
the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1
adds 4 etc.
240
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN
Figure 137:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage
exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for
all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:

241
Section 6
6.5.2.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring: phase-toearth loops.
Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the
corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E).

above.
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to the Phase selection with load
enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals on the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the DIRCND output on the Directional
impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function.
242
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STCND
L1N
AND
STNDL1N
L2N
AND
STNDL2N
L3N
AND
STNDL3N
STNDPE
OR
OR
VTSZ
BLOCK
AND
OR
STND
BLK
en06000408.vsd
IEC06000408 V1 EN
Figure 138:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 139.
STNDL1N
AND
15 ms
t
STL1
AND
15 ms
t
STL2
AND
15 ms
t
STL3
AND
15 ms
t
START
STNDL2N
STNDL3N
OR
BLK
en06000409.vsd
IEC06000409 V1 EN
Figure 139:
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 140.
243
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STNDL1N
DIRL1N
AND
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N
STNDL3N
DIRL3N
STZMPE.
&
AND
AND
&
15 ms
t
STL1
&
15 ms
t
STL2
&
15 ms
t
STL3
&
15 ms
t
START
BLK
OR
en07000081.vsd
IEC07000081 V1 EN
Figure 140:
Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode
in figure 141.
Timer tPE=On
STZMPE
AND
tPE
t
15ms
TRIP
BLKTR
AND
STL1
AND
TRL1
STL2
AND
TRL2
STL3
AND
TRL3
en07000082.vsd
IEC07000082 V1 EN
Figure 141:
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
244
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.5.3
Function block
ZMMPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC06000454 V2 EN
Figure 142:
ZMMPDIS function block
ZMMAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC09000947 V1 EN
Figure 143:
6.5.4
ZMMAPDIS function block

Table 123:
Name
ZMMPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 124:
Name
ZMMPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
245
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN

loop
Table 125:
ZMMAPDIS Input signals
Name
Type
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
ZMMAPDIS Output signals
Name
Table 127:
Default
I3P
Table 126:
6.5.5
Description
START
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN

loop
Setting parameters
ZMMPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00

246
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

Forw / Rev
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

X0
0.50 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
100.00
R0
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
15.00

RFPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
%IB
20

Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN
5 - 30
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
Table 128:
ZMMAPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

Forw / Rev
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

X0
0.50 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
15.00

RFPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPE
10 - 30
%IB
20

Phase-Earth loops
247
Section 6
6.5.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 129:
ZMMPDIS technical data
Function
6.6
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
(10-30)% of IBase
(0.50-3000.00) W/phase
(0.10-1000.00) /phase
(0.50-9000.00) /phase
(0.50-3000.00) /phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E
(1.00-9000.00) W/loop

accuracy
Conditions:
degrees
Dynamic overreach

with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
24 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically
Directional impedance element for mho

characteristic and additional distance protection
directional function for earth faults ZDMRDIR,
ZDARDIR
Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZDMRDIR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D
S00346 V1 EN
Additional distance protection
directional function for earth faults
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZDARDIR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00346 V1 EN
248
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.6.1
Introduction
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase
unselective directional function based on symmetrical components.
6.6.2
6.6.2.1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element
for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR). Equation 50 and equation 51 are used to
classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phaseto-phase fault respectively.
- ArgDir < arg
0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M

I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 50)
EQUATION1617 V1 EN
- ArgDir < arg
0.85 U1L1L 2 + 0.15 U1L1L 2 M

I L1L 2
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 51)
EQUATION1619 V1 EN
Where:
ArgDir
Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes
Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 144 for mho characteristics.
U1L1
Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1M
Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
IL1
Phase current in phase L1
U1L1L2
Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U1L1L2M
Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
IL1L2
Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 144) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.
If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the
mho characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparatortype calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of
infinite radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the
249
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
directional lines are implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to

the one used for the quadrilateral impedance characteristics.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for
parameter DirEvalType is vital:
alternative Comparator is strongly recommended

alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)
X
Zset reach point
ArgNegRes
-ArgDir
-Zs
en06000416.vsd
IEC06000416 V1 EN
Figure 144:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

by 180 degrees.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:
250
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional

indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of
its rated value.
The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function

has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation
and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11
(2048)
bit 10
(1024)
bit 9
(512)
bit 8
(256)
bit 7
(128)
bit 6
(64)
STRVL3L1=
1
STRVL2L3=
1
STRVL1L2=
1
STRVL3N=1
STRVL2N=1
STRVL1N=1
bit 5
(32)
bit 4
(16)
bit 3
(8)
bit 2
(4)
bit 1
(2)
bit 0
(1)
STFWL3L1=
1
STFWL2L3=
1
STFWL1L2=
1
STFWL3N=1
STFWL2N=1
STFWL1N=1
The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an ORfunction of all the forward starting conditions, that is, STFWL1N, STFWL2N,
STFWL3N, STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is
similar to the STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an ORfunction of all the reverse starting conditions, that is, STRVL1N, STRVL2N,
STRVL3N, STRVL1L2, STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.
Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service
values:
resistance phase L1
reactance phase L1
resistance phase L2
reactance phase L2
resistance phase L3
reactance phase L3
direction phase L1
direction phase L2
direction phase L3
251
Section 6
6.6.2.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults

ZDARDIR
A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence
memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:
The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These

elements always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in threephase faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.
There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse
phase to phase faults and double phase-to-earth faults during high load periods. To
solve these, additional directional element is used.
For phase-to-earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one
of following types of polarization:
Zero-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Zero-sequence current
These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance

protection directional function for earth faults (ZDARDIR).
Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection.
The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 145.
252
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
- 3U 0
AngleOp
AngleRCA
3I 0
en06000417.vsd
IEC06000417 V1 EN
Figure 145:
Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element
Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.
Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zerosequence current, for example, the current in the neutral of a power transformer.
The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current
compensation is described in figure 146. The same also applies for the negativesequence function.
Z0 SA
I0
I0
Z0 SB
Z0 Line
Charac te ris tic

ang le
U0
U0
K*I0
U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd
IEC06000418 V1 EN
Figure 146:
Principle for zero sequence compensation
Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the
normal directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are
per phase and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the
additional directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase
must indicate correct direction.
253
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Normal
directional
element
L1N, L2N, L3N
AND
Release of distance
measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N
Additional
directional
element
AND per
phase
en06000419.vsd
IEC06000419 V1 EN
Figure 147:
6.6.3
Earth distance element directional supervision
Function block
ZDMRDIR
I3P*
U3P*
DIR_CURR
DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
IEC06000422 V2 EN
Figure 148:
ZDMRDIR function block
ZDARDIR
I3P*
U3P*
I3PPOL*
DIRCND
STFWPE
STRVPE
DIREFCND
IEC06000425 V2 EN
Figure 149:
6.6.4
ZDARDIR function block

Table 130:
Name
ZDMRDIR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
254
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 131:
ZDMRDIR Output signals
Name
Type
DIR_CURR
GROUP SIGNAL
Group connection
DIR_VOLT
GROUP SIGNAL
Group connection
DIR_POL
GROUP SIGNAL
Group connection
STFW
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction
STRV
BOOLEAN
Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND
INTEGER

measuring loop
Table 132:
ZDARDIR Input signals
Name
Type
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current signals
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage signals
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
Polarisation current signals
DIRCND
INTEGER
Binary coded directional signal
ZDARDIR Output signals
Name
Table 134:
Default
I3P
Table 133:
6.6.5
Description
Type
Description
STFWPE
BOOLEAN
Forward start signal from phase-to-ground

directional element
STRVPE
BOOLEAN
Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground

directional element
DIREFCND
INTEGER
Start direction Binary coded
Setting parameters
ZDMRDIR Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
DirEvalType
Impedance
Comparator
Imp/Comp
Comparator
Directional evaluation mode Impedance /

Comparator
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115

forward direction
ArgDir
5 - 45
Deg
15

forward direction
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
%IB
10

255
Section 6
Table 135:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for current values
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base setting for voltage level in kV
PolMode
-3U0
-U2
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
-3U0
Polarization quantity for opt dir function

for P-E faults
AngleRCA
-90 - 90
Deg
75
Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or

base angle)
I>
1 - 200
%IB
Minimum operation current in % of IBase
UPol>
1 - 100
%UB
Minimum polarizing voltage in % of UBase
IPol>
5 - 100
%IB
10
Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase
Table 136:
Name
ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AngleOp
90 - 180
Deg
160
Operation sector angle
Kmag
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
40.00
Boost-factor in -U0comp and -U2comp

polarization
6.7
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

Mho Impedance supervision logic
6.7.1
IEC 61850
identification
ZSMGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault
inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for
loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:
1.
2.
A fault inception detection logic

High SIR detection logic
256
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.7.2
6.7.2.1
Fault inception detection

The aim for the fault inception detector is to detect quickly that a fault has occurred
on the system.
The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents
or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase
voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and
corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the settings DeltaI and
DeltaU respectively. Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not
activated, the output signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has
occurred.
If the setting PilotMode is set to On in blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and
send to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has
to be fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:
1.
2.
3.
The setting PilotMode has to be set to On

The breaker has to be closed, that is, the input signal CBOPEN has to be
deactivated
A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal
BLOCKCS is not activated
Or
A fault inception is detected
If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote
end. The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:
1.
2.
3.
The function has to be in pilot mode, that is, the setting PilotMode has to be
set to On
The carrier send signal should be blocked, that is, input signal BLOCKCS is
On and,
A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, that is, input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated.
ZSMGAPC function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation
of the change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It
operates if the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting DeltaU or 3U0 exceeds
the setting Delta3U0.
If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection
function will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the
257
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
external fuse failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are
generated by activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input
BLKZ on the distance Mho function block.
During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might
cause the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC)
will increase the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done
by activating the output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input
BLKZMTD on mho distance function block.
High SIR detection
High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.
The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any
of the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting SIRLevel. The HSIR signal is
intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.
6.7.3
Function block
ZSMGAPC
I3P*
BLKZMTD
U3P*
BLKCHST
BLOCK
CHSTOP
REVSTART
HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN
IEC06000426 V2 EN
Figure 150:
6.7.4
ZSMGAPC function block

Table 137:
Name
ZSMGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and

DFT magnitude
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of the function
REVSTART
BOOLEAN
Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS
BOOLEAN
Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
Indicates that the breaker is open
258
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 138:
ZSMGAPC Output signals
Name
6.7.5
Table 139:
Type
Description
BLKZMTD
BOOLEAN
Block signal for blocking of time domained mho
BLKCHST
BOOLEAN
Blocking signal to remote end to block

overreaching zone
CHSTOP
BOOLEAN
Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR
BOOLEAN
Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit
Setting parameters
ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base value for current measurement
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base value for voltage measurement
PilotMode
Off
On
Off
Pilot mode Off/On
Zreach
0.1 - 3000.0
ohm
0.1
38.0
Line impedance
IMinOp
10 - 30
%IB
20
Minimum operating current for SIR

measurement
Table 140:
ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DeltaI
0 - 200
%IB
10
Current change level in %IB for fault

inception detection
Delta3I0
0 - 200
%IB
10
Zero seq current change level in % of IB
DeltaU
0 - 100
%UB
Voltage change level in %UB for fault

inception detection
Delta3U0
0 - 100
%UB
Zero seq voltage change level in % of UB
SIRLevel
5 - 15
10
Settable level for source impedance ratio
6.8
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS
Faulty phase identification with load
encroachment for mho
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
FMPSPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN
259
Section 6
6.8.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced, for example difficulties to get permission to build
new power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types
of fault so that single phase tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an
important roll in this matter.
The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s)
in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in
some cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted
operation. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment,
which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones
without interfering with the load.
The output signals from the phase selection function produce important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.
6.8.2
6.8.2.1
The phase selection function

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function
can be decomposed into six different parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A high speed delta based current phase selector

A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
A symmetrical components based phase selector
Fault evaluation and selection logic
A load encroachment logic
A blinder logic
The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
Delta based current and voltages
The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on
patent US4409636.
The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element and
is essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power
Line Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line.
The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that
filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault
260
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
occurs, currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents
and voltages resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line.
At this point the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output
is processed by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship
between phases to determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.
The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the
following criterion is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):
Max(UL1,UL2,UL3)>DeltaUMinOp
Max(IL1,IL2,IL3)>DeltaIMinOp
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3
are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp
are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current
filters to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a
case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components
phase selector will operate.
The delta voltages ULn and delta current ILn (n prefix for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.
The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type.
The logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing
by the largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The
condition for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed
as:
FaulType =
( UL1, UL2, UL3)

MAX ( UL1, UL 2, UL3)
(Equation 52)
EQUATION1621 V2 EN
FaulType =
( IL1, IL2, IL3)

MAX ( IL1, IL 2, IL3)
(Equation 53)
EQUATION1622 V2 EN
The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)
Single phase-to-earth;
FaultType=1
FaultType=2
Three-phase fault;
FaultType=3
261
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-earth fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and
3 for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if earth was involved
or not.
Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.
When a single phase-to-earth fault has been detected, the logic determines the
largest quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two
largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.
The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the
output is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and
a fault is detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-earth. This
way a premature single phase-to-earth fault detection is not released for a phase-tophase fault. If, however, earth current is detected before the timer expires, the phaseto-earth fault is released sooner.
If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a
certain amount. Each detection of either earth-to-phase or additional phases further
reduce the initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster.
There is no time delay, if for example, all three phases are faulty.
The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time
as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block
the delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When
the DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get
too abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.
Symmetrical component based phase selector
The symmetrical component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence

voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents.
All the symmetrical quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference
to phase L1.
The function is made up of four main parts:
A
Detection of the presence of earth fault
A phase-to-phase logic block based on U1/U2 angle relationship
A phase-to-earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships

between U2/I0 and U2/U1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase- to-phase to earth fault
Logic for detection of three-phase fault
262
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Presence of earth-fault detection

This detection of earth fault is performed in two levels, first by evaluation of the
magnitude of zero sequence current, and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and
negative sequence voltage. It is a complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in
the Symmetrical component based phase selector.
The complementary based zero-sequence current function evaluates the presence of
earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting
parameter INRelPE. The output signal is used to release the earth-fault loop. It is a
complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector.
The condition for releasing the phase-to-earth loop is as follows:
The output from this detection is used to release the earth-fault loop.
|3I0|>maxIph: INRelPE
where:
|3I0|
is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0
maxIph
is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents
INRelPE
is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the
maximum phase current
The earth-fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current
by the main sequence function meets the following conditions:
|3I0|>IBase 0.5
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE
where:
maxIph
is the maximal current magnitude found in any of the three phases
INRelPE
is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase
IBase
is the global setting of the base current (A)
In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of
zero sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In
those cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and
negative sequence voltage. The release of the earth-fault loops can then be
achieved if all of the following conditions are fulfilled:
|3U0|>|U2| 0.5
|3U0|>|U1| 0.2
|U1|> UBase 0.2/(3)
and
263
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3I0> 0.1 IBase

or
3I0<maxIph INRelPE
where:
3U0
is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage
U2
is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of
phase L1
k5
is design parameter
ILmax
is the maximal phase current
IMinOp
is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase
Phase-to-phase fault detection

The detection of phase-to-phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle
difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.
UL3
60
L3-L1 sector
180
UL2
L2-L3 sector
U1L1 (Ref)
L1-L2 sector
UL1
300
en06000383.vsd
IEC06000383 V1 EN
Figure 151:
Definition of fault sectors for phase-to-phase fault
The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle
between the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according
to figure 151 and the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U1|>U1MinOP
|U2|>U2MinOp
where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp
are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltages
264
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 151 above is reference.

If there is a three-phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.
Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth-fault detection
The detection of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth fault (US patent
5390067) is based on two conditions:
1. Angle relationship between U2 and I0
2. Angle relationship between U2 and U1
The condition 1 determines faulty phase at single phase-to-earth fault by determine
the argument between U2 and I0.
80
L2-E sector
200
L3-E sector
L1-E sector
320
IEC06000384 V2 EN
Figure 152:
Condition 1: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between U2

and I0
The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in
radians as input to the U2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if
the fault is in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault
is classified as forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to
200 degrees, see figure 153.
265
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Forward
200
20
Reverse
en06000385.vsd
IEC06000385 V1 EN
Figure 153:
Directional element used to release the measured angle between

Uo and I0
The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If
the angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that
sector will be active see figure 152. Only one sector signal is allowed to be
activated at the same time.
The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if
the main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPE
where:
U2 and IN
are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zerosequence current (3I0)
U2MinOp
is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence

voltage
maxIph
is the maximum phase current
INRelPE
is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth loop
The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.
The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence
voltage U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase-to-phase
voltage relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse
direction. A phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same
angle boarders as for condition 1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies
266
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
within one sector, the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The
condition 2 is released if both the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|U1|>U1MinOP
where:
|U1| and |U2|
are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltages.
U1MinOP and U2MinOp
are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operating voltages.
140
L3-E sector
20
L1-E sector
U1L1
(Ref)
L2-E sector
260
IEC06000413 V2 EN
Figure 154:
Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship
If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase-to-earth. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be
the complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- earth fault.
Condition 1 and
Condition 2
Fault type
L3-E
L3-E
L3-E
L2-E
L1-E
L2-L3-E
The sequence phase selector is blocked when earth is not involved or if a threephase fault is detected.
Three-phase fault detection
Unless it has been categorized as a single or two-phase fault, the function classifies
it as a three-phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U1|<U1Level
267
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
and
|I1|>I1LowLevel
or
|I1|>IMaxLoad
where:
|U1| and |I1|
are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude
U1Level ,
I1LowLevel
are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
IMaxLoad
is the setting of the maximum load current
The output signal for detection of three-phase fault is only released if not earth
fault and phase-to-phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.
The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to 10.
The condition for not detecting phase-to-phase faults is determined by three
conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase-to-phase fault.
Those are:
1:
earth fault is detected
or
|3I0IN|> 0.05 IBase
and
|3I0IN|>maxIph INRelPE
2:
phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults are not fulfilled
and
maxIph<0.1 IBase
and
|I2|<0.1 maxIph
3:
|3I0IN|>maxIph INBlockPP
or
|I2|<maxIph I2maxIL
where:
maxIph
is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
INRelPE
is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth fault loops

268
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
|I2|
is the magnitude of the negative sequence current
I2ILmax
is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current
to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase
INBlockPP
is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring
loops
Fault evaluation and selection logic
The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified
according to figure 155. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal
3 Phase fault is activated, all four outputs START, STL1, STL2 and STL3 gets
activated.
DeltaIL1
DeltaUL1
Sequence based
function
L1L2 fault
a
OR
a>b
then c=a
else c=b
a<b
then c=b
else c=a
FaultPriority
Adaptive release
dependent on result
from Delta logic
OR
L1N fault
3 Phase fault
STL1
&
IL1Valid
BLOCK
IEC06000386 V2 EN
Figure 155:
Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1
Load encroachment logic
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic
based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality
is always activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho
(FMPSPDIS) function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched
On/Offin the respective impedance measuring function.
resistive reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the
same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the
load encroachment function, as shown in figure 156.
269
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Blinder
Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating
characteristic is illustrated in figure 156. There are six individual measuring loops
with the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-earth loops which estimate the
impedance according to
Zn = Uph / Iph
and three phase-to-phase loops according to
Zph-ph = Uph-ph / Iph-ph
The start operations from respective loop are binary coded into one word and
provides an output signal STCNDPLE.
X
jX
Operation area
Operation area
RLd
ArgLd
ArgLd
R
R
ArgLd
ArgLd
RLd
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en06000414.vsd
IEC06000414 V1 EN
Figure 156:
Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic
Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic
phase selector activates the output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3. If an earth fault
is detected the signal STPE gets activated.
The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is started (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase-to- element is enabled. STPE is expected to be made available for two-phase
and three-phase faults for the correct output to be selected. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below.
The output STCNDPHS provides release information from the phase selection part
only. STCNDLE provides release information from the load encroachment part
only. STCNDPLE provides release information from the phase selection part and
270
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
the load encroachment part combined, that is, both parts have to issue a release at
the same time (this signal is normally not used in the zone measuring element). In
these signals, each fault type has an associated value, which represents the
corresponding zone measuring loop to be released. The values are presented in
table 140.
0=
no faulted phases
1=
L1E
2=
L2E
3=
L3E
4=
-L1L2E
5=
-L2L3E
6=
-L3L1E
7=
-L1L2L3E
8=
-L1L2
9=
-L2L3
10=
-L3L1
11=
L1L2L3
An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase-to-earth outputs are
to be asserted when the earth input G is not asserted.
The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating.
STCNDPLE is connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance
measuring zones to be blocked. The signal must be connected to the input LDCND
for selected mho impedance measuring zones .
The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to
release the blocking from the load encroachment function.
6.8.3
Function block
FMPSPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
ZSTART
TR3PH
1POLEAR
STL1
STL2
STL3
STPE
STCNDPHS
STCNDPLE
STCNDLE
START
IEC06000429 V2 EN
Figure 157:
FMPSPDIS function block
271
Section 6
6.8.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 141:
FMPSPDIS Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for current
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ZSTART
BOOLEAN
Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH
BOOLEAN
Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR
BOOLEAN
Single pole autoreclosing in progress
FMPSPDIS Output signals
Name
Table 143:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 142:
6.8.5
Default
Type
Description
STL1
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase L1
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STPE
BOOLEAN
Earth fault detected
STCNDPHS
INTEGER
Binary coded starts from phase selection
STCNDPLE
INTEGER
Binary coded starts from ph sel with load

encroachment
STCNDLE
INTEGER
Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
START
BOOLEAN
Indicates that something has started
Setting parameters
FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
IMaxLoad
10 - 5000
%IB
200
Maximum load for identification of three

phase fault in % of IBase
RLd
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00
Load encroachment resistive reach in

ohm/phase
ArgLd
5 - 70
Deg
20
Load encroachment inclination of load

angular sector
272
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 144:
FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DeltaIMinOp
5 - 100
%IB
10
Delta current level in % of IBase
DeltaUMinOp
5 - 100
%UB
20
Delta voltage level in % of UBase
U1Level
5 - 100
%UB
80
Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3ph fault
I1LowLevel
5 - 200
%IB
10
Pos seq current level for identification of

3-ph fault in % of IBase
U1MinOp
5 - 100
%UB
20
Minimum operate positive sequence

voltage for ph sel
U2MinOp
1 - 100
%UB
Minimum operate negative sequence

voltage for ph sel
INRelPE
10 - 100
%IB
20
3I0 limit for release ph-e measuring

loops in % of max phase current
INBlockPP
10 - 100
%IB
40

measuring loops in % of max phase
current
6.8.6
Technical data
Table 145:
FMPSPDIS technical data
Function
6.9
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-30)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir

reverse
(0.53000) W/phase
(570) degrees

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.530) x Ir

characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR
IEC 61850
identification

characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)
ZMRPDIS

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)
ZMRAPDIS
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN
21
S00346 V1 EN
273
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC 61850
identification
Directional impedance quadrilateral
6.9.1
ZDRDIR
IEC 60617
identification
Z<->
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D
Introduction
The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMRPDIS together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure
75.
X
Forward
operation
R
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 158:
Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection,

quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS
activated
sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single pole tripping and autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at
load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
274
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines and
so on.
6.9.2
6.9.2.1

for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 76 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,
impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 3
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 4
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Zone 5
en05000458.vsd
IEC05000458 V1 EN
Figure 159:
The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-tophase fault.
6.9.2.2
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the nondirectional impedance characteristics presented in figure 77 and figure 78. The phaseto-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-tophase characteristic presents the per phase reach.
275
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X (Ohm/loop)
R1PE+Rn
RFPE
RFPE
X1PE+Xn
jN
RFPE
Xn =
X0PE-X1PE
3
Rn =
R0PE-R1PE
3
jN
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE
X1PE+Xn
RFPE
RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd
R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN
Figure 160:
Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring , ohm/loop domain
276
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RFPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
X
0
PE
--1X
11FWPE
X
0
PE
X 0 PG X
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3 33
X1PP
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP
RFPP
X1PP
RFPP
2
R1PP
RFPP
2
en07000062.vsd
IEC07000062 V2 EN
Figure 161:
Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring
277
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UL1
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1
Phase-to-earth
element
RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
L1-L2
UL1
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L2
RFPP
IL2
(Arc resistance)
UL2
R1 + j X1
UL1
Three-phase
fault
IL1
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element L1-L3
IL3
UL3
IEC08000282 V2 EN
Figure 162:
Fault loop model
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPE and RFPP are the
eventual fault resistances in the faulty place.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
in figure 80. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
278
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 163:
6.9.2.3
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
(ZMRPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.
phase-to-earth loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
sum of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn< IMinOpPP.
to operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse
6.9.2.4
279
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 4 (example for a

phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2
Zapp = ------------------------I L1 IL2
(Equation 54)
EQUATION1222 V1 EN
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth
faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 5.
U L1
Z app = -----------------------------I L1 + I N KN
(Equation 55)
EQUATION1223 V1 EN
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
KN =
Z0 - Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION 2105 V1 EN
Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN
Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0
X0
R1
X1
reactance X.
280
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The formula given in equation 5 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
X Di
U = R i + ------ ----w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN
(Equation 56)

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ -----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION354 V1 EN
(Equation 57)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0
Dt
EQUATION355 V1 EN
(Equation 58)
with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN
(Equation 59)
where:
Re
Im
f0
The algorithm calculates Rmmeasured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equal to:
281
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Im ( U ) DRe ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I )
(Equation 60)
EQUATION357 V1 EN
Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )
(Equation 61)
EQUATION358 V1 EN
6.9.2.5
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 12 and equation 13 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg
0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M

I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 62)
EQUATION725 V2 EN
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
- ArgDir < arg
0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M

I L1 L 2
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 63)
EQUATION726 V2 EN
where:
ArgDir
U1L1
U1L1M
IL1
U1L1L2
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U1L1L2M
IL1L2
282
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 81). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.
STDIR=
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN
Figure 164:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in

Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
restored.
After 100ms the following occurs:
283
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.9.2.6


Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N.. The phase-tophase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

above.
FRPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
Input signal STCND is connected to FRPSPDISfunction output STCNDZ.
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR function.
284
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Figure 165:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition
Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 83.
Figure 166:

285
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STNDL1N
DIRL1N
AND
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N
AND
STNDL3N
OR
DIRL3N
AND
STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2
AND
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3
AND
STNDL3L1
DIRL3L1
STZMPE.
AND
OR
OR
AND
15 ms
t
STL1
AND
15 ms
t
STL2
AND
15 ms
t
STL3
AND
OR
STZMPP
AND
BLK
OR
AND
15 ms
t
START
IEC09000888 V1 EN
Figure 167:
Composition of start signals in directional operating mode
in figure 85.
286
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Timer tPP=On
tPP
t
AND
STZMPP
OR
Timer tPE=On
AND
STZMPE
tPE
t
AND
OR
AND
15ms
TRIP
BLKTR
AND
STL1
AND
TRL1
STL2
AND
TRL2
STL3
AND
TRL3
en00000490.vsd
IEC09000887 V1 EN
Figure 168:
6.9.3
Function block
ZMRPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC08000248 V1 EN
Figure 169:
ZMRPDIS function block
287
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ZMRAPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
STCND
DIRCND
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
STND
IEC08000290 V1 EN
Figure 170:
ZMRAPDIS function block

ZDRDIR
I3P*
U3P*
STDIRCND
IEC09000639 V1 EN
6.9.4

Table 146:
Name
ZMRPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 147:
Name
ZMRPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN

loop
288
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 148:
Name
ZMRAPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 149:
Name
ZMRAPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
STND
BOOLEAN

loop
Table 150:
ZDRDIR Input signals
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 151:
Name
STDIRCND
ZDRDIR Output signals

Type
INTEGER
Description
measuring loop
289
Section 6
6.9.5
Table 152:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
ZMRPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

Forw / Rev
X1PP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach PhPh
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-Ph
RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1PE
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-E
X0PE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
100.00
R0PE
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
15.00

RFPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
OperationPP
Off
On
On
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

loops
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinOpPE
10 - 1000
%IB
20

Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN
5 - 1000
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
290
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 153:
ZMRAPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
OperationDir
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

Forw / Rev
X1PP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach PhPh
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-Ph
RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1PE
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE
0.01 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-E
X0PE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
100.00
R0PE
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
15.00

RFPE
0.10 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
OperationPP
Off
On
On
Timer tPP
Off
On
On

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPE
Off
On
On

loops
Timer tPE
Off
On
On

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinOpPE
10 - 1000
%IB
20

Phase-Earth loops
Table 154:
ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
IMinOpPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
291
Section 6
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115

forward direction
ArgDir
5 - 45
Deg
15

forward direction
6.9.6
Technical data
Table 155:
ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS technical data
Function
6.10
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
Max 5 with selectable

direction

current, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase
Minimum operate current, phaseto-phase and phase-to-earth
(10-1000)% of IBase
(0.10-3000.00) /
phase
(0.01-1000.00) /
phase
(0.10-9000.00) /
phase

2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
(0.01-3000.00) /
phase
(0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase
(0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach
<5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
24 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
30 ms typically
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS
Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with settable angle
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
FRPSPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
292
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.10.1
Introduction
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get
permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be
used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the
proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.
6.10.2
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for
phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the
combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS uses information
from the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in
forward or reverse direction.
The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:
Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
293
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:
Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function ZDRDIR.
There are output from FRPSPDIS that indicate whether a start is in forward or
reverse direction or non-directional, for example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 103.
X
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FW)
Reverse (RV)
en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN
Figure 171:
Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS)
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function ZDRDIR. It shall be connected to the STDIR
output on ZDRDIR. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on
the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
294
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STDIR=
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2 etc.
The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary
coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMRPDIS distance measuring zones block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STCNDZ = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32
6.10.2.1
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to
equation 24.
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase
selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS).
ZPHSn =
ULn
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN
(Equation 64)
where:
n
corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
The characteristic for FRPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 104. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the
first quadrant of 70.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 27 and equation 28.
295
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RN =
R 0 PE - R1PE
3
(Equation 65)
EQUATION 2125 V1 EN
RN =
R0 - R1
3
(Equation 65)
EQUATION1256 V1 EN
XN =
X 0 - X1
3
(Equation 66)
EQUATION1257 V1 EN
X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
RFRvPE
R1PE+RN
IEC09000633 V1 EN
Figure 172:
Characteristic of FRPSPDIS for phase to earth fault (directional

lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 27 and equation 28.
3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN
(Equation 67)
296
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3 I0 INReleasePE
------------------------------------ Iphmax
100
(Equation 68)
EQUATION766 V1 EN
where:
IMinOpPE
is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phaseto-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax
6.10.2.2
is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to
equation 29.
ZPHS =
ULm - ULn
-2 ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN
(Equation 69)
ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 105.
297
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X (ohm/phase)
0.5FRvPP
R1PP 0.5RFFwPP
X1
0.5RFFwPP
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPP
0.5RFRvPP
R1PP
X1
0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000634 V1 EN
Figure 173:
The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS at phase-to-phase fault

(directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 30 or equation 31.
3I 0 < IMinOpPE
(Equation 70)
EQUATION2109 V1 EN
3I 0 <
INBlockPP
Iph max
100
(Equation 71)
EQUATION2110 V1 EN
where:
IMinOpPE
is the minimum operation current for forward earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

Iphmax
is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
298
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.10.2.3
Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 29, equation 30 and equation 31 are used to release the
operation of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all
directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 106.
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1PP
3
0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3
30 deg
RFwPP
2
3
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg
IEC09000635 V2 EN
Figure 174:
6.10.2.4
The characteristic of FRPSPDIS for three-phase fault (set angle 70)
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
299
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.
X
RLdFw
ArgLd
ArgLd
ArgLd
RLdRv
ArgLd
IEC09000042 V1 EN
Figure 175:
Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic, see figure 109.
When output signal STCNDI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in
figure 108. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current
and the distance measuring zones.
300
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STCNDZ
STCNDLE
IEC10000099-1en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN
Figure 176:
Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated
When FRPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 109. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of
the zone together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.
301
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line
en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 177:
Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated
Figure 109 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 110. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100
degrees instead of the original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The
blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards
and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or
less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a
margin to the load impedance.
302
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X (W /
phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone
R (W /
phase)
IEC09000049 V1 EN
Figure 178:
Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS in forward direction for threephase fault, ohm/phase domain
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 111. Since the load characteristic is based on the same
measurement as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral
characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault.
At the same time the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and
RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.
303
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 179:
Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases
There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.
6.10.2.5
Minimum operate currents

The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain
threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS
value of the current in phase Ln.
The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).
304
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.10.2.6

Figure 112 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toearth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is
available within the IED.
Load encroachment block
3I 0 0.5 IMinOpPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0
Iphmax
100
IRELPE
15 ms
t
&
&
Bool to
integer
BLOCK
3I 0 < IMinOpPE
OR
INBlockPP
3I 0 <
Iphmax
100
STPE
&
10 ms 20 ms
t
t
&
15 ms
t
STCNDLE
STPP
IRELPP
IEC09000149 V1 EN
Figure 180:
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 112. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.
Figure 113 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase
selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is within
the characteristic.
305
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N
OR
15 ms
t
STNDPE
OR
15 ms
t
STNDL1
OR
15 ms
t
STNDL2
AND
OR
15 ms
t
STNDL3
AND
INDL1L2
IRELPE
ZML1N
ZML2N
ZML3N
ZML1L2
ZML2L3
ZML3L1
IRELPP
AND
AND
AND
INDL2L3
AND
INDL3L1
OR
15 ms
t
STNDPP
Figure 181:
Composition on non-directional phase selection signals
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 114 and figure 115. The directional criteria
appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high
phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 115) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 114) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 114 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which
is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be
configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and
this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone
measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.
306
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
INDL1N
DRVL1N
AND
INDL1L2
DRVL1L2
AND
OR
15 ms
t
STRVL1
OR
15 ms
t
STRVPE
OR
15 ms
t
STRVL2
INDL3L1
DRVL3L1
AND
INDL2N
DRVL2N
AND
INDL1L2
AND
INDL2L3
DRVL2L3
INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N
INDL1L2
INDL2L3
INDL3L1
AND
INDL3N
DRVL3N
AND
INDL2L3
Bool to
integer
15 ms
AND
OR
INDL3L1
AND
15 ms
OR
STCNDZ
STRVL3
STRVPP
Figure 182:
Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction
307
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
AND
INDL1N
DFWL1N
AND
AND
OR
15 ms
t
INDL1L2
DFWL1L2
AND
OR
INDL3L1
DFWL3L1
DFWL2N
OR
15 ms
t
STFWL1
15 ms
t
STFWPE
15 ms
t
STFWL2
15 ms
t
STFW2PH
AND
AND
INDL1L2
AND
OR
INDL2L3
DFWL2L3
STFW1PH
AND
AND
INDL2N
15 ms
t
AND
OR
15 ms
t
AND
INDL3N
DFWL3N
AND
AND
INDL2L3
AND
15 ms
t
STFWL3
15 ms
t
STFW3PH
15 ms
t
STFWPP
OR
INDL3L1
AND
AND
OR
IEC05000201 V2 EN
Figure 183:
Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction
Figure116 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.
308
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
TimerPP=Off
tPP
t
AND
OR
TimerPE=Off
tPE
t
AND
AND
OR
TRIP
AND
STNDPP
STFWPP
OR
STRVPP
OR
STNDPE
STFWPE
START
OR
STRVPE
IEC08000441 1 V2 EN
Figure 184:
6.10.3
TRIP and START signal logic
Function block
FRPSPDIS
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND
TRIP
START
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE
IEC08000430 V2 EN
Figure 185:
FRPSPDIS function block

309
Section 6
6.10.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 156:
Name
FRPSPDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 157:
Name
FRPSPDIS Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip output
START
BOOLEAN
Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1
BOOLEAN
STFWL2
BOOLEAN
STFWL3
BOOLEAN
STFWPE
BOOLEAN
Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1
BOOLEAN
STRVL2
BOOLEAN
STRVL3
BOOLEAN
STRVPE
BOOLEAN
Earth fault detected in reverse direction
STNDL1
BOOLEAN
STNDL2
BOOLEAN
STNDL3
BOOLEAN
STNDPE
BOOLEAN
Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH
BOOLEAN
Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE
BOOLEAN
Current conditions release of phase-earth

measuring elements
STPP
BOOLEAN
Current conditions release of phase-phase

measuring elements
STCNDZ
INTEGER
Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE
INTEGER
Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
310
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.10.5
Table 158:
Setting parameters
FRPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.01
400.00
INBlockPP
10 - 100
%IPh
40

measuring loops
INReleasePE
10 - 100
%IPh
20

measuring loops
RLdFw
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00

impedance area
RLdRv
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00

impedance area
ArgLd
5 - 70
Deg
30

impedance area
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
15.00

angle, Ph-Ph
R1PE
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm/p
0.01
1.50

angle, Ph-E
X0
0.50 - 9000.00
ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0PE
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
5.00

RFFwPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFRvPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFFwPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
RFRvPE
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
IMinOpPP
5 - 500
%IB
10
IMinOpPE
5 - 500
%IB

Phase-Earth loops
Table 159:
FRPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerPP
Off
On
Off

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE
Off
On
Off

Ph-E
tPE
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay to trip, Ph-E
311
Section 6
6.10.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 160:
FRPSPDIS technical data
Function
6.11
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-500)% of IBase
Reactive reach, positive

sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, positive

sequence
(0.101000.00) /phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence
(0.509000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase

faults, forward and reverse
(1.009000.00) /loop

accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ir
Current range: (0.5-30) x
IBase
degrees
Fault resistance, phase-tophase faults, forward and reverse
(0.503000.00) /loop

reverse
Safety load impedance angle
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
Power swing detection ZMRPSB

Power swing detection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZMRPSB
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
68
Zpsb
SYMBOL-EE V1 EN
6.11.1
Introduction
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big
generation plants.
Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB) is used to detect power swings and
initiate block of selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth-fault
currents during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function to allow fault clearance.
6.11.2
Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ) function comprises an inner and an outer
quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in
figure 186.
312
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a
power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the
outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times
longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance
measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The
impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases
separately.
One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to
the specific system operating conditions.
jX
X1OutFw
X1InFw
DRv
R1LIn
ZL
DFw
j
R1FInRv
R1FInFw
DFw
ArgLd
DRv
ArgLd
DFw
DFw
R
DFw
DRv
DFw
RLdInRv RLdInFw
DRv
j
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw
DRv
X1InRv
X1OutRv
IEC09000222 V1 EN
Figure 186:
Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB function (setting parameters

in italic)
The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB function is performed by solving

equation 72 and equation 73 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2 and
L3).
ULn
Rset
Re
ILn
EQUATION1183 V2 EN
(Equation 72)
313
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ULn
Im
Xset
n
I
L
EQUATION1184 V2 EN
(Equation 73)
The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries.
6.11.2.1
Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment, the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by
setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value
while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 74.
RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw
EQUATION1185 V2 EN
(Equation 74)
where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1
The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting
the parameter ArgLd.
The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ArgLd and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).
The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better
adaptation to the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle
and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the
line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the
inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw.
From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and
second quadrant.
6.11.2.2
Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction, the resistive reach is limited by
setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment
zone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by
using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 75.
314
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RLdInRv = kLdRRvRLdOutRv
EQUATION1187 V2 EN
(Equation 75)
where:
kLdRRv is a settable multiplication factor less than 1
From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and
fourth quadrant.
The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.
The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load
encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line
resistance R1LIn. The argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is
the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and
outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is
DRv.
6.11.2.3
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to
the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,
where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined
as X1InRv + DRv.
where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv
6.11.2.4
Basic detection logic

The operation of the Power swing detection ZMRPSB is only released if the
magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current,
IMinOpPE.
ZMRPSB function can operate in two operating modes:
315
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of

the three phases. Figure 187 presents a composition of an internal detection
signal DET-L1 in this particular phase.
The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least
two out of three phases. Figure 188 presents a composition of the detection
signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.
Signals ZOUTLn (outer boundary) and ZINLn (inner boundary) in figure 187 are
related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase
separately (n represents the corresponding L1, L2 and L3). They are internal
signals, calculated by ZMRPSB function.
The tP1 timer in figure 187 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate
area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part
of figure 187 (internal input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers)
are duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the
same settings.
ZOUTL1
ZINL1
0-tP1
0
AND
AND
0-tP2
0
OR
-loop
AND
ZOUTL2
ZOUTL3
detected
-loop
OR
AND
DET-L1
OR
0
0-tW
IEC05000113 V2 EN
Figure 187:
Detection of power swing in phase L1
316
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
DET-L1
DET-L2
DET-L3
DET1of3 - int.
>1
&
>1
&
DET2of3 - int.
&
Figure 188:
Detection of power swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode
ZOUTL1
ZOUT
OR
ZOUTL2
ZINL1
ZOUTL3
TRSP
ZIN
OR
ZINL2
AND
ZINL3
tEF
AND
I0CHECK
AND
BLKI02
10 ms
t
OR
tR1
AND
INHIBIT
OR
-loop
tR2
AND
BLKI01
BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
BLK1PH
DET2of3 - int.
REL2PH
BLK2PH
AND
tH
OR
AND
t
OR
AND
START
EXTERNAL
en05000114.vsd
IEC05000114 V1 EN
Figure 189:
Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB function
317
Section 6
6.11.2.5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 189 presents a simplified logic diagram for the Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the
detailed logic diagrams in figure 187 and figure 188 respectively.
Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the
functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.
The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated from
RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.
There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:
Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal

instantaneously.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected
and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to
disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01
functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer,
if an earth-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and
the power swing has been detected before the earth-fault (activation of the
signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the
logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input
I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance
has been seen within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB operate
characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of
ZMRPSB function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent
single-phase fault after single-phase autoreclosing dead time, if the initial singlephase fault and single-phase opening of the circuit breaker causes the power
swing in the remaining two phases.
318
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.11.3
Function block
ZMRPSB
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKI01
BLKI02
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXTERNAL
START
ZOUT
ZIN
IEC06000264 V2 EN
Figure 190:
6.11.4
ZMRPSB function block

Table 161:
Name
ZMRPSB Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKI01
BOOLEAN
Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition
BLKI02
BOOLEAN
Block inhibit of start output for subsequent

residual current detection
BLK1PH
BOOLEAN
Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH
BOOLEAN
Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH
BOOLEAN
Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH
BOOLEAN
Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK
BOOLEAN
Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit

start output
TRSP
BOOLEAN
Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping

function
EXTERNAL
BOOLEAN
Input for external detection of power swing
Table 162:
Name
ZMRPSB Output signals

Type
Description
START
BOOLEAN
Power swing detected
ZOUT
BOOLEAN
Measured impedance within outer impedance

boundary
ZIN
BOOLEAN
Measured impedance within inner impedance

boundary
319
Section 6
6.11.5
Table 163:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
ZMRPSB Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On / Off
X1InFw
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
Inner reactive boundary, forward
R1LIn
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
Line resistance for inner characteristic

angle
R1FInFw
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance coverage to inner

resistive line, forward
X1InRv
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
Inner reactive boundary, reverse
R1FInRv
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance line to inner resistive

boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh
Off
On
On
Operation of load discrimination

characteristic
RLdOutFw
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
Outer resistive load boundary, forward
ArgLd
5 - 70
Deg
25
Load angle determining load impedance

area
RLdOutRv
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
Outer resistive load boundary, reverse
kLdRFw
0.50 - 0.90
Mult
0.01
0.75
Multiplication factor for inner resistive

load boundary, forward
kLdRRv
0.50 - 0.90
Mult
0.01
0.75
Multiplication factor for inner resistive

load boundary, reverse
tEF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Timer for overcoming single-pole

reclosing dead time
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB
10
Minimum operate current in % of IBase
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for current level settings
Table 164:
ZMRPSB Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tP1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.045
Timer for detection of initial power swing
tP2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.015
Timer for detection of subsequent power

swings
tW
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.250
Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer
tH
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Timer for holding power swing START

output
tR1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Timer giving delay to inhibit by the

residual current
tR2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow

swing
Step
Default
Description
320
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.11.6
Technical data
Table 165:
ZMRPSB technical data
Function
6.12
Range or value
Reactive reach
(0.10-3000.00) W/phase
Resistive reach
(0.101000.00)W/loop
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s

Conditions:
degrees
0.5% 10 ms
Power swing logic ZMRPSL

Power swing logic
6.12.1
Accuracy
IEC 61850
identification
ZMRPSL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Power Swing Logic (ZMRPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of
faults on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when
the distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic
consists of two different parts:
Communication and tripping part: provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which
are not blocked during the system oscillations.
Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.
6.12.2
6.12.2.1
Communication and tripping logic

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 191.
321
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STDEF
AR1P1
&
STPSD
BLOCK
&
tCS
t
&
tTrip
tBlkTr
t
CS
CSUR
&
BLKZMPS
t
CACC
CR
&
>1
TRIP
en06000236.vsd
IEC06000236 V1 EN
Figure 191:
Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping

logic
The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the
BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF
functional input signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by
the logical one on the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal
BLKZMPS remains logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally
(BLOCK is logical zero) and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF
is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero).
Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of this blocking condition, if the measured
impedance remains within the operate area of the Power Swing Detection
(ZMRPSB) function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used to block
the operation of the power-swing zones.
Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates
the TRIP functional output.
Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.
Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local
trip condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not
blocked by one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present
longer then the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.
6.12.2.2
Blocking logic
Figure 192 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their
clearance on the remote power lines.
322
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
&
BLKZMH
&
STZML
BLOCK
STMZH
STZMPSD
STPSD
tZL
t
&
&
tDZ
t
&
>1
STZMLL
>1
&
-loop
en06000237.vsd
IEC06000237 V1 EN
Figure 192:
Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power

swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines
and other system elements
The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional input BLOCK. It can start only
if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB) function must not detect power swinging over the
protected power line.
STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the
impedance must be detected within the external boundary of ZMRPSB function.
STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault
must be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example
zone 2.
The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:
If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it

appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer
tDZ.
If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay
longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the
time delay set on the tZL timer.
The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.
323
Section 6
6.12.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
ZMRPSL
BLOCK
STZMUR
STZMOR
STPSD
STDEF
STZMPSD
CACC
AR1P1
CSUR
CR
TRIP
STZMURPS
BLKZMUR
BLKZMOR
CS
IEC07000026 V2 EN
Figure 193:
6.12.4
ZMRPSL function block

Table 166:
Name
ZMRPSL Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
STZMUR
BOOLEAN
Start of the underreaching zone
STZMOR
BOOLEAN
Start of the overreaching zone
STPSD
BOOLEAN
Power swing detected
STDEF
BOOLEAN
Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or

reverse direction
STZMPSD
BOOLEAN
Operation of Power Swing Detection external

characteristic
CACC
BOOLEAN
Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1
BOOLEAN
Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR
BOOLEAN
Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing

zone
CR
BOOLEAN
Carrier receive signal during power swing

detection operation
Table 167:
Name
ZMRPSL Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip through Power Swing Logic
STZMURPS
BOOLEAN
Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to

be used in configuration
BLKZMUR
BOOLEAN
Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR
BOOLEAN
Block trip of overreaching distance protection

zones
CS
BOOLEAN
Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing
324
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.12.5
Table 168:
Setting parameters
ZMRPSL Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
tDZ
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
Permitted max oper time diff between

higher and lower zone
tDZMUR
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Delay for oper of underreach zone with

detected diff in oper time
tCS
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Conditional timer for sending the CS at

power swings
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Conditional timer for tripping at power

swings
tBlkTr
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Timer for blocking the overreaching

zones trip
6.13
6.13.1
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM

IEC 61850
identification
Pole slip protection
PSPPPAM
IEC 60617
identification
Ucos
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78
Introduction
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of
the pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required
action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system. The electrical system
parts swinging to each other can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of
the power swing allowing the two systems to be stable as separated islands.
6.13.2
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the
impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If
the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to
right and motoring is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were
a motor).
325
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 194. The transient
behaviour is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.
Zone 1
EB
Zone 2
Xd
XT
XS
IED
EA
jX
A
XS
Pole slip
impedance
movement
XT
Apparent generator
impedance
Xd
B
IEC06000437 V2 EN
Figure 194:
Movements in the impedance plain
where:
X'd
= transient reactance of the generator
XT
= short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer
ZS
= impedance of the power system A
The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:
326
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an
angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.
en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN
Figure 195:
Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the

equivalent generators
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle
exceeds the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
Slipping is detected when:
a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in
zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone
1 when signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the
centre of slipping).
After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction
of slip - either GEN or MOTOR are issued.
327
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line
is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of
rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is
crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite
direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated
after N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.
All signals are reset if:
the direction of movement reverses

the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.
Imin > 0.10 IBase
Ucosj < 0.92 UBase
AND
START
AND
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz
d startAngle
ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC
ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB
Counter
N1Limit
a
b
ab
d tripAngle
OR
Counter
N2Limit
TRIP1
AND
a
b ab
AND
TRIP
TRIP2
en07000005.vsd
IEC07000005 V1 EN
Figure 196:
Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM
328
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.13.3
Function block
PSPPPAM
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKGEN
BLKMOTOR
EXTZONE1
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
ZONE1
ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOS
UCOSPER
IEC10000045 V1 EN
Figure 197:
6.13.4
PSPPPAM function block

Table 169:
Name
PSPPPAM Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current group connection
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage group connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKGEN
BOOLEAN
Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR
BOOLEAN
Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1
BOOLEAN
Extension of zone1 with zone2 region
Table 170:
Name
PSPPPAM Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START
BOOLEAN
Common start signal
ZONE1
BOOLEAN
First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2
BOOLEAN
First slip in zone2 region
GEN
BOOLEAN
Generator is faster than the system
MOTOR
BOOLEAN
Generator is slower than the system
SFREQ
REAL
Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM
REAL
Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER
REAL
Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOS
REAL
UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER
REAL
UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase
329
Section 6
6.13.5
Table 171:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
PSPPPAM Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation On / Off
OperationZ1
Off
On
On
Operation Zone1 On / Off
OperationZ2
Off
On
On
Operation Zone2 On / Off
ImpedanceZA
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Forward impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Reverse impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi
72.00 - 90.00
Deg
0.01
85.00
Angle of the slip impedance line
StartAngle
0.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
110.0
Rotor angle for the start signal
TripAngle
0.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
90.0
Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit
1 - 20
Count limit for the trip1 signal
N2Limit
1 - 20
Count limit for the trip2 signal
Table 172:
Name
ResetTime
Table 173:
PSPPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
5.000
Description
Time without slip to reset all signals
PSPPPAM Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
IBase
0.1 - 99999.9
0.1
3000.0
Base Current (primary phase current in

Amperes)
UBase
0.1 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
20.0
Base Voltage (primary phase-to-phase

voltage in kV)
MeasureMode
PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,

L3L1)
InvertCTcurr
No
Yes
No
Invert current direction
6.13.6
Description
Technical data
Table 174:
PSPPPAM technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Impedance reach
(0.001000.00)% of Zbase
2.0% of Ur/Ir
Characteristic angle
(72.0090.00) degrees
5.0 degrees
Start and trip angles
(0.0180.0) degrees
5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters
(1-20)
330
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.14
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and

current based ZCVPSOF
Automatic switch onto fault logic,
voltage and current based
6.14.1
IEC 61850
identification
ZCVPSOF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (ZCVPSOF) is a
function that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead
line detection check is provided to activate the function when the line is dead.
Mho distance protections can not operate for switch onto fault condition when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for
this purpose.
6.14.2
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based function (ZCVPSOF)
can be activated externally by Breaker Closed Input or internally (automatically)
by using UI Level Based Logic see figure 198.
The activation from the Dead line detection function is released if the internal
signal deadLine from the UILevel function is activated at the same time as the
input ZACC is not activated during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting
parameter AutoInit is set to On.
When the setting AutoInit is Off, the function is activated by an external binary
input BC. To get a trip one of the following operation modes must also be selected
by the parameter Mode:
Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal
connected to non directional distance protection zone).
Mode = UILevel; trip is released if UILevel detector is activated.
Mode = UILvl&Imp; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or
UILevel detection.
The internal signal deadLine from the UILevel detector is activated if all three
phase currents and voltages are below the setting IPh< and UPh<.
UI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though
the voltage is very low. The logic is based on current and voltage levels. The
internal signal SOTF UILevel is activated if a phase voltage is below the setting
331
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UPh< and corresponding phase current is above the setting IPh< longer than the
time tDuration.
ZCVPSOF can be activated externally from input BC and thus setting AutoInit is
bypassed.
The function is released during a settable time tSOTF.
The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
BLOCK
15
AND
TRIP
BC
AutiInit=On
1000
200
ZACC
AND
IL1
OR
deadLine
IL2
IL3
UL1
UILevel detector
UL2
UL3
Iph<
SOTFU ILevel
Uph<
AND
Mode = Impedance
AND
Mode = UILevel
OR
OR
Mode = UILvl&Imp
AND
en07000084.vsd
IEC07000084 V2 EN
Figure 198:
Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic,

voltage and current based.
332
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
6.14.3
Function block
ZCVPSOF
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BC
ZACC
TRIP
IEC06000459 V2 EN
Figure 199:
6.14.4
ZCVPSOF function block

Table 175:
ZCVPSOF Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current DFT
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage DFT
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BC
BOOLEAN
External enabling of SOTF
ZACC
BOOLEAN
Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF
ZCVPSOF Output signals
Name
Type
TRIP
Table 177:
Description
I3P
Table 176:
6.14.5
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Trip output
Setting parameters
ZCVPSOF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current (A)
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage L-L (kV)
Mode
Impedance
UILevel
UILvl&Imp
UILevel
Mode of operation of SOTF Function
AutoInit
Off
On
Off
Automatic switch onto fault initialization
IPh<
1 - 100
%IB
20
Current level for detection of dead line in

% of IBase
UPh<
1 - 100
%UB
70
Voltage level for detection of dead line in

% of UBase
333
Section 6
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
tDuration
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Time delay for UI detection (s)
tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Drop off delay time of switch onto fault

function
tDLD
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Delay time for activation of dead line

detection
6.14.6
Step
Default
Technical data
Table 178:
ZCVPSOF technical data
Parameter
6.15
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line
(1100)% of
0.5% of Ur
Operate current, detection of dead line
(1100)% of
1.0% of Ir
Delay following dead line detection input before

Automatic switch into fault logic function is
automatically turned On
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Time period after circuit breaker closure in which

Automatic switch into fault logic function is active
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
UBase
IBase
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

Phase preference logic
6.15.1
Description
IEC 61850
identification
PPLPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or high
impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the
faulty lines at cross-country fault.
Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase-to-earth faults in isolated
and high impedance earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
the lagging phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred
fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase
preference combinations are available for selection.
6.15.2
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ has 10 operation modes, which can be set by the
parameter OperMode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in
334
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
table 179 below. The difference between cyclic and acyclic operation can be
explained by the following example. Assume a L1 fault on one line and a L3 fault
on another line. For OperMode = 1231c the line with L3 fault will be tripped (L3
before L1) while for OperMode = 123a the line with L1 1 fault will be tripped (L1
before L3).
Table 179:
OperMode
Operation modes for Phase preference logic

Description
No filter
No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-toearth faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at crosscountry faults
No pref
No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-earth faults, trip is allowed

without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault
1231 c
Cyclic 1231c; L1 before L2 before L3 before L1
1321 c
Cyclic 1321c; L1 before L3 before L2 before L1
123 a
Acyclic 123a; L1 before L2before L3
132 a
Acyclic 132a; L1 before L3 before L2
213 a
231 a
312 a
321 a
The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled voltage and current
discrimination and the second one labeled phase preference evaluation, see
figure 200.
The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross-country fault. If cross-country fault is
detected, an internal signal Detected cross-country fault is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the
condition for trip.
The voltage and current discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals if
the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter UPN< at the
same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3U0>. If
there is a start in any phase the START output signal will be activated.
The internal signal for detection of cross-country fault, DetectCrossCountry, that
come from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be
achieved in three different ways:
335
Section 6
1.
2.
3.
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> for a time
longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same
time as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0>
during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN> at the same
time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
the measured phase-to-phase voltage in at least one of the phase

combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than
20 ms.
At least two of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN<
for more than 20 ms.
The second part, phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the
input signal STCND together with phase selection start condition (from phase
selection functions) connected to input STCND, and the information from the
setting parameter OperMode are used to determine the condition for trip. To
release the Phase preference logic, at least two out of three phases must be faulty.
The fault classification whether it is a single phase-to-earth, two-phase or crosscountry fault and which phase to be tripped at cross-country fault is converted into
a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring zone to release
the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode. This is done by
activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input STCND on the
distance zone measuring element.
The release signals from phase selection will only be gated with the cross-country
check from IN and UN but without time delay. If no phase selection start has
occurred, the release is based on current and voltage discriminating part only.
The input signal STCND consist of binary information of fault type and is
connected to the output STCND on phase selection function. The fault must be
activated in at least two phases to be classified as a cross-country fault in the phase
preference part of the logic.
The input signals RELxxx are additional fault release signals that can be connected
to external protection functions through binary input.
The output START and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK
336
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1UL2
UL2UL3
UL3UL1
IN
Voltage and
Current
Discrimination
UN
UPN<
START
AND
UPP<
IN>
Detect CrossCountry fault
UN0>
OperMode
RELL1N
Phase Preference
Evaluation
RELL2N
ZREL
AND
RELL3N
STCND
BLOCK
IEC09000220 V2 EN
Figure 200:
6.15.3
Simplified block diagram for Phase preference logic
Function block
PPLPHIZ
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND
START
ZREL
IEC07000029 V2 EN
Figure 201:
6.15.4
PPLPHIZ function block

Table 180:
Name
PPLPHIZ Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function

337
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N
BOOLEAN
RELL3N
BOOLEAN
STCND
INTEGER
Integer coded external release signals
PPLPHIZ Output signals
Name
Table 182:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 181:
6.15.5
Default
RELL1N
Type
Description
START
BOOLEAN
Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of

direction
ZREL
INTEGER
Integer coded output release signal
Setting parameters
PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.01
400.00
Base voltage
OperMode
No Filter
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
No Filter
Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
UPN<
10 - 100
%UB
70
Operate value of phase undervoltage in

% of UBase/sqrt(3)
UPP<
10 - 100
%UB
50
Operate value of line to line

undervoltage (% of UBase)
3U0>
5 - 300
%UB
20
Operate value of residual voltage in % of

UBase/sqrt(3)
IN>
10 - 200
%IB
20
Operate value of residual current (% of

IBase)
tUN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Pickup-delay for residual voltage
tOffUN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Dropoff-delay for residual voltage
tIN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Pickup-delay for residual current
338
Section 6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 183:
PPLPHIZ technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage
(10.0 - 100.0)% of UBase
0,5% of Ur
Reset ratio, undervoltage
< 105%
Operate value, residual voltage
(5.0 - 70.0)% of UBase
0,5% of Ur
Reset ratio, residual voltage
> 95%
Operate value, residual current
(10 - 200)% of IBase
1,0% of Ir for I < Ir

1,0% of I for I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual current
> 95%
Timers
(0.000 - 60.000) s
0,5% 10 ms
Operating mode
No Filter, NoPref
Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a,
312a, 321a
339
340
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 7
Current protection
About this chapter

This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection,
Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.
7.1
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC

Instantaneous phase overcurrent
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
PHPIOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
7.1.1
Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach
and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
7.1.2
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the
fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase
current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent
protection function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than
the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true.
This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this
phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the
parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the
parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
341
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
7.1.3
Function block
PHPIOC
I3P*
BLOCK
ENMULT
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
IEC04000391 V2 EN
Figure 202:
7.1.4
PHPIOC function block

Table 184:
PHPIOC Input signals
Name
Type
Three phase current
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ENMULT
BOOLEAN
Enable current start value multiplier
PHPIOC Output signals
Name
Table 186:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 185:
7.1.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from any phase
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
PHPIOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
OpMode
2 out of 3
1 out of 3
1 out of 3
Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out

of 3
IP>>
1 - 2500
%IB
200
Operate phase current level in % of IBase
Table 187:
Name
StValMult
PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0
Unit
-
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Description
Multiplier for operate current level
342
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.1.6
Technical data
Table 188:
PHPIOC technical data
Function
7.2
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Reset time
Operate time
Reset time
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC

Four step phase overcurrent protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OC4PTOC
3I>
4
4
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51/67
alt
TOC-REVA V1 EN
7.2.1
Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for step 1 and 4 separately. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined time characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set
to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
A 2nd harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
7.2.2
The Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3
343
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/

Reverse.
The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:
The direction element

The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
The four step over current function
The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter
DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
faultState
Direction
Element
I3P
dirPh1Flt
dirPh2Flt
dirPh3Flt
4 step over current

element
One element for each
step
faultState
START
U3P
TRIP
I3P
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en05000740.vsd
IEC05000740 V1 EN
Figure 203:
Functional overview of OC4PTOC
A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.
344
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function

block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four
step phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC, it is possible to select the
type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select
either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component
and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If
RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in
addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from
the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected
current values are fed to OC4PTOC.
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to
the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2
and STL3 are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall
be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the
local HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set
restrain current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as
current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for
the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage
(15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2
I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
(Equation 76)
EQUATION1449 V1 EN
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
(Equation 77)
EQUATION1450 V1 EN
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN
I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
(Equation 78)
345
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Phase-earth short circuit:
U refL1 = U L1
I dirL1 = I L1
(Equation 79)
EQUATION1452 V1 EN
U refL 2 = U L 2
I dirL 2 = I L 2
(Equation 80)
EQUATION1453 V1 EN
U refL 3 = U L 3
I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN
(Equation 81)

restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition
seals in.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.
346
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN
Figure 204:
Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is
available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".
All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse
characteristics".
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the
set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network
switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The
trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
347
Section 7
Current protection
7.2.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
OC4PTOC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
TRIP
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
2NDHARM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
IEC06000187 V2 EN
Figure 205:
7.2.4
OC4PTOC function block

Table 189:
Name
OC4PTOC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
Block of Step1
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
Block of Step2
348
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLKST3
BOOLEAN
Block of Step3
BLKST4
BOOLEAN
Block of Step4
ENMULT1
BOOLEAN
When activated, the current multiplier is in use for

step1
ENMULT2
BOOLEAN

step2
ENMULT3
BOOLEAN

step3
ENMULT4
BOOLEAN

step4
Table 190:
Name
OC4PTOC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TR1
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal from step1
TR2
BOOLEAN
TR3
BOOLEAN
TR4
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
TR1L1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2
BOOLEAN
TR1L3
BOOLEAN
TR2L1
BOOLEAN
TR2L2
BOOLEAN
TR2L3
BOOLEAN
TR3L1
BOOLEAN
TR3L2
BOOLEAN
TR3L3
BOOLEAN
TR4L1
BOOLEAN
TR4L2
BOOLEAN
TR4L3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
General start signal
ST1
BOOLEAN
Common start signal from step1
ST2
BOOLEAN
ST3
BOOLEAN
ST4
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
349
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
7.2.5
Table 191:
Name
Type
Description
STL3
BOOLEAN
ST1L1
BOOLEAN
Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2
BOOLEAN
ST1L3
BOOLEAN
ST2L1
BOOLEAN
ST2L2
BOOLEAN
ST2L3
BOOLEAN
ST3L1
BOOLEAN
ST3L2
BOOLEAN
ST3L3
BOOLEAN
ST4L1
BOOLEAN
ST4L2
BOOLEAN
ST4L3
BOOLEAN
2NDHARM
BOOLEAN
Block from second harmonic detection
DIRL1
INTEGER
Direction for phase1
DIRL2
INTEGER
DIRL3
INTEGER
Setting parameters
OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
AngleRCA
40 - 65
Deg
55
Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA
40 - 89
Deg
80
Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of

3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
DirMode1
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,

forward, reverse)
350
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time delay curve type for

step 1
I1>
1 - 2500
%IB
1000
Phase current operate level for step1 in

% of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Definitive time delay of step 1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
Time multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 1
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100
Minimum operate current for step1 in %

of IBase
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate time for inverse curves

for step 1
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for current operate level for

step 1
DirMode2
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time

step 2
I2>
1 - 2500
%IB
500

% of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
351
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Step
Default
k2
0.05 - 999.00
Unit
-
0.01
0.05
Description
for step 2
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50

of IBase
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

for step 2
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

step 2
DirMode3
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time

step 3
I3>
1 - 2500
%IB
250

% of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 3
IMin3
1 - 10000
%IB
33

of IBase
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

for step 3
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

step 3
DirMode4
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
352
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time

step 4
I4>
1 - 2500
%IB
175

% of IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 4
IMin4
1 - 10000
%IB
17

of IBase
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

for step 4
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

step 4
Table 192:
OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMinOpPhSel
1 - 100
%IB
Minimum current for phase selection in

% of IBase
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
%IB
20
Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in

% of Fundamental
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for step 1
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite

Time curve step 1
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for customer

programmable curve for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for customer

353
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for customer

tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for customer

HarmRestrain1
Off
On
Off
Enable block of step 1 from harmonic

restrain
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

Time curve step 2
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

HarmRestrain2
Off
On
Off

restrain
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

Time curve step 3
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

HarmRestrain3
Off
On
Off
Enable block of step3 from harmonic

restrain
354
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020

Time curve step 4
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

HarmRestrain4
Off
On
Off

restrain
Table 193:
OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)
Name
MeasType
7.2.6
Values (Range)
DFT
RMS
Unit
Step
Default
DFT
Description
Selection between DFT and RMS
measurement
Technical data
Table 194:
OC4PTOC technical data
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Min. operating current
(1-100)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
(-70.0 -50.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Maximum forward angle
(40.070.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Minimum forward angle
(75.090.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
2nd harmonic blocking
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
355
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
7.3
Setting range
Accuracy
Inverse characteristics, see

table 722, table 723 and table
724
19 curve types
See table 722, table 723 and

table 724
Operate time, start function
Reset time, start function
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC
Instantaneous residual overcurrent
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EFPIOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50N
IN>>
IEF V1 EN
7.3.1
Introduction
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line
at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC can be configured to measure the residual
current from the three-phase current inputs or the current from a separate current
input. EFPIOC can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
7.3.2
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current,
as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This
current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC).
In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of
the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a
signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate
the output signal TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
356
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be
activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
7.3.3
Function block
EFPIOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN
TRIP
IEC06000269 V2 EN
Figure 206:
7.3.4
EFPIOC function block

Table 195:
EFPIOC Input signals
Name
Type
Three phase currents
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKAR
BOOLEAN
Block input for auto reclose
MULTEN
BOOLEAN
Enable current multiplier
EFPIOC Output signals
Name
Type
TRIP
Table 197:
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 196:
7.3.5
Default
I3P
Description
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
Setting parameters
EFPIOC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
IN>>
1 - 2500
%IB
200
Operate residual current level in % of

IBase
Table 198:
EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)
Name
StValMult
Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0
Unit
-
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Description
Multiplier for operate current level
357
Section 7
Current protection
7.3.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 199:
EFPIOC technical data
Function
7.4
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
Reset time
Operate time
Reset time
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC

Four step residual overcurrent
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EF4PTOC
51N/67N
IN
4
4
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
alt
TEF-REVA V1 EN
7.4.1
Introduction
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.
The directional function includes 3 options
voltage polarized
current polarized
dual polarized
EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
358
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.

EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding
communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current
reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available as well.
EF4PTOC can be configured to measure the residual current from the three-phase
current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
7.4.2
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity.
I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
7.4.2.1
Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:
1.
directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for
example, connected to:
2.
parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases

(Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point
of a star connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star
points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
359
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

(Equation 82)
EQUATION1874 V2 EN
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The
phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this
step and a common START signal.
7.4.2.2
Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the
direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use the residual voltage
-3U0 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage can be:
1.
2.
directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in

EF4PTOC function input U3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then
connected to open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC analog
function input U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate -3U0 from the
UPol = -3U 0 = -(UL1 + UL2 + UL3)

EQUATION1875 V2 EN
(Equation 83)
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
360
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor
of the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This
phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter UpolMin.
It shall be noted that 3U0 is used to determine the location of the earth fault. This
insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the earth-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use the residual current (3I0)
as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1.
directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then
typically connected to one single current transformer located between power
system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
2.
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT

input can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in
all three phases (Holm-Green connection)
calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN
(Equation 84)
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus

the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is
derived. This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence
source Impedance in order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in
accordance with the following formula:
UIPol = Z 0s IPol = (RNPol + j XNPol) IPol
EQUATION1877 V2 EN
(Equation 85)
361
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the
voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol = UUPol + UIPol = -3U 0 + Z 0 s IPol = -3U 0 + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) IPol
EQUATION1878 V3 EN
(Equation 86)
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with
the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault
(Forward/Reverse).
7.4.2.3
External polarizing for earth-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the
following functions if available in the IED:
1.
2.
7.4.2.4
Distance protection directional function.

Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.
Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for every earth-fault
function. Base current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the
protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as
rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.
7.4.2.5
Internal earth-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Four residual overcurrent steps.

Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in
blocking during switching of parallel transformers.
Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.
362
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
7.4.2.6
Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:
Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
directional supervision element.
Residual current start value.
Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to
section "Inverse characteristics".
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For
the complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "Inverse time
characteristics".
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual
current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value
1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 207.
363
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLKTR
IMinx
Characteristx=DefTime
a>b
tx
|IOP|
AND
TRINx
OR
a>b
INxMult
STINx
AND
T
F
INx>
AND
Inverse
tMin
BLKSTx
BLOCK
Characteristx=Inverse
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrainx=Off
DirModex=Off
OR
STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
IEC10000008 V1 EN
Figure 207:
Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x =

step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.
7.4.2.7
Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent
steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
directional supervision element and the integrated directional
comparison function.
The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
Iop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
1.
2.
3.
When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 208, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.
364
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Operating area
STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse

release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV
40% of
IN>DIR
RCA +85 deg
RCA
65
Upol = -3U 0
-RCA +85 deg
RCA -85 deg
Characteristic for forward

release of measuring steps
IN>DIR
STFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW
IEC11000243-1-en.ai
IEC11000243 V1 EN
Figure 208:
Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is

bigger than 40% of IN>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will

set EF4PTOC function output binary signals:
1.
2.
STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is

bigger than setting parameterIN>Dir and directional supervision element
detects fault in forward direction.
STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is
bigger than 60% of setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision
element detects fault in reverse direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
365
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 209:
|Iop|
a
b
0.6
a>b
REVERSE_Int
X
a
IN>Dir
0.4
STRV
AND
a>b
FORWARD_Int
STFW
AND
FWD
polMethod=Voltage
OR
polMethod=Dual
UPolMin
UPol
polMethod=Current
OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol
T
0.0 F
IPolMin
Iop
UTotPol
T
F
Complex
Number
RVS
UIPol
0.0
T
F
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
BLOCK
IEC07000067 V4 EN
Figure 209:
7.4.2.8
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step
Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step residual overcurrent protection function
EF4PTOC can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to
the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the pre-set
level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four residual
overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting
HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF4PTOC
function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking
can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature
366
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers

in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush
current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is
switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will
cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called
transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two
transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will
thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will
however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the
parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first
transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current component initially.
After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd
harmonic blocking will reset. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal will be latched as long as the residual current measured by
the relay is larger than a selected step current level.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic sealin feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are
simultaneously fulfilled:
1.
2.
3.
Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible
to select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or
IN3> or IN4>).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value
defined by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 210.
367
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK
Extract second
harmonic current
component
IOP
2ndHarmStab
2NDHARMD
OR
a>b
Extract
fundamental
current component
q-1
t=70ms
t
OR
AN
D
OR
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
UseStartValue
a>b
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
en07000068-2.vsd
IEC07000068 V2 EN
Figure 210:
7.4.2.9
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature
Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault
logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate
either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there
is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing
sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations.
The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation
is defined by the setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse.
The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position
open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a
residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give
a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200
ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The UnderTime logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF
368
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint
feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can
occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is
activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker
close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set
delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance
protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The UnderTime logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
SOTF
Open
tPulse
Closed
ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND
STIN2
AND
StepForSOTF
STIN3
OperationMode
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME
TRIP
UnderTime
tUnderTime
2nd Harmonic
HarmResSOFT
AND
SOTF or
UnderTime
OR
Open
OR
Close
tPulse
Close command
ActUnderTime
AND
STIN4
IEC06000643 V2 EN
Figure 211:
Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC
function is shown in figure 212:
369
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element
INPol
Direction
Element
3U0
4 step over current

element
One element for each
step
operatingCurrent
earthFaultDirection
3I0
TRIP
angleValid
DirMode
enableDir
3I0
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
start step 2, 3 and

4
Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
Mode
Selection
DirMode
enableDir
TRIP
CB
pos
or cmd
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en06000376.vsd
IEC06000376 V1 EN
Figure 212:
7.4.3
Functional overview of EF4PTOC
Function block
EF4PTOC
I3P*
U3P*
I3PPOL*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
CBPOS
CLOSECB
OPENCB
TRIP
TRIN1
TRIN2
TRIN3
TRIN4
TRSOTF
START
STIN1
STIN2
STIN3
STIN4
STSOTF
STFW
STRV
2NDHARMD
IEC06000424 V2 EN
Figure 213:
EF4PTOC function block
370
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.4.4

Table 200:
Name
EF4PTOC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three Phase Current Group Connection
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three Phase Voltage Group Connection
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three Phase Polarisation Current
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
BLKST3
BOOLEAN
BLKST4
BOOLEAN
ENMULT1
BOOLEAN

step1
ENMULT2
BOOLEAN

step2
ENMULT3
BOOLEAN

step3
ENMULT4
BOOLEAN

step4
CBPOS
BOOLEAN
Breaker position
CLOSECB
BOOLEAN
Breaker close command
OPENCB
BOOLEAN
Breaker open command
Table 201:
Name
EF4PTOC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRIN1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2
BOOLEAN
TRIN3
BOOLEAN
TRIN4
BOOLEAN
TRSOTF
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START
BOOLEAN
STIN1
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 1
STIN2
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 2
STIN3
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 3
STIN4
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 4
STSOTF
BOOLEAN
Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault

function
371
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
7.4.5
Table 202:
Name
Type
Description
STFW
BOOLEAN
Forward directional start signal
STRV
BOOLEAN
Reverse directional start signal
2NDHARMD
BOOLEAN
2nd harmonic block signal
Setting parameters
EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base value for current settings
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400
Base value for voltage settings
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
polMethod
Voltage
Current
Dual
Voltage
Type of polarization
UPolMin
1 - 100
%UB
Minimum voltage level for polarization in

% of UBase
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
Minimum current level for polarization in

% of IBase
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
5.00
Real part of source Z to be used for

current polarisation
XNPol
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
40.00
Imaginary part of source Z to be used for

current polarisation
IN>Dir
1 - 100
%IB
10
Residual current level for Direction

release in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
Second harmonic restrain operation in %

of IN amplitude
BlkParTransf
Off
On
Off
Enable blocking at parallel transformers
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
IN4>
Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,

2, 3 or 4)
SOTF
Off
SOTF
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
Off
SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/

Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
ActivationSOTF
Open
Closed
CloseCommand
Open
Select signal that shall activate SOTF
StepForSOTF
Step 2
Step 3
Step 2
Selection of step used for SOTF
HarmResSOTF
Off
On
Off
Enable harmonic restrain function in

SOTF
tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay for SOTF
t4U
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Switch-onto-fault active time

372
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ActUnderTime
CB position
CB command
CB position
Select signal to activate under time (CB

Pos/CBCommand)
tUnderTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay for under time
DirMode1
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Time delay curve type for step 1
IN1>
1 - 2500
%IB
100
Operate residual current level for step 1

in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Independent (defenite) time delay of step

1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
Time multiplier for the dependent time

delay for step 1
IMin1
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
100.00
Minimum current for step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

for step 1
IN1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for scaling the current setting

value for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Reset curve type for step 1
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Reset time delay for step 1
HarmRestrain1
Off
On
On

restrain
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

373
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

DirMode2
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
IN2>
1 - 2500
%IB
50

in % of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Independent (definitive) time delay of

step 2
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

delay for step 2
IMin2
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
50
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

step 2
IN2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
HarmRestrain2
Off
On
On

restrain
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

374
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

DirMode3
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
IN3>
1 - 2500
%IB
33

in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
Independent time delay of step 3
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

delay for step 3
IMin3
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
33
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

for step 3
IN3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for step 3
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
HarmRestrain3
Off
On
On

restrain
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

programmable curve step 3
375
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

DirMode4
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
IN4>
1 - 2500
%IB
17

in % of IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200

step 4
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

delay for step 4
IMin4
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate time in inverse curves

step 4
IN4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for step 4
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
HarmRestrain4
Off
On
On

restrain
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 4
376
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

7.4.6
Technical data
Table 203:
EF4PTOC technical data
Function
7.5
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate current for directional

comparison
(1100)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

table 722, table 723 and table 724
18 curve types

table 724
Second harmonic restrain

operation
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of Ir
Relay characteristic angle
(-180 to 180) degrees
2.0 degrees
Minimum polarizing voltage
(1100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current
(1-30)% of IBase
0.25% of Ir
Real part of source Z used for

current polarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
Imaginary part of source Z used

for current polarization
(0.503000.00) W/phase
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
377
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Four step negative sequence
overcurrent protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

device number
NS4PTOC
46I2
I2
4
4
alt
IEC10000053 V1 EN
7.5.1
Introduction
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized or dual polarized.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase
short circuits, phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding
communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same
logic as for directional zero sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weakend infeed functionality are available.
7.5.2
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity.
I3PPOL, input used for Polarizing Quantity.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
7.5.2.1
Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always
uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative
378
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
sequence current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The
pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the preprocessing block by using the following formula:
I op = I 2 =
1
3
IL1 + a IL 2 + a IL3
2
)
(Equation 87)
EQUATION2266 V1 EN
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg
a2
similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg
The negative sequence current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus,

the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence
current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection
to compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3>
or I4>). If the negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and
the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step
is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4)
for this step and a common START signal.
7.5.2.2
Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function can be set
to use voltage polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected, NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage
-U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage
input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -U2 from the first three
inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
UPol = -U 2 = EQUATION2267 V1 EN
1
(UL1 + a UL 2 + a 2 UL3)
3
(Equation 88)
379
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
The negative sequence voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus,

the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence
voltage is derived. This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating
current, in order to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To
enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting UpolMin.
Note that U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the
required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected, the function uses the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol = UUPol + UIPol = -U 2 + ZPol IPol = -U 2 + ( RPol + jXPol ) IPol
IECEQUATION2315 V1 EN
(Equation 89)
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol is used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/
Reverse).
7.5.2.3
External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions
if available in the IED:
7.5.2.4
Distance protection directional function

Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function
Base quantities within the function

The base quantities must be entered as setting parameters for every function. Base
current (IBase) must be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. In line protections the primary rated current of the CT is chosen.
380
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Base voltage UBase must be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the

protected object in primary kV. In line protections the primary rated voltage of the
VT is chosen.
7.5.2.5
Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
7.5.2.6
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as
measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:
Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself.
The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision
Element described in the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative
sequence overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse
characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves,
refer to Chapter "Inverse time characteristics"
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse time
characteristics"
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by
external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase
negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input
ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in
the following figure:
381
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP|
ENMULTx
IxMult
tx
AND
TRx
OR
a>b
STx
AND
T
F
Ix>
Inverse
BLKSTx
BLOCK
Characteristx=Inverse
OR
DirModex=Off
STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
IEC09000683 V1 EN
Figure 214:
Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.
7.5.2.7
Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must
be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional
supervision element and the integrated directional comparison
function.
NS4PTOC has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current Iop
is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the setting polMethod. The
polarizing quantity can be selected by NS4PTOC in one of the following two ways:
When polMethod=Voltage, UVPol is used as polarizing quantity

When polMethod=Dual, UTotPol is used as polarizing quantity
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 208, to determine the direction of the fault.
382
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Reverse
Area
Upol=-U2
AngleRCA
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
IEC10000031 V1 EN
Figure 215:
Operating characteristic for fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as IOp is bigger than

40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC output binary signals:
1.
2.
STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward

area, see fig 208 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 208. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
I>Dir)
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
383
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 209:
|Iop|
0.6
a a>
b b
REVERSE_Int
X
a a>
b b
I>Dir
0.4
STRV
AND
FORWARD_Int
STFW
AND
polMethod=Voltage
OR
polMethod=Dual
UPolMin
UPol
T
0.0 F
IPolMin
Iop
UTotPol
IPol
RVS
RNPol
XNPol
BLOCK
Complex
Number
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
D i r e c ti o n a l
t
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
FWD
AngleRCA
UIPol
0.0
T
F
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
IEC07000067-4 V1 EN
Figure 216:
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step
384
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.5.3
Function block
NS4PTOC
I3P*
U3P*
I3PPOL*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKST3
BLKST4
ENMULT1
ENMULT2
ENMULT3
ENMULT4
TRIP
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STFW
STRV
IEC10000054 V1 EN
Figure 217:
7.5.4
NS4PTOC function block

Table 204:
Name
NS4PTOC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Negative Sequence 3 phase current
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Negative Sequence 3 phase voltage
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
Negative Sequence 3 phase polarisation current
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
BLKST3
BOOLEAN
BLKST4
BOOLEAN
ENMULT1
BOOLEAN

step1
ENMULT2
BOOLEAN

step2
ENMULT3
BOOLEAN

step3
ENMULT4
BOOLEAN

step4
385
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 205:
NS4PTOC Output signals
Name
7.5.5
Table 206:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TR1
BOOLEAN
TR2
BOOLEAN
TR3
BOOLEAN
TR4
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
ST1
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 1
ST2
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 2
ST3
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 3
ST4
BOOLEAN
Start signal step 4
STFW
BOOLEAN
Forward directional start signal
STRV
BOOLEAN
Reverse directional start signal
Setting parameters
NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base value for current settings
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400
Base value for voltage settings
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
polMethod
Voltage
Dual
Voltage
Type of polarization
UPolMin
1 - 100
%UB
Minimum voltage level for polarization in

% of UBase
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
Minimum current level for polarization in

% of IBase
RPol
0.50 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
5.00
Real part of neg. seq. source imp. to be

used for current polarisation
XPol
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
40.00
Imaginary part of neg. seq. source imp.

to be used for current polarisation
I>Dir
1 - 100
%IB
10
Neg. seq. curr. I2 level for Direction

release in % of IBase
DirMode1
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
386
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
I1>
1 - 2500
%IB
100
Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 1

in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Independent (defenite) time delay of step

1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

delay for step 1
IMin1
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
100.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

for step 1
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

DirMode2
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
387
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
I2>
1 - 2500
%IB
50

in % of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

step 2
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

delay for step 2
IMin2
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
50
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

step 2
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

DirMode3
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
388
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
I3>
1 - 2500
%IB
33

in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
Independent time delay of step 3
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

delay for step 3
IMin3
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
33
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

for step 3
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for step 3
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

DirMode4
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

forward, reverse)
389
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
I4>
1 - 2500
%IB
17

in % of IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200

step 4
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

delay for step 4
IMin4
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate time in inverse curves

step 4
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for step 4
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

390
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.5.6
Technical data
Table 207:
NS4PTOC technical data
Function
7.6
Accuracy
Operate value, negative

sequence current, step 1-4
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

table 722, table 723 and table 724
18 curve types

table 724
Minimum operate current for

step 1 - 4
(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I < Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate value, negative current

for directional release
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
2.0 degrees
Minimum polarizing voltage
(1100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current
(2-100)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
Real part of negative sequence

source impedance used for
current polarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
Imaginary part of negative

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
(0.503000.00) W/phase
25 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset
25 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset
Critical impulse time, start

function
Impulse margin time, start

function
15 ms typically
Transient overreach
<10% at = 100 ms
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE
Sensitive directional residual over
current and power protection
7.6.1
Range or value
IEC 61850
identification
SDEPSDE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
67N
Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth391
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toearth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle.
Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0
and cos .
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phaseto-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the
residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the
residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a
characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.
A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional
sensitive back-up protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always
has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic
angle is chosen to -90 in such a network.
In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor,
the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the earth-fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is
chosen to 0.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the
selectivity of the earth-fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider
the following facts:
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed
networks, with large capacitive earth-fault current
In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used, for
example, in low impedance earthed system. Such a resistor will give a resistive
earth-fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase-toearth fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives
better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.
392
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.6.2
7.6.2.1
Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from preprocessor blocks.
The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) ).
Uref = -3U0 ejRCADIr. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance
earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is
appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0cos
gets larger than the set value.
RCADir = 0 , ROADir = 0
3I0
= ang(3I0 ) ang(3Uref )
3I0 cos
3U0 = Uref
IEC06000648 V3 EN
Figure 218:
RCADir set to 0
393
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Uref
RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang (3I0 ) ang (Uref )
3U0
IEC06000649 V3 EN
Figure 219:
RCADir set to -90
For trip, both the residual current 3I0cos and the release voltage 3U0, must be
larger than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time
delay.
There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is
larger than a set value as shown in figure 220. This is equivalent to blocking of the
function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.
394
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RCADir = 0o
3I0
Operate area
j
3I0 cos j
-3U0 = Uref
ROADir
IEC06000650 V2 EN
Figure 220:
Characteristic with ROADir restriction
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer
angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure 221:
395
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RCADir = 0
Operate area
-3U0 =Uref
Instrument
transformer
angle error
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim)
3I0 (to prot)
en06000651.vsd
IEC06000651 V2 EN
Figure 221:
Explanation of RCAComp
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Uref) ).
Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger than
the set value.
For trip, both the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time
delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0cos ( + 180) the set value.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.
396
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The inverse time delay is defined as:

t inv =
kSN (3I0 3U 0 cos j(reference))

3I0 3U 0 cos j(measured)
(Equation 90)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the
angle = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCADir = 0
ROADir = 80
Operate area
3I0
80
-3U0
en06000652.vsd
IEC06000652 V2 EN
Figure 222:
Example of characteristic
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger
than the set levels INDir> and UNREL> and the angle shall be in the set sector
ROADir and RCADir.
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir
This variant shall have definite time delay.
397
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in
the forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the
directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the
reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is
set to operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will
give the start signal STFW.
Non-directional earth fault current protection
This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle.
The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.
If available the non-directional function is using the calculated residual current,
derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect crosscountry faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for
the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.
This variant shall have the possibility of choice between definite time delay and
inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set levels (INNonDir>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the
binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection
The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher
than a set level.
There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this set
voltage level.
For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels (UN>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.
When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 223.
398
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STNDIN
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TRUN
STUN
UN>
OpMODE=3I0cosfi
IN>
&
INcosPhi>
OpMODE=3I03U0cosfi
&
STARTDIRIN
&
INUNcosPhi>
SN
Phi in RCA +- ROA
&
TRDIRIN
TimeChar = InvTime
&
OpMODE=3I0 and fi
TimeChar = DefTime
DirMode = Forward
&
&
1
STFW
Forward
DirMode = Reverse
&
STRV
Reverse
en06000653.vsd
IEC06000653 V2 EN
Figure 223:
Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth-fault current protection
7.6.3
Function block
SDEPSDE
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKTRDIR
BLKNDN
BLKUN
TRIP
TRDIRIN
TRNDIN
TRUN
START
STDIRIN
STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL
IEC07000032 V2 EN
Figure 224:
SDEPSDE function block
399
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 208:
Name
SDEPSDE Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for current
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Blocks the operate outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR
BOOLEAN
Blocks the directional operate outputs of the

function
BLKNDN
BOOLEAN
Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN
BOOLEAN
Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 209:
Name
SDEPSDE Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip of the function
TRDIRIN
BOOLEAN
Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN
BOOLEAN
Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN
BOOLEAN
Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START
BOOLEAN
General start of the function
STDIRIN
BOOLEAN
Start of the directional residual over current

function
STNDIN
BOOLEAN
Start of non directional residual over current
STUN
BOOLEAN
Start of non directional residual over voltage
STFW
BOOLEAN
Start of directional function for a fault in forward

direction
STRV
BOOLEAN
Start of directional function for a fault in reverse

direction
STDIR
INTEGER
Direction of fault. A general signal common to all

three mode of residual over current protection
UNREL
BOOLEAN
Residual voltage release of operation of all

directional modes
400
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.6.5
Table 210:
Setting parameters
SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
OpMode
3I0Cosfi
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
3I0Cosfi
Selection of operation mode for protection
DirMode
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of operation forward or reverse
RCADir
-179 - 180
Deg
-90
Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp
-10.0 - 10.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir
0 - 90
Deg
90
Relay open angle ROA used as release

in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi>
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res

over current, in %Ib
SN>
0.25 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv

time count, in %Sb
INDir>
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
5.00
Set level for directional residual over

current prot, in %Ib
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Definite time delay directional residual

overcurrent, in sec
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
Reference value of res power for inverse

time count, in %Sb
kSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
Time multiplier setting for directional

residual power mode
OpINNonDir>
Off
On
Off
Operation of non-directional residual

overcurrent protection
INNonDir>
1.00 - 400.00
%IB
0.01
10.00
Set level for non directional residual over

current, in %Ib
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay for non-directional residual

over current, in sec
TimeChar
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Norm. inv.
Operation curve selection for IDMT

operation
401
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT

curves, in sec
kIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
IDMT time mult for non-dir res over

current protection
OpUN>
Off
On
Off
Operation of non-directional residual

overvoltage protection
UN>
1.00 - 200.00
%UB
0.01
20.00
Set level for non-directional residual over

voltage, in %Ub
tUN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for non-directional residual

over voltage, in sec
INRel>
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
Residual release current for all

directional modes, in %Ib
UNRel>
0.01 - 200.00
%UB
0.01
3.00
Residual release voltage for all direction

modes, in %Ub
Step
Default
Table 211:
Name
Step
Default
Description
SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Time delay used for reset of definite

timers, in sec
tPCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Setting P for customer programmable

curve
tACrv
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Setting A for customer programmable

curve
tBCrv
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Setting B for customer programmable

curve
tCCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting C for customer programmable

curve
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
IEC Reset
Reset mode when current drops off.
tPRCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Setting PR for customer programmable

curve
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Setting TR for customer programmable

curve
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting CR for customer programmable

curve
Table 212:
Name
Description
SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
100
Base Current, in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
63.50
Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral
SBase
0.05 200000000.00
kVA
0.05
6350.00
Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase
402
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 213:
SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)
Name
RotResU
7.6.6
Values (Range)
0 deg
180 deg
Unit
Step
Default
Description
180 deg
Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if

necessary
Technical data
Table 214:
SDEPSDE technical data
Function
Operate level for 3I0cosj
directional residual overcurrent
Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj

directional residual power
Operate level for 3I0 and j

residual overcurrent
Operate level for non-directional

overcurrent
Range or value
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of SBase
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
(1.00-400.00)% of lBase
At low setting:
(10-50) mA
Accuracy
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
0.5 mA
1.0 mA
1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
10% of set value
1.0% of Ir at Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
0.5 mA
1.0 mA
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
1.0 mA
Operate level for non-directional

residual overvoltage
(1.00-200.00)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur at UUr
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Residual release current for all

directional modes
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
0.5 mA
1.0 mA
Residual release voltage for all

directional modes
(0.01-200.00)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur at UUr
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

table 722, table 723 and table
724
19 curve types

table 724
Relay characteristic angle RCA
2.0 degrees
Relay open angle ROA
(0-90) degrees
2.0 degrees
Operate time, non-directional

residual over current
Reset time, non-directional

residual over current
403
Section 7
Current protection
7.7
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Thermal overload protection, one time constant

LPTTR
Thermal overload protection, one time
constant
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
LPTTR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
26
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
7.7.1
Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need of a thermal overload protection also for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory.
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.
7.7.2
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal
overload protection, one time constant function LPTTR.
From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated
according to the expression:
Q final
I
=
I ref
Tref
EQUATION1167 V1 EN
(Equation 91)
where:
I
is the largest phase current,
Iref
is a given reference current and
Tref
is steady state temperature corresponding to Iref
404
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START
output signal is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
Dt
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
EQUATION1168 V1 EN
(Equation 92)
where:
Qn
is the calculated present temperature,
Qn-1
is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,
Qfinal
is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,
Dt
is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and
is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)
The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal,
TEMP.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:
Q
- Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
EQUATION1169 V1 EN
(Equation 93)
The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated that is, a calculation of the cooling time to
a set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
405
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
(Equation 94)
EQUATION1170 V1 EN
Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The
calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables.
By setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual
current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the
input ENMULT must be activated.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
START
Final Temp
> TripTemp
actual temperature
Calculation
of actual
temperature
IL1, IL2, IL3
Calculation
of final
temperature
Actual Temp >
AlarmTemp
ALARM
TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
Lockout
logic
LOCKOUT
Actual Temp
< Recl Temp
Calculation
of time to
trip
Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout
TTRIP
TENRECL
IEC09000637 V1 EN
Figure 225:
Functional overview of LPTTR
406
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.7.3
Function block
LPTTR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
ENMULT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET
TRIP
START
ALARM
LOCKOUT
IEC04000396 V3 EN
Figure 226:
7.7.4
LPTTR function block

Table 215:
LPTTR Input signals
Name
Type
Table 217:
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
ENMULT
BOOLEAN
Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or

more lines
AMBTEMP
REAL
Ambient temperature from external temperature

sensor
SENSFLT
BOOLEAN
Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 216:
LPTTR Output signals
Name
7.7.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
START
BOOLEAN
Start Signal
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Lockout signal
Setting parameters
LPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
0 - 99999
3000
Base current in A
TRef
0 - 600
Deg
90
End temperature rise above ambient of

the line when loaded with IRef
407
Section 7
Current protection
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IRef
0 - 400
%IB
100
The load current (in %of IBase) leading

to TRef temperature
IMult
1-5
Current multiplier when function is used

for two or more lines
Tau
0 - 1000
Min
45
Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp
0 - 200
Deg
80
Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp
0 - 600
Deg
90
Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp
0 - 600
Deg
75
Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse
0.05 - 0.30
0.01
0.1
Operate pulse length. Minimum one

execution cycle
AmbiSens
Off
On
Off
External temperature sensor availiable
DefaultAmbTemp
-50 - 250
Deg
20
Ambient temperature used when

AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp
-50 - 600
Deg
50
Temperature raise above ambient

temperature at startup
7.7.6
Technical data
Table 218:
LPTTR technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reference current
(0-400)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
Reference temperature
(0-400)C
1.0C
Operate time:
Time constant t = (01000)

minutes
IEC 60255-8, class 5 + 200 ms
Alarm temperature
(0-200)C
2.0% of heat content trip
Trip temperature
(0-400)C
Reset level temperature
(0-400)C
I 2 - I p2
t = t ln 2
I - Ib 2
EQUATION1356 V1 EN
(Equation 95)
I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Ib = base current, IBase
7.8
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF
408
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Breaker failure protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CCRBRF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50BF
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
7.8.1
Introduction
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current based,
contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against unnecessary operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria
can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip
command.
CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of
the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an
incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.
7.8.2
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set
time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used.
The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line
protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With
the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit
breaker is larger than the operate current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS
evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication.
The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening,
that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
409
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its
time a back-up trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed
breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out
of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or
high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/
or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and
for multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if
the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
START
STL1
30 ms
OR
BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND
S
R
BLOCK
Reset L1
SR
AND
Time out L1
OR
Retrip Time Out L1

BackupTrip L1
OR
IEC09000976 V1 EN
Figure 227:
Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic
410
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IP>
a
b
FunctionMode
a>b
Current
OR
AND
Reset L1
OR
Contact
Time out L1
OR
Current and Contact
IL1
AND
Current High L1
CB Closed L1
AND
OR
BFP Started L1
a
I>BlkCont
AND
a>b
AND
OR
AND
CBCLDL1
Contact Closed L1
AND
IEC09000977 V1 EN
Figure 228:
BFP Started L1
RetripMode
Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation
t1
t
From other
phases
Retrip Time Out L1

AND
No CBPos Check
1
CBFLT
OR
CB Pos Check
CB Closed L1
TRRETL3
TRRETL2
OR
tPulse
OR
TRRET
TRRETL1
OR
AND
AND
IEC09000978 V1 EN
Figure 229:
Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function
411
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IN
IN>
BUTripMode
1
From other
phases
a>b
AND
Contact Closed L1
2 out of 4
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Current High L2
Current High L3
OR
OR
Current High L1
CBFLT
AND
AND
t2
BFP Started L1
t2MPh
AND
OR
From other
phases
BFP Started L2
AND
OR
AND
Backup Trip L1
OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2

phases Backup Trip L3
OR
2 of 3
OR
TRBU
tPulse
BFP Started L3
t3
S
AND
SR
OR
TRBU2
IEC09000979 V1 EN
Figure 230:
Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function
Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.
7.8.3
Function block
CCRBRF
I3P*
BLOCK
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
CBCLDL1
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT
TRBU
TRBU2
TRRET
TRRETL1
TRRETL2
TRRETL3
CBALARM
IEC06000188 V2 EN
Figure 231:
CCRBRF function block
412
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.8.4

Table 219:
CCRBRF Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase group signal for current inputs
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
START
BOOLEAN
Three phase start of breaker failure protection

function
STL1
BOOLEAN
Start signal of phase L1
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
CBCLDL1
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2
BOOLEAN
CBCLDL3
BOOLEAN
CBFLT
BOOLEAN
CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip

instantaneously
CCRBRF Output signals
Name
Table 221:
Description
I3P
Table 220:
7.8.5
Default
Type
Description
TRBU
BOOLEAN
Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2
BOOLEAN
Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection

function
TRRET
BOOLEAN
Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1
BOOLEAN

phase L1
TRRETL2
BOOLEAN

phase L2
TRRETL3
BOOLEAN

phase L3
CBALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
Setting parameters
CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
Detection principle for back-up trip
413
Section 7
Current protection
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Back-up trip mode
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Operation mode of re-trip logic
IP>
5 - 200
%IB
10
Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IN>
2 - 200
%IB
10
Operate residual current level in % of

IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of re-trip
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase

start
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Trip pulse duration
Table 222:
Name
CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
I>BlkCont
5 - 200
%IB
20
Current for blocking of CB contact

operation in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
Additional time delay to t2 for a second

back-up trip
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay for CB faulty signal
7.8.6
Technical data
Table 223:
CCRBRF technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate phase
current
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, phase

current
> 95%
Operate residual
current
(2-200)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual

current
> 95%
Phase current level

for blocking of
contact function
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time for

current detection
10 ms typically
Reset time for

current detection
15 ms maximum
414
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.9
Stub protection STBPTOC

Stub protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
STBPTOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50STB
3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN
7.9.1
Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line
disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will
mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection
will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone between the current transformers
and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is
released from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
7.9.2
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current
the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed
to a comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the
RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the function I>.
If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the
comparator for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the
release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the
TRIP signal. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output
signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.
415
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION
BLOCK
TRIP
AND
STIL1
OR
STIL2
STIL3
RELEASE
en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN
Figure 232:
7.9.3
Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection
Function block
STBPTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
RELEASE
TRIP
START
IEC05000678 V2 EN
Figure 233:
7.9.4
STBPTOC function block

Table 224:
Name
STBPTOC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
RELEASE
BOOLEAN
Release of stub protection
Table 225:
Name
STBPTOC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
START
BOOLEAN
General start
416
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.9.5
Table 226:
Setting parameters
STBPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
ReleaseMode
Release
Continuous
Release
Release of stub protection
I>
1 - 2500
%IB
200
Operate current level in % of IBase
Table 227:
STBPTOC Group settings (advanced)
Name
t
7.9.6
7.10
Values (Range)
Unit
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
Description
0.000
Time delay
Technical data
Table 228:
STBPTOC technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operating current
(1-2500)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio
> 95%
Definite time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operating time, start

function
Resetting time,
startfunction
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Pole discordance protection CCRPLD

Pole discordance protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CCRPLD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
417
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
persists the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.
The Polediscordance protection function CCRPLD operates based on information
from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional
criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.
7.10.2
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 234.
circuit breaker
Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd
IEC05000287 V2 EN
Figure 234:
Pole discordance external detection logic
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 235.
418
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.
poleThreeClosed from C.B.
+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.
poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN
Figure 235:
Pole discordance signals for internal logic
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.
Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current
measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the
setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer
(tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP
signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be
set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open
or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences
with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCRPLD is shown in figure 236.
419
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL
Discordance
detection
AND
t
t
150 ms
TRIP
OR
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD
t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN
Figure 236:
Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCRPLD contact and current based
CCRPLDis blocked if:
The IED is in TEST mode and CCRPLD has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single
phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal
1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external
device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this
binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress
from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can
generate a trip signal TRIP:
Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.
420
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.10.2.1
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO
contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for
each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a
150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.
7.10.2.2
Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set
time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker
has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200
ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load
conditions.
The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs
can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from
the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may
be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).
7.10.3
Function block
CCRPLD
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL
TRIP
START
IEC06000275 V2 EN
Figure 237:
CCRPLD function block
421
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 229:
CCRPLD Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKDBYAR
BOOLEAN
Block of function at CB single phase auto reclosing cycle
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
Close order to CB
OPENCMD
BOOLEAN
Open order to CB
EXTPDIND
BOOLEAN
Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN
BOOLEAN
Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL
BOOLEAN
Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN
BOOLEAN
Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL
BOOLEAN
Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN
BOOLEAN
Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL
BOOLEAN
Pole three closed indication from CB
CCRPLD Output signals
Name
Table 231:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 230:
7.10.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal to CB
START
BOOLEAN
Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
Setting parameters
CCRPLD Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay between trip condition and

trip signal
ContSel
Off
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
Off
Contact function selection
CurrSel
Off
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
Off
Current function selection
CurrUnsymLevel
0 - 100
80
Unsym magn of lowest phase current

compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel
0 - 100
%IB
10
Current magnitude for release of the

function in % of IBase
422
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.10.6
Technical data
Table 232:
CCRPLD technical data
Function
7.11
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(0100)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
Time delay
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

Directional underpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
GUPPDUP
IEC 60617
identification
P<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37
SYMBOL-LL V1 EN
7.11.1
Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to
protect the generator itself.
Figure 238 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
423
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Underpower IED
Operate
Line
Overpower IED
Operate
Line
Margin
Margin
Operating point
without
turbine torque
Operating point
without
turbine torque
IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 238:
7.11.2
Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 239. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle
S(angle)
S(angle) <
Power1
TRIP1
START1
S(angle) <
Power2
TRIP2
START2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
IEC09000018 V2 EN
Figure 239:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 233.
424
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 233:
Set value: Mode
L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
(Equation 96)
EQUATION1697 V1 EN
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN
L1L2
(Equation 102)
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN
L3
(Equation 101)
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN
L2
(Equation 100)
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN
L1
(Equation 99)
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN
L3L1
(Equation 98)
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN
L2L3
(Equation 97)
(Equation 103)
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN
(Equation 104)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting
Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At
trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The
absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + droppower1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very
425
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) +
Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will
reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop
out and that the timer of the stage will reset.
7.11.2.1
Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is
possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 105)
EQUATION1959 V1 EN
Where
S
is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
TD
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
7.11.2.2
Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
240.
426
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC05000652 V2 EN
Figure 240:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values
or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in
percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value:
Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.
7.11.3
Function block
GUPPDUP
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
IEC07000027 V2 EN
Figure 241:
GUPPDUP function block
427
Section 7
Current protection
7.11.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 234:
GUPPDUP Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK1
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 2
GUPPDUP Output signals
Name
Table 236:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 235:
7.11.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 2
START
BOOLEAN
Common start
START1
BOOLEAN
Start of stage 1
START2
BOOLEAN
Start of stage 2
REAL
Active Power in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of SBASE
REAL
Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of SBASE
Setting parameters
GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
OpMode1
Off
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
1.0
Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060
Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2
Off
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 2
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
1.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
DropDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060
428
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 237:
GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
0.000 - 0.999
0.001
0.000
Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
pu
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % Sbase
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
pu
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % Sbase
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to calibrate current at

5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ir
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at

5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ur
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Table 238:
GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
Pos Seq
Selection of measured current and

voltage
7.11.6
Technical data
Table 239:
GUPPDUP technical data
Function
Power level
Range or value
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of SBase
(2.0-10)% of SBase
Accuracy
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
< 50% of set value
< 20% of set value
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2 degrees
Timers
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
429
Section 7
Current protection
7.12
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

Directional overpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
GOPPDOP
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
32
P>
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V1 EN
7.12.1
Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to
protect the generator itself.
Figure 242 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
430
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Underpower IED
Operate
Line
Overpower IED
Operate
Line
Margin
Margin
Operating point
without
turbine torque
Operating point
without
turbine torque
IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 242:
7.12.2
Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 243. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle
S(angle)
S(angle) >
Power1
TRIP1
START1
S(angle) >
Power2
TRIP2
START2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
IEC06000567 V2 EN
Figure 243:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 240.
431
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 240:
Set value: Mode
L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
(Equation 106)
EQUATION1697 V1 EN
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
(Equation 107)
EQUATION1698 V1 EN
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
(Equation 108)
EQUATION1699 V1 EN
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
(Equation 109)
EQUATION1700 V1 EN
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
(Equation 110)
EQUATION1701 V1 EN
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN
L2
(Equation 112)
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN
L3
(Equation 111)
(Equation 113)
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN
(Equation 114)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting
Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a
trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of
any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any
of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The
absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) droppower1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low,
normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
432
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2)

Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out
ant that the timer of the stage will reset.
7.12.2.1
Low pass filtering

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 115)
EQUATION1959 V1 EN
Where
S
is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
7.12.2.2

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
244.
433
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC05000652 V2 EN
Figure 244:
Calibration curves
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of
base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.
7.12.3
Function block
GOPPDOP
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
START
START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
IEC07000028 V2 EN
Figure 245:
GOPPDOP function block
434
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.12.4

Table 241:
GOPPDOP Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK1
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 2
GOPPDOP Output signals
Name
Table 243:
Description
I3P
Table 242:
7.12.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 2
START
BOOLEAN
Common start
START1
BOOLEAN
Start of stage 1
START2
BOOLEAN
Start of stage 2
REAL
Active Power in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of SBASE
REAL
Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of SBASE
Setting parameters
GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
OpMode1
Off
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
DropDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060
OpMode2
Off
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 2
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
DropDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
0.060

435
Section 7
Current protection
Table 244:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
0.000 - 0.999
0.001
0.000

measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
pu
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of

Sbase
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
pu
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of

Sbase
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ir
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ur
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Table 245:
Name
GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
Pos Seq

voltage
436
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.12.6
Technical data
Table 246:
GOPPDOP technical data
Function
Range or value
Power level
Accuracy
(0.0500.0)% of Sbase
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of Sbase
(2.0-10)% of Sbase
7.13
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2 degrees
Timers
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

Broken conductor check
7.13.1
< 50% of set value

< 20% of set value
IEC 61850
identification
BRCPTOC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46
Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) function, consisting of continuous current
unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected will give alarm or trip
at detecting broken conductors.
7.13.2
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The currentmeasuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.
The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:
The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the
highest phase current
The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel

lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will
experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first
two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period
longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated.
437
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 246
BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:
The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local
HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal
functions.
The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip
to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START
=1
BLOCK
Function Enable
&
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
t
t
TRIP
STI
IL1<50%IP>
IL2<50%IP>
=1
IL3<50%IP>
IEC09000158 V1 EN
Figure 246:
7.13.3
Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
Function block
BRCPTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
START
IEC07000034 V2 EN
Figure 247:
BRCPTOC function block
438
Section 7
Current protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
7.13.4

Table 247:
BRCPTOC Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Blocks the operate output
BRCPTOC Output signals
Name
Table 249:
Description
I3P
Table 248:
7.13.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Operate signal of the protection logic
START
BOOLEAN
Start signal of the protection logic
Setting parameters
BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
0 - 99999
3000
IBase
Iub>
50 - 90
%IM
50
Unbalance current operation value in

percent of max current
IP>
5 - 100
%IB
20
Minimum phase current for operation of

Iub> in % of Ibase
tOper
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Operate time delay
Table 250:
BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)
Name
tReset
7.13.6
Values (Range)
Unit
0.010 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
Description
0.100
Time delay in reset
Technical data
Table 251:
BRCPTOC technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation
(5100)% of IBase
0.1% of Ir
Unbalance current operation
(0100)% of maximum current
0.1% of Ir
Timer
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
439
440
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 8
Voltage protection
About this chapter

This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions
work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and
technical data are included for each function.
8.1
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

Two step undervoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
UV2PTUV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27
2U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER THAN
V1 EN
8.1.1
Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
8.1.2
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
START signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted
trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking level the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is
generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can
be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
441
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS
value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phaseto-phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:
U < (%) UBase(kV )

3
(Equation 116)
EQUATION1429 V2 EN
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 117)
EQUATION1990 V1 EN
When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.
8.1.2.1
Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phaseto-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters
OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START
outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be
lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:
t=
k
U < -U
U<
EQUATION1431 V1 EN
(Equation 118)
442
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The type B curve is described as:
t=
k 480
U < -U
- 0.5
32
U<
2.0
+ 0.055
EQUATION1432 V1 EN
(Equation 119)
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
kA
+D
t=
p
U < -U

-C
B
U<

EQUATION1433 V1 EN
(Equation 120)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U<
down to U< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< (1.0 CrvSatn/
100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN
(Equation 121)
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The
details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 22.3
"Inverse characteristics".
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite
time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it
should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 248 and figure 249.
443
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tReset1
Voltage
tReset1
START
Hysteresis
Measured
Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
t1
Instantaneous
Reset
Time
Linear Decrease
IEC05000010 V3 EN
Figure 248:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
444
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tReset1
Voltage
START
START
tReset1
Hysteresis
Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time Integrator
Frozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Reset
Linear Decrease
IEC05000011-en-2.vsd
IEC05000011 V2 EN
Figure 249:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure
250. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 251 and figure 252 receptively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
445
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ST1
a
b>a
U1<
tReset1
t1
TR1
AND
OFF
Delay
ON
Delay
IEC09000785 V1 EN
Figure 250:
Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
Un<
START
TRIP
tResetn
tn
IEC10000039 V1 EN
Figure 251:
Example for Definite Time Delay stage rest
446
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Un<
START
TRIP
tResetn
tn
IEC10000040 V1 EN
Figure 252:
8.1.2.3
Example for Definite Time Delay stage operation
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or
completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1:
blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2:
BLKST2:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked.
The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal
blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking.
Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will
get very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the
blocking function, as seen in figure 253. The delay of the blocking function must
be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.
447
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN
Figure 253:
8.1.2.4
Blocking function
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to
the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3
out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 254.
448
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UL1
Comparator
UL1 < U1<
UL2
Comparator
UL2 < U1<
UL3
Comparator
UL3 < U1<
ST1L1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
Phase 1
ST1L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MinVoltSelect
or
Time integrator
t1
tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST1L3
ST1
OR
TR1L1
Step 1
TR1L2
TRIP
TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator
UL1 < U2<
Comparator
UL2 < U2<
Comparator
UL3 < U2<
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
Time integrator
t2
tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
ST2L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MinVoltSelect
or
ST2L1
Phase 1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST2L3
ST2
OR
TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
TRIP
TR2L3
TR2
OR
OR START
OR
TRIP
en05000012.vsd
IEC05000834 V1 EN
Figure 254:
Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
449
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
UV2PTUV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
TRIP
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
IEC06000276 V2 EN
Figure 255:
8.1.4
UV2PTUV function block

Table 252:
Name
UV2PTUV Input signals

Type
Default
Description
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase voltages
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 253:
Name
UV2PTUV Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TR1
BOOLEAN
TR1L1
BOOLEAN
TR1L2
BOOLEAN
TR1L3
BOOLEAN
TR2
BOOLEAN
TR2L1
BOOLEAN
TR2L2
BOOLEAN
TR2L3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
450
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
8.1.5
Table 254:
Type
Description
ST1
BOOLEAN
ST1L1
BOOLEAN
ST1L2
BOOLEAN
ST1L3
BOOLEAN
ST2
BOOLEAN
ST2L1
BOOLEAN
ST2L2
BOOLEAN
ST2L3
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
OperationStep1
Off
On
On
Enable execution of step 1
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time

step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3

3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
U1<
1 - 100
%UB
70
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in

% of UBase, step 1
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

for step 1
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 1
IntBlkSel1
Off
Block of trip
Block all
Off
Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
IntBlkStVal1
1 - 100
%UB
20
Voltage setting for internal blocking in %

of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of internal (low level)

blocking for step 1
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2
Off
On
On
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time

step 2
451
Section 8
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3

U2<
1 - 100
%UB
50

% of UBase, step 2
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

for step 2
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 2
IntBlkSel2
Off
Block of trip
Block all
Off
Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
IntBlkStVal2
1 - 100
%UB
20
Voltage setting for internal blocking in %

of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of internal (low level)

blocking for step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Table 255:
Name
UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.025
Description
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of used IDMT reset curve type

for step 1
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Parameter D for customer

PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Tuning param for prog. under voltage

IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous

for step 2
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
452
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Step
Default
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Tuning param for prog. under voltage

IDMT curve, step 2
Table 256:
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)
Name
ConnType
8.1.6
Values (Range)
PhN DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
Unit
Step
Default
PhN DFT
Description
Group selector for connection type
Technical data
Table 257:
UV2PTUV technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage, low

and high step
(1100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis
(0100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking
level, low and high
step
(1100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Inverse time
characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 726
See table 726
Definite time delays
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate
time, inverse
characteristics
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time, start

function
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset
Reset time, start

function
10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
453
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

Two step overvoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OV2PTOV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59
2U>
SYMBOL-C-2U SMALLER THAN
V1 EN
8.2.1
Introduction
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines etc.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be used to detect open
line ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function
to supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm,
switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV has an extremely high reset ratio to allow settings close to system
service voltage.
8.2.2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or threephase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is
issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3
out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains
above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage
UBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase
fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-tophase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
454
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth
voltage over:
U > (%) UBase( kV )

3
(Equation 122)
EQUATION1434 V1 EN
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 123)
EQUATION1993 V1 EN
When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.
8.2.2.1
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of
3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding START signal.
8.2.2.2
Time delay
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
t=
k
U -U >
U>
IEC09000051 V1 EN
(Equation 124)
455
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
t=
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 125)
The type C curve is described as:

t=
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
3.0
+ 0.035
(Equation 126)
t=
kA
U -U >
-C
B
U>
EQUATION1439 V1 EN
+D
(Equation 127)
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down
to U< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< (1.0 CrvSatn/100). If
the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN
(Equation 128)
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 256. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"
456
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
en05000016.vsd
IEC05000016 V1 EN
Figure 256:
Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite
time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for
the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined
reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area,
the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to
only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable
(HystAbs2) to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It should be noted
that for Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is
value is linearly decreased during the reset time..
457
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tReset
1
tReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
Hysteresis
Measured
Voltage
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Linear Decrease
Frozen Timer
t1
Instantaneous
Reset
Time
IEC09000055 V1 EN
Figure 257:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
458
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tReset1
Voltage
START
START
tReset1
Hysteresis
TRIP
U1>
Measured Voltage
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time Integrator
Frozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Reset
Linear Decrease
IEC05000020 V2 EN
Figure 258:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite time delay

instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured
459
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ST1
a
b<a
U1>
tReset1
t1
TR1
AND
OFF
Delay
ON
Delay
IEC10000100 V1 EN
Figure 259:
Un>
START
TRIP
tResetn
tn
IEC10000037 V1 EN
Figure 260:
460
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Un>
START
TRIP
tResetn
tn
IEC10000038 V1 EN
Figure 261:
8.2.2.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:
8.2.2.4
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
BLKST1:
BLKTR2:
BLKST2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the
input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set
value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria
to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection
(OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 262.
461
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UL1
Comparator
UL1 > U1>
UL2
Comparator
UL2 > U1>
UL3
Comparator
UL3 > U1>
ST1L1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
Phase 1
ST1L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MaxVoltSelect
or
Time integrator
t1
tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST1L3
ST1
OR
TR1L1
Step 1
TR1L2
TRIP
TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator
UL1 > U2>
Comparator
UL2 > U2>
Comparator
UL3 > U2>
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
Time integrator
t2
tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
ST2L2
Phase 2
Phase 3
START
MaxVoltSelect
or
ST2L1
Phase 1
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
ST2L3
ST2
OR
TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
TRIP
TR2L3
TR2
OR
OR
OR
START
TRIP
en05000013.vsd
IEC05000013-WMF V1 EN
Figure 262:
Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
462
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
8.2.3
Function block
OV2PTOV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
TRIP
TR1
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
IEC06000277 V2 EN
Figure 263:
8.2.4
OV2PTOV function block

Table 258:
Name
OV2PTOV Input signals

Type
Default
Description
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for three phase voltage input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 259:
Name
OV2PTOV Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TR1
BOOLEAN
TR1L1
BOOLEAN
TR1L2
BOOLEAN
TR1L3
BOOLEAN
TR2
BOOLEAN
TR2L1
BOOLEAN
TR2L2
BOOLEAN
TR2L3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
463
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
8.2.5
Table 260:
Name
Type
Description
ST1
BOOLEAN
ST1L1
BOOLEAN
ST1L2
BOOLEAN
ST1L3
BOOLEAN
ST2
BOOLEAN
ST2L1
BOOLEAN
ST2L2
BOOLEAN
ST2L3
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
OperationStep1
Off
On
On
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time

step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3

U1>
1 - 200
%UB
120

% of UBase, step 1
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

for step 1
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 1
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
OperationStep2
Off
On
On
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time

step 2
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3

U2>
1 - 200
%UB
150

% of UBase, step 2
464
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

for step 2
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Table 261:
Step
Default
Description
OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.025
Description
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous

for step 1
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Tuning param for prog. over voltage

IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous

for step 2
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100

IDMT curve, step 2
465
Section 8
Voltage protection
Table 262:
Name
ConnType
8.2.6
8.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
PhN DFT
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
Unit
Step
Default
PhN DFT
Description
Group selector for connection type
Technical data
Table 263:
OV2PTOV technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy

and high step
(1-200)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur at U < Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis
(0100)% of UBase
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time
characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 725
See table 725
Definite time delays
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate
time, Inverse
characteristics
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time, start

function
Reset time, start

function
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV
Two step residual overvoltage
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ROV2PTOV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N
3U0
TRV V1 EN
8.3.1
Introduction
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.
466
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the

residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it
from a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point
voltage transformer.
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.
8.3.2
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high singlephase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage
can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary
windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the threephase voltages and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual
voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV. ROV2PTOV
has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time
delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.
8.3.2.1
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.
8.3.2.2
Time delay
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
467
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
t=
k
U -U >
U>
(Equation 129)
IEC09000051 V1 EN

t=
k 480
32
- 0.5
U >
U -U >
2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 130)
The type C curve is described as:

t=
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
3.0
+ 0.035
(Equation 131)
t=
kA
U -U >
-C
B
U>
EQUATION1439 V1 EN
+D
(Equation 132)
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to
U> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN
(Equation 133)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section
"Inverse characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves
for the inverse time mode (IDMT).
468
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and
tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the
corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to
the hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 257 and figure 258.
tReset
1
tReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
Hysteresis
Measured
Voltage
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Linear Decrease
Frozen Timer
t1
Instantaneous
Reset
Time
IEC09000055 V1 EN
Figure 264:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
469
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tReset1
Voltage
START
START
tReset1
Hysteresis
TRIP
U1>
Measured Voltage
Time
t1
START
TRIP
Time Integrator
Frozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Reset
Linear Decrease
IEC05000020 V2 EN
Figure 265:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite timer delay

instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured
470
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ST1
a
b<a
U1>
tReset1
t1
TR1
AND
OFF
Delay
ON
Delay
IEC10000100 V1 EN
Figure 266:
Un<
START
TRIP
tResetn
tn
IEC10000039 V1 EN
Figure 267:
471
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Un<
START
TRIP
tResetn
tn
IEC10000040 V1 EN
Figure 268:
8.3.2.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
8.3.2.4
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
BLKST1:
BLKTR2:
BLKST2:
blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.
Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV)
is schematically described in figure 269.
472
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UN
Comparator
UN > U1>
TR1
START
Time integrator
t1
tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Comparator
UN > U2>
TRIP
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 1
ST2
Phase 1
TR2
START
Time integrator
t2
tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
ST1
Phase 1
TRIP
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
OR
Step 2
OR
START
TRIP
en05000748.vsd
IEC05000748 V1 EN
Figure 269:
8.3.3
Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV
Function block
ROV2PTOV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLKST1
BLKTR2
BLKST2
TRIP
TR1
TR2
START
ST1
ST2
IEC06000278 V2 EN
Figure 270:
ROV2PTOV function block
473
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 264:
ROV2PTOV Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase voltages
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
ROV2PTOV Output signals
Name
Table 266:
Name
Description
U3P
Table 265:
8.3.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TR1
BOOLEAN
TR2
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
ST1
BOOLEAN
ST2
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
OperationStep1
Off
On
On
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time

step 1
U1>
1 - 200
%UB
30
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),

step 1 in % of UBase
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

for step 1
k1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 1
HystAbs1
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
474
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperationStep2
Off
On
On
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time

step 2
U2>
1 - 100
%UB
45
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),

step 2 in % of UBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

for step 2
k2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Table 267:
ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.025
Description
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous

for step 1
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100

IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous

for step 2
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

475
Section 8
Voltage protection
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100

IDMT curve, step 2
8.3.6
8.4
Technical data
Table 268:
ROV2PTOV technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy

and high step
(1-200)% of UBase
1.0% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis
(0100)% of UBase
1.0% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time
characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 727
See table 727
Definite time setting
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate
time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time, start

function
Reset time, start

function
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

Overexcitation protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OEXPVPH
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
24
U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN
8.4.1
Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into nonlaminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow.
476
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and
adjacent parts in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating
curves and independent alarm stages.
8.4.2
The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) function is growing as
the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most
of the time near their designated limits.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend
an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination
with below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a transformer unit
is on load, but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load
occurrence. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger
to experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental
transformer equation, see equation 134, that peak flux density Bmax is directly
proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and
turns n.
E = 4.44 f n Bmax A
(Equation 134)
EQUATION898 V2 EN
The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 135.

M ( p.u.) =
E f
( Ur ) ( fr )
(Equation 135)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing.

If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically
1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into
other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current
circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:
overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

a large increase in magnetizing currents
an increase in core and winding temperature
an increase in transformer vibration and noise
477
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per

hertz (V/Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or
is not possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source
after a delay ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected
generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are
subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of
the turbine. In such cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a startup of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not
possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay,
by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at 10%
above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the
actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1
times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained
basis, see equation 136.
E
--------- 1.1 Ur
fr
f
(Equation 136)
EQUATION900 V1 EN
or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 137.

E
f
V Hz >
fr
(Equation 137)
where:
V/Hz>
is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
V/Hz> is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does
not know exactly what to set, then the default value for V/Hz> = 110 % for the
standard IEC 60076-1 shall be used.
In OEXPVPH, the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 138.
M ( p.u. ) =
E f
Ur fr
(Equation 138)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1
for any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Ur/fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %
of Ur/fr.
478
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in

general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For
no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power
transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the
voltage U which is measured and fed to OEXPVPH , depending on the direction of
the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where
OEXPVPH is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding.
It is important to specify in the application configuration on which side of the
power transformer OEXPVPH is placed.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full
load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the
transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage,
no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be
equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 =
Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.
OEXPVPH calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the
leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on
the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers
the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage
reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to
Xc/2. OEXPVPH protection will then take the given measured voltage U, as the
induced voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events
such as loss-of-load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-earth voltage does
not mean overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single phaseto-earth fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases-to-earth, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each
winding.
8.4.2.1
Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation
protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH shall be set to
measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines
the two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI are set to
same value.
If, for example, voltage UL1L2 is fed to OEXPVPH, then currents IL1, and IL2
must be applied. From these two input currents, current IL1L2 = IL1 - IL2 is
479
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
calculated internally by the OEXPVPH algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage

must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm
exits without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current
are used by OEXPVPH. A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher
than 70% of rated phase-to-earth voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in
operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 Hz
and 60 Hz respectively.
OEXPVPH can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from

the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.
8.4.2.2
Operate time of the overexcitation protection

The operate time of OEXPVPH is a function of the relative overexcitation.
Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:
the so called IEEE law, and

a tailor-made law.
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match the transformer core capability well.
The square law is according to equation 139.
top =
0.18 k
V Hz> - 1
0.18 k
overexcitation
(Equation 139)
where:
M
the relative excitation
V/Hz>
is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 272.

Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.
480
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The relative excitation M is calculated using equation270
Umeasured
fmeasured
=
UBase
frated
Umeasured
frated
UBase fmeasured
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 140.
top
(M (t) - V
Hz > ) dt 0.18 k
2
(Equation 140)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it
becomes true that:
n
Dt
( M(j)
V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
j=k
(Equation 141)
EQUATION906 V1 EN
where:
Dt
is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH and
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is
given as Ur/fr.
As long as M > V/Hz> (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only
be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will
be tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 272, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 271.
481
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
delay in s
tMax
under excitation
inverse delay law
overexcitation
tMin
0
M=V/Hz>
V/Hz>
Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>

Mmax
Emax
Excitation M
E (only if f = fr = const)
99001067.vsd
IEC99001067 V1 EN
Figure 271:
Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax and tMin
A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In
case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEXPVPH trips after tMax seconds.
A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high
degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin,
OEXPVPH function trips after tMin seconds. The inverse delay law is not valid for
values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the overexcitation
level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>V/Hz>).
482
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES
Time (s)
1000
100
k = 60
k = 20
k = 10
k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
10
k=4
k=3
k=2
k=1
1
10
20
OVEREXCITATION IN %
30
40
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd
IEC01000373 V1 EN
Figure 272:
Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation
The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH setting V/

Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency voltage, where the
inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example, V/
Hz>> = 140 %, then M is according to equation 142.
M=
(V
Hz>> ) / f
Ur/fr
= 1.40
(Equation 142)
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In

this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided
into five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as
shown in figure 273. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5
=> t6.
483
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
delay in s
tMax
tMin
underexcitation
Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0
Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M

Mmax
Emaxcont
99001068.vsd
IEC99001068 V1 EN
Figure 273:
An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by
linear interpolation.
Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.
8.4.2.3
Cooling
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH is basically a thermal protection; therefore a
cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH setting, with a default time constant
tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their
previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is
assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an
overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter
than it would be otherwise.
8.4.2.4
Overexcitation protection function measurands

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in
PCM600. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if
the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful with small or moderate overexcitations.
If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of
the remaining time to trip is done against tMax.
The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a
monitored data value VPERHZ, is calculated from the expression:
M ( p.u. ) =
E f
Ur fr
(Equation 143)
484
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If VPERHZ value is less than setting V/Hz> (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to V/Hz> (in %), the excitation is exactly equal
to the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than V/Hz>,
the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100,
while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum
continuous excitation limit.
Monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected
power transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip
value which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same
time, as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then
for some reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or tMin,
then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when
tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the
very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEXPVPH TRIP output signal will be
set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.
8.4.2.5
Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set
2% lower than (V/Hz>) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the
operator an early abnormal voltages warning.
8.4.2.6
Logic diagram
BLOCK
AlarmLevel
t
V/Hz>
I3P
Calculation
of internal
induced
voltage Ei
Ei
M=
(Ei / f)
(Ur / fr)
ALARM
t>tMin
&
TRIP
tMin
k
&
tAlarm
M>V/Hz>
U3P
t>tAlarm
IEEE law
M
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>>
tMax
Xleak
V/Hz>>
M = relative V/Hz as service value

IEC05000162 V2 EN
Figure 274:
A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection

OEXPVPH
485
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.
8.4.3
Function block
OEXPVPH
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
RESET
TRIP
START
ALARM
IEC05000329 V3 EN
Figure 275:
8.4.4
OEXPVPH function block

Table 269:
OEXPVPH Input signals
Name
Type
Current connection
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset operation
OEXPVPH Output signals
Name
Table 271:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 270:
8.4.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip from overexcitation function
START
BOOLEAN
Overexcitation above set operate level

(instantaneous)
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)
Setting parameters
OEXPVPH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current (rated phase current) in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage (main voltage) in kV
V/Hz>
100.0 - 180.0
%UB/f
0.1
110.0
Operate level of V/Hz at no load and

rated freq in % of (Ubase/frated)
486
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Step
Default
V/Hz>>
100.0 - 200.0
%UB/f
0.1
140.0
High level of V/Hz above which tMin is

used, in % of (Ubase/frated)
XLeak
0.000 - 200.000
ohm
0.001
0.000
Winding leakage reactance in primary

ohms
TrPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)
tMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse

curve, in sec
tMax
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse

curve, in sec
tCooling
0.10 - 9000.00
0.01
1200.00
Transformer magnetic core cooling time

constant, in sec
CurveType
IEEE
Tailor made
IEEE
Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor

made
kForIEEE
1 - 60
Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type

curve
AlarmLevel
50.0 - 120.0
0.1
100.0
Alarm operate level as % of operate level
tAlarm
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
5.00
Alarm time delay, in sec
Default
Table 272:
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OEXPVPH Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
t1Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
7200.00
Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made

curve, in sec
t2Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
3600.00
Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec
t3Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
t4Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
900.00
t5Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
450.00
t6Tailor
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
225.00
Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made

curve, in sec
Step
Default
Table 273:
Description
OEXPVPH Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
MeasuredU
PosSeq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1L2
Selection of measured voltage
MeasuredI
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
L1L2
Selection of measured current
487
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 274:
OEXPVPH technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, start
(100180)% of (UBase/frated)
0.5% of U
Operate value, alarm
(50120)% of start level
0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate value, high level
(100200)% of (UBase/frated)
0.5% of U
Curve type
IEEE or customer defined
Class 5 + 40 ms
IEEE : t =
(0.18 k )
( M - 1) 2
EQUATION1319 V1 EN
(Equation 144)
where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
8.5
Minimum time delay for inverse

function
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Maximum time delay for inverse

function
(0.009000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
Alarm time delay
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

Voltage differential protection
8.5.1
IEC 61850
identification
VDCPTOV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60
Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages
from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
and one trip step.
8.5.2
The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on
comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase.
Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage
transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The
voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip
level UDATrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given
after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage
supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The
outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage
488
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for
loss of all three phases.
Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision
function SDDRFUF.
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as
service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve
full balance in normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 276.
UDTripL1>
AND
UDTripL2>
AND
UDTripL3>
O
R
tReset tTrip
t
t
AND
AND
AND
UDAlarmL1>
TRIP
START
AND
UDAlarmL2>
AND
UDAlarmL3>
O
R
tAlarm
AND
ALARM
AND
U1LOW
AND
U1<L1
AND
U1<L2
tAlarm
t
AND
U1<L3
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
U2<L1
AND
U2<L2
t1
t
AND
U2LOW
U2<L3
BLOCK
en06000382-2.vsd
IEC06000382 V3 EN
Figure 276:
Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV
489
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.5.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
VDCPTOV
U3P1*
U3P2*
BLOCK
TRIP
START
ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF
IEC06000528 V2 EN
Figure 277:
8.5.4
VDCPTOV function block

Table 275:
VDCPTOV Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Bus voltage
U3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Capacitor voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
VDCPTOV Output signals
Name
Table 277:
Name
Description
U3P1
Table 276:
8.5.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Voltage differential protection operated
START
BOOLEAN
Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW
BOOLEAN
Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW
BOOLEAN
Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF
REAL
Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF
REAL
UL3DIFF
REAL
Setting parameters
VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
UBase
0.50 - 2000.00
kV
0.01
400.00
Base Voltage
BlkDiffAtULow
No
Yes
Yes
Block operation at low voltage
490
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UDTrip
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
5.0
Operate level, in % of UBase
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay for voltage differential

operate, in milliseconds
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for voltage differential reset,

in seconds
U1Low
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
70.0
Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
U2Low
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
70.0
Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
tBlock
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time for undervoltage block
UDAlarm
0.0 - 100.0
%UB
0.1
2.0
Alarm level, in % of UBase
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Time delay for voltage differential alarm,

in seconds
Table 278:
VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
RFL1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Ratio compensation factor phase L1

U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RFL2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RFL3
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

U2L3*RFL3=U1L3
8.5.6
Unit
Step
VDCPTOV technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and

trip
(0.0100.0) % of UBase
0.5 % of Ur
Under voltage level
(0.0100.0) % of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Timers
(0.00060.000)s
0.5% 10 ms
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

Loss of voltage check
8.6.1
Description
Technical data
Table 279:
8.6
Default
IEC 61850
identification
LOVPTUV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27
Introduction
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV) is suitable for use in networks with an
automatic system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip
491
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
command to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value
for a time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
8.6.2
The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognises
if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three
phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START
output signal indicates start.
Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase
voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.
LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a
length set by setting tPulse.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU
input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated
circuit breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).
492
Section 8
Voltage protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes
BLOCK
START
>1
Function Enable
tTrip
&
STUL1N
tPulse
TRIP
&
STUL2N
only 1 or 2 phases are low for

at least 10 s (not three)
Latched
Enable
STUL3N
&
tBlock
>1
CBOPEN
Reset Enable
>1
&
VTSU
>1
tRestore
Set Enable
>1
Line restored for

at least 3 s
IEC07000089 V2 EN
Figure 278:
Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV
8.6.3
Function block
LOVPTUV
U3P*
BLOCK
CBOPEN
VTSU
TRIP
START
IEC07000039 V2 EN
Figure 279:
LOVPTUV function block
493
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.6.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 280:
LOVPTUV Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block the all outputs
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker open
VTSU
BOOLEAN
Block from voltage circuit supervision
LOVPTUV Output signals
Name
Table 282:
Name
Description
U3P
Table 281:
8.6.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
START
BOOLEAN
Start signal
Setting parameters
LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
UBase
0.1 - 9999.9
kV
0.1
400.0
Base voltage
UPE
1 - 100
%UB
70
Operate voltagein% of base voltage

Ubase
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
Operate time delay
Table 283:
Name
LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
tPulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to block when all 3ph

voltages are not low
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay for enable the function after

restoration
8.6.6
Step
Default
Description
Technical data
Table 284:
Function
LOVPTUV technical data

Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage
(0100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Pulse timer
(0.05060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Timers
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
494
Section 9
Frequency protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 9
About this chapter

This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions
work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and
technical data are included for each function.
9.1
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

Underfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPTUF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
9.1.1
Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used for load shedding systems, remedial
action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
SAPTUF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines
9.1.2
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent
time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time
delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the
voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
495
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.
9.1.2.1
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency
function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases
the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is
issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should
be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.
9.1.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time
delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay
and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the
setting TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay.
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 280
and equation 145. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the START condition, with respect to
the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset,
after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is
not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
On the output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency
returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
9.1.2.3
Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced,
to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
496
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
equation 145. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a

similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and
overvoltage functions.
U - UMin
t=
UNom - UMin
Exponent
( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
(Equation 145)
EQUATION1182 V1 EN
where:
t
is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
is the measured voltage
Exponent
is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to

tMax, tMin
are time settings.
The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 280, for:

UMin
= 90%
UNom
= 100%
tMax
= 1.0 s
tMin
= 0.0 s
Exponent
= 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
TimeDlyOperate [s]
0
Exponenent
1
2
3
0.5
90
95
100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN
Figure 280:
Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.
497
Section 9
9.1.2.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely,
by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST:
blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.1.2.5
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the
positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The
time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special
voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting
of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay
TimeDlyRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is
schematically described in figure 281.
Block
OR
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Frequency
Time integrator
Comparator
f < StartFrequency
TimerOperation Mode
Selector
START
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
START
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
TimeDlyRestore
RESTORE
en05000726.vsd
IEC05000726 V1 EN
Figure 281:
Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF
498
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
9.1.3
Function block
SAPTUF
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST
TRIP
START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
IEC06000279 V2 EN
Figure 282:
9.1.4
SAPTUF function block

Table 285:
SAPTUF Input signals
Name
Type
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Blocking operate output.
BLKREST
BOOLEAN
Blocking restore output.
SAPTUF Output signals
Name
Table 287:
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 286:
9.1.5
Default
U3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START
BOOLEAN
Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
FREQ
REAL
Measured frequency
Setting parameters
SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
StartFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
48.80
Frequency setting/start value.
IntBlockLevel
0 - 100
%UB
50
Internal blocking level in % of UBase.
TimeDlyOperate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate time delay in over/underfrequency mode.
TimeDlyReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for reset.
TimeDlyRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Restore time delay.
499
Section 9
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
50.10
Restore frequency if frequency is above

frequency value.
TimerOperation
Definite timer
Volt based timer
Definite timer
Setting for choosing timer mode.
UNom
50 - 150
%UB
100
Nominal voltage in % of UBase for

voltage based timer.
UMin
50 - 150
%UB
90
Lower operation limit in % of UBase for

Exponent
0.0 - 5.0
0.1
1.0
For calculation of the curve form for

tMax
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum time operation limit for voltage

based timer.
tMin
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Minimum time operation limit for voltage

based timer.
9.1.6
Description
Technical data
Table 288:
SAPTUF technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, start function
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
100 ms typically
100 ms typically
Operate time, definite time function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5%
10 ms
Reset time, definite time function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5%
10 ms
Voltage dependent time delay
Settings:
UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
Exponent=0.0-5.0
tMax=(0.000-60.000)s
tMin=(0.000-60.000)s
Class 5 +
200 ms
U - UMin
t=
UNom - UMin
Exponent
( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
EQUATION1182 V1 EN
(Equation 146)
U=Umeasured
9.2
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

Overfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPTOF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
500
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
9.2.1
Introduction
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network.
Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over
frequency.
SAPTOF is used mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is
also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring.
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines
9.2.2
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.
9.2.2.1
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency
protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF is blocked, and the
output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations
of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.2.2.2
Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite
time delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
501
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset, after
that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
9.2.2.3
Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely,
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
9.2.2.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the
positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design
of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 283.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLOCK
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
Frequency
Comparator
f > StartFrequency
BLKDMAGN
OR
START
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
START
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
en05000735.vsd
IEC05000735 V1 EN
Figure 283:
Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF
502
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
9.2.3
Function block
SAPTOF
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
TRIP
START
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
IEC06000280 V2 EN
Figure 284:
9.2.4
SAPTOF function block

Table 289:
SAPTOF Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
SAPTOF Output signals
Name
Table 291:
Description
U3P
Table 290:
9.2.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START
BOOLEAN
Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
FREQ
REAL
Measured frequency
Setting parameters
SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage
StartFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
51.20
Frequency setting/start value.
IntBlockLevel
0 - 100
%UB
50
TimeDlyOperate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Operate time delay in over/underfrequency mode.
TimeDlyReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
503
Section 9
9.2.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 292:
SAPTOF technical data
Function
9.3
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz at
symmetrical threephase voltage
100 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset +0.5 Hz
100 ms typically
Operate time, definite time

function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5% 10 ms
Reset time, definite time

function
(0.000-60.000)s
0.5% 10 ms
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

Rate-of-change frequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPFRC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
9.3.1
Introduction
Rate-of-change frequency protection function (SAPFRC) gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC can be used for generation shedding,
load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between
positive or negative change of frequency.
SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on
positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phaseneutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog
inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting
guidelines.
9.3.2
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC has a
settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the
set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above
the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
504
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of
the function is available, that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage
IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If
the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
9.3.2.1
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is
measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-ofchange frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude.
If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued,
then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency
recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of
StartFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.
9.3.2.2
Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay,
tTrip. .
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition
continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, with
respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s
the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore
functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the
restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
9.3.2.3
Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked,
505
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
BLKREST:
blocks the RESTORE output
9.3.2.4
Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously
measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power
system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay
time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the
RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has
earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls
if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of
SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 285.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET
Voltage
OR
BLOCK
BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Rate-of-Change
of Frequency
Comparator
If
[StartFreqGrad<0
START
AND
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate
Start
&
Trip
Output
Logic
START
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Frequency
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
TimeDlyRestore
RESTORE
en05000835.vsd
IEC05000835 V1 EN
Figure 285:
Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC
506
Section 9
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
9.3.3
Function block
SAPFRC
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST
TRIP
START
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
IEC06000281 V2 EN
Figure 286:
9.3.4
SAPFRC function block

Table 293:
SAPFRC Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
BLKREST
BOOLEAN
Blocking restore output.
SAPFRC Output signals
Name
Table 295:
Description
U3P
Table 294:
9.3.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient
START
BOOLEAN
Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base setting for the phase-phase voltage

in kV
StartFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
Hz/s
0.01
0.50
Frequency gradient start value. Sign

defines direction.
IntBlockLevel
0 - 100
%UB
50
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate time delay in pos./neg.

frequency gradient mode.
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
49.90
Restore frequency if frequency is above

frequency value (Hz)
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Restore time delay.
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
507
Section 9
9.3.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 296:
SAPFRC Technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, internal

blocking level
(0-100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
100 ms typically
508
Section 10
Multipurpose protection
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 10
About this chapter

This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current
and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters,
function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each
function.
10.1
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection
10.1.1
IEC 61850
identification
CVGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a
negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as
open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth
faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three
functions are used, which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase
voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase
selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the
directional earth fault protection function.
10.1.2
10.1.2.1
Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to
three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it
will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end
user in the setting tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 297.
509
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 297:
Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter
CurrentInput
Comment
Phase1
CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
Phase2
Phase3
PosSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

current phasor
NegSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative

sequence current phasor
3ZeroSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence

current phasor multiplied by factor 3
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with

maximum magnitude
MinPh

minimum magnitude
UnbalancePh
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which

is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set
to 0 all the time
10
Phase1-Phase2
CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated

as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and
phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)
11
Phase2-Phase3

phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)
12
Phase3-Phase1

phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)
13
MaxPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the

maximum magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the

minimum magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which

is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 298:
Table 298:
Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
Phase1
CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
Phase2
Phase3

510
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Set value for the

parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
PosSeq

voltage phasor
-NegSeq

sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
-3ZeroSeq

voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the
directional feature when used.
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with

maximum magnitude
MinPh
CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with

minimum magnitude
UnbalancePh
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,

which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0 all the time
10
Phase1-Phase2
CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage
phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)
11
Phase2-Phase3

phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)
12
Phase3-Phase1

phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1)
13
MaxPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the

maximum magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the

minimum magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,

which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and phph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 298 is always
applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT
inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2
& UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information
about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing
block, which will then take automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 299 for built-in
current restraint feature:
511
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 299:
Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter RestrCurr
10.1.2.2
Comment
PosSeq

current phasor
NegSeq

sequence current phasor
3ZeroSeq

current phasor multiplied by factor 3
MaxPh

maximum magnitude
Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for
every CVGAPC function.
Base current shall be entered as:
1.
2.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 297.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by
3 (1.732 Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10
to 15, as shown in table 297.
Base voltage shall be entered as:

1.
2.
10.1.2.3
rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 298.
rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 298.
Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 297) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set
level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on
other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the
overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled builtin features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
512
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Second harmonic feature
The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component

in the measured current quantity (see table 297). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:
PosSeq (positive sequence current)

NegSeq (negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first
harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the
relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 297) and
measured voltage phasor (see table 298). In protection terminology it means that
the General currrent and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made
directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step
will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction
(Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means
from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to
understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 298) and measured current
phasor (see table 297) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole
responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in
order to get a proper directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this
automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by
the end user to check for the directional criteria.
Table 300 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
Table 300:
Set value for the
parameter
CurrentInput
Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature

Set value for the
parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
PosSeq
PosSeq
Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power
NegSeq
-NegSeq
Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
3ZeroSeq
-3ZeroSeq
Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to
-90 depending on the power system earthing (that
is, solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
513
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Set value for the

parameter
CurrentInput
Set value for the

parameter
Comment
VoltageInput
Phase1
Phase2-Phase3
Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase2
Phase3-Phase1
Directional overcurrent function for the second phase

is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase3
Phase1-Phase2
Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and
IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool,
checks that:
the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 287).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN
Figure 287:
I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool,

checks that:
514
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 287).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN
Figure 288:
CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options:
Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100
ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined
during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup
level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.
Voltage restraint/control feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a

measured voltage quantity (see table 298). Practically then the pickup level of the
overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies
are available:
Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

515
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN
Figure 289:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN
Figure 290:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT
516
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).
Current restraint feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining

current quantity (see table 299). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.
IMeasured
te
ra
pe
O
ea
ar
IsetHigh
tr
es
*I r
f
f
e
Co
s tr
e
I>R
ain
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN
Figure 291:
Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude
This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to
one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the end user setting.
10.1.2.4
Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 297) with the set pickup
level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start
signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value
one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip
517
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the setting.
10.1.2.5
Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 298) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio
is settable, with default value of 0.99.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.
10.1.2.6
Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity (see table 298) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set
level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 1.01.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.
10.1.2.7
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.
518
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IED
Phasors &
samples
Current and voltage selection

settings
Selection of which current

and voltage shall be given to
the built-in protection
elements
Selected current
Selected voltage
Restraint current selection
Selection of restraint current
Selected restraint current
Phasors &
samples
Phasor calculation of
individual currents
CVGAPC function
Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
A/D conversion scaling

with CT ratio
A/D conversion
scaling with CT ratio
ADM
IEC05000169 V2 EN
Figure 292:
Treatment of measured currents within IED for CVGAPC function
Figure 292 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.
1.
2.
3.
Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function:

1.
2.
3.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 297) for
internally measured current.
Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 298) for
internally measured voltage.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 299) for
internally measured restraint current.
519
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CURRENT
UC1
2
Selected current
TRUC1
nd
Harmonic
restraint
STUC2
UC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
TRUC2
STOC1
OC1
Selected restraint current
2nd Harmonic
restraint
TROC1
Current restraint
BLK2ND
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint
STOC2
TROC2
OC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint
Directionality
UDIRLOW
DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
STOV1
OV1
TROV1
OV2
TROV2
UV1
TRUV1
STOV2
Selected voltage
STUV1
STUV2
UV2
TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN
Figure 293:
CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements
520
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Logic in figure 293 can be summarized as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Enable
second
harmonic
The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements.
Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of
its START and TRIP output signals.
More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the
following four figures
Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements &
steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
Second
harmonic check
DEF time
selected
BLKTROC
1
DEF
AND
TROC1
OR
Selected current
a
b
StartCurr_OC1
a>b
OC1=On
BLKOC1
STOC1
AND
Inverse
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature
Selected voltage
Selected restrain current
Directionality
check
DIR_OK
Inverse
time
selected
Current
Restraint
Feature
Imeasured > k Irestraint
en05000831.vsd
IEC05000831 V1 EN
Figure 294:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)
521
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Bin input: BLKUC1TR
Selected current
b>a
DEF
TRUC1
AND
AND
StartCurr_UC1
Operation_UC1=On
STUC1
Bin input: BLKUC1
en05000750.vsd
IEC05000750 V1 EN
Figure 295:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has
the same internal logic)
DEF time
selected
BLKTROV1
DEF
AND
TROV1
OR
Selected voltage
a
b
StartVolt_OV1
a>b
STOV1
AND
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
BLKOV1
Inverse time
selected
en05000751.vsd
IEC05000751 V1 EN
Figure 296:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)
522
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
DEF time
selected
BLKTRUV
1
DEF
AND
TRUV1
OR
Selected voltage
b>a
STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
selected
BLKUV1
en05000752.vsd
IEC05000752 V1 EN
Figure 297:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)
10.1.3
Function block
CVGAPC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC1
BLKOC1TR
ENMLTOC1
BLKOC2
BLKOC2TR
ENMLTOC2
BLKUC1
BLKUC1TR
BLKUC2
BLKUC2TR
BLKOV1
BLKOV1TR
BLKOV2
BLKOV2TR
BLKUV1
BLKUV1TR
BLKUV2
BLKUV2TR
TRIP
TROC1
TROC2
TRUC1
TRUC2
TROV1
TROV2
TRUV1
TRUV2
START
STOC1
STOC2
STUC1
STUC2
STOV1
STOV2
STUV1
STUV2
BLK2ND
DIROC1
DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE
IEC05000372 V2 EN
Figure 298:
CVGAPC function block
523
Section 10
10.1.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 301:
Name
CVGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKOC1
BOOLEAN
Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1
BOOLEAN

OC1
BLKOC2
BOOLEAN
Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2
BOOLEAN

OC2
BLKUC1
BOOLEAN
Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2
BOOLEAN
Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1
BOOLEAN
Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2
BOOLEAN
Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1
BOOLEAN
Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2
BOOLEAN
Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 302:
Name
CVGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip signal
TROC1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
524
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
10.1.5
Table 303:
Type
Description
START
BOOLEAN
STOC1
BOOLEAN
Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2
BOOLEAN
Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1
BOOLEAN
Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2
BOOLEAN
Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1
BOOLEAN
Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2
BOOLEAN
Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1
BOOLEAN
Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2
BOOLEAN
Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND
BOOLEAN
Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1
INTEGER
Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2
INTEGER
Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW
BOOLEAN
Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT
REAL
Measured current value
ICOSFI
REAL
Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE
REAL
Measured voltage value
UIANGLE
REAL
Angle between voltage and current
Setting parameters
CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
CurrentInput
phase1
phase2
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
Select current signal which will be

measured inside function
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base Current
525
Section 10
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VoltageInput
phase1
phase2
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
Select voltage signal which will be

measured inside function
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base Voltage
OperHarmRestr
Off
On
Off
Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /

On
l_2nd/l_fund
10.0 - 50.0
1.0
20.0
Ratio of second to fundamental current

harmonic in %
EnRestrainCurr
Off
On
Off
Enable current restrain function On / Off
RestrCurrInput
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
Max
PosSeq
Select current signal which will be used

for curr restrain
RestrCurrCoeff
0.00 - 5.00
0.01
0.00
Restraining current coefficient
RCADir
-180 - 180
Deg
-75
Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir
1 - 90
Deg
75
Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM
0.0 - 5.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Below this level in % of Ubase setting

ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1
Off
On
Off
Operation OC1 Off / On
StartCurr_OC1
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
Operate current level for OC1 in % of

Ibase
CurveType_OC1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
tDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50

OC1
526
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Step
Default
k_OC1
Values (Range)
0.05 - 999.00
Unit
-
0.01
0.30
Description
delay for OC1
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100

of IBase
tMin_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1
Voltage control
Input control
Volt/Input control
Off
Off
Control mode for voltage controlled OC1

function
VDepMode_OC1
Step
Slope
Step
Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,

slope)
VDepFact_OC1
0.02 - 5.00
0.01
1.00
Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1

is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
50.0
Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of

Ubase
UHighLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
100.0
Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of

Ubase
HarmRestr_OC1
Off
On
Off
Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic

restrain
DirMode_OC1
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,

forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC1
I&U
IcosPhi&U
I&U
Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for

OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1

(Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Operation_OC2
Off
On
Off
Operation OC2 Off / On
StartCurr_OC2
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
Operate current level for OC2 in % of

Ibase
CurveType_OC2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
tDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50

OC2
k_OC2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

delay for OC2

527
Section 10
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50

of IBase
tMin_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2
Voltage control
Input control
Volt/Input control
Off
Off
Control mode for voltage controlled OC2

function
VDepMode_OC2
Step
Slope
Step
Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,

slope)
VDepFact_OC2
0.02 - 5.00
0.01
1.00
Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2

is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
50.0
Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of

Ubase
UHighLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
100.0
Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of

Ubase
HarmRestr_OC2
Off
On
Off
Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic

restrain
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,

forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC2
I&U
IcosPhi&U
I&U
Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for

OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2

(Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Operation_UC1
Off
On
Off
Operation UC1 Off / On
EnBlkLowI_UC1
Off
On
Off
Enable internal low current level blocking

for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1
0 - 150
%IB
20
Internal low current blocking level for

UC1 in % of Ibase
StartCurr_UC1
2.0 - 150.0
%IB
1.0
70.0
Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %

of Ibase
tDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1
Off
On
Off
Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic

restrain
Operation_UC2
Off
On
Off
Operation UC2 Off / On
EnBlkLowI_UC2
Off
On
Off
Enable internal low current level blocking

for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2
0 - 150
%IB
20
Internal low current blocking level for

UC2 in % of Ibase
StartCurr_UC2
2.0 - 150.0
%IB
1.0
70.0
Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %

of Ibase
tDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2
Off
On
Off
Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic

restrain

528
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation_OV1
Off
On
Off
Operation OV1 Off / On
StartVolt_OV1
2.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
150.0
Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of

Ubase
CurveType_OV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
tDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Operate time delay in sec for definite

time use of OV1
tMin_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

for OV1
k_OV1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

delay for OV1
Operation_OV2
Off
On
Off
Operation OV2 Off / On
StartVolt_OV2
2.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
150.0
Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of

Ubase
CurveType_OV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
tDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

time use of OV2
tMin_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

for OV2
k_OV2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

delay for OV2
Operation_UV1
Off
On
Off
Operation UV1 Off / On
StartVolt_UV1
2.0 - 150.0
%UB
0.1
50.0
Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %

of Ubase
CurveType_UV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
tDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

time use of UV1
tMin_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

for UV1
k_UV1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1
Off
On
On
Enable internal low voltage level

blocking for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1
0.0 - 5.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Internal low voltage blocking level for

UV1 in % of Ubase
Operation_UV2
Off
On
Off
Operation UV2 Off / On
529
Section 10
Name
Step
Default
StartVolt_UV2
2.0 - 150.0
%UB
0.1
50.0
Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %

of Ubase
CurveType_UV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
tDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

time use of UV2
tMin_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

for UV2
k_UV2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2
Off
On
On
Enable internal low voltage level

blocking for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2
0.0 - 5.0
%UB
0.1
0.5
Internal low voltage blocking level for

UV2 in % of Ubase
Table 304:
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Description
CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurrMult_OC1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OC1
tResetDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

Time curve OC1
P_OC1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OC1
A_OC1
0.000 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OC1
B_OC1
0.000 - 99.000
0.001
0.000

curve for OC1
C_OC1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

programmable curve for OC1
PR_OC1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

TR_OC1
0.005 - 600.000
0.001
13.500

CR_OC1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

CurrMult_OC2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OC2
tResetDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

Time curve OC2
P_OC2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OC2

530
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
A_OC2
0.000 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OC2
B_OC2
0.000 - 99.000
0.001
0.000

curve for OC2
C_OC2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

PR_OC2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

TR_OC2
0.005 - 600.000
0.001
13.500

CR_OC2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

tResetDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OV1
tResetDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time

use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves

for OV1
A_OV1
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OV1
B_OV1
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OV1
C_OV1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

programmable curve for OV1
D_OV1
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

P_OV1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OV2
tResetDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

for OV2
A_OV2
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OV2
B_OV2
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OV2
C_OV2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

D_OV2
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

P_OV2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OV2
531
Section 10
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResCrvType_UV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for UV1
tResetDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

for UV1
A_UV1
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for UV1
B_UV1
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for UV1
C_UV1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

programmable curve for UV1
D_UV1
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

P_UV1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for UV2
tResetDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

for UV2
A_UV2
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for UV2
B_UV2
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for UV2
C_UV2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

D_UV2
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

P_UV2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for UV2
532
Section 10
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
10.1.6
Technical data
Table 305:
CVGAPC technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Measuring current
input
phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq,

NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Base current
(1 - 99999) A
Measuring voltage
input
phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,

UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Base voltage
(0.05 - 2000.00) kV
Start overcurrent,
step 1 and 2
(2 - 5000)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir for I<Ir

1.0% of I for I>Ir
Start undercurrent,
step 1 and 2
(2 - 150)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir for I<Ir

1.0% of I for I>Ir
Definite time delay
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time start

overcurrent
Reset time start

overcurrent
Operate time start

undercurrent
Reset time start

undercurrent
See table 722 and

table 723
Parameter ranges for customer defined

characteristic no 17:
k: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0
See table 722 and table 723
Voltage level where

voltage memory
takes over
(0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Start overvoltage,
step 1 and 2
(2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur for U<Ur

0.5% of U for U>Ur
Start undervoltage,
step 1 and 2
(2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur for U<Ur

0.5% of U for U>Ur
Operate time, start

overvoltage
Reset time, start

overvoltage
Operate time start

undervoltage
25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Uset

533
Section 10
Function
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Range or value
Accuracy
Reset time start

undervoltage
High and low voltage

limit, voltage
dependent operation
(1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase
1.0% of Ur for U<Ur

1.0% of U for U>Ur
Directional function
Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse
Relay characteristic
angle
(-180 to +180) degrees
2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle
(1 to 90) degrees
2.0 degrees
Reset ratio,
overcurrent
> 95%
Reset ratio,
undercurrent
< 105%
Reset ratio,
overvoltage
> 95%
Reset ratio,
undervoltage
< 105%
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Overcurrent:
Undercurrent:
Overvoltage:
Undervoltage:
534
Section 11
Secondary system supervision
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 11
About this chapter

This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure
supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
11.1
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF

Current circuit supervision
11.1.1
IEC 61850
identification
CCSRDIF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negativesequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of
open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high
voltages will stress the secondary circuit.
Current circuit supervision (CCSRDIF) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to
block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.
11.1.2
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 299.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
535
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of
the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than
the set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSRDIF is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM
will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after
the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function
when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.
IEC05000463 V1 EN
Figure 299:
Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 300.
536
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Slope = 0.8
Operation
area
I MinOp
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN
Figure 300:
Operate characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
11.1.3
Function block
CCSRDIF
I3P*
IREF*
BLOCK
FAIL
ALARM
IEC05000389 V2 EN
Figure 301:
11.1.4
CCSRDIF function block

Table 306:
Name
CCSRDIF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for three phase current input
IREF
GROUP
SIGNAL
TBD
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
537
Section 11
Table 307:
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CCSRDIF Output signals
Name
11.1.5
Table 308:
Name
Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for current circuit failure
Setting parameters
CCSRDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
IBase value for current level detectors
IMinOp
5 - 200
%IB
20
Minimum operate current differential

level in % of IBase
Table 309:
Name
Ip>Block
11.1.6
CCSRDIF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
5 - 500
Unit
Step
%IB
150
Description
Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase
CCSRDIF technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(5-200)% of Ir
10.0% of Ir at I Ir
10.0% of I at I > Ir
Block current
(5-500)% of Ir
5.0% of Ir at I Ir
5.0% of I at I > Ir
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF

Fuse failure supervision
11.2.1
Default
Technical data
Table 310:
11.2
IEC 61850
identification
SDDRFUF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF) is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
538
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise
might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different algorithms,
negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithms and an additional delta
voltage and delta current algorithm.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in
isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence
measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the
negative-sequence current 3I2.
The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly
or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current
3I0.
For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation
modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the
negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure,
which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during
station operations.
11.2.2
11.2.2.1
Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 302:
the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

the zero-sequence current 3I0
the negative sequence current 3I2
the negative sequence voltage 3U2
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and
3I0>, 3U2< and 3I2>.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zerosequence current is below the set value 3I0<.
539
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured

negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured
negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.
A drop off delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.
Sequence Detection
3I0<
CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero
sequence
filter
IL2
3I0
a
b
a>b
100 ms
t
3I2
Negative
sequence
filter
IL3
a
b
3I2<
CurrNegSeq
a>b
100 ms
t
AND
AND
3U0>
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
FuseFailDetNegSeq
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence
filter
UL2
Negative
sequence
filter
UL3
a
b
3U0
a>b
VoltNegSeq
a
b
3U2
a>b
3U2>
IEC10000036 V1 EN
Figure 302:
Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part
The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local
HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.
The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions:
The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal
fufailStarted is not present
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off.
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to
other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
540
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 11
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to
increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the
breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might
operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent
of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of
voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of
the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, synchro-check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.
541
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
intBlock
OR
20 ms
t
BLKTRIP
AND
100 ms
t
All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
AND
AND
SealIn = On
3PH
AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND
OpDUDI = On
OR
5s
t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs
OR
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq
UZsIZs AND UNsINs

OptimZsNs
a
b
OR
OR
AND
a>b
AND
200 ms
t
DeadLineDet1Ph
AND
150 ms
t
MCBOP
All UL > UsealIn<
60 sec
t
VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
BLKZ
BLKU
AND
5 sec
t
AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS
IEC10000033 V1 EN
Figure 303:
Simplified logic diagram for main logic of Fuse failure function
542
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
11.2.2.2
Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 304. The calculation of
the change is based on vector change which means that it detects both amplitude
and phase angle changes. The calculated delta quantities are compared with their
respective set values DI< and DU> and the algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a
sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected in
each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases:
The change in voltage DU

The change in current DI
The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled for a phase:
The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more
than 1.5 cycle
The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU>
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI>
and at least one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting
IPh>
The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high
current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is used
to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line
is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain
followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase
at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and
energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse
failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to be an
important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way
only the first criterion can activate the delta function.
543
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1
One cycle
delay
|DI|
a
b
DI<
UL1
a>b
One cycle
delay
|DU|
a
b
DU>
a
b
UPh>
IL2
a>b
20 ms
t
a>b
AND
1.5 cycle
t
UL2
Same logic as for phase 1
IL3
UL3
Same logic as for phase 1
UL1
a
b
IL1
IPh>
a
b
a<b
a>b
AND
CBCLOSED
UL2
a
b
IL2
AND
a
b
a
b
IL3
a
b
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
UL3
OR
OR
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
FuseFailDetDUDI
IEC10000034 V1 EN
Figure 304:
Simplified logic diagram for DU/DI detection part
544
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
11.2.2.3
Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 305. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to
be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated.
If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated
Dead Line Detection
IL1
a
b
IL2
a
b
IL3
a
b
a<b
AllCurrLow
AND
a<b
a<b
IDLD<
UL1
DeadLineDet1Ph
a
b
UL2
a
b
UL3
a
b
a<b
a<b
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
a<b
DLD1PH
AND
AND
DLD3PH
UDLD<
intBlock
IEC10000035 V1 EN
Figure 305:
11.2.2.4
Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 306. The fuse failure
supervision function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode
selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The
different operation modes are:
Off; The negative and zero sequence function is switched off

UNsINs; Negative sequence is selected
UZsIZs; Zero sequence is selected
545
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
UZsIZs OR UNsINs; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working
in parallel in an OR-condition
UZsIZs AND UNsINs; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and
working in series (AND-condition for operation)
OptimZsNs; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be
activated)
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,
FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is
released, the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal
BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead phase detection,
DeadLineDet1Ph, is activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used for
blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection, synchrocheck, and so on). For blocking of impedance protection functions output BLKZ
shall be used.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase
voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ
signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If
all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On also the output signal 3PH will be activated. The
signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase
voltage is below the set value USealIn<.
If SealIn is set to On fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in
the IED. At start-up (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due to
configuration change) the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory
and re-establishes the conditions present before the shut down. All phase voltages
must became above USealIn< before fuse failure is de-activated and inhibits the
block of different protection functions.
The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above
the setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence
voltage has been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all
phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection)
and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent
of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of
546
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of
the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be
affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection.
The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions
occur:
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off

The input BLOCK is activated
The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as no fuse failure indication
is present
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to
other internal functions of the IED. Through OR gate it can be connected to both
binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output of any of the
protection functions included in the IED and/or trip from external equipments via
binary inputs. When activated for more than 20 ms without any fuse fail detected,
the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim
is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the
breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might
operate.
547
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
intBlock
OR
20 ms
t
BLKTRIP
AND
100 ms
t
All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
AND
AND
SealIn = On
3PH
AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND
OpDUDI = On
OR
5s
t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs
OR
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq
UZsIZs AND UNsINs

OptimZsNs
a
b
OR
OR
AND
a>b
AND
200 ms
t
DeadLineDet1Ph
AND
150 ms
t
MCBOP
All UL > UsealIn<
60 sec
t
VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
BLKZ
BLKU
AND
5 sec
t
AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS
IEC10000033 V1 EN
Figure 306:
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main

logic
548
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
11.2.3
Function block
SDDRFUF
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
CBCLOSED
MCBOP
DISCPOS
BLKTRIP
BLKZ
BLKU
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH
IEC05000700 V3 EN
Figure 307:
11.2.4
SDDRFUF function block

Table 311:
SDDRFUF Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current connection
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
CBCLOSED
BOOLEAN
Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP
BOOLEAN
Active when external MCB opens protected

voltage circuit
DISCPOS
BOOLEAN
Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Blocks operation of function when active
SDDRFUF Output signals
Name
Table 313:
Description
I3P
Table 312:
11.2.5
Default
Type
Description
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU
BOOLEAN
General start of function
3PH
BOOLEAN
Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH
BOOLEAN
Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH
BOOLEAN
Dead line condition in all three phases
Setting parameters
SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base voltage

549
Section 11
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpMode
Off
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
UZsIZs
Operating mode selection
3U0>
1 - 100
%UB
30
Operate level of residual overvoltage

element in % of UBase
3I0<
1 - 100
%IB
10
Operate level of residual undercurrent

element in % of IBase
3U2>
1 - 100
%UB
30
Operate level of neg seq overvoltage

element in % of UBase
3I2<
1 - 100
%IB
10
Operate level of neg seq undercurrent

element in % of IBase
OpDUDI
Off
On
Off
Operation of change based function Off/

On
DU>
1 - 100
%UB
60
Operate level of change in phase voltage

in % of UBase
DI<
1 - 100
%IB
15
Operate level of change in phase current

in % of IBase
UPh>
1 - 100
%UB
70
Operate level of phase voltage in % of

UBase
IPh>
1 - 100
%IB
10
Operate level of phase current in % of

IBase
SealIn
Off
On
On
Seal in functionality Off/On
USealln<
1 - 100
%UB
70
Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in

% of UBase
IDLD<
1 - 100
%IB
Operate level for open phase current

detection in % of IBase
UDLD<
1 - 100
%UB
60
Operate level for open phase voltage

detection in % of UBase
11.2.6
Technical data
Table 314:
SDDRFUF technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence
(1-100)% of UBase
1.0% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence
(1100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
Operate voltage change level
(1100)% of UBase
5.0% of Ur
Operate current change level
(1100)% of IBase
5.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage
(1-100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current
(1-100)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir

550
Section 11
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate phase dead line voltage
(1-100)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current
(1-100)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
25 ms typically at 1 to 0 Ubase
35 ms typically at 0 to 1 Ubase
551
552
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 12
Control
About this chapter

This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their
setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are
included for each function.
12.1
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SESRSYN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
25
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
12.1.1
Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN) function checks
that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at
least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.
For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided.
The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is
used for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchrocheck and lower than
a set maximum level for the synchronizing function.
553
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.1.2
12.1.2.1
Basic functionality
The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares
them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the
actual measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the
output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit
breaker and the closing circuit.
For single circuit breaker and 1 breaker circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage
is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1 breaker circuit
breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of
the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.
12.1.2.2
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the synchronizing
function components such as Synchrocheck, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchrocheck
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for
evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as
phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a
setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.
554
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 12
Control
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference:
FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of
different voltages on the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage
before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The
frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured
and may not exceed the set value.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are
available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as
required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchrocheck function respectively. Input
TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking
conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA,
FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency
difference and phase angle difference conditions are met.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicate that the circuit
breaker has been closed by some other equipment or function than SESRSYN. The
output is activated, if the voltage condition is fulfilled at the same time the phase
angle difference between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than
60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.
555
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND
AND
TSTAUTSY
TSTSC
BLKSC
BLOCK
AND
OR
AND
AUTOSYOK
0-60 s
t
AND
tSCA
UDiffSC
AND
50 ms
t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
FreqDiffA
PhaseDiffA
UDIFFSC
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
PhDiff > 60
AND
32 ms
t
100 ms
AND
INADVCLS
PhDiff < 5
IEC07000114 V3 EN
Figure 308:
Simplified logic diagram for the Synchrocheck function
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set
values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the
voltages are both live. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured
values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of
frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffMax, FreqDiffMin and
UDiffSynch.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum
frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to
allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time.
556
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At
operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the
function reset. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not
fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the functions are, by
mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
function respective of the synchronizing part. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the
function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.
SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH
OFF
ON
TEST MODE
OFF
ON
STARTSYN
AND
BLKSYNCH
OR
AND
S
R
UDiffSynch
50 ms
UHighBusSynch
AND
SYNOK
AND
UHighLineSynch
OR
FreqDiffMax
AND
FreqDiffMin
OR
FreqRateChange
fBus&fLine 5 Hz
PhaseDiff < 15 deg
SYNPROGR
AND
AND
TSTSYNOK
tClose
Pulse
tMax
Synch
SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=closing angle
IEC06000636 V2 EN
Figure 309:
Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation
by the Energizing check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they
are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg
and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg
for line energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The
557
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured
and shall not exceed a set value.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse
supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective
MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function
block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input with connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals
(FIXDSIGN) function block will mean that the setting is done from Parameter
Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp
MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage

transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN
function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck
and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line
and Bus voltages and fuse supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This
is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are the
Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type
contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible
to use an inverter for one of the positions.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars
This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts
B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select
between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed
and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All
other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL
respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.
558
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1 and UB2OKUB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2. ULNOK and ULNFF supervises the fuse for
the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively
be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the
selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is
true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic
diagram is shown in figure 310.
B1QOPEN
B1SEL
AND
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
B2SEL
AND
B2QCLD
AND
bus1Voltage
invalidSelection
busVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
OR
UB2OK
UB2FF
OR
ULN1OK
ULN1FF
OR
AND
OR
AND
selectedFuseOK
AND
AND
USELFAIL
BLOCK
en05000779.vsd
IEC05000779 V1 EN
Figure 310:
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement
Note that with 1 breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in
the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus
breaker and the Tie breakers is described.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck
(Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side
559
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected
either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement.
Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,
LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage.
The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF, and with alternative
Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations
are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1
circuit breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2
Circuit breaker is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2.
If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is
set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure.
This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.
The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is
shown in figure 311 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 312
560
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
LN1QOPEN
LN1QCLD
LN1SEL
AND
B1QOPEN
B1QCLD
LN2SEL
AND
AND
LN2QCLD
AND
invalidSelection
AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND
line1Voltage
lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
OR
UB2OK
UB2FF
OR
OR
ULN1OK
ULN1FF
OR
ULN2OK
ULN2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
USELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000780.vsd
IEC05000780 V1 EN
Figure 311:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement
561
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
LN1QOPEN
LN1QCLD
LN1SEL
AND
B1SEL
1
B1QOPEN
B1QCLD
AND
AND
AND
line1Voltage
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2QCLD
LN2SEL
AND
B2SEL
1
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD
AND
AND
AND
OR
line2Voltage
invalidSelection
lineVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF
UB2OK
UB2FF
OR
AND
OR
OR
ULN1OK
ULN1FF
OR
ULN2OK
ULN2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
USELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000781.vsd
IEC05000781 V1 EN
Figure 312:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.
Fuse failure supervision
External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are
connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN functions
in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be
used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs
labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact
indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.
562
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage
and the ULNOK and ULNFF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them
to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse
failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing
check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the synchrocheck function
requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of
fuse failures.
12.1.3
Function block
SESRSYN
U3PBB1*
SYNOK
U3PBB2*
AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1*
AUTOENOK
U3PLN2*
MANSYOK
BLOCK
MANENOK
BLKSYNCH
TSTSYNOK
BLKSC
TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG
TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN
TSTENOK
B1QCLD
USELFAIL
B2QOPEN
B1SEL
B2QCLD
B2SEL
LN1QOPEN
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN
SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD
SYNFAIL
UB1OK
UOKSYN
UB1FF
UDIFFSYN
UB2OK
FRDIFSYN
UB2FF
FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK
FRDERIVA
ULN1FF
UOKSC
ULN2OK
UDIFFSC
ULN2FF
FRDIFFA
STARTSYN
PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH
FRDIFFM
TSTSC
PHDIFFM
TSTENERG
INADVCLS
AENMODE
UDIFFME
MENMODE
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
IEC10000046 V1 EN
Figure 313:
12.1.4
SESRSYN function block

Table 315:
Name
SESRSYN Input signals

Type
Default
Description
U3PBB1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,

busbar 1
U3PBB2
GROUP
SIGNAL

busbar 2
U3PLN1
GROUP
SIGNAL

line 1

563
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
U3PLN2
GROUP
SIGNAL

line 2
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Block synchronizing
BLKSC
BOOLEAN
Block synchro check
BLKENERG
BOOLEAN
Block energizing check
B1QOPEN
BOOLEAN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to

bus1
B1QCLD
BOOLEAN
Close status for CB or disconnector connected to

bus1
B2QOPEN
BOOLEAN

bus2
B2QCLD
BOOLEAN

bus2
LN1QOPEN
BOOLEAN

line1
LN1QCLD
BOOLEAN

line1
LN2QOPEN
BOOLEAN

line2
LN2QCLD
BOOLEAN

line2
UB1OK
BOOLEAN
Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF
BOOLEAN
Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK
BOOLEAN
Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF
BOOLEAN
Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK
BOOLEAN
Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF
BOOLEAN
Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK
BOOLEAN
Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF
BOOLEAN
Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN
BOOLEAN
Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC
BOOLEAN
Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG
BOOLEAN
Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE
INTEGER
Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE
INTEGER
Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 316:
Name
SESRSYN Output signals

Type
Description
SYNOK
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK
BOOLEAN
Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK
BOOLEAN
Automatic energizing check OK
564
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
MANSYOK
BOOLEAN
Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK
BOOLEAN
Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY
BOOLEAN
Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY
BOOLEAN
Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK
BOOLEAN
Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL
BOOLEAN
Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus1 selected
B2SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus2 selected
LN1SEL
BOOLEAN
Line1 selected
LN2SEL
BOOLEAN
Line2 selected
SYNPROGR
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN
BOOLEAN
Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set

limits
UDIFFSYN
BOOLEAN
Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA
BOOLEAN
Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC
BOOLEAN
Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC
BOOLEAN
Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA
BOOLEAN
Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto

operation
FRDIFFM
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference out of limit for Manual

operation
PHDIFFM
BOOLEAN
Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual

Operation
INADVCLS
BOOLEAN
Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of voltage in p.u
FRDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS
REAL
Bus voltage
ULINE
REAL
Line voltage
MODEAEN
INTEGER
Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN
INTEGER
Selected mode for manual energizing
565
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.1.5
Table 317:
Name
Setting parameters
SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
CBConfig
No voltage sel.
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
No voltage sel.
Select CB configuration
UBaseBus
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
400.000
Base value for busbar voltage settings
UBaseLine
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
400.000
Base value for line voltage settings
PhaseShift
-180 - 180
Deg
Phase shift
URatio
0.040 - 25.000
0.001
1.000
Voltage ratio
OperationSynch
Off
On
Off
Operation for synchronizing function Off/

On
UHighBusSynch
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing

in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit line for synchronizing

in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSynch
0.02 - 0.50
pu
0.01
0.10
Voltage difference limit for synchronizing

in p.u
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
Hz
0.001
0.010
Minimum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing
FreqDiffMax
0.050 - 0.250
Hz
0.001
0.200
Maximum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
Hz/s
0.001
0.300
Maximum allowed frequency rate of

change
tBreaker
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.080
Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
600.00
Resets synch if no close has been made

before set time
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Minimum time to accept synchronizing

conditions
OperationSC
Off
On
On
Operation for synchronism check

function Off/On
UHighBusSC
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck

in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck

in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSC
0.02 - 0.50
pu
0.01
0.15
Voltage difference limit in p.u
FreqDiffA
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
Frequency difference limit between bus

and line Auto
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
Frequency difference limit between bus

and line Manual
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
Phase angle difference limit between

bus and line Auto
566
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Step
Default
PhaseDiffM
Values (Range)
5.0 - 90.0
Unit
Deg
1.0
25.0
Description
Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Manual
tSCA
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay output for synchrocheck

Manual
AutoEnerg
Off
DLLB
DBLL
Both
DBLL
Automatic energizing check mode
ManEnerg
Off
DLLB
DBLL
Both
Both
Manual energizing check mode
ManEnergDBDL
Off
On
Off
Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
UHighBusEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit bus for energizing

check in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit line for energizing

check in % of UBaseLine
ULowBusEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
%UBB
1.0
40.0
Voltage low limit bus for energizing

check in % of UBaseBus
ULowLineEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
%UBL
1.0
40.0
Voltage low limit line for energizing

check in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg
50.0 - 180.0
%UB
1.0
115.0
Maximum voltage for energizing in % of

UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for automatic energizing

check
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for manual energizing check
567
Section 12
Control
Table 318:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SelPhaseBus1
Phase L1 for
busbar1
Phase L2 for
busbar1
Phase L3 for
busbar1
Phase L1L2 for
busbar1
Phase L2L3 for
busbar1
Phase L3L1 for
busbar1
Pos. sequence for
busbar1
Phase L1 for
busbar1
Select phase for busbar1
SelPhaseBus2
Phase L1 for
busbar2
Phase L2 for
busbar2
Phase L3 for
busbar2
Phase L1L2 for
busbar2
Phase L2L3 for
busbar2
Phase L3L1 for
busbar2
Pos. sequence for
busbar2
Phase L1 for
busbar2
Select phase for busbar2
SelPhaseLine1
Phase L1 for line1

Phase L2 for line1
Phase L3 for line1
Phase L1L2 for
line1
Phase L2L3 for
line1
Phase L3L1 for
line1
Pos. sequence for
line1
Phase L1 for line1
Select phase for line1
SelPhaseLine2
Phase L1 for line2

Phase L2 for line2
Phase L3 for line2
Phase L1L2 for
line2
Phase L2L3 for
line2
Phase L3L1 for
line2
Pos. sequence for
line2
Phase L1 for line2
Select phase for line2
568
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.1.6
Technical data
Table 319:
SESRSYN technical data
Function
12.2
Range or value
Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus
Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline
(0.40-25.000) % of UBaseBus
Voltage high limit for

synchronizing and
synchrocheck
(50.0-120.0)% of UBaseBus and

UBaseLIne
0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U >Ur
Reset ratio, synchrocheck
> 95%
Frequency difference limit

between bus and line
(0.003-1.000) Hz
2.0 mHz
Phase angle difference limit

(5.0-90.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Voltage difference limit

(0.02-0.5) p.u
0.5% of Ur
Time delay output for

synchrocheck
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Voltage high limit for

energizing check
(50.0-120.0)% of UBaseBus and

UBaseLIne
0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U >Ur
Reset ratio, voltage high limit
> 95%
Voltage low limit for

energizing check
(10.0-80.0)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, voltage low limit
< 105%
Maximum voltage for

energizing
(50.0-180.0)% of UBaseBus and/

or UBaseLIne
0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U >Ur
Time delay for energizing

check
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time for

synchrocheck function
160 ms typically
Operate time for energizing

function
80 ms typically
and UBaseLIne
Autorecloser SMBRREC
Function Description
Autorecloser
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SMBRREC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
79
O->I
SYMBOL-L V1 EN
569
Section 12
Control
12.2.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
The autorecloser (SMBRREC) function provides high-speed and/or delayed autoreclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
Up to five reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The first
attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults
respectively.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A
priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only
close if the fault proved to be transient.
Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck
function.
12.2.2
12.2.2.1
Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding
of the functionality.
12.2.2.2
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting
parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation = On, the
function is activated while with the setting Operation = Off the function is
deactivated. With the setting Operation = External ctrl, the activation/deactivation
is made by input signal pulses, for example, from a control system.
When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).
Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At
this point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the
output signal READY on the SMBRREC function block is activated (high).
12.2.2.3
Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase(0), 1/2/3ph(1),
1/2ph(2), 1ph+1*2ph(3), 1/2ph+1*3ph(4), 1ph+1*2/3ph(5). The selected mode
can be read as integer as per above list on output MODE.
As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for
example from function block B16I to input MODEINT.
Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph,
5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph.
570
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input
MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.
12.2.2.4
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle

The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. It
should be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for
different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection
stages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used.
For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be
met. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:
CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
CBPOS: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and
start was applied
No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.
After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is
set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.
To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,
one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START
and set a parameter StartByCBOpen = On and CBAuxContType = NormClosed
(normally closed). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip
commands to input INHIBIT.
The logic for switching the auto-recloser On/Off and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 314. The following should be considered:
Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or On. External ctrl offers
the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,
communication commands to the same inputs, and so on.
SMBRREC is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the
function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In
both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the
function. START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes
its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and
CBREADY.
571
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Operation:On
Operation:Off
Operation:External Ctrl
AND
ON
AND
OFF
START
STARTHS
OR
OR
CBREADY
CBPOS
initiate
OR
autoInitiate
TRSOTF
SETON
AND S
OR
Additional conditions
AND
start
120 ms
t
CB Closed
AND
AND S
AND
tCBClosedMin
R
t
AND
Blocking conditions
OR
AND
READY
Inhibit condistions
count 0
en05000782.vsd
IEC05000782 V1 EN
Figure 314:
12.2.2.5
Auto-reclosing Off/On and start
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase autoreclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,
and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the autoreclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is
activated in connection with the input START, the auto-reclosing open time for twophase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility
for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when
required. It is activated by input STARTHS.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the
normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel
for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant
time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open
time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter
Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
12.2.2.6
Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the
572
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off, a long

trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input
INHIBIT.
Extended t1
PLCLOST
initiate
AND
OR
AND
AND
Extend t1
tTrip
t
start
AND
AND
long duration
(block SMBRREC)
IEC05000783 V2 EN
Figure 315:
Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
Reclosing checks and the reclaim timer
When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals
are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In
three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is
possible to use a synchrocheck function in the same physical device or an external
one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function
input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set
to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-check
function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-check,
or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At singlephase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by
STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is
disregarded.
By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the
readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing
command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB
ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with
after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition
was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the
CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence.
573
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The synchro-check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.
The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after
which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is
treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB
closing command is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state
in the reclosing sequence.
574
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
t1 1Ph
t
From logic for

reclosing
programs
1P2PTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
3PT2TO
3PT3TO
3PT4TO
3PT5TO
SYNC
initiate
CBREADY
OR
"SMBRREC Open time" timers
t1 2Ph
t
1P2PTO
OR
t1 3Ph HS
t
3PHSTO
t1 3Ph
t
3PT1TO
AND
OR
Pulse AR
AND
AND
AND
OR
SMRREC State
Control
tSync
t
AND
Blocking out
COUNTER
CL
Pulse SMBRREC (above)

OR
LOGIC
reclosing
programs
TR2P
TR3P
start
initiate
AND
tReclaim
t
Reclaim Timer On
0
1
2
3
4
5
1PT1
2PT1
3PHS
3PT1
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
INPROGR
OR
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Blocking out
OR
INHIBIT
tInhibit
t
Inhibit (internal)
IEC05000784 V2 EN
Figure 316:
Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers
Pulsing of the CB closing command
The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter

tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting
described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter
575
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut
(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 317
When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is
incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total
number of reclosing commands issued.
pulse
tPulse
**)
initiate
AND
CLOSECB
OR
50 ms
1PT1
AND
2PT1
AND
3PT1
AND
3PT2
AND
3PT3
AND
3PT4
AND
3PT5
AND
RSTCOUNT
counter
COUNT1P
counter
COUNT2P
counter
COUNT3P1
counter
COUNT3P2
counter
COUNT3P3
counter
COUNT3P4
counter
COUNT3P5
counter
COUNTAR
**) Only if "CutPulse" = On

en05000785.vsd
IEC05000785 V1 EN
Figure 317:
Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal
If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START
or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The
timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the
number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence
576
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
will be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets
but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing.
Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked.
The signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can
also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk
should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB
does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the
output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
initiate
block start
AND
OR
AND
shot 0
UNSUCCL
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
Pulse AR (Closing)
CBPOS
OR
CBclosed
tUnsucCl
AND
AND
eno5000786.vsd
IEC05000786 V1 EN
Figure 318:
Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing
Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence
The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following

reclosing shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the
protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting
parameter AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function
to proceed without a new start.
577
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tAutoContWait
t
AND
CLOSECB
AND
S Q
R
AND
CBPOS
CBClosed
OR
START
OR
initiate
en05000787.vsd
IEC05000787 V1 EN
Figure 319:
Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5
Start of reclosing from CB open information
If a user wants to apply starting of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of

from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting
mode is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to
block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically, one also set
CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC
(normally closed) to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from
CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated
and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing
sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping
and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.
578
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
StartByCBOpen = On
1
START
AND
STARTHS
AND
100 ms
start
AND
100 ms
AND
en05000788.vsd
IEC05000788 V1 EN
Figure 320:
12.2.2.7
Pulsing of the start inputs
Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient
and permanent faults are shown below in figures 321 to 324.
Fault
CB POS
Closed
Open
Closed
CB READY
START
SYNC
(Trip)
tReclaim
READY
INPROG
1PT1
ACTIVE
CLOSE CB
t1 1Ph
tPulse
PREP3P
SUCCL
Time
en04000196-2-en.vsd
IEC04000196 V2 EN
Figure 321:
Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing
579
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Fault
CB POS
Closed
Open
START
Open
CB READY
(Trip)
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
3PT1
t1 3Ph
3PT2
t2 3Ph
tReclaim
ACTIVE
CLOSE CB
tPulse
tPulse
PREP3P
UNSUCCL
Time
en04000197.vsd
IEC04000197 V1 EN
Figure 322:
Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing
580
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-START
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
t1s
AR01-CLOSECB
AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim
en04000198.vsd
IEC04000198 V1 EN
Figure 323:
Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase

single-shot reclosing
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-START
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
AR01-CLOSECB
t1s
t2
AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim
en04000199.vsd
IEC04000199 V1 EN
Figure 324:
Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,

two-shot reclosing
581
Section 12
Control
12.2.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
SMBRREC
ON
BLOCKED
OFF
SETON
BLKON
READY
BLKOFF
ACTIVE
RESET
SUCCL
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
START
INPROGR
STARTHS
1PT1
TRSOTF
2PT1
SKIPHS
3PT1
ZONESTEP
3PT2
TR2P
3PT3
TR3P
3PT4
THOLHOLD
3PT5
CBREADY
PERMIT1P
CBPOS
PREP3P
PLCLOST
CLOSECB
SYNC
WFMASTER
WAIT
COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT
COUNT2P
MODEINT
COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE
IEC06000189 V2 EN
Figure 325:
12.2.4
SMBRREC function block

Table 320:
Name
SMBRREC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
OFF
BOOLEAN
Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
BLKON
BOOLEAN
Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF
BOOLEAN
Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET
BOOLEAN
Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT
BOOLEAN
Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START
BOOLEAN
Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip

signal
STARTHS
BOOLEAN
Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF
BOOLEAN
Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from

SOTF
SKIPHS
BOOLEAN
Will skip the high speed shot and continue on

delayed shots
ZONESTEP
BOOLEAN
Coordination between local AR and down stream

devices
TR2P
BOOLEAN
Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P
BOOLEAN
Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping

occurred
582
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
THOLHOLD
BOOLEAN
Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY
BOOLEAN
CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow

start / close
CBPOS
BOOLEAN
Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST
BOOLEAN
Power line carrier or other form of permissive sig

nal lost
SYNC
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT
BOOLEAN
Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT
BOOLEAN
Resets all counters
MODEINT
INTEGER
Integer input used to set the reclosingMode,

alternative to setting
Table 321:
Name
SMBRREC Output signals

Type
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
The AR is in blocked state
SETON
BOOLEAN
The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY
BOOLEAN
Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new

sequence
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL
BOOLEAN
Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL
BOOLEAN
Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the

reclaim time
INPROGR
BOOLEAN
Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open

time
1PT1
BOOLEAN
Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1
BOOLEAN
Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1
BOOLEAN
Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2
BOOLEAN
3PT3
BOOLEAN
3PT4
BOOLEAN
3PT5
BOOLEAN
PERMIT1P
BOOLEAN
Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P
BOOLEAN
Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip

operation
CLOSECB
BOOLEAN
Closing command for CB
WFMASTER
BOOLEAN
Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential

reclosing
COUNT1P
INTEGER
Counting the number of single-phase reclosing

shots
COUNT2P
INTEGER
Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1
INTEGER
Counting the number of three-phase reclosing

shot 1
583
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
12.2.5
Table 322:
Name
Type
Description
COUNT3P2
INTEGER

shot 2
COUNT3P3
INTEGER

shot 3
COUNT3P4
INTEGER

shot 4
COUNT3P5
INTEGER

shot 5
COUNTAR
INTEGER
Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE
INTEGER
Integer output for reclosing mode
Setting parameters
SMBRREC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
External ctrl
On
External ctrl
Off, ExternalCtrl, On
ARMode
3 phase
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
1/2/3ph
The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
t1 1Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Open time for shot 1, single-phase
t1 3Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000
Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing

3ph
t1 3PhHS
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Open time for shot 1, high speed

reclosing 3ph
tReclaim
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Duration of the reclaim time
tSync
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Maximum trip pulse duration
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Duration of the circuit breaker closing

pulse
tCBClosedMin
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
Min time that CB must be closed before

new sequence allows
tUnsucCl
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Wait time for CB before indicating

Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority
None
Low
High
None
Priority selection between adjacent

terminals None/Low/High
tWaitForMaster
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Maximum wait time for release from

Master
584
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 323:
SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfShots
1
2
3
4
5
Max number of reclosing shots 1-5
StartByCBOpen
Off
On
Off
To be set ON if AR is to be started by
CB open position
CBAuxContType
NormClosed
NormOpen
NormOpen
Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO

for CBPOS input
CBReadyType
CO
OCO
CO
Select type of circuit breaker ready

signal CO/OCO
t1 2Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Open time for shot 1, two-phase
t2 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t4 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t5 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Extended t1
Off
On
Off
Extended open time at loss of

permissive channel Off/On
tExtended t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
3Ph Dead time is extended with this

value at loss of perm ch
tInhibit
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Inhibit reclosing reset time
CutPulse
Off
On
Off
Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On
Follow CB
Off
On
Off
Advance to next shot if CB has been

closed during dead time
AutoCont
Off
On
Off
Continue with next reclosing-shot if

breaker did not close
tAutoContWait
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Wait time after close command before

proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk
NoCBCheck
CB check
NoCBCheck
Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by

checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl
Off
On
Off
Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
ZoneSeqCoord
Off
On
Off
Coordination of down stream devices to

local prot units AR
585
Section 12
Control
12.2.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 324:
SMBRREC technical data
Function
Number of autoreclosing shots
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 1Ph
shot 1 - t1 2Ph
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3PhDld
Range or value
1-5
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
shot 2 - t2
shot 3 - t3
shot 4 - t4
shot 5 - t5
(0.00-6000.00) s
Extended autorecloser open time
(0.000-60.000) s
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync
(0.00-6000.00) s
Maximum trip pulse duration
(0.000-60.000) s
Inhibit reset time
(0.000-60.000) s
Reclaim time
(0.00-6000.00) s
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR

becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle
(0.00-6000.00) s
Circuit breaker closing pulse length
(0.000-60.000) s
CB check time before unsuccessful
(0.00-6000.00) s
Wait for master release
(0.00-6000.00) s
Wait time after close command before

proceeding to next shot
(0.000-60.000) s
12.3
Apparatus control APC
12.3.1
Introduction
Accuracy
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate
is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not
supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the
resulting position is supervised.
12.3.2
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
586
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic

sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a
Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function
module that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures
consistency in the process information used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and
supervised by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type
of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same
software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an
interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of
interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is
intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function
blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay.
These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the
switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard
configuration. These four types are:
Bay control QCBAY

Switch controller SCSWI
Circuit breaker SXCBR
Circuit switch SXSWI
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The functions
Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle
the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation
input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control
function. The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and
setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
12.3.3
Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 325 describes vendor specific cause values in
addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the
cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An
output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit
breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the
error during the command.
587
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 325:
Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Attribute value
Defined in IEC 61850
Description
Supported
no error
serviceError-type
blocked-by-switchinghierarchy
select-failed
invalid-position
position-reached
parameter-change-inexecution
step-limit
blocked-by-mode
blocked-by-process
10
blocked-by-interlocking
11
blocked-bysynchrocheck
12
command-already-inexecution
13
blocked-by-health
14
1-of-n-control
15
abortion-by-cancel
16
time-limit-over
17
abortion-by-trip
18
object-not-selected
19
Not in use
588
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Attribute value
Description
-20
Not in use
-21
Not in use
-23
blocked-for-command
-24
blocked-for-opencommand
-25
blocked-for-closecommand
-26
Not in use
-27
Not in use
-28
Not in use
-29
Not in use
-30
long-operation-time
-31
switch-not-start-moving
-32
persisting-intermediatestate
-33
switch-returned-to-initialposition
-34
switch-in-bad-state
-35
not-expected-finalposition
Vendor specific
12.3.4
Bay control QCBAY
12.3.4.1
Introduction
Supported
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.
12.3.4.2
The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is not defined in the IEC
6185081 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch
control functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.
Local panel switch
The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The
switch connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The
positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/
remote level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally
589
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
situated on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the
switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards.
When the switch is mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the
function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local
level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the
PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to
operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch,
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted
Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/
remote switch position according to table 326. In addition, there is one
configuration parameter that affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter
AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO
value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local and remote
level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the
PSTO value shows the actual state of switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible
to control anything.
Table 326:
Local panel switch
positions
PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions

PSTO value
AllPSTOValid
(configuration
parameter)
Possible locations that shall be able to

operate
0 = Off
--
Not possible to operate
1 = Local
FALSE
Local Panel
1 = Local
TRUE
Local or Remote level without any

priority
2 = Remote
FALSE
Remote level
2 = Remote
TRUE
Local or Remote level without any

priority
3 = Faulty
--
Not possible to operate
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
590
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
6185081). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are
rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
12.3.4.3
Function block
QCBAY
LR_OFF
LR_LOC
LR_REM
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
PSTO
UPD_BLKD
CMD_BLKD
LOC
REM
IEC10000048 V1 EN
Figure 326:
12.3.4.4
QCBAY function block

Table 327:
Name
QCBAY Input signals

Type
Default
Description
LR_OFF
BOOLEAN
External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC
BOOLEAN
External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM
BOOLEAN
External Local/Remote switch is in Remote

position
LR_VALID
BOOLEAN
Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal to block the command
Table 328:
Name
QCBAY Output signals

Type
Description
PSTO
INTEGER
Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Function is blocked for commands
LOC
BOOLEAN
Local operation allowed
REM
BOOLEAN
Remote operation allowed
591
Section 12
Control
12.3.4.5
Table 329:
Name
AllPSTOValid
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Priority
No priority
Unit
-
Step
-
12.3.5
Local/Remote switch
12.3.5.1
Introduction
Default
Priority
Description
Priority of originators
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied
via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control
(QCBAY) function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to
choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external
hardware switch connected via binary inputs.
12.3.5.2
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 327, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is
used. When a local HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in
the configuration. The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the
output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).
592
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
REM
BL_ UPD
BL_ CMD
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
REM
BL_ UPD
BL_ CMD
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO 10
HMICTR 10
PSTO 11
HMICTR 11
PSTO 12
HMICTR 12
IEC10000052 V1 EN
Figure 327:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the
local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen
page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote
position to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
593
Section 12
Control
12.3.5.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
LOCCTRL
REMCTRL
LHMICTRL
OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
VALID
IEC05000360 V2 EN
Figure 328:
PSTO1
PSTO2
PSTO3
PSTO4
PSTO5
PSTO6
PSTO7
PSTO8
PSTO9
PSTO10
PSTO11
PSTO12
LOCREM function block
LOCREMCTRL
HMICTR1
HMICTR2
HMICTR3
HMICTR4
HMICTR5
HMICTR6
HMICTR7
HMICTR8
HMICTR9
HMICTR10
HMICTR11
HMICTR12
IEC05000361 V2 EN
Figure 329:
12.3.5.4
LOCREMCTRL function block

Table 330:
Name
LOCREM Input signals

Type
Default
Description
CTRLOFF
BOOLEAN
Disable control
LOCCTRL
BOOLEAN
Local in control
REMCTRL
BOOLEAN
Remote in control
LHMICTRL
INTEGER
LHMI control
Table 331:
Name
LOCREM Output signals

Type
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
Control is disabled
LOCAL
BOOLEAN
Local control is activated
REMOTE
BOOLEAN
Remote control is activated
VALID
BOOLEAN
Outputs are valid
594
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 332:
LOCREMCTRL Input signals
Name
Type
INTEGER
PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2
INTEGER
PSTO3
INTEGER
PSTO4
INTEGER
PSTO5
INTEGER
PSTO6
INTEGER
PSTO7
INTEGER
PSTO8
INTEGER
PSTO9
INTEGER
PSTO10
INTEGER
PSTO11
INTEGER
PSTO12
INTEGER
LOCREMCTRL Output signals
Name
Table 334:
Description
PSTO1
Table 333:
12.3.5.5
Default
Type
Description
HMICTR1
INTEGER
Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2
INTEGER
HMICTR3
INTEGER
HMICTR4
INTEGER
HMICTR5
INTEGER
HMICTR6
INTEGER
HMICTR7
INTEGER
HMICTR8
INTEGER
HMICTR9
INTEGER
HMICTR10
INTEGER
HMICTR11
INTEGER
HMICTR12
INTEGER
Setting parameters
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name
ControlMode
12.3.6
Values (Range)
Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Internal LR-switch
Description
Control mode for internal/external LRswitch
Switch controller SCSWI
595
Section 12
Control
12.3.6.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may
handle and operate on one three-phase device.
12.3.6.2
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation.
The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.
Control handling
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The
control model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the
"SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is
supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of
position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the
enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for
the IEC 61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the
function block and used for example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual
position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible
to execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the
parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad
state no execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution
command is sent independent of the position value.
Evaluation of position
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
596
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI.

With the group signal connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and
quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
All switches in open position:
switch control position = open
All switches in close position:
switch control position = close
One switch =open, two switches= close (or

inversely):
switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in intermediate position:
switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will
change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole
discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance
situation, that is, the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time
longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause"
values from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch
(SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active,
but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.
Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions
The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and
the synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck
597
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result
from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the
operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the
synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch
function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI
will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see figure 330. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision
of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 334.
SCSWI
EXE_CL
SXCBR
OR
CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECB
Synchro
check
Synchronizing
function
IEC09000209 V1 EN
Figure 330:
Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the
execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command
execution after the selection of the object to operate.
598
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
select
execute command
tSelect
timer
t1
t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause'

is set
en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN
Figure 331:
tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback
reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT
command termination
tResResponse
timer
t1
t1>tResResponse, then
1-of-n-control in 'cause'
is set
en05000093.vsd
IEC05000093 V1 EN
Figure 332:
tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see figure 333.
599
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination
position
open
close
tExecutionFB
timer
t1>tExecutionFB, then
long-operation-time in
'cause' is set
t1
* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094.vsd
IEC05000094 V1 EN
Figure 333:
tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
START_SY
t1
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing
t2
t2>tSynchronizing, then
blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
IEC05000095 V1 EN
Figure 334:
tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
600
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.3.6.3
Function block
SCSWI
BLOCK
PSTO
L_SEL
L_OPEN
L_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
BL_CMD
RES_GRT
RES_EXT
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS1
XPOS2
XPOS3
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SELECTED
RES_RQ
START_SY
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
POLEDISC
CMD_BLK
L_CAUSE
XOUT
POS_INTR
IEC05000337 V2 EN
Figure 335:
12.3.6.4
SCSWI function block

Table 335:
Name
SCSWI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Operator place selection
L_SEL
BOOLEAN
Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Used for local automation function
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT
BOOLEAN
Positive acknowledge that all reservations are

made
RES_EXT
BOOLEAN
Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK
BOOLEAN
Closing is permitted at set to true by the

synchrocheck
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Enables close operation
XPOS1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
XPOS2
GROUP
SIGNAL
XPOS3
GROUP
SIGNAL
601
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 336:
SCSWI Output signals
Name
12.3.6.5
Table 337:
Name
Type
Description
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
Execute command for close direction
SELECTED
BOOLEAN
Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ
BOOLEAN
Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY
BOOLEAN
Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION
INTEGER
Position indication
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Open position indication
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Closed position indication
POLEDISC
BOOLEAN
The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after

a set time
CMD_BLK
BOOLEAN
Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
Latest value of the error indication during command
XOUT
BOOLEAN
Execution information to XCBR/XSWI
POS_INTR
BOOLEAN
Stopped in intermediate position
Setting parameters
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
SBO Enh
Specifies control model type
PosDependent
Always permitted
Not perm at 00/11
Always permitted
Permission to operate depending on the

position
tSelect
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
30.00
Maximum time between select and

execute signals
tResResponse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Allowed time from reservation request to

reservation granted
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
10.00
Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil

close conditions
tSynchronizing
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
0.00
Supervision time to get the signal

synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
30.00
Maximum time from command execution

to termination
tPoleDiscord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Allowed time to have discrepancy

between the poles
12.3.7
Circuit breaker SXCBR
602
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.3.7.1
Introduction
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the
switching operation and position.
12.3.7.2
The users of the Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is other functions such as for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC
61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function
executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous
conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard
level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher
level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from
protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is
described in figure 336.
From I/O
E
RU
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 336:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example,
operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure and so on.
603
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for
immediate command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for
immediate command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then
use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 337 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
604
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 337:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 338 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect
on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 338:
Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
605
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and
CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
shown in figure 339 .
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 339:
Open command with open position indication
606
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.3.7.3
Function block
SXCBR
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
TR_OPEN
TR_CLOSE
RS_CNT
XIN
XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SUBSTED
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
TR_POS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
IEC05000338 V2 EN
Figure 340:
12.3.7.4
SXCBR function block

Table 338:
Name
SXCBR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Resets the operation counter
XIN
BOOLEAN
Execution information from CSWI
Table 339:
Name
SXCBR Output signals

Type
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
Group signal for XCBR output
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED
BOOLEAN
Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands

607
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
12.3.7.5
Table 340:
Name
Type
Description
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION
INTEGER
Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus closed position
TR_POS
INTEGER
Truck position indication
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
Operation counter value
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
Setting parameters
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
0.100
Supervision time for the apparatus to

move after a command
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
Output resets when a new correct end

position is reached
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for close command
SuppressMidPos
Off
On
On
Mid-position is suppressed during the

time tIntermediate
12.3.8
Circuit switch SXSWI
12.3.8.1
Introduction
Default
Description
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via output
boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
12.3.8.2
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) is other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions.
Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs
the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value.
608
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If
the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in
figure 341.
From I/O
E
RU
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 341:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example,
operators place, protection functions, autorecloser and so on.
The blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for
immediate command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for
immediate command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
609
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 342 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 342:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 343 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect
on both execute output pulses.
610
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 343:
Execute output pulse
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and
CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
611
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 344:
12.3.8.3
Open command with open position indication
Function block
SXSWI
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
RS_CNT
XIN
XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SUBSTED
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
IEC05000339 V2 EN
Figure 345:
12.3.8.4
SXSWI function block

Table 341:
Name
SXSWI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O

612
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Resets the operation counter
XIN
BOOLEAN
Execution information from CSWI
SXSWI Output signals
Name
Table 343:
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 342:
12.3.8.5
Default
POSCLOSE
Type
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
Group signal for XSWI output
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED
BOOLEAN
Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION
INTEGER
Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
Operation counter value
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
Setting parameters
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Supervision time for the apparatus to

move after a command
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
15.000
Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
Output resets when a new correct end

position is reached
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType
Load Break
Disconnector
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
Disconnector
1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
SuppressMidPos
Off
On
On
Mid-position is suppressed during the

time tIntermediate
12.3.9
Step
Default
Description
Bay reserve QCRSV
613
Section 12
Control
12.3.9.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking
information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.
12.3.9.2
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function
starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the
own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible
to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the
own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller
(SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and
V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal
EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
Reservation request of own bay
If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to
know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with
the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the
number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of
the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already
is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output
signal RESERVED.
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is
connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command
sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the
"cause" signal.
Reservation of other bays
When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay
that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If
not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and
wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done
by activating the output RES_BAYS.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.
614
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Reservation request from another bay
When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped
into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input
RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the
acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the
bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
Blocking and overriding of reservation
If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is

blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay.
This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the
OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the
external acknowledge.
Bay with more than eight apparatuses
If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight
apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 346. If more then one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
615
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
IEC05000088 V2 EN
Figure 346:
12.3.9.3
Connection of two QCRSV function blocks
Function block
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_RQ1
RES_RQ2
RES_RQ3
RES_RQ4
RES_RQ5
RES_RQ6
RES_RQ7
RES_RQ8
BLK_RES
OVERRIDE
RES_DATA
RES_GRT1
RES_GRT2
RES_GRT3
RES_GRT4
RES_GRT5
RES_GRT6
RES_GRT7
RES_GRT8
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340 V2 EN
Figure 347:
QCRSV function block
616
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.3.9.4

Table 344:
Name
QCRSV Input signals

Type
Default
Description
EXCH_IN
INTEGER
Used for exchange signals between different

BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1
BOOLEAN
Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ3
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ4
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ5
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ6
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ7
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ8
BOOLEAN
BLK_RES
BOOLEAN
Reservation is not possible and the output signals

are reset
OVERRIDE
BOOLEAN
Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA
INTEGER
Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 345:
Name
QCRSV Output signals

Type
Description
RES_GRT1
BOOLEAN
Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to

operate
RES_GRT2
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT3
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT4
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT5
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT6
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT7
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT8
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_BAYS
BOOLEAN
Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B
BOOLEAN
Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED
BOOLEAN
Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER

BayRes blocks
617
Section 12
Control
12.3.9.5
Table 346:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tCancelRes
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
10.000
Supervision time for canceling the

reservation
ParamRequest1
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the own bay only, at

selection of apparatus 1
ParamRequest2
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

ParamRequest3
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

ParamRequest4
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

ParamRequest5
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

ParamRequest6
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

ParamRequest7
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

ParamRequest8
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

12.3.10
Reservation input RESIN
12.3.10.1
Introduction
Description
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays
(up to 60 instances are available).
12.3.10.2
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic
conditions. The logic diagram in figure 348 shows how the output signals are
created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block
representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.
618
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
EXCH_IN
INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
BAY_ACK
1
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
&
BAY_VAL
1
RE_RQ_B
BAY_RES
&
V _RE_RQ
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN
Figure 348:
Logic diagram for RESIN
Figure 349 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN
modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay"
used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last
RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles
the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the
first RESIN module in the chain has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use
of instance number one of the function block RESIN, where the input EXCH_IN is
set to #5, but is hidden for the user.
619
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay 1
Bay 2
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay n
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
QCRSV
RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN
Figure 349:
12.3.10.3
Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN
Function block
RESIN1
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000341 V2 EN
Figure 350:
RESIN1 function block
RESIN2
EXCH_IN
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807 V1 EN
Figure 351:
RESIN2 function block
620
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.3.10.4

Table 347:
Name
RESIN1 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BAY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.

from this bay
BAY_VAL
BOOLEAN
The reserv. and acknow. signals from another

bay are valid
BAY_RES
BOOLEAN
Request from other bay to reserve this bay
Table 348:
Name
RESIN1 Output signals

Type
Description
ACK_F_B
BOOLEAN
All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay
ANY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay
VALID_TX
BOOLEAN
The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays

are valid
RE_RQ_B
BOOLEAN
V_RE_RQ
BOOLEAN
Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER

ResIn blocks
Table 349:
Name
RESIN2 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
EXCH_IN
INTEGER

ResIn blocks
BAY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.

from this bay
BAY_VAL
BOOLEAN
The reserv. and acknow. signals from another

bay are valid
BAY_RES
BOOLEAN
Table 350:
Name
RESIN2 Output signals

Type
Description
ACK_F_B
BOOLEAN
All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay
ANY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from

this bay
VALID_TX
BOOLEAN
The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays

are valid
RE_RQ_B
BOOLEAN
V_RE_RQ
BOOLEAN
Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER

ResIn blocks
621
Section 12
Control
12.3.10.5
Table 351:
Name
FutureUse
Table 352:
Name
FutureUse
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Bay in use
Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future
use
RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use
Unit
-
12.4
Interlocking
12.4.1
Introduction
Step
-
Default
Bay in use
Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future
use
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage

switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to
prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each
IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.
12.4.2
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control
IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Introduction") is used to ensure that HV
apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking
condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the
operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data
on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection.
Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of
switching devices that may affect it.
622
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a
bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function
and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between
standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level
interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:
Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

Interlocking
modules in
other bays
Interlocking
module
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXCBR
Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
IEC04000526 V1 EN
Figure 352:
Interlocking module on bay level
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
Unearthed busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid
Figure 353 illustrates the data exchange principle.
623
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Station bus
Bay 1
Bay n
WA1 not earthed

WA2 not earthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn
Bus coupler
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed
...
..
WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 not earthed

WA2 not earthed

in other bay
WA1
WA2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QA1
QA1
QB9
QB9
QB2
QB1
QC1
QC2
QA1
en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN
Figure 353:
Data exchange between interlocking modules
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and

earthing switches are always identical.
Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where
they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So
a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If
there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs
must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example,
without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a
section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the
earthing switch operation is concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage
systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if
the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other
closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is
completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed
connections, or if they are earthed on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing
624
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between

CB and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:
Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add
these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at
the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations
ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
12.4.3
Logical node for interlocking SCILO
12.4.3.1
Introduction
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.
12.4.3.2
Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a
defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this
case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be
true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are
enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical
nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals
625
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node
Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.
SCILO
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
=1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
&
EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd
IEC04000525 V1 EN
Figure 354:
12.4.3.3
SCILO function logic diagram
Function block
SCILO
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
IEC05000359 V2 EN
Figure 355:
12.4.3.4

Table 353:
Name
SCILO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN
BOOLEAN
Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN
BOOLEAN
Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 354:
Name
12.4.4
SCILO function block
SCILO Output signals

Type
Description
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is

enabled
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is

enabled
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES
626
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.4.1
Introduction
The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one
busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 356.
QC
en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN
Figure 356:
12.4.4.2
Switchyard layout BB_ES
Function block
BB_ES
QC_OP
QC_CL
BB_DC_OP
VP_BB_DC
EXDU_BB
QCREL
QCITL
BBESOPTR
BBESCLTR
IEC05000347 V2 EN
Figure 357:
12.4.4.3
BB_ES function block
Logic diagram
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC
BB_DC_OP
EXDU_BB
&
QCREL
QCITL
QC_OP
QC_CL
BBESOPTR
BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
IEC04000546 V1 EN
12.4.4.4

Table 355:
Name
BB_ES Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QC_OP
BOOLEAN
Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL
BOOLEAN
Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP
BOOLEAN
All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC
BOOLEAN
Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part

are valid
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays with disc on this

busbar part
627
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 356:
BB_ES Output signals
Name
Type
Description
QCREL
BOOLEAN
Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL
BOOLEAN
Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR
BOOLEAN
QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR
BOOLEAN
QC on this busbar part is in closed position
12.4.5
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS
12.4.5.1
Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bussection circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 358. The
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit
breaker.
WA2 (A2)
WA1 (A1)
QC1
QB1
QB2
QC2
QA1
QC3
QC4
A1A2_BS
en04000516.vsd
IEC04000516 V1 EN
Figure 358:
Switchyard layout A1A2_BS
628
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.5.2
Function block
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
BBTR_OP
VP_BBTR
EXDU_12
EXDU_ES
QA1O_EX1
QA1O_EX2
QA1O_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
A1A2_BS
QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC4REL
QC4ITL
S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
VPQB1TR
VPQB2TR
IEC05000348 V2 EN
Figure 359:
A1A2_BS function block
629
Section 12
Control
12.4.5.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
VPQB1
QB1_OP
QA1O_EX1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQA1
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC3
VPS1QC1
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
A1A2_BS
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPQC4
=1
VPS1QC1
=1
VPS2QC2
&
>1
1
QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
&
&
&
&
>1
1
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
en04000542.vsd
IEC04000542 V1 EN
630
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB1
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
&
1
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC4REL
QC4ITL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QA1_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQA1
>1
S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
&
en04000543.vsd
IEC04000543 V1 EN
12.4.5.4

Table 357:
Name
A1A2_BS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP
BOOLEAN
QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP
BOOLEAN
QB2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP
BOOLEAN
QC4_CL
BOOLEAN
S1QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
S2QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar

transfer
631
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay connected to

busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.

QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1
BOOLEAN
External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2
BOOLEAN
QA1O_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX1
BOOLEAN
External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 358:
Name
12.4.6
Type
EXDU_12
A1A2_BS Output signals

Type
Description
QA1OPREL
BOOLEAN
Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL
BOOLEAN
Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL
BOOLEAN
Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL
BOOLEAN
Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL
BOOLEAN
QB2ITL
BOOLEAN
QC3REL
BOOLEAN
Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL
BOOLEAN
Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL
BOOLEAN
QC4ITL
BOOLEAN
S1S2OPTR
BOOLEAN
No bus section connection between bus section 1

and 2
S1S2CLTR
BOOLEAN
Bus coupler connection between bus section 1

and 2 exists
QB1OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB1CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB2OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB2CLTR
BOOLEAN
VPS1S2TR
BOOLEAN
Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2

are valid
VPQB1TR
BOOLEAN
Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR
BOOLEAN
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC
632
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.6.1
Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 360.
A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.
QB
WA1 (A1)
WA2 (A2)
QC1
QC2
A1A2_DC
en04000492.vsd
IEC04000492 V1 EN
Figure 360:
12.4.6.2
Switchyard layout A1A2_DC
Function block
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
QBOPREL
QB_CL
QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP
QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL
QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP
DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL
DCCLTR
S1DC_OP
VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3
IEC05000349 V2 EN
Figure 361:
A1A2_DC function block
633
Section 12
Control
12.4.6.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Logic diagram
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
QB_CL
=1
VPQB
VPDCTR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES
VPS1QC1
=1
VPS2QC2
=1
&
>1
1
QBOPREL
QBOPITL
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES
&
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3
&
en04000544.vsd
IEC04000544 V1 EN
IEC04000545 V1 EN
12.4.6.4

Table 359:
Name
A1A2_DC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QB_OP
BOOLEAN
QB is in open position
QB_CL
BOOLEAN
QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
S1QC1_CL
BOOLEAN

634
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
S2QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
S2QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
S1DC_OP
BOOLEAN
All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open

position
S2DC_OP
BOOLEAN
All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open

position
VPS1_DC
BOOLEAN
Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1

are valid
VPS2_DC
BOOLEAN
Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2

are valid
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.

QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays with disc conn to

section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1
BOOLEAN
External close condition for section disconnector

QB
QBCL_EX2
BOOLEAN
External close condition for section disconnector

QB
QBOP_EX1
BOOLEAN
External open condition for section disconnector

QB
QBOP_EX2
BOOLEAN

QB
QBOP_EX3
BOOLEAN

QB
Table 360:
Name
A1A2_DC Output signals

Type
Description
QBOPREL
BOOLEAN
Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL
BOOLEAN
Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL
BOOLEAN
Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL
BOOLEAN
Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR
BOOLEAN
The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR
BOOLEAN
The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR
BOOLEAN
Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)
12.4.7
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC
12.4.7.1
Introduction
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 362. The
function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
635
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1
QB2
QB20
QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN
Figure 362:
12.4.7.2
Switchyard layout ABC_BC
Function block
ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QB20_OP
QB20_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
BBTR_OP
BC_12_CL
VP_BBTR
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_12
EXDU_BC
QA1O_EX1
QA1O_EX2
QA1O_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB20_EX1
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB1REL
QB1ITL
QB2REL
QB2ITL
QB7REL
QB7ITL
QB20REL
QB20ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
QB220OTR
QB220CTR
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPQB1TR
VQB220TR
VPQB7TR
VPQB12TR
VPBC12TR
VPBC17TR
VPBC27TR
IEC05000350 V2 EN
Figure 363:
ABC_BC function block
636
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.7.3
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB20_OP
QB20_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
VPQB1
QB1_OP
QA1O_EX1
VPQB20
QB20_OP
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
ABC_BC
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB20
=1
VPQB7
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPQC21
=1
VPQC71
&
QA1OPREL
QA1OPITL
>1
1
&
&
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB7
VPQB20
&
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
en04000533.vsd
IEC04000533 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
&
en04000534.vsd
IEC04000534 V1 EN
637
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
&
en04000535.vsd
IEC04000535 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB20
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2
&
>1
1
QB7REL
QB7ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB20REL
QB20ITL
&
en04000536.vsd
IEC04000536 V1 EN
638
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQB1
VPQB20
VPQB7
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB20
VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
VPQB7
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QB20_OP
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQB20
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QB7_OP
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQB7
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QB7_OP
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQB7
&
1
1
&
&
>1
&
>1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB220OTR
QB220CTR
VQB220TR
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
VPQB7TR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
VPBC12TR
&
>1
BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
VPBC17TR
&
>1
BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR
&
en04000537.vsd
IEC04000537 V1 EN
12.4.7.4

Table 361:
Name
ABC_BC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB1_OP
BOOLEAN
QB1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB2_OP
BOOLEAN
QB2_CL
BOOLEAN
QB7_OP
BOOLEAN
QB7_CL
BOOLEAN
QB20_OP
BOOLEAN
QB20_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC11_OP
BOOLEAN
Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open

position
639
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
QC11_CL
BOOLEAN
Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed

position
QC21_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC21_CL
BOOLEAN

position
QC71_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC71_CL
BOOLEAN

position
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
A bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar

transfer
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN
Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and

WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay containing earthing

switches
EXDU_12
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/

WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
No transmission error from any other bus coupler

bay
QA1O_EX1
BOOLEAN
QA1O_EX2
BOOLEAN
QA1O_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB20_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB20_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB7_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB7_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 362:
Name
ABC_BC Output signals

Type
Description
QA1OPREL
BOOLEAN
Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL
BOOLEAN
Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
640
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
QB1REL
BOOLEAN
QB1ITL
BOOLEAN
QB2REL
BOOLEAN
QB2ITL
BOOLEAN
QB7REL
BOOLEAN
QB7ITL
BOOLEAN
QB20REL
BOOLEAN
QB20ITL
BOOLEAN
QC1REL
BOOLEAN
QC1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC2REL
BOOLEAN
QC2ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB1CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB220OTR
BOOLEAN
QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR
BOOLEAN
QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB7CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB12OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR
BOOLEAN
No connection via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR
BOOLEAN
Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR
BOOLEAN

WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR
BOOLEAN

WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR
BOOLEAN

WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR
BOOLEAN

WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR
BOOLEAN
VQB220TR
BOOLEAN
Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open

or closed)
VPQB7TR
BOOLEAN
VPQB12TR
BOOLEAN
Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or

closed)
VPBC12TR
BOOLEAN

WA2 are valid
VPBC17TR
BOOLEAN

WA7 are valid
VPBC27TR
BOOLEAN

WA7 are valid
641
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.8
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH
12.4.8.1
Introduction
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,
BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 364.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB2
QB1
QC1
QC1
QA1
QA1
QC2
QC2
QB6
QB6
QC3
BH_LINE_A
QC3
QB61
QA1
BH_LINE_B
QB62
QB9
QB9
QC1
QC2
QC9
QC9
BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd
IEC04000513 V1 EN
Figure 364:
Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.
642
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.8.2
Function blocks
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB6_OP
QB6REL
QB6_CL
QB6ITL
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QC3REL
QC3_CL
QC3ITL
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9ITL
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9ITL
CQA1_OP
QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL
QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP
VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
IEC05000352 V2 EN
Figure 365:
BH_LINE_A function block
643
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB6_OP
QB6REL
QB6_CL
QB6ITL
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QC3REL
QC3_CL
QC3ITL
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9ITL
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9ITL
CQA1_OP
QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL
QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP
VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
IEC05000353 V2 EN
Figure 366:
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
BH_LINE_B function block
BH_CONN
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
QB61ITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
IEC05000351 V2 EN
Figure 367:
BH_CONN function block
644
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.8.3
Logic diagrams
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
VPQB61
VPQB62
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61
VPQB62
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
BH_CONN
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB61
=1
VPQB62
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VP1QC3
=1
VP2QC3
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
&
>1
1
QB61REL
QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB62REL
QB62ITL
&
&
1
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
en04000560.vsd
IEC04000560 V1 EN
645
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQB1
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
BH_LINE_A
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB6
=1
VPQC9
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPCQA1
=1
VPCQC1
=1
VPCQC2
=1
VPCQB61
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPVOLT
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
&
>1
1
QB6REL
QB6ITL
&
en04000554.vsd
IEC04000554 V1 EN
646
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
VPQB1
VPQB6
QB1_OP
QB6_OP
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPCQB61
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1
VPQB6
VPQC9
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QB9_EX3
&
QB1REL
QB1ITL
>1
1
&
&
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
1
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL
QB9ITL
>1
&
en04000555.vsd
IEC04000555 V1 EN
CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
>1
&
>1
&
&
&
QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd
IEC04000556 V1 EN
647
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB6_OP
QB6_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQB2
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
BH_LINE_B
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQB6
=1
VPQC9
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPCQA1
=1
VPCQC1
=1
VPCQC2
=1
VPCQB62
=1
VPQC21
=1
VPVOLT
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
&
>1
1
QB6REL
QB6ITL
&
en04000557.vsd
IEC04000557 V1 EN
648
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB2
VPQB6
QB2_OP
QB6_OP
VPQB6
VPQB9
VPCQB62
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1
VPQB6
VPQC9
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QB9_EX3
&
QB2REL
QB2ITL
>1
1
&
&
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
1
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
&
1
&
>1
QB9REL
QB9ITL
>1
&
en04000558.vsd
IEC04000558 V1 EN
CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
>1
&
>1
&
&
&
QC9REL
QC9ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd
IEC04000559 V1 EN
649
Section 12
Control
12.4.8.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 363:
Name
BH_LINE_A Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB6_OP
BOOLEAN
QB6_CL
BOOLEAN
QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP
BOOLEAN
QB1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QB9_OP
BOOLEAN
QB9_CL
BOOLEAN
QC9_OP
BOOLEAN
QC9_CL
BOOLEAN
CQA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP
BOOLEAN
QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL
BOOLEAN
QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP
BOOLEAN
CQC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC11_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC11_CL
BOOLEAN

position
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)

failure
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bay containing earthing

switch QC11
QB6_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB6_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX1
BOOLEAN
650
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
QB9_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX4
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX5
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX6
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX7
BOOLEAN
Table 364:
Name
BH_LINE_A Output signals

Type
Description
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
QB6REL
BOOLEAN
QB6ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1REL
BOOLEAN
QB1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC1REL
BOOLEAN
QC1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC2REL
BOOLEAN
QC2ITL
BOOLEAN
QC3REL
BOOLEAN
QC3ITL
BOOLEAN
QB9REL
BOOLEAN
QB9ITL
BOOLEAN
QC9REL
BOOLEAN
QC9ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB1CLTR
BOOLEAN
VPQB1TR
BOOLEAN
Table 365:
Name
BH_LINE_B Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB6_OP
BOOLEAN
QB6_CL
BOOLEAN
QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP
BOOLEAN
QB2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
651
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QB9_OP
BOOLEAN
QB9_CL
BOOLEAN
QC9_OP
BOOLEAN
QC9_CL
BOOLEAN
CQA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP
BOOLEAN
QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL
BOOLEAN
QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP
BOOLEAN
CQC1_CL
BOOLEAN
CQC2_OP
BOOLEAN
CQC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC21_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC21_CL
BOOLEAN

position
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN

failure
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN

switch QC21
QB6_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB6_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX4
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX5
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX6
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX7
BOOLEAN
652
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 366:
Name
BH_LINE_B Output signals

Type
Description
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
QB6REL
BOOLEAN
QB6ITL
BOOLEAN
QB2REL
BOOLEAN
QB2ITL
BOOLEAN
QC1REL
BOOLEAN
QC1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC2REL
BOOLEAN
QC2ITL
BOOLEAN
QC3REL
BOOLEAN
QC3ITL
BOOLEAN
QB9REL
BOOLEAN
QB9ITL
BOOLEAN
QC9REL
BOOLEAN
QC9ITL
BOOLEAN
QB2OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB2CLTR
BOOLEAN
VPQB2TR
BOOLEAN
Table 367:
Name
BH_CONN Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB61_OP
BOOLEAN
QB61_CL
BOOLEAN
QB62_OP
BOOLEAN
QB62_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
1QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1
BOOLEAN
653
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
QB61_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB62_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB62_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 368:
Name
BH_CONN Output signals

Type
Description
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
QB61REL
BOOLEAN
QB61ITL
BOOLEAN
QB62REL
BOOLEAN
QB62ITL
BOOLEAN
QC1REL
BOOLEAN
QC1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC2REL
BOOLEAN
QC2ITL
BOOLEAN
12.4.9
Interlocking for double CB bay DB
12.4.9.1
Introduction
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter including DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B,
DB_LINEfunctions are used for a line connected to a double circuit breaker
arrangement according to figure 368.
654
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1
QB2
QC1
QA1
QC4
QA2
DB_BUS_B
DB_BUS_A
QC2
QB61
QC5
QB62
QC3
QB9
DB_LINE
QC9
en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN
Figure 368:
Switchyard layout double circuit breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are
connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from
the line to the busbars.
12.4.9.2
Function block
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB1_OP
QB61REL
QB1_CL
QB61ITL
QB61_OP
QB1REL
QB61_CL
QB1ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC3_OP
QB1OPTR
QC3_CL
QB1CLTR
QC11_OP
VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
IEC05000354 V2 EN
Figure 369:
DB_BUS_A function block
655
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9REL
QB9ITL
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
IEC05000356 V2 EN
Figure 370:
DB_LINE function block
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2CLREL
QA2_CL
QA2CLITL
QB2_OP
QB62REL
QB2_CL
QB62ITL
QB62_OP
QB2REL
QB62_CL
QB2ITL
QC4_OP
QC4REL
QC4_CL
QC4ITL
QC5_OP
QC5REL
QC5_CL
QC5ITL
QC3_OP
QB2OPTR
QC3_CL
QB2CLTR
QC21_OP
VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
IEC05000355 V2 EN
Figure 371:
DB_BUS_B function block
656
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.9.3
Logic diagrams
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VPQB61
VPQB1
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
DB_BUS_A
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB61
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC3
=1
&
&
>1
1
VPQC11
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB61REL
QB61ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
en04000547.vsd
IEC04000547 V1 EN
VPQB61
VPQB1
QB61_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
&
1
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd
IEC04000548 V1 EN
657
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VPQB62
VPQB2
VPQA2
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPQC21
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
DB_BUS_B
=1
VPQA2
=1
VPQB62
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC4
=1
VPQC5
VPQC3
=1
=1
&
&
>1
1
VPQC21
QA2CLREL
QA2CLITL
QB62REL
QB62ITL
&
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
en04000552.vsd
IEC04000552 V1 EN
VPQB62
VPQB2
QB62_OP
QB2_OP
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
&
1
1
QC4REL
QC4ITL
QC5REL
QC5ITL
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd
IEC04000553 V1 EN
658
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA2_OP
QA2_CL
QB61_OP
QB61_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQA1
VPQA2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
DB_LINE
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQA2
=1
VPQB61
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQB62
=1
VPQC4
=1
VPQC5
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPQC9
=1
&
VPVOLT
>1
1
&
QB9REL
QB9ITL
en04000549.vsd
IEC04000549 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
&
>1
&
&
&
en04000550.vsd
IEC04000550 V1 EN
659
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQB61
VPQB62
VPQB9
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
&
1
&
1
QC3REL
QC3ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd
IEC04000551 V1 EN
12.4.9.4

Table 369:
Name
DB_BUS_A Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB1_OP
BOOLEAN
QB1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB61_OP
BOOLEAN
QB61_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QC11_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC11_CL
BOOLEAN

position
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN

switch QC11
QB61_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB61_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 370:
Name
DB_BUS_A Output signals

Type
Description
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
QB61REL
BOOLEAN
QB61ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1REL
BOOLEAN

660
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
QB1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC1REL
BOOLEAN
QC1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC2REL
BOOLEAN
QC2ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB1CLTR
BOOLEAN
VPQB1TR
BOOLEAN
Table 371:
Name
DB_LINE Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QA2_OP
BOOLEAN
QA2_CL
BOOLEAN
QB61_OP
BOOLEAN
QB61_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QB62_OP
BOOLEAN
QB62_CL
BOOLEAN
QC4_OP
BOOLEAN
QC4_CL
BOOLEAN
QC5_OP
BOOLEAN
QC5_CL
BOOLEAN
QB9_OP
BOOLEAN
QB9_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QC9_OP
BOOLEAN
QC9_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)

failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN

failure
QB9_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX2
BOOLEAN
661
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
QB9_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX4
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX5
BOOLEAN
Table 372:
Name
DB_LINE Output signals

Type
Description
QB9REL
BOOLEAN
QB9ITL
BOOLEAN
QC3REL
BOOLEAN
QC3ITL
BOOLEAN
QC9REL
BOOLEAN
QC9ITL
BOOLEAN
Table 373:
Name
DB_BUS_B Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA2_OP
BOOLEAN
QA2_CL
BOOLEAN
QB2_OP
BOOLEAN
QB2_CL
BOOLEAN
QB62_OP
BOOLEAN
QB62_CL
BOOLEAN
QC4_OP
BOOLEAN
QC4_CL
BOOLEAN
QC5_OP
BOOLEAN
QC5_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QC21_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC21_CL
BOOLEAN

position
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN

switch QC21
QB62_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB62_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX2
BOOLEAN
662
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 374:
DB_BUS_B Output signals
Name
Type
Description
QA2CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA2CLITL
BOOLEAN
QB62REL
BOOLEAN
QB62ITL
BOOLEAN
QB2REL
BOOLEAN
QB2ITL
BOOLEAN
QC4REL
BOOLEAN
QC4ITL
BOOLEAN
QC5REL
BOOLEAN
QC5ITL
BOOLEAN
QB2OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB2CLTR
BOOLEAN
VPQB2TR
BOOLEAN
12.4.10
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE
12.4.10.1
Introduction
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 372. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar
or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1
QB2
QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
QB9
QC9
en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN
Figure 372:
Switchyard layout ABC_LINE
663
Section 12
Control
12.4.10.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
ABC_LINE
QA1CLREL
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB9_OP
QB9REL
QB9_CL
QB9ITL
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1ITL
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2ITL
QB7_OP
QB7REL
QB7_CL
QB7ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QC9_OP
QC9REL
QC9_CL
QC9ITL
QC11_OP
QB1OPTR
QC11_CL
QB1CLTR
QC21_OP
QB2OPTR
QC21_CL
QB2CLTR
QC71_OP
QB7OPTR
QC71_CL
QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP
QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL
QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP
VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL
VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP
VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL
VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4
IEC05000357 V2 EN
Figure 373:
ABC_LINE function block
664
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.10.3
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
QC71_OP
QC71_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2
ABC_LINE
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB9
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQB7
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQC9
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPQC21
=1
VPQC71
=1
VPVOLT
&
&
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
QB9REL
QB9ITL
>1
1
&
en04000527.vsd
IEC04000527 V1 EN
665
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
&
VPQB2
&
QB1REL
1
1
QB1ITL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
&
QB1EX3
en04000528.vsd
IEC04000528 V1 EN
666
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
&
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
&
VPQC1
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
&
QB2REL
1
1
QB2ITL
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
en04000529.vsd
IEC04000529 V1 EN
667
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
VP_BB7_D
QB7REL
>1
1
QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
&
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX2
IEC04000530 V1 EN
668
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
&
>1
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB9
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9
VPVOLT
QB7_OP
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
&
&
1
1
&
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QC9REL
QC9ITL
en04000531.vsd
IEC04000531 V1 EN
669
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
QB7_OP
QB7_CL
VPQB7
QB7OPTR
QB7CLTR
VPQB7TR
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
>1
&
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd
IEC04000532 V1 EN
12.4.10.4

Table 375:
Name
ABC_LINE Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB9_OP
BOOLEAN
QB9_CL
BOOLEAN
QB1_OP
BOOLEAN
QB1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB2_OP
BOOLEAN
QB2_CL
BOOLEAN
QB7_OP
BOOLEAN
QB7_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC9_OP
BOOLEAN
QC9_CL
BOOLEAN
QC11_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC11_CL
BOOLEAN

position
QC21_OP
BOOLEAN

position
670
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
QC21_CL
BOOLEAN

position
QC71_OP
BOOLEAN

position
QC71_CL
BOOLEAN

position
BB7_D_OP
BOOLEAN
Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own

bay are open
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN

WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP
BOOLEAN
No bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL
BOOLEAN

WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP
BOOLEAN
No bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL
BOOLEAN

WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)

failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN

failure
VP_BB7_D
BOOLEAN
Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar

WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN

WA2 are valid
VP_BC_17
BOOLEAN

WA7 are valid
VP_BC_27
BOOLEAN

WA7 are valid
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN

switches
EXDU_BPB
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay with disconnectors

on WA7
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB9_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB7_EX1
BOOLEAN
671
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
QB7_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB7_EX4
BOOLEAN
Table 376:
Name
12.4.11
Type
QB7_EX2
ABC_LINE Output signals

Type
Description
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
QB9REL
BOOLEAN
QB9ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1REL
BOOLEAN
QB1ITL
BOOLEAN
QB2REL
BOOLEAN
QB2ITL
BOOLEAN
QB7REL
BOOLEAN
QB7ITL
BOOLEAN
QC1REL
BOOLEAN
QC1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC2REL
BOOLEAN
QC2ITL
BOOLEAN
QC9REL
BOOLEAN
QC9ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB1CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB2OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB2CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB7OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB7CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB12OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB12CLTR
BOOLEAN
VPQB1TR
BOOLEAN
VPQB2TR
BOOLEAN
VPQB7TR
BOOLEAN
VPQB12TR
BOOLEAN

closed)
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO
672
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.11.1
Introduction
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a
transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 374.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1
QB2
QC1
QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2
T
QC3
QA2
QC4
QB3
QA2 and QC4 are not

used in this interlocking
QB4
en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN
Figure 374:
Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO
673
Section 12
Control
12.4.11.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1CLREL
QA1_CL
QA1CLITL
QB1_OP
QB1REL
QB1_CL
QB1ITL
QB2_OP
QB2REL
QB2_CL
QB2ITL
QC1_OP
QC1REL
QC1_CL
QC1ITL
QC2_OP
QC2REL
QC2_CL
QC2ITL
QB3_OP
QB1OPTR
QB3_CL
QB1CLTR
QB4_OP
QB2OPTR
QB4_CL
QB2CLTR
QC3_OP
QB12OPTR
QC3_CL
QB12CLTR
QC11_OP
VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
VPQB2TR
QC21_OP
VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
IEC05000358 V2 EN
Figure 375:
AB_TRAFO function block
674
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.11.3
Logic diagram
QA1_OP
QA1_CL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB3_OP
QB3_CL
QB4_OP
QB4_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QA1_EX1
AB_TRAFO
=1
VPQA1
=1
VPQB1
=1
VPQB2
=1
VPQC1
=1
VPQC2
=1
VPQB3
=1
VPQB4
=1
VPQC3
=1
VPQC11
=1
VPQC21
QA1CLREL
QA1CLITL
&
>1
&
en04000538.vsd
IEC04000538 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
&
>1
1
QB1REL
QB1ITL
&
&
en04000539.vsd
IEC04000539 V1 EN
675
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
&
>1
1
QB2REL
QB2ITL
&
&
en04000540.vsd
IEC04000540 V1 EN
VPQB1
VPQB2
VPQB3
VPQB4
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
&
1
1
QC1REL
QC1ITL
QC2REL
QC2ITL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL
VPQB1
QB1OPTR
QB1CLTR
VPQB1TR
QB2_OP
QB2_CL
VPQB2
QB1_OP
QB2_OP
VPQB1
VPQB2
QB2OPTR
QB2CLTR
VPQB2TR
QB12OPTR
QB12CLTR
VPQB12TR
>1
&
en04000541.vsd
IEC04000541 V1 EN
12.4.11.4

Table 377:
Name
AB_TRAFO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
QA1_OP
BOOLEAN
QA1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB1_OP
BOOLEAN
QB1_CL
BOOLEAN
QB2_OP
BOOLEAN
QB2_CL
BOOLEAN
QC1_OP
BOOLEAN
QC1_CL
BOOLEAN

676
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
QC2_OP
BOOLEAN
QC2_CL
BOOLEAN
QB3_OP
BOOLEAN
QB3_CL
BOOLEAN
QB4_OP
BOOLEAN
QB4_CL
BOOLEAN
QC3_OP
BOOLEAN
QC3_CL
BOOLEAN
QC11_OP
BOOLEAN
QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL
BOOLEAN
QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP
BOOLEAN
QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL
BOOLEAN
QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN

WA1 and WA2
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN

WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES
BOOLEAN

switches
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1
BOOLEAN
External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2
BOOLEAN
QA1_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB1_EX3
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX1
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX2
BOOLEAN
QB2_EX3
BOOLEAN
Table 378:
Name
AB_TRAFO Output signals

Type
Description
QA1CLREL
BOOLEAN
QA1CLITL
BOOLEAN
QB1REL
BOOLEAN
QB1ITL
BOOLEAN
QB2REL
BOOLEAN
QB2ITL
BOOLEAN
QC1REL
BOOLEAN
QC1ITL
BOOLEAN
QC2REL
BOOLEAN

677
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
QC2ITL
BOOLEAN
QB1OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB1CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB2OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB2CLTR
BOOLEAN
QB12OPTR
BOOLEAN
QB12CLTR
BOOLEAN
VPQB1TR
BOOLEAN
VPQB2TR
BOOLEAN
VPQB12TR
BOOLEAN

closed)
12.4.12
Position evaluation POS_EVAL
12.4.12.1
Introduction
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals
OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.
12.4.12.2
Logic diagram
Position including quality
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Open/close position of
switch device
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is
not used.
Input position (Value)
Signal quality
Output OPENPOS
Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker
intermediate)
Good
1 (Breaker open)
Good
2 (Breaker closed)
Good
3 (Breaker faulty)
Good
Any
Invalid
Any
Oscillatory
678
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.4.12.3
Function block
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079 V1 EN
Figure 376:
12.4.12.4
POS_EVAL function block

Table 379:
POS_EVAL Input signals
Name
Type
POSITION
Table 380:
INTEGER
Position status including quality
Type
Description
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Close position
Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation SLGGIO
Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation
12.5.1
Description
POS_EVAL Output signals
Name
12.5
Default
IEC 61850
identification
SLGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function
(SLGGIO) (or the selector switch function block) is used to get a selector switch
functionality similar to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different
functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for
maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio.
The logic selector switches eliminate all these problems.
12.5.2
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on
the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,
679
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one
operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is
received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present
activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for
example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated).
Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case
of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output
will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay
between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application
Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the
desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either
locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the
function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present
position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place
(local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed
the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual
position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names
instead of a number.
680
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.5.2.1
Functionality and behaviour

Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands
Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language
Ctrl/Com
Single Command
Selector Switch (GGIO)
3
../Com/Sel Sw/
SLGGIO3
Damage ctrl
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw
SLGGIO1
SLGGIO2
..
..
SLGGIO15
../Com/Sel Sw/
SLGGIO3
Damage ctrl
P:Disc All
OK
N: Disc Fe
Cancel
4
5
../Com/Sel Sw/
DmgCtrl
Damage ctrl:
The dialog window that appears

shows the present position (P:)
and the new position (N:), both
in clear names, given by the
user (max. 13 characters).
Modify the position with arrows.

The pos will not be modified (outputs
will not be activated) until you press
the E-button for O.K.
IEC06000420 V2 EN
Figure 377:
Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the local HMI:
1 SLGGIO instances in the ACT application configuration
2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters)
3 Position number, up to 32 positions
4 Change position
5 New position
12.5.2.2
Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGGIO
681
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions,
but only the first three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it
when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the
control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:
From the graphical display:
Change to the "Switches" page

of the SLD by left-right arrows.
Select switch by up-down
arrows
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DAL
Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language
Select switch. Press the

I or O key. A dialog box
appears.
E
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until
you press the E-button for O.K.
Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
P: Disc
OK
N: Disc Fe
Cancel
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
IEC06000421 V2 EN
Figure 378:
Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
682
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
12.5.3
Function block
SLGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN
^SWPOS01
^SWPOS02
^SWPOS03
^SWPOS04
^SWPOS05
^SWPOS06
^SWPOS07
^SWPOS08
^SWPOS09
^SWPOS10
^SWPOS11
^SWPOS12
^SWPOS13
^SWPOS14
^SWPOS15
^SWPOS16
^SWPOS17
^SWPOS18
^SWPOS19
^SWPOS20
^SWPOS21
^SWPOS22
^SWPOS23
^SWPOS24
^SWPOS25
^SWPOS26
^SWPOS27
^SWPOS28
^SWPOS29
^SWPOS30
^SWPOS31
^SWPOS32
SWPOSN
IEC05000658 V2 EN
Figure 379:
12.5.4
SLGGIO function block

Table 381:
Name
SLGGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
UP
BOOLEAN
Binary "UP" command
DOWN
BOOLEAN
Binary "DOWN" command
Table 382:
SLGGIO Output signals
Name
Type
Description
SWPOS01
BOOLEAN
Selector switch position 1
SWPOS02
BOOLEAN
SWPOS03
BOOLEAN
SWPOS04
BOOLEAN
SWPOS05
BOOLEAN
683
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
12.5.5
Table 383:
Name
Type
Description
SWPOS06
BOOLEAN
SWPOS07
BOOLEAN
SWPOS08
BOOLEAN
SWPOS09
BOOLEAN
SWPOS10
BOOLEAN
SWPOS11
BOOLEAN
SWPOS12
BOOLEAN
SWPOS13
BOOLEAN
SWPOS14
BOOLEAN
SWPOS15
BOOLEAN
SWPOS16
BOOLEAN
SWPOS17
BOOLEAN
SWPOS18
BOOLEAN
SWPOS19
BOOLEAN
SWPOS20
BOOLEAN
SWPOS21
BOOLEAN
SWPOS22
BOOLEAN
SWPOS23
BOOLEAN
SWPOS24
BOOLEAN
SWPOS25
BOOLEAN
SWPOS26
BOOLEAN
SWPOS27
BOOLEAN
SWPOS28
BOOLEAN
SWPOS29
BOOLEAN
SWPOS30
BOOLEAN
SWPOS31
BOOLEAN
SWPOS32
BOOLEAN
SWPOSN
INTEGER
Switch position (integer)
Setting parameters
SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
NrPos
2 - 32
32
Number of positions in the switch
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
Output type, steady or pulse
684
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Stop when min or max position is reached
12.6
Step
Description
Selector mini switch VSGGIO

Selector mini switch
12.6.1
Default
IEC 61850
identification
VSGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used
for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.
12.6.2
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the
same way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through
the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the
POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and
distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is
associated with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be
displayed on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in
GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place , operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850
685
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
(Remote). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN)

will allow operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit
representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1
12.6.3
IPOS2
Name of displayed string Default string value
PosUndefined
P00
Position1
P01
Position2
P10
PosBadState
P11
Function block
VSGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC06000508 V3 EN
Figure 380:
12.6.4
VSGGIO function block

Table 384:
Name
VSGGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
IPOS1
BOOLEAN
Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2
BOOLEAN
Position 2 indicating input
Table 385:
VSGGIO Output signals
Name
Type
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
The function is active but the functionality is

blocked
POSITION
INTEGER
Position indication, integer
POS1
BOOLEAN
Position 1 indication, logical signal
686
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
12.6.5
Table 386:
Type
Description
POS2
BOOLEAN
Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12
BOOLEAN
Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21
BOOLEAN
Execute command from position 2 to position 1
Setting parameters
VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Specifies the type for control model

according to IEC 61850
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
Max time between select and execute

signals
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Command pulse lenght
12.7
Generic double point function block DPGGIO

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
functions
12.7.1
IEC 61850
identification
DPGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is
used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It
is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.
12.7.2
Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
functions (DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to
the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals,
other tools must be used, as described in the application manual, to PCM600 must
be used to define which function block in which equipment or system should
receive this information.
687
Section 12
Control
12.7.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
DPGGIO
OPEN
CLOSE
VALID
POSITION
IEC07000200 V2 EN
Figure 381:
12.7.4
DPGGIO function block

Table 387:
DPGGIO Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Open indication
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close indication
VALID
BOOLEAN
Valid indication
Table 388:
DPGGIO Output signals
Name
POSITION
12.7.5
Default
OPEN
Type
INTEGER
Description
Double point indication
Settings
12.8
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO

Single point generic control 8 signals
12.8.1
IEC 61850
identification
SPC8GGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a
collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from
REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need
extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way,
simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
688
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks. The commands
can be pulsed or steady.
12.8.2
The PSTO input will determine which the allowed position for the operator
(LOCAL, REMOTE, ALL) is. Upon sending a command from an allowed operator
position, one of the 8 outputs will be activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex
(where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and
how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the
function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control
functions. Even if PSTO can be configured to allow LOCAL or
ALL operator positions, the only functional position usable with the
SPC8GGIO function block is REMOTE.
12.8.3
Function block
SPC8GGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
IEC07000143 V2 EN
Figure 382:
12.8.4
SPC8GGIO function block

Table 389:
Name
SPC8GGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Blocks the function operation
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 390:
Name
SPC8GGIO Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output4

689
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
12.8.5
Table 391:
Name
Type
Description
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output8
Setting parameters
SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
Latched1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/latched mode for

output 1
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed

output 2
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output2 Pulse Time
Latched3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed

output 3
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed

output 4
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed

output 5
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output5 Pulse Time
Latched6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed

output 6
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output6 Pulse Time
Latched7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed

output 7
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output7 Pulse Time
Latched8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed

output 8
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Output8 pulse time
12.9
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS
690
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
AutomationBits, command function for
DNP3
12.9.1
IEC 61850
identification
AUTOBITS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get
into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
12.9.2
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can
be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object
12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and
off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On,
latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be
regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in
the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts
like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon
deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the
operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If
PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
691
Section 12
Control
12.9.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
AUTOBITS
BLOCK
PSTO
^CMDBIT1
^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000925 V1 EN
Figure 383:
12.9.4
AUTOBITS function block

Table 392:
Name
AUTOBITS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 393:
Name
AUTOBITS Output signals

Type
Description
CMDBIT1
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 8

692
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
12.9.5
Table 394:
Description
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 32
Setting parameters
AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Operation
Table 395:
Type
CMDBIT9
Off
On
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Off
Description
Operation Off / On
DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Operation
Values (Range)
Off
On
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Off
Description
Operation mode Off / On
693
Section 12
Control
Table 396:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
Serial-Mode
Off
Operation mode
BaudRate
300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
Baud-rate for serial port
WireMode
Four-wire
Two-wire
Two-wire
RS485 wire mode
Table 397:
Name
CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DLinkConfirm
Never
Sometimes
Always
Never
Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries
0 - 255
Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Application layer maximum Rx fragment

size
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Application layer maximum Tx fragment

size
StopBits
1-2
Stop bits
Parity
No
Even
Odd
Even
Parity
tRTSWarmUp
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
RS485 maximum back-off random delay

in s
Table 398:
Name
CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote client/master
694
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 399:
CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
Table 400:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 401:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
Table 402:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 403:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
695
Section 12
Control
Table 404:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 405:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048

size
Table 406:
Name
MSTRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
696
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 407:
MSTRS485 Non group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source (master) address
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
Address query enable
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
Enable application for multiple fragment

response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
Confirm each multiple fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
Unsolicited response sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
Unsolicited response off-line retry delay

in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

697
Section 12
Control
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response class 1 event

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout before error status is

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Time synchronization request after

timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
Yes
Allow DNP to set time in IED
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
Use average of 3 time requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
Step
Default
Table 408:
Name
Values (Range)
Description
MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
698
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 409:
MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
699
Section 12
Control
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00

in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
External time format
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No

timeout
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 410:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
700
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 411:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
701
Section 12
Control
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00

in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No

timeout
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
702
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 412:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
703
Section 12
Control
Table 413:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00

in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No

timeout
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
704
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Unit
Step
Default
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 414:
Values (Range)
Description
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
705
Section 12
Control
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 415:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00

in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold

706
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Unit
Step
Default
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No

timeout
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
12.10
Values (Range)
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

Single command, 16 signals
12.10.1
Description
IEC 61850
identification
SINGLECMD
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
12.10.2
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.
The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of
13 characters in PCM600.
707
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole
function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode,
SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power
interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the
updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
12.10.3
Function block
SINGLECMD
BLOCK
ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
IEC05000698 V3 EN
Figure 384:
12.10.4
SINGLECMD function block

Table 416:
Name
BLOCK
Table 417:
Name
SINGLECMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block single command function
SINGLECMD Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Single command output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
OUT3
BOOLEAN
OUT4
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN

708
Section 12
Control
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
12.10.5
Table 418:
Type
Description
OUT10
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
OUT14
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Name
Mode
Values (Range)
Off
Steady
Pulsed
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Off
Description
Operation mode
709
710
Section 13
Scheme communication
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 13
About this chapter

This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and
earth fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for
faults on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic
(ZCPSCH), current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCRWPSCH) for the
distance protection function and scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection (ECPSCH) and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic
(ECRWPSCH) for the residual overcurrent function.
Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLCPLAL) is discussed which is a function that
can generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any
telecommunication.
The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block
diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting
parameters.
13.1
Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH
Scheme communication logic for
distance or overcurrent protection
13.1.1
IEC 61850
identification
ZCPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme
communication logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for
example, permissive underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking,
unblocking, intertrip are available.
The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme
communication signaling when included.
Phase segregated communication is also available for correct operation at
simultaneous faults when three distance protection communication channels are
available between the line ends.
711
Section 13
13.1.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to
issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and
Permissive schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false
tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends
on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a
blocking scheme.
13.1.2.1
Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is
allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED.
The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone
to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 385.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the
settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 385.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip
by activating the input BLKTR, Block of signal send by activating the input BLKCS.
tCoord
CACC
CR
AND
TRIP
en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN
Figure 385:
Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme
Channels for communication in each direction must be available.
13.1.2.2
Permissive underreaching scheme

In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring
element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault
is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in
permissive underreaching schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 386.
712
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tCoord
CACC
CR
AND
TRIP
en05000513.vsd
IEC05000513 V1 EN
Figure 386:
Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme
The permissive underreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as

mentioned for blocking scheme.
13.1.2.3
Permissive overreaching scheme

In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring
element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault
is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in
permissive overreaching schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal is the same as for permissive underreaching, as in
figure 386.
The permissive overreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as
mentioned for blocking scheme.
13.1.2.4
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome
by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 387. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
713
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CR
1
tSecurity
t
CRG
200 ms
t
CRL
>1
150 ms
AND
OR
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN
Figure 387:
Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off
The unblocking function is out of operation
No restart
Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart

It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling
13.1.2.5
Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.
In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.
13.1.2.6
Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 388.
714
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unblock =Off
CR
Unblock =
NoRestart
Unblock =
Restart
CRG
CRL
CRL
OR
AND
tSecurit
y
1
200 ms
t
AND
150 ms
OR
AND
LCG
AND
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSUR
tSendMi
n
BLOCK
CSBLK
CRL
AND
OR
AND
OR
Schemetype =
Permissive UR
AND
AND
CACC
CS
OR
tCoord
OR
25 ms
t
TRIP
Schemetype =
Permissive OR
OR
CSOR
AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCS
AND
IEC05000515 V2 EN
Figure 388:
Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent

protection, simplified logic diagram
715
Section 13
13.1.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
ZCPSCH
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG
IEC06000286 V2 EN
Figure 389:
13.1.4
ZCPSCH function block

Table 419:
Name
ZCPSCH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Signal for block of trip output from communication

logic
BLKCS
BOOLEAN
Block of carrier send in permissive OR and

blocking schemes
CSBLK
BOOLEAN
Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC
BOOLEAN
Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR
BOOLEAN
Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR
BOOLEAN
Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR
BOOLEAN
Carrier Signal Received
CRG
BOOLEAN
Carrier guard signal received
Table 420:
Name
ZCPSCH Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip output
CS
BOOLEAN
Carrier Send signal
CRL
BOOLEAN
Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard

signal
LCG
BOOLEAN
Loss of carrier guard signal
716
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.1.5
Table 421:
Setting parameters
ZCPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SchemeType
Off
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Permissive UR
Scheme type
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Co-ordination time for blocking

communication scheme
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
Table 422:
ZCPSCH Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Unblock
Off
NoRestart
Restart
Off
Operation mode of unblocking logic
tSecurity
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Security timer for loss of carrier guard

detection
13.1.6
Technical data
Table 423:
ZCPSCH technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive Underreach
Permissive Overreach
Blocking

(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum duration of a send signal
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Security timer for loss of guard

signal detection
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Off
NoRestart
Restart
717
Section 13
13.2
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for

distance protection ZC1PPSCH
Phase segregated Scheme
communication logic for distance
protection
13.2.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC 61850
identification
ZC1PPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Introduction
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults
on a power line. All possible types of communication schemes for example,
permissive underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available.
To manage problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase
segregated communication is needed. This will then replace the standard Scheme
communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) on
important lines where three communication channels (in each subsystem) are
available for the distance protection communication.
The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for
distance protection (ZC1PPSCH) function is to supplement the distance protection
function such that:
fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are
on the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for
faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.
To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, that is, one per phase,
each capable of transmitting a signal in each direction is required.
ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase
segregated communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive
overreaching schemes.
13.2.2
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to
issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and
Permissive schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false
tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends
on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a
blocking scheme.
718
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection

(ZC1PPSCH) function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a
supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs
from the distance protection and the communication equipment.
The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the
settings.
The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of
ZC1PPSCH makes this logic able to support practically any scheme
communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The
outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in
accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s)
and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated.
When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive
criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the
transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.
13.2.2.1
Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is
allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED. The received signal (sent
by a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to
CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault
instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is
connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 390. In case of external faults, the
blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses,
to prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 390.
ZC1PPSCH can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is
achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by
activating the input BLKCSLx.
CACCLx
CRLx
tCoord
AND
25 ms
TRLx
IEC06000310 V2 EN
Figure 390:
13.2.2.2
Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme
Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring
element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a
fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
719
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has
elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The
logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 391. Three channels
for communication in each direction must be available.
CACCLx
CRLx
AND
tCoord
t
25 ms
t
TRLx
IEC07000088 V2 EN
Figure 391:
13.2.2.3
Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach

scheme
Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element
(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is
in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is
the same as for permissive underreach, see figure 390.
The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current
reversal logic when this function is included.
Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.
13.2.2.4
Unblocking scheme
In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is
overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to
locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function
when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As
phase segregated communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is
typically connected single-phase or phase-to-phase it is not possible to evaluate
which of the phases to release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported.
13.2.2.5
Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an
underreaching zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for
tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase
segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection
and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.
720
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.2.2.6
Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for one phase is shown in figure 392.
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSURLx
tSendMin
BLOCK
CSBLKLx
CRLx
AND
OR
AND
OR
Scheme Type =
Permissive UR
AND
AND
CACCLx
CSLx
OR
OR
tCoord
t
25 ms
t
TRLx
Scheme Type =
Permissive OR
OR
CSORLx
AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
Scheme Type =
Blocking
BLKCSx
AND
CSL1
CSL2
AND
CSL2
CSL3
AND
OR
CSMPH
CSL3
CSL1
AND
CSL1
CSL2
OR
GENERAL
CSL3
IEC06000311 V2 EN
Figure 392:
Simplified logic diagram for one phase
721
Section 13
13.2.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
ZC1PPSCH
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKTRL1
BLKTRL2
BLKTRL3
CACCL1
CACCL2
CACCL3
CSURL1
CSURL2
CSURL3
CSORL1
CSORL2
CSORL3
CSBLKL1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
BLKCSL2
BLKCSL3
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
CSL1
CSL2
CSL3
CSMPH
CRLL1
CRLL2
CRLL3
IEC06000427 V2 EN
Figure 393:
13.2.4
ZC1PPSCH function block

Table 424:
Name
ZC1PPSCH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Common signal for block of trip output from

communication logic in all phases
BLKTRL1
BOOLEAN

logic in Phase L1
BLKTRL2
BOOLEAN

logic in Phase L2
BLKTRL3
BOOLEAN

logic in Phase L3
CACCL1
BOOLEAN
Accelerated Distance protection zone start in

Phase L1
CACCL2
BOOLEAN
Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in

Phase L2
CACCL3
BOOLEAN
Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in

Phase L3
CSURL1
BOOLEAN
Underreaching distance protection zone signal in

Phase L1
CSURL2
BOOLEAN

Phase L2
CSURL3
BOOLEAN

Phase L3
722
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
CSORL1
BOOLEAN
Overreaching distance protection zone signal in

Phase L1
CSORL2
BOOLEAN

Phase L2
CSORL3
BOOLEAN

Phase L3
CSBLKL1
BOOLEAN

in Phase L1
CSBLKL2
BOOLEAN

in Phase L2
CSBLKL3
BOOLEAN

in Phase L3
BLKCSL1
BOOLEAN
Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking

schemes in Phase L1
BLKCSL2
BOOLEAN

schemes in Phase L2
BLKCSL3
BOOLEAN

schemes in Phase L3
CRL1
BOOLEAN
Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRL2
BOOLEAN
CRL3
BOOLEAN
CRMPH
BOOLEAN
Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault
Table 425:
Name
ZC1PPSCH Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip output in any of the phase
TRL1
BOOLEAN
Trip output in Phase L1
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
CSL1
BOOLEAN
Carrier Send in phase L1
CSL2
BOOLEAN
CSL3
BOOLEAN
CSMPH
BOOLEAN
carrier Send for multi phase fault
CRLL1
BOOLEAN
CRLL2
BOOLEAN
CRLL3
BOOLEAN
723
Section 13
13.2.5
Table 426:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
ZC1PPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation On / Off
Scheme Type
Off
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Permissive UR
Scheme type
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Trip coordinate time
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Minimum duration of Carrier Send signal
13.2.6
Technical data
Table 427:
ZC1PPSCH technical data
Function
13.3
Accuracy
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Minimum duration of a carrier send

signal
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Security timer for loss of carrier

guard detection
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Off
NoRestart
Restart
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection ZCRWPSCH
Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for distance protection
13.3.1
Range or value
Scheme type
IEC 61850
identification
ZCRWPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlap on the parallel line.
724
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When
activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no
reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also
echoed back to accelerate the sending end.
Three phase or phase segregated scheme logic is available.
13.3.2
13.3.2.1
Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRV to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone
has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the trip signal is
activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 394.
IRV
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev
t
t
t
AND
IRVBLK
tDelayRev
t
IRVL
en05000122_2_en.vsd
IEC05000122 V2 EN
Figure 394:
The preventing of sending the send signal CS and activating of the TRIP in the
scheme communication block ZCPSCH is carried out by connecting the IRVL
signal to input BLOCK in the ZCPSCH function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is
set to zero.
13.3.2.2
Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal
under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different
fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
The WEI function returns the received signal, see figure 395, when:
725
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
No active signal present on the input BLOCK.

The functional input CRL is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL
output on the scheme communication logic ZCPSCH .
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLK1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is
usually configured to the BLOCK functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2
functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not
undervoltage) as present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
IEC05000123 V1 EN
Figure 395:
Echo of a received signal by the WEI function
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.
An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping
of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI
function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 396.
Figure 396:
Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram
726
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.3.3
Function block
ZCRWPSCH
U3P*
BLOCK
IRVBLK
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL
IRVL
TRWEI
TRWEIL1
TRWEIL2
TRWEIL3
ECHO
IEC06000287 V2 EN
Figure 397:
13.3.4
ZCRWPSCH function block

Table 428:
Name
ZCRWPSCH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IRVBLK
BOOLEAN
Block of current reversal function
IRV
BOOLEAN
Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of WEI logic due to operation of other

protections
VTSZ
BOOLEAN
Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure

function
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL
BOOLEAN
POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 429:
Name
ZCRWPSCH Output signals

Type
Description
IRVL
BOOLEAN
Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI
BOOLEAN
Trip of WEI logic
TRWEIL1
BOOLEAN
Trip of WEI logic in phase L1
TRWEIL2
BOOLEAN
TRWEIL3
BOOLEAN
ECHO
BOOLEAN
Carrier send by WEI logic
727
Section 13
13.3.5
Table 430:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
ZCRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurrRev
Off
On
Off
Operating mode of Current Reversal

Logic
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060
Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and

local trip
WEI
Off
Echo
Echo & Trip
Off
Operating mode of WEI logic
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
Coordination time for the WEI logic
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
UPP<
10 - 90
%UB
70
Phase to Phase voltage for detection of

fault condition
UPN<
10 - 90
%UB
70
Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of

fault condition
13.3.6
Technical data
Table 431:
ZCRWPSCH technical data
Function
13.4
Range or value
Accuracy
Detection level phase-to-neutral

voltage
(10-90)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Detection level phase-to-phase

voltage
(10-90)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio
<105%
Operate time for current reversal

logic
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end

infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL

Local acceleration logic
IEC 61850
identification
ZCLCPLAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
728
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.4.1
Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication
channel is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLCPLAL) can be used. This logic
enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully
replace a communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the lossof-load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
13.4.2
13.4.2.1
Zone extension
The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason,
configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used
autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing
device, see figure 398.
This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.
IEC05000157 V1 EN
Figure 398:
Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic
After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions.
In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an
unwanted autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the
reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.
On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by
instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-ofload acceleration).
729
Section 13
13.4.2.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Loss-of-Load acceleration
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used
for "acceleration" connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip
"instantaneously" during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase
currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an
overreaching zone will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition
when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at
the opposite IED, see figure 399. The current measurement is performed internally
and the internal STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions.
The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the
opposite IED. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults,
because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite IED is tripped.
IEC05000158 V1 EN
Figure 399:
Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.
13.4.3
Function block
ZCLCPLAL
I3P*
BLOCK
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC
TRZE
TRLL
IEC05000333 V2 EN
Figure 400:
ZCLCPLAL function block
730
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.4.4

Table 432:
ZCLCPLAL Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ARREADY
BOOLEAN
Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for

fast trip
NDST
BOOLEAN
Non directional criteria used to prevent

instantaneous trip
EXACC
BOOLEAN
Connected to function used for tripping at zone

extension
BC
BOOLEAN
Breaker Close
LLACC
BOOLEAN
Connected to function used for tripping at loss of

load
ZCLCPLAL Output signals
Name
Table 434:
Description
I3P
Table 433:
13.4.5
Default
Type
Description
TRZE
BOOLEAN
Trip by zone extension
TRLL
BOOLEAN
Trip by loss of load
Setting parameters
ZCLCPLAL Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for current values
LoadCurr
1 - 100
%IB
10
Load current before disturbance in % of

IBase
LossOfLoad
Off
On
Off
Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load.
ZoneExtension
Off
On
Off
Enable/Disable operation of Zone

extension
MinCurr
1 - 100
%IB
Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB

trip in % of IBase
tLowCurr
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR

value
tLoadOn
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay on pick-up for load current

release
tLoadOff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay on drop off for load current

release
731
Section 13
13.5
Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECPSCH
Scheme communication logic for
residual overcurrent protection
13.5.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC 61850
identification
ECPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Introduction
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses
communication channels.
In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be
transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time
of the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short
operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection
enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching schemes. The logic can
also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal,
included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent
protection (ECRWPSCH) function.
13.5.2
The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is configured to
give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH
logic:
Input signal CACC is used for tripping of the communication scheme,

normally the start signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
Input signal CSBLK is used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreaching
step of STRV.
Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.
In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to

the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.
732
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.5.2.1
Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional
element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional
element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received
from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency)
is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for
zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.
Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is
no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to
current reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid
unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end
infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking
signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally
longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received
signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
IEC05000448 V1 EN
Figure 401:
13.5.2.2
Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme
Permissive under/overreaching scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends
a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward
733
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive
signal before activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for
the communication in each direction.
An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works
in the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may
detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in
the distance or earth-fault protection.
In case of an internal earth-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates
and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal).
Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates
and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).
The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the
underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSUR.
In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.
734
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK
CRL
AND
CR
25 ms
0 - 60 s
AND
CACC
AND
t
tCoord
TRIP
t
50 ms
t
AND
BLKCS
AND
Overreach
CSOR
OR
CS
AND
CSUR
OR
en05000280_2_en.vsd
IEC05000280 V2 EN
13.5.2.3
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome
by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 402. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
735
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CR
1
tSecurity
t
CRG
200 ms
t
CRL
>1
150 ms
AND
OR
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN
Figure 402:
Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off:
The unblocking function is out of operation
No restart:

If CRG disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling
13.5.3
Function block
ECPSCH
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG
IEC06000288 V2 EN
Figure 403:
ECPSCH function block
736
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.5.4

Table 435:
ECPSCH Input signals
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS
BOOLEAN
Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking

schemes
CSBLK
BOOLEAN
Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier

Send
CACC
BOOLEAN
Signal to be used for tripping by Communication

Scheme
CSOR
BOOLEAN
Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for

Carrier Send
CSUR
BOOLEAN
Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for

Carrier Send
CR
BOOLEAN
Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG
BOOLEAN
Carrier guard signal received
ECPSCH Output signals
Name
Table 437:
Description
BLOCK
Table 436:
13.5.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip by Communication Scheme Logic
CS
BOOLEAN
Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL
BOOLEAN
Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme

Logic
LCG
BOOLEAN
loss of carrier guard signal
Setting parameters
ECPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
SchemeType
Off
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Permissive UR
Scheme type, Mode of Operation
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Communication scheme coordination

time
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
737
Section 13
Table 438:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Unblock
Off
NoRestart
Restart
Off
tSecurity
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Security timer for loss of carrier guard

detection
13.5.6
Technical data
Table 439:
ECPSCH technical data
Function
13.6
Range or value
Permissive Underreaching
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme
coordination time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
logic for residual overcurrent protection
13.6.1
Accuracy
Scheme type
IEC 61850
identification
ECRWPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Introduction
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH.
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earthfault protection function can be supported with logic that uses communication
channels.
The 670 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme
communication logic.
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching
permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on
the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection
between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal
logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.
738
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can

basically operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.
The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this
IED. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/
or zero-sequence source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these
conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.
13.6.2
13.6.2.1
Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current
reversal and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the
blocking overreaching scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault
protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment
malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Figure 404 and figure 405 show the logic circuits.
Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK
input of the directional comparison module.
13.6.2.2
Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to input
signal IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the
reverse direction element is activated during the tPickUpRev time, the output signal
IRVL is activated, see figure 404. The logic is now ready to handle a current
reversal without tripping. Output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input
on the permissive overreaching scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelayRev time, see
figure 404. This ensures the reset of the received CR signal.
739
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK
0-60 s
t
IRV
IRVBLK
tPickUpRev
10 ms
t
0-60 s
t
AND
tPickUpRev
0-60 s
t
IRVL
tDelayRev
IEC09000031 V1 EN
Figure 404:
13.6.2.3
Simplified logic diagram, current reversal

The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo)
or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). See figure 405 and figure
406.
The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction
element, connected to WEIBLK1 via an OR-gate. See figure 405. If neither the
forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last
200 ms, the weak-end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See
figure 405.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth-fault function that is in operation.
BLOCK
200 ms
t
WEIBLK1
CRL
&
50 ms
t
200 ms
t
AND
ECHO
WEI = Echo
IEC09000032 V1 EN
Figure 405:
Simplified logic diagram, weak-end infeed - Echo
With the Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further,
it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled
and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0>.
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth-fault function that is in operation.
740
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK
200 ms
t
WEIBLK1
CRL
50 ms
t
AND
200 ms
t
ECHO
AND
AND
WEI = Echo&Trip
ST3U0
TRWEI
AND
CBOPEN
IEC09000020 V1 EN
Figure 406:
Simplified logic diagram, weak-end infeed - Echo & Trip
The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of
200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo
signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing
action if the weak-end echo is selected for both line ends.
13.6.3
Function block
ECRWPSCH
U3P*
BLOCK
IRVBLK
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL
IRVL
TRWEI
ECHO
CR
IEC06000289 V2 EN
Figure 407:
13.6.4
ECRWPSCH function block

Table 440:
Name
ECRWPSCH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IRVBLK
BOOLEAN
Block of current reversal function
IRV
BOOLEAN
Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2
BOOLEAN

protections
VTSZ
BOOLEAN
Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure

function
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
CRL
BOOLEAN
POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

741
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 441:
ECRWPSCH Output signals
Name
13.6.5
Table 442:
Name
Type
Description
IRVL
BOOLEAN
TRWEI
BOOLEAN
Trip of WEI logic
ECHO
BOOLEAN
Carrier send by WEI logic
CR
BOOLEAN
POR Carrier signal received from remote end
Setting parameters
ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurrRev
Off
On
Off

Logic
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060

local trip
WEI
Off
Echo
Echo & Trip
Off
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
3U0>
5 - 70
%UB
25
Neutral voltage setting for fault

conditions measurement
13.6.6
Technical data
Table 443:
ECRWPSCH technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Off
Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3Uo for WEI trip
(5-70)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio
>95%

logic
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

infeed logic
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
742
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.7

phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH
logic for phase segregated
communication
13.7.1
IEC 61850
identification
ZC1WPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Introduction
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(ZC1WPSCH) function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When
activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no
reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also
echoed back to accelerate the sending end.
13.7.2
13.7.2.1

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided
trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 408.
IRVLn
tPickUpRev 10 ms
t
t
tPickUpRev
t
&
IRVBLKLn
tDelayRev
t
IRVOPLn
IEC06000474 V2 EN
Figure 408:
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn
in the Scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection
743
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
(ZCPSCH) is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn signal to input BLOCKLn in

ZCPSCH function.
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated
communication (ZC1WPSCH) function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which
secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if
the pick-up timer is set to zero.
The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the
condition that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault
detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
VTSZ
BLOCK
CRLn
>1
tWEI
t
&
50 ms
t
ECHOLn - cont.
200 ms
t
&
WEIBLKL1
200 ms
t
WEIBLKL2
200 ms
t
ECHOLn
IEC07000085 V2 EN
Figure 409:
The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 409, when:
The input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output
on the scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection
(ZCPSCH).
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKLx input or to the VTSZ input. The later is usually configured to the
STGEN output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 input.
An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An
undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of
the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo &Trip, together with the WEI
function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 410.
744
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
WEI = Echo&Trip
ECHOLn - cont.
CBOPEN
STUL1N
STUL2N
AND
100 ms
t
OR
STUL3N
OR
TRWEI
AND
15 ms
t
TRWEIL1
AND
15 ms
t
TRWEIL2
AND
15 ms
t
TRWEIL3
en00000551.vsd
Figure 410:
13.7.3
Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram
Function block
ZC1WPSCH
U3P*
TRPWEI
BLOCK
TRPWEIL1
BLKZ
TRPWEIL2
CBOPEN
TRPWEIL3
CRL1
IRVOP
CRL2
IRVOPL1
CRL3
IRVOPL2
IRVL1
IRVOPL3
IRVL2
ECHO
IRVL3
ECHOL1
IRVBLKL1
ECHOL2
IRVBLKL2
ECHOL3
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
WEIBLKL1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
WEIBLKO1
WEIBLKO2
WEIBLKO3
IEC06000477 V2 EN
Figure 411:
ZC1WPSCH function block
745
Section 13
13.7.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 444:
Name
ZC1WPSCH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure

function
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
CRL1
BOOLEAN
Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2
BOOLEAN
CRL3
BOOLEAN
IRVL1
BOOLEAN
Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2
BOOLEAN
Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3
BOOLEAN
Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1
BOOLEAN
Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2
BOOLEAN
IRVBLKL3
BOOLEAN
WEIBLK
BOOLEAN
Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1
BOOLEAN
Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2
BOOLEAN
WEIBLKL3
BOOLEAN
WEIBLKOP
BOOLEAN

protection
WEIBLKO1
BOOLEAN
Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation

of other protection
WEIBLKO2
BOOLEAN

of other protections
WEIBLKO3
BOOLEAN

of other protections
Table 445:
Name
ZC1WPSCH Output signals

Type
Description
TRPWEI
BOOLEAN
Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEIL1
BOOLEAN
Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1
TRPWEIL2
BOOLEAN
TRPWEIL3
BOOLEAN
IRVOP
BOOLEAN
IRVOPL1
BOOLEAN
Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVOPL2
BOOLEAN
IRVOPL3
BOOLEAN
746
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
13.7.5
Table 446:
Type
Description
ECHO
BOOLEAN
Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHOL1
BOOLEAN
Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1
ECHOL2
BOOLEAN
ECHOL3
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
ZC1WPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base setting for Voltage level
OperCurrRev
Off
On
Off

Logic
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060

local trip
OperationWEI
Off
Echo
Echo & Trip
Off
UPE<
10 - 90
%UB
70
Phase to Earth voltage for detection of

fault condition
UPP<
10 - 90
%UB
70
Phase to Phase voltage for detection of

fault condition
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
13.7.6
Technical data
Table 447:
ZC1WPSCH technical data
Function
13.8
Description
Range or value
Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral

voltage
(10-90)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Detection level phase to phase

voltage
(10-90)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio
<105%
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms

infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Direct transfer trip logic
747
Section 13
13.8.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
Direct transfer trip (DTT) logic is used together with Line distance protection
function or other type of line protection. One typical example for use of transfer
trip is given below. When Line distance protection function is extended to cover
power lines feeding the transformer directly and there is a fault in transformer
differential area, the transformer differential protection operates faster than line
protection. A trip command is sent to the remote end of the line. On remote end,
before sending a trip command to the circuit breaker, the certainty of a fault
condition is ensured by checking local criterion in DTT logic.
CR
TRIP
CS
DTT
TRIP
IDIFF>
VT1
Xsource
Line
CT1
CT2
CT3
Power
Transformer
Source
Load
en03000120.vsd
IEC03000120 V1 EN
Figure 412:
Direct transfer trip
On receiving the CR signal from remote end, Direct transfer trip logic needs to
check additional local criterion, before sending the trip signal to circuit breaker.
DTT logic can be handled in the following separate application functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
Three-phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
Three-phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC
A composite scheme of these functions must be configured in PCM600

configuration tool, to make a complete DTT scheme as shown in Figure 413. The
different individual local criteria functions can also be used as direct tripping
protections, normally with a time delay.
748
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CR1
CR2
Low impedance protection
Breaker Failure
Backup trip of breaker failure

protection
Three phase overcurrent

CarrierReceiveLogic
CR1
CR2
Zero sequence overcurrent
protection
Analog input
I3P
LocalCheck
Negative sequence overcurrent
protection
CB Trip output
LCCRPTRC
Three phase undercurrent
U3P
OR
Zero sequence overvoltage

protection
Negative sequence overvoltage

protection
Compensated over and

undervoltage protection
Low active power and power

factor protection
Sudden change in current

variation
IEC09000773 V1 EN
Figure 413:
13.8.2
Direct transfer trip scheme
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

Low active power and power factor
protection
13.8.2.1
IEC 61850
identification
LAPPGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37_55
Introduction
Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) function measures
power flow. It can be used for protection and monitoring of:
749
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
phase wise low active power

phase wise low power factor
phase wise reactive power and apparent power as service values
Following features are available:
13.8.2.2
Definite time stage for low active power protection

Definite time stage for low power factor protection
Individual enabling of Low active power and Low power factor functions
Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of 3' and '2 out of 3'
Phase wise calculated values of apparent power, reactive power, active power
and power factor are available as service values
Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current
Low active power and low power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) calculates power
and power factor from voltage and current values. Trip signal must be set
independently for low active power and low power factor condition after definite
time delay.
Active power calculation
LAPPGAPC calculates single phase complex power of L1, L2 and L3 loop by
following equations. From this complex apparent power, the real and imaginary
parts can be respective active and reactive power values of respective phases. All
the apparent power values given out of the function are absolute values. The active
power is the real part of the calculated apparent power.
S L1 = U L1 I L1
EQUATION2243 V1 EN
(Equation 147)
S L2 = U L2 IL2
EQUATION2244 V1 EN
(Equation 148)
S L3 = U L3 I L3
EQUATION2245 V1 EN
(Equation 149)
Power factor calculation

Power factor is a ratio of active power to apparent power. The function calculates
power factor from the calculated values of active power and apparent power of L1,
L2 and L3 loop by following equation:
pf L1
PL1
S L1
EQUATION2246 V1 EN
(Equation 150)
750
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
pf L 2
PL 2
SL2
(Equation 151)
EQUATION2247 V1 EN
pf L 3
PL 3
SL3
(Equation 152)
EQUATION2248 V1 EN
Active power trip mode

The low active power functionality has a trip mode setting. According to this
setting, trip is activated if the low active power is detected in one out of three
phases or two out of three phases respectively. These two modes are user settable
through setting OpMode.
Zero clamping filtering
The function will do zero clamping to disable the calculation if the current and
voltage values of a particular phase are less than 30% of UBase for voltage and 3%
of IBase for current value.
Calculation
The active power setting value used for detection of under power must be given as
a three-phase value. The design starts to calculate internally the per phase value
from this setting and detect phase wise under power condition individually. The
power factor start value is common for all the three phases.
Phase wise analog values apparent power, active power, reactive power and power
factor are available as service values.
STLAPLx
P < LAP<
I3P
TRLAP
Calculation P and
pf
U3P
STLPFLx
pf < pf<
TRLPFLx
IEC10000011 V1 EN
Figure 414:
Logic diagram of Low active power and low power factor protection
(LAPPGAPC)
751
Section 13
13.8.2.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
LAPPGAPC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRLAP
TRLPF
TRLPFL1
TRLPFL2
TRLPFL3
STLAP
STLPF
STLAPL1
STLAPL2
STLAPL3
STLPFL1
STLPFL2
STLPFL3
IEC09000763 V1 EN
Figure 415:
13.8.2.4
LAPPGAPC function block

Table 448:
Name
LAPPGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase group signal for current
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase group signal for voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block all trip signals of the funtction
Table 449:
Name
LAPPGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
TRLAP
BOOLEAN
Trip low active power
TRLPF
BOOLEAN
Trip low power factor
TRLPFL1
BOOLEAN
Trip low power factor phase 1
TRLPFL2
BOOLEAN
TRLPFL3
BOOLEAN
STLAP
BOOLEAN
Start low active power
STLPF
BOOLEAN
Start low power factor
STLAPL1
BOOLEAN
Start low active power phase 1
STLAPL2
BOOLEAN
STLAPL3
BOOLEAN
STLPFL1
BOOLEAN
Start low power factor phase 1
STLPFL2
BOOLEAN
STLPFL3
BOOLEAN
752
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.2.5
Table 450:
Setting parameters
LAPPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base Setting for current in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
SBase
1 - 50000
MVA
1200
Base Setting for power in MVA
OperationLAP
Off
On
Off
Operation low active power Off/On
OpMode
2 out of 3
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
Trip mode low active power 2out of 3 or

1 out of 3
LAP<
2.0 - 100.0
%SB
0.1
5.0
3 Phase start value for low active power

in % of SBase
tOpLAP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
Time delay to operate for low active power
OperationLPF
Off
On
Off
Operation low power factor Off/On
LPF<
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.40
Start value for low power factor
tOpLPF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
Time delay to operate for low power factor
13.8.2.6
Technical data
Table 451:
LAPPGAPC technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, low

active power
(2.0-100.0)% of SBase
1,0% of Sr
Reset ratio, low

active power
<105%
Transient overreach,
low active power
<20 % at = 100 ms
Operate value, low

power factor
0.00-1.00
1,0% of Sr
Reset ratio, low

power factor
<105%
low power factor
<20 % at = 100 ms
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Critical impulse time,

low active power
10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8xPset
Impulse margin time,

low active power
10 ms typically
753
Section 13
13.8.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Compensated over and undervoltage protection

COUVGAPC
IEC 61850
identification
Compensated over and undervoltage

protection
13.8.3.1
IEC 60617
identification
COUVGAPC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59_27
Introduction
Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) function calculates
the remote end voltage of the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage,
current and with the help of transmission line parameters, that is, line resistance,
reactance, capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection of long transmission
line for in zone faults, COUVGAPCcan be incorporated with local criteria within
direct transfer trip logic to ensure tripping of the line only under abnormal conditions.
13.8.3.2
Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) function is phase
segregated and mainly used for local criteria check in Direct transfer trip. The
principle is to utilize local measured voltage and current to calculate the voltage at
the remote end of the line.
The main measured inputs to COUVGAPC are three-phase voltage and current
signals. COUVGAPCuses line resistance, reactance and line charging capacitance
to calculate the remote end voltage. It also takes the input for local shunt reactor,
connected at the line side of the line breaker, reactance value. The calculated
voltage is referred to as compensated voltage.
STOV
TROV
Over voltage
U3P
t
Compensated
voltage calculation
SWIPOS
EnShuntReactor
STOVLx
comparator
I3P
TRIPOVLx
STUVLx
&
Under voltage
comparator
TRIPUVLx
TRUV
STUV
IEC09000782 V1 EN
Figure 416:
Logic diagram of Compensated over and undervoltage protection

(COUVGAPC)
754
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The formula used for calculation of compensated voltage is as follows:

Uremote = Ulocal (Ilocal j x Ulocal/Xsr + j x Ulocal/Xcp) x Zsetting
Where:
Uremote
calculated voltage at the opposite side of line
Ulocal
measured local voltage
Ilocal
measured local current
Xsr
reactance of local line connected shunt reactor, if applicable
Xcp
half of equivalent reactance of line distributed capacitor
Above calculated compensated voltage is compared to preset over and under

voltage levels set as percentage of base voltage UBase. If the calculated voltage
exceeds setting in any phase, COUVGAPC generates start and trip signals for that
phase and common start and trip signals. Independent enabling for overvoltage and
undervoltage are available with definite time delay. If shunt reactor is not present
in the system, COUVGAPC does not include any effect of shunt reactor while
calculating the compensated voltage. This shunt reactor calculation is enabled
when both input SWIPOS is 1 and setting parameter EnShuntReactor is On. Run
time change in EnShuntReactor setting parameter restarts the IED and SWIPOS
input signal is used to enable/disable the shunt reactor calculations.
Calculations
All resistance and reactance considered in compensated voltage calculation are

primary side values.
Calculation of shunt reactor reactance in ohms from given MVAr rating:
2
X sr =
UN
QN
(Equation 153)
EQUATION2249 V1 EN
Where:
UN
line to line voltage
QN
is total three phase MVAr of shunt reactor
If total line capacitance (Ctotal) is known then half line capacitive reactance:
X cp
2
wCtotal
EQUATION2250 V1 EN
(Equation 154)
and if total line capacitive reactance XcTotal is known:
X cp
= 2 X cTotal
EQUATION2251 V1 EN
(Equation 155)
755
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Compensated voltage for all three phases is available as service values.
13.8.3.3
Function block
COUVGAPC
I3P*
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
SWIPOS
TRUV
TROV
TRUVL1
TRUVL2
TRUVL3
TROVL1
TROVL2
TROVL3
STUV
STOV
STUVL1
STUVL2
STUVL3
STOVL1
STOVL2
STOVL3
IEC09000764 V1 EN
Figure 417:
13.8.3.4
COUVGAPC function block

Table 452:
Name
COUVGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for current inputs
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for voltage inputs
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of the function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Blocks all operate outputs
SWIPOS
BOOLEAN
Local shunt reactor connected or not
Table 453:
Name
COUVGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
TRUV
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal for compensated under voltage
TROV
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal for compensated over voltage
TRUVL1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal for compensated under voltage of

phase 1
TRUVL2
BOOLEAN

phase 2
TRUVL3
BOOLEAN

phase 3
TROVL1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal for compensated over voltage of

phase 1
756
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
13.8.3.5
Table 454:
Type
Description
TROVL2
BOOLEAN

phase 2
TROVL3
BOOLEAN

phase 3
STUV
BOOLEAN
Common start signal for compensated under

voltage
STOV
BOOLEAN
Common start signal for compensated over voltage
STUVL1
BOOLEAN
Start signal for compensated under voltage of

phase 1
STUVL2
BOOLEAN

phase 2
STUVL3
BOOLEAN

phase 3
STOVL1
BOOLEAN
Start signal for compensated over voltage of

phase 1
STOVL2
BOOLEAN

phase 2
STOVL3
BOOLEAN

phase 3
Setting parameters
COUVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
OperationUV
Off
On
On
Operation compensated under voltage

Off/On
U<
1 - 100
%UB
70
Compensated under voltage level in %

of UBase
tUV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay to trip under voltage
OperationOV
Off
On
On
Operation compensated over voltage Off/

On
U>
1 - 200
%UB
120
Compensated over voltage level in % of

UBase
tOV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to trip over voltage
Table 455:
COUVGAPC Group settings (advanced)
Name
HystAbs
Values (Range)
0.0 - 100.0
Unit
%UB
Step
0.1
Default
0.5
Description
Hysteresis absolute for compensated
over/under voltage in % of UBase
757
Section 13
Table 456:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
COUVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
R1
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
5.00
Positive sequence resistance per phase

for the line in ohm
X1
0.01 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
40.00
Positive sequence reactance per phase

for the line in ohm
Xc
1.00 - 10000.00
ohm
0.01
1000.00
Half of equivalent capacitive reactance

per phase in ohm
EnShuntReactor
Off
On
On
Enable setting if shunt reactor connected

in line
Xsh
1.00 - 10000.00
ohm
0.01
1500.00
Per phase reactance of local Shunt

Reactor in ohm
13.8.3.6
Technical data
Table 457:
COUVGAPC technical data
Function
13.8.4
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value,
undervoltage
(1-100)% of UBase
0,5% of Ur
Reset ratio,
undervoltage
<105%

undervoltage
5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8xUset

undervoltage
15 ms typically
Operate value,
overvoltage
(1-200)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur at U<Ur
0.5% of U at U>Ur
Reset ratio,
overvoltage
>95%

overvoltage
2 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2xUset

overvoltage
10 ms typically
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC

Sudden change in current variation
IEC 61850
identification
SCCVPTOC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51
758
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.4.1
Introduction
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function is a fast way of finding
any abnormality in line currents. When there is a fault in the system, the current
changes faster than the voltage. SCCVPTOC finds abnormal condition based on
phase-to-phase current variation. The main application is as a local criterion to
increase security when transfer trips are used.
13.8.4.2
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function calculates the variation
in phase-to-phase current and gives the START output when this variation crosses
the sum of start level and float threshold for a time of tDelay. The variation is
calculated for all the three phase-to-phase currents.
The variation in the current is calculated using the following equation:
Di = i ( t ) - 2 i ( t - T ) + i ( t - 2T )
EQUATION2252 V1 EN
Where:
i(t)
Amplitude of the current at the present instant
i(t-T)
Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly one cycle time before
i(t-2T)
Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly two cycle time before
Criteria:
Di > i (1.8 DIT
+ I >)
EQUATION2253 V1 EN
(Equation 156)
I>: start level

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation
DIT
1 2T -1
Di ( t - n )
T n =T
EQUATION2254 V1 EN
(Equation 157)
T: the count of the sampling value in one cycle

If the above criteria becomes true for a time of tDelay, then respective START
output is activated provided the BLOCK input is false, and the respective TRIP
outputs is activated for the time of tHold provided the BLKTR and BLOCK input
is false.
759
Section 13
13.8.4.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
SCCVPTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
START
IEC09000765 V1 EN
Figure 418:
13.8.4.4
SCCVPTOC function block

Table 458:
SCCVPTOC Input signals
Name
Type
Three phase to phase current samples group
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block trip signals
SCCVPTOC Output signals
Name
Table 460:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 459:
13.8.4.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
START
BOOLEAN
Common start signal
Setting parameters
SCCVPTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
I>
0 - 100
%IB
20
Fixed threshold setting in % of IBase
tHold
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Hold time for operate signals
Table 461:
Name
tDelay
SCCVPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
0.000 - 0.005
Step
0.001
Default
0.002
Description
Time delay for start and trip signals
760
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.4.6
Technical data
Table 462:
SCCVPTOC technical data
Function
13.8.5
13.8.5.1
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value,
overcurrent
(0 - 100)% of IBase
1,0% of Ir
Reset ratio,
overcurrent
>95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC

IEC 61850
identification
Carrier receive logic
LCCRPTRC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94
Introduction
In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR signal gives the trip to the
circuit breaker after checking certain local criteria functions in order to increase the
security of the overall tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC)
function gives final trip output of the DTT scheme.
Features:
13.8.5.2
Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme

Blocking function output on CR Channel Error
Phase wise trip outputs
The functionality of the Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC) is to release the TRIP
signal for DTT scheme based on the LOCTRL1, LOCTRL2, LOCTRL3, and
LOCTR signals coming from local criterion, and the Carrier receive signals CR1
and CR2. There are two modes of operation 1 out of 2 and 2 out of 2. In the case of
the 1 out of 2 mode if any one of the carrier signal is received then the trip signals
will be released, and in 2 out of 2 mode both the CRs should be high to release trip
signal. If any one of the channel error signals is high in 2 out of 2 mode, then logic
automatically switches to 1 out of 2 mode after a time delay of 200 ms. After
switching to 1/2 mode under channel error condition and if channel error gets
cleared the mode will switch back only after a time delay of 200 ms.
If the input channel error signal is high then the respective carrier receive signal
will be blocked.
761
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The complete function can be blocked by setting the BLOCK input high.
13.8.5.3
Function block
LCCRPTRC
BLOCK
LOCTR
LOCTRL1
LOCTRL2
LOCTRL3
CHERR1
CHERR2
CR1
CR2
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
IEC09000766 V1 EN
Figure 419:
13.8.5.4
LCCRPTRC function block

Table 463:
Name
LCCRPTRC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LOCTR
BOOLEAN
Local common trip signal coming from DTT
LOCTRL1
BOOLEAN
Local trip signal for phase 1 coming from DTT
LOCTRL2
BOOLEAN
LOCTRL3
BOOLEAN
CHERR1
BOOLEAN
Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 1
CHERR2
BOOLEAN
Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 2
CR1
BOOLEAN
Carrier receive 1
CR2
BOOLEAN
Carrier receive 2
Table 464:
Name
LCCRPTRC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip
TRL1
BOOLEAN
Trip phase 1
TRL2
BOOLEAN
Trip phase 2
TRL3
BOOLEAN
Trip phase 3
762
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.5.5
Table 465:
Setting parameters
LCCRPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
ChMode
2 Out Of 2
1 Out Of 2
2 Out Of 2
Setting to select 1/2 or 2/2 mode
tOperate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay to operate
13.8.5.6
13.8.6
Technical data
Table 466:
LCCRPTRC technical data
Function
Range or value
1 Out Of 2
2 Out Of 2
Timer
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV

Negative sequence overvoltage
protection
13.8.6.1
Accuracy
Operation mode
IEC 61850
identification
LCNSPTOV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
47
Introduction
Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. Negative
sequence voltage and current get high values during unsymmetrical faults.
13.8.6.2
Negative sequence over voltage protection (LCNSPTOV) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The negative sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection U3P in PCM600.
This voltage is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high
if the input negative sequence voltage is greater than the preset value U2>. Trip
signal will be set high after a time delay setting of tU2. There is a BLOCK input
which will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The
negative sequence voltage is also available as service value output U2.
763
Section 13
13.8.6.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
LCNSPTOV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
START
IEC09000767 V1 EN
Figure 420:
13.8.6.4
LCNSPTOV Function block

Table 467:
LCNSPTOV Input signals
Name
Type
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block overall function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block trip output
LCNSPTOV Output signals
Name
Table 469:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 468:
13.8.6.5
Default
U3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal for negative sequence over voltage
START
BOOLEAN
Start signal for negative sequence over voltage
Setting parameters
LCNSPTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400
U2>
1 - 200
%UB
10
Negative sequence over voltage start

value in %UBase
tU2
0.000 - 120.000
0.001
2.000
764
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.6.6
13.8.7
Technical data
Table 470:
LCNSPTOV technical data
Function
Range or value
(1-200)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur at U<Ur
0.5% of U at U>Ur
Reset ratio, negative

sequence
overvoltage
>95%
Operate time, start
20 ms typically at 0 to 2xUset
Reset time, start

negative sequence
overvoltage

negative sequence
overvoltage
15 ms typically
Timers
(0.000-120.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV

Zero sequence overvoltage protection
13.8.7.1
Accuracy
Operate value,
negative sequence
overvoltage
IEC 61850
identification
LCZSPTOV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N
Introduction
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth.
They can reach considerably high values during earth faults.
13.8.7.2
Zero sequence over voltage protection (LCZSPTOV) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The zero sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection U3P in PCM600.
This voltage is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high
if the input zero sequence voltage is greater than the preset value 3U0>. Trip signal
will be set high after a time delay setting of t3U0. BLOCK input will block the
complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence voltage
will be available as service value output as 3U0.
765
Section 13
13.8.7.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
LCZSPTOV
U3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
START
IEC09000768 V1 EN
Figure 421:
13.8.7.4
LCZSPTOV function block

Table 471:
LCZSPTOV Input signals
Name
Type
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block TRIP output
LCZSPTOV Output signals
Name
Table 473:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 472:
13.8.7.5
Default
U3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP signal for zero sequence over voltage
START
BOOLEAN
Start signal for zero sequence over voltage
Setting parameters
LCZSPTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400
3U0>
1 - 200
%UB
10
Zero sequence voltage start value in %

of UBase
t3U0
0.000 - 120.000
0.001
2.000
766
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.7.6
13.8.8
Technical data
Table 474:
LCZSPTOV technical data
Function
Range or value
(1-200)% of UBase
0.5% of Ur at U<Ur
0.5% of U at U>Ur
Reset ratio, zero

sequence
overvoltage
>95%
Operate time, start
25 ms typically at 0 to 1.5xUset
Reset time, start
25 ms typically at 1.5 to 0xUset

zero sequence
overvoltage
10 ms typically at 0 to 1.5xUset
Timers
(0.000-120.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC

Negative sequence overcurrent
protection
13.8.8.1
Accuracy
Operate value, zero

sequence
overvoltage
IEC 61850
identification
LCNSPTOC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46
Introduction
Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. They can
reach considerably high values during abnormal operation.
13.8.8.2
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (LCNSPTOC) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The negative sequence input current from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600.
This current is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high
if the input negative sequence current is greater than the preset value I2>. Trip
signal will be set high after a time delay setting of tI2. BLOCK input will block the
complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence
current is available as service value output I2.
767
Section 13
13.8.8.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
LCNSPTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
START
IEC09000769 V1 EN
Figure 422:
13.8.8.4
LCNSPTOC Function block

Table 475:
LCNSPTOC Input signals
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block trip signal
LCNSPTOC Output signals
Name
Table 477:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 476:
13.8.8.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal negative sequence over current

protection
START
BOOLEAN
Start signal for negative sequence over current

protection
Setting parameters
LCNSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
I2>
1 - 2500
%IB
100
Negative sequence over current start

value in % of IBase
tI2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
768
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.8.6
13.8.9
Technical data
Table 478:
LCNSPTOC technical data
Function
Range or value
(1 - 2500)% of IBase
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, negative

sequence
overcurrent
>95%
Operate time, start
20 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset
Reset time, start

negative sequence
overcurrent

negative sequence
overcurrent
10 ms typically
Timer
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
start function
<5% at = 100 ms
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC

Zero sequence overcurrent protection
13.8.9.1
Accuracy
Operate value,
negative sequence
overcurrent
IEC 61850
identification
LCZSPTOC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N
Introduction
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth.
They have a considerably high value during earth faults.
13.8.9.2
Zero sequence overcurrent protection (LCZSPTOC) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The zero sequence input current from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600.
This current is compared against the preset value and a start signal will be set high
if the input zero sequence current is greater than the preset value 3I0>. Trip signal
will be set high after a time delay setting of t3I0. BLOCK input will block the
complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence current is
available as service value output 3I0.
769
Section 13
13.8.9.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
LCZSPTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
START
IEC09000770 V1 EN
Figure 423:
13.8.9.4
LCZSPTOC Function block

Table 479:
LCZSPTOC Input signals
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block trip output
LCZSPTOC Output signals
Name
Table 481:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 480:
13.8.9.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal for zero sequence over current

protection
START
BOOLEAN
Start signal for zero sequence over current

protection
Setting parameters
LCZSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
3I0>
1 - 2500
%IB
100
Zero sequence over current start value

in % of IBase
t3I0
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
770
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.9.6
13.8.10
Technical data
Table 482:
LCZSPTOC technical data
Function
Range or value
(1-2500)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I<Ir
1.0% of I at I>Ir
Reset ratio, zero

sequence
overcurrent
>95%
Operate time, start
Reset time, start

zero sequence
overcurrent

zero sequence
overcurrent
15 ms typically
Timer
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC

Three phase overcurrent
13.8.10.1
Accuracy
Operate value, zero

sequence
overcurrent
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
LCP3PTOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51
Introduction
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for overcurrent conditions.
Features:
13.8.10.2
Phase wise start and trip signals

Overcurrent protection
Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
Single definite time stage trip function.
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is used for detecting over current
conditions. LCP3PTOC starts when the current exceeds the set limit IOC>. It
operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the function operates after a
predefined time tOC and resets when the fault current disappears. The function
771
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output, timer

or the function itself, if desired.
13.8.10.3
Function block
LCP3PTOC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
IEC09000771 V1 EN
Figure 424:
13.8.10.4
LCP3PTOC Function block

Table 483:
Name
LCP3PTOC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block trip of the function
Table 484:
Name
LCP3PTOC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
Common start signal
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
772
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
13.8.10.5
Table 485:
Setting parameters
LCP3PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation On / Off
IBase
0 - 99999
3000
IOC>
5 - 2500
%IB
1000
Start value for 3 phase over current in %

IBase
tOC
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
13.8.10.6
13.8.11
Technical data
Table 486:
LCP3PTOC technical data
Function
Range or value
(5-2500)% of IBase
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio,
overcurrent
>95%
Operate time, start
Reset time, start

overcurrent

overcurrent
10 ms typically
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC

Three phase undercurrent
13.8.11.1
Accuracy
Operate value,
overcurrent
IEC 61850
identification
LCP3PTUC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37
Introduction
Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) is designed for detecting loss of
load conditions.
Features:
773
Section 13
13.8.11.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Phase wise start and trip signals

Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
Single definite time stage trip function
Three phase undercurrent (LCP3PTUC) is used for detecting sudden load loss
which is considered as fault condition. LCP3PTUC starts when the current is less
than the set limit IUC<. It operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is,
the function operates after a predefined time tUC and resets when the load current
restores. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the
function output, timer or the function itself, if desired.
13.8.11.3
Function block
LCP3PTUC
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
TRL1
TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
IEC09000772 V1 EN
Figure 425:
13.8.11.4
LCP3PTUC Function block

Table 487:
Name
LCP3PTUC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block trip of the function
Table 488:
Name
LCP3PTUC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
Common start signal
774
Section 13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
13.8.11.5
Table 489:
Type
Description
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
LCP3PTUC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation On / Off
IBase
0 - 99999
3000
Current Base
IUC<
1.00 - 100.00
%IB
0.01
50.00
Start value for 3 phase under current in

% IBase
tUC
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
13.8.11.6
Technical data
Table 490:
LCP3TUC technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value,
undercurrent
(1.00-100.00)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
Reset ratio,
undercurrent
>105%
Operate time, start
Reset time, start

undercurrent

undercurrent
10 ms typically
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
775
776
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 14
Logic
About this chapter

This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the
functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals
and technical data are included for each function.
14.1
Tripping logic SMPPTRC

Tripping logic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SMPPTRC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
14.1.1
Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker
involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides pulse prolongation to ensure a trip
pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct cooperation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lockout.
14.1.2
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic SMPPTRC is settable
(tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening.
For three-phase tripping, SMPPTRC has a single input (TRIN) through which all
trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a
single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs,
as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
777
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK
tTripMin
TRIN
AND
TRIP
OR
Operation Mode = On
Program = 3Ph
en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN
Figure 426:
Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip
SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter
inputs enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single
trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase
segregated trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC function. Examples of such
protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded
SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping
(for example, carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication
logic), and one for earth fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual
overcurrent protection).
Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip
command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase
selection signals.
The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the
IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or
three-phase trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser
SMBRREC function.
The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A
special input is also provided which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping,
forcing all tripping to be three-phase.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each
breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal
from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a threephase trip, if desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of
closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.
778
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
14.1.2.1
Logic diagram
TRINL1
TRINL2
OR
TRINL3
OR
1PTRZ
1PTREF
OR
TRIN
AND
RSTTRIP - cont.
Program = 3ph
en05000517.vsd
IEC05000517 V1 EN
Figure 427:
Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram
TRINP_3P
TRINP_A
PS_A
OR
AND
ATRIP
TRINP_B
PS_B
OR
AND
BTRIP
TRINP_C
PS_C
OR
AND
CTRIP
OR
OR
OR
-loop
-loop
OR
AND
1PTRGF
AND
AND
tWaitForPHS
OR
1PTRZ
AND
t
IEC10000056 V1 EN
Figure 428:
Phase segregated front logic
779
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
L1TRIP
150 ms
OR
RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
L2TRIP
150 ms
AND
OR
STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
L3TRIP
150 ms
AND
OR
TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
OR
OR
P3PTR
AND
OR
-loop
en05000519.vsd
Figure 429:
Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode
780
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
L1TRIP - cont.
150 ms
OR
RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
L2TRIP
150 ms
OR
STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
AND
L3TRIP
150 ms
OR
TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
OR
AND
OR
TRIP
OR
-loop
en05000520.vsd
Figure 430:
Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode
781
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
BLOCK
RTRIP
TRL1
AND
OR
STRIP
TRL2
AND
OR
TTRIP
TRL3
AND
OR
RSTTRIP
TRIP
OR
AND
OR
TR3P
AND
-loop
10 ms
AND
AND
AND
5 ms
AND
AND
TR1P
TR2P
OR
-loop
en05000521.vsd
Figure 431:
14.1.3
Final tripping circuits
Function block
SMPPTRC
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT
TRL1
TRIN
TRL2
TRINL1
TRL3
TRINL2
TR1P
TRINL3
TR2P
PSL1
TR3P
PSL2
CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
IEC05000707 V2 EN
Figure 432:
14.1.4
SMPPTRC function block

Table 491:
Name
SMPPTRC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN
BOOLEAN
Trip all phases
782
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Trip phase 1
TRINL2
BOOLEAN
Trip phase 2
TRINL3
BOOLEAN
Trip phase 3
PSL1
BOOLEAN
Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2
BOOLEAN
PSL3
BOOLEAN
1PTRZ
BOOLEAN
Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF
BOOLEAN
Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase

selection
P3PTR
BOOLEAN
Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout

function
SMPPTRC Output signals
Name
Table 493:
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 492:
14.1.5
Default
TRINL1
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip output signal
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
TR1P
BOOLEAN
Tripping single-pole
TR2P
BOOLEAN
Tripping two-pole
TR3P
BOOLEAN
Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
Setting parameters
SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
Program
3 phase
1ph/3ph
1ph/2ph/3ph
1ph/3ph
Three ph; single or three ph; single, two

or three ph trip
tTripMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS
0.020 - 0.500
0.001
0.050
Secures 3-pole trip when phase

selection failed
783
Section 14
Logic
Table 494:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TripLockout
Off
On
Off
On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip

latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock
Off
On
Off
On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and

trip, Off: only inp
14.1.6
Technical data
Table 495:
SMPPTRC technical data
Function
14.2
Range or value
3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph
Minimum trip pulse length
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO

Trip matrix logic
14.2.1
Accuracy
Trip action
IEC 61850
identification
TMAGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
TMAGGIO output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the
signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.
14.2.2
Trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide the necessary grouping of connected input signals (for example, for
tripping and alarming purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
784
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1.
2.
3.
when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 (TRUE) the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1
(TRUE).
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 (TRUE) the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1
(TRUE).
when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 (TRUE) the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The
OnDelay is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set
time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides wether the output shall be
steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with
duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation since the inputs are
connected in an OR-function a new pulse will only be given on the output if all
related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. And for steady operation
the of delay will start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is
shown in figure 433
PulseTime
&
ModeOutput1
Input 1
Ondelay
Offdelay
&
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Input 16
PulseTime
&
ModeOutput2
Input 17
Ondelay
Offdelay
&
Input 32
PulseTime
&
ModeOutput3
Ondelay
Offdelay
&
IEC09000612 V1 EN
Figure 433:
Trip matrix internal logic
Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order
to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip
coils.
785
Section 14
Logic
14.2.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
TMAGGIO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
IEC09000830 V1 EN
Figure 434:
14.2.4
TMAGGIO function block

Table 496:
Name
TMAGGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
INPUT17
BOOLEAN
Binary input 17
INPUT18
BOOLEAN
Binary input 18
INPUT19
BOOLEAN
Binary input 19
INPUT20
BOOLEAN
Binary input 20

786
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Binary input 21
INPUT22
BOOLEAN
Binary input 22
INPUT23
BOOLEAN
Binary input 23
INPUT24
BOOLEAN
Binary input 24
INPUT25
BOOLEAN
Binary input 25
INPUT26
BOOLEAN
Binary input 26
INPUT27
BOOLEAN
Binary input 27
INPUT28
BOOLEAN
Binary input 28
INPUT29
BOOLEAN
Binary input 29
INPUT30
BOOLEAN
Binary input 30
INPUT31
BOOLEAN
Binary input 31
INPUT32
BOOLEAN
Binary input 32
TMAGGIO Output signals
Name
Table 498:
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 497:
14.2.5
Default
INPUT21
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
OR function between inputs 1 to 32
Setting parameters
TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
PulseTime
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Output pulse time
OnDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Output on delay time
OffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Output off delay time
ModeOutput1
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
ModeOutput2
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
ModeOutput3
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
787
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
14.3
Configurable logic blocks
14.3.1
Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.
14.3.2
OR function block.
INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.
PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs.
GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to
pass from the input to the output.
XOR function block.
LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.
TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.
AND function block.
SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. Set input has priority.
RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. Reset input has priority.
Inverter function block INV

INV
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000404 V2 EN
Figure 435:
INV function block
788
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 499:
INV Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 500:
Description
Input
INV Output signals
Name
Type
OUT
14.3.3
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Output
OR function block OR
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.
OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
IEC04000405 V2 EN
Figure 436:
OR function block
Table 501:
OR Input signals
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 to OR gate
Table 502:
Name
OR Output signals
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output from OR gate
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Inverted output from OR gate
789
Section 14
Logic
14.3.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs are inverted.
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4N
OUT
NOUT
IEC04000406 V2 EN
Figure 437:
AND function block
Table 503:
AND Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
INPUT4N
BOOLEAN
Input 4 inverted
Table 504:
AND Output signals
Name
14.3.5
Default
INPUT1
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Output inverted
Timer function block TIMER

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (T).
TIMER
INPUT
T
ON
OFF
IEC04000378 V2 EN
Figure 438:
TIMER function block
Table 505:
TIMER Input signals
Name
INPUT
Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input to timer
790
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 506:
TIMER Output signals
Name
Table 507:
Type
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
Output from timer , pick-up delayed
OFF
BOOLEAN
Output from timer, drop-out delayed
TIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
0.000 - 90000.000
14.3.6
Step
0.001
Default
Description
0.000
Time delay of function
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
PULSETIMER
INPUT
T
OUT
IEC04000407 V2 EN
Figure 439:
PULSETIMER function block
Table 508:
PULSETIMER Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 509:
Description
Input to pulse timer
PULSETIMER Output signals
Name
Type
OUT
Table 510:
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Output from pulse timer
PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name
T
14.3.7
Values (Range)
0.000 - 90000.000
Unit
s
Step
0.001
Default
0.010
Description
Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions
with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.
791
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
XOR
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
IEC04000409 V2 EN
Figure 440:
XOR function block
Table 511:
XOR Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 to XOR gate
Table 512:
XOR Output signals
Name
14.3.8
Default
INPUT1
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output from XOR gate
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Inverted output from XOR gate
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.
LOOPDELAY
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000296 V1 EN
Figure 441:
LOOPDELAY function block
Table 513:
LOOPDELAY Input signals
Name
INPUT
Table 514:
Name
OUT
14.3.9
Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input signal
LOOPDELAY Output signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Description
Output signal, signal is delayed one execution
cycle
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with
memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
792
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset.
Table 515:
SET
Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

RESET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted
last value
SRMEMORY
SET
OUT
RESET
NOUT
IEC04000408 V2 EN
Figure 442:
SRMEMORY function block
Table 516:
SRMEMORY Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Input signal to set
RESET
BOOLEAN
Input signal to reset
Table 517:
SRMEMORY Output signals
Name
Table 518:
Default
SET
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Inverted output signal
SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name
Memory
14.3.10
Values (Range)
Off
On
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
On
Description
Operating mode of the memory function
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with
memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each
RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher
priority over SET input.
793
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 519:
Truth table for RSMEMORY function block
RESET
SET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted last
value
RSMEMORY
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000294 V1 EN
Figure 443:
RSMEMORY function block
Table 520:
RSMEMORY Input signals
Name
Type
Input signal to set
RESET
BOOLEAN
Input signal to reset
RSMEMORY Output signals
Name
Name
Memory
14.3.11
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 521:
Table 522:
Default
SET
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Inverted output signal
RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Off
On
Step
-
Default
On
Description
Operating mode of the memory function
Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal
should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.
GATE
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000410 V2 EN
Figure 444:
GATE function block
794
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 523:
GATE Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 524:
Description
Input to gate
GATE Output signals
Name
Type
OUT
Table 525:
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Output from gate
GATE Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Operation
Unit
Off
On
14.3.12
Step
Default
Off
Description
Operation Off/On
Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has outputs for delayed input
signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an
Operation setting On/, Off/ that controls the operation of the timer.
TIMERSET
INPUT
ON
OFF
IEC04000411 V2 EN
Figure 445:
TIMERSET function block
Table 526:
TIMERSET Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 527:
Description
Input to timer
TIMERSET Output signals
Name
Table 528:
Default
Type
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF
BOOLEAN
Output from timer, drop-out delayed
TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
Delay for settable timer n
795
Section 14
Logic
14.3.13
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 529:
Configurable logic blocks
Logic block
14.4
Quantity with cycle time

fast
medium
Range or
value
normal
Accuracy
LogicAND
60
60
160
LogicOR
60
60
160
LogicXOR
10
10
20
LogicInverter
30
30
80
LogicSRMemory
10
10
20
LogicRSMemory
10
10
20
LogicGate
10
10
20
LogicTimer
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
LogicPulseTimer
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
LogicTimerSet
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
LogicLoopDelay
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Trip Matrix Logic
Boolean 16 to Integer
Boolean 16 to
integer with Logic
Node
Integer to Boolean 16
Integer to Boolean
16 with Logic Node
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN

Fixed signals
IEC 61850
identification
FXDSIGN
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed)

signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the
unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating
certain logic.
14.4.1
There are eight outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
796
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
14.4.2
OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
Function block
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC05000445 V2 EN
Figure 446:
14.4.3

Table 530:
Name
14.4.4
FXDSIGN function block
FXDSIGN Output signals

Type
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
Boolean signal fixed off
ON
BOOLEAN
Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO
INTEGER
Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE
INTEGER
Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE
INTEGER
Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO
REAL
Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL
STRING
String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL
GROUP SIGNAL
Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF
GROUP SIGNAL
Group signal fixed off
Setting parameters
797
Section 14
Logic
14.5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

IEC 61850
identification
Boolean 16 to integer conversion
14.5.1
IEC 60617
identification
B16I
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer.
14.5.2
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input will freeze the output at
the last value.
14.5.3
Function block
B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC07000128 V2 EN
Figure 447:
14.5.4
B16I function block

Table 531:
Name
B16I Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
798
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Table 532:
B16I Output signals
Name
OUT
14.5.5
Default
IN4
Type
INTEGER
Description
Output value
Setting parameters
14.6
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation B16IFCVI
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with
logic node representation
14.6.1
IEC 61850
identification
B16IFCVI
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(B16IFCVI) is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
B16IFCVI can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).
799
Section 14
Logic
14.6.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(B16IFCVI) is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
The BLOCK input will freeze the output at the last value.
14.6.3
Function block
B16IFCVI
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC09000624 V1 EN
Figure 448:
14.6.4
B16IFCVI function block

Table 533:
Name
B16IFCVI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13

800
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Table 534:
B16IFCVI Output signals
Name
OUT
14.6.5
Default
IN14
Type
Description
INTEGER
Output value
Setting parameters
14.7
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16

Integer to boolean 16 conversion
14.7.1
IEC 61850
identification
IB16
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer
into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.
14.7.2
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer
into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16 function is designed for receiving the
integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
801
Section 14
Logic
14.7.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
IB16
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC06000501 V2 EN
Figure 449:
14.7.4
IB16 function block

Table 535:
Name
IB16 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INP
INTEGER
Integer Input
Table 536:
Name
IB16 Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
802
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
14.7.5
Setting parameters
14.8
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation IB16FCVB
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with
logic node representation
14.8.1
IEC 61850
identification
IB16FCVB
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB)
is used to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.
IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 depending on the
operator position input (PSTO).
14.8.2
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB)
is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16FCVB
function can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC
61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off
or Local, then no change is applied to the outputs.
803
Section 14
Logic
14.8.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
IB16FCVB
BLOCK
PSTO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC09000399 V1 EN
Figure 450:
14.8.4
IB16FCVB function block

Table 537:
Name
IB16FCVB Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 538:
Name
IB16FCVB Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
804
Section 14
Logic
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
14.8.5
Setting parameters
This function does not have any setting parameters.
805
806
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 15
Monitoring
About this chapter

This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and
disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function
blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
15.1
Measurements
Measurements
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CVMMXN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
Phase current measurement
CMMXU
I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
Phase-phase voltage measurement
VMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
Current sequence component

measurement
CMSQI
Voltage sequence measurement
VMSQI
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
Phase-neutral voltage measurement
VNMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
807
Section 15
Monitoring
15.1.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values
of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is
vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It
provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the
power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of
protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of
instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the
proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it
can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional
overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the
actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low
limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also
supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which
reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure
value can also be based on periodic reporting.
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system
quantities:
P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
I: phase current amplitude
F: power system frequency
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical
quantities:
I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)
808
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual
hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequential quantities:
I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively
voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as
instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low
pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
15.1.2
15.1.2.1
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the preprocessing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function
Phase angle reference
All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The
General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section
"Analog inputs".
Zero point clamping
Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1,
I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXU.
809
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity
Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 451. The
monitoring has two different modes of operating:
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 451.

Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN
Figure 451:
Presentation of operating limits
Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output

(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1:
High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below
Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block
(XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 451.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity
The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:
810
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting

(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
en05000500.vsd
IEC05000500 V1 EN
Figure 452:
Periodic reporting
Amplitude dead-band supervision
If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the
change is larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is
detected by a new measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum
necessary. Figure 453 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band
supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values
are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
811
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
t
99000529.vsd
IEC99000529 V1 EN
Figure 453:
Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the Y set limits. Even if amplitude dead-band reporting is
selected, there will be a 30 s "back-ground" cyclic reporting as well.
Integral dead-band reporting
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the preset limit (XZeroDb), figure 454, where an example of reporting with integral deadband supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous
but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each
other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 454 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals
with small variations that can last for relatively long periods. Even if integral deadband reporting is selected, there will be a 30 s "back-ground" cyclic reporting as well.
812
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
A2
Y4
Value
Reported
Value
Reported
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
Y1
A6
A5
Value
Reported
t
99000530.vsd
IEC99000530 V1 EN
Figure 454:
Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
15.1.2.2
Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and threephase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to
measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending
on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by
a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter
phase power calculation
Mode
1
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
EQUATION1385 V1 EN
Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation
U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
EQUATION1386 V1 EN
Arone
S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
*
EQUATION1387 V1 EN
(Equation 158)
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
EQUATION1388 V1 EN
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
EQUATION1389 V1 EN
(Equation 160)
U =
(Equation 159)
3 U PosSeq
I = I PosSeq
EQUATION1390 V1 EN
(Equation 161)
Comment
Used when
three phaseto-earth
voltages are
available
Used when
three two
phase-tophase
voltages are
available
Used when
only
symmetrical
three phase
power shall
be measured
813
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter

phase power calculation
Mode
4
L1L2
S = U L1 L 2 ( I L*1 - I L* 2 )
(Equation 162)
EQUATION1391 V1 EN
Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation
U = U L1 L 2
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
EQUATION1392 V1 EN
L2L3
S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
*
(Equation 164)
EQUATION1393 V1 EN
U = U L2 L3
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
EQUATION1394 V1 EN
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
*
(Equation 166)
EQUATION1395 V1 EN
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1
*
(Equation 168)
EQUATION1397 V1 EN
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
U =
L2
S = 3 U L2 I L2
*
(Equation 170)
EQUATION1399 V1 EN
U =
L3
S = 3 U L3 I L3
*
EQUATION1401 V1 EN
(Equation 172)
Used when
only UL3L1
phase-tophase
voltage is
available
Used when
only UL2
phase-toearth voltage
is available
3 U L2
(Equation 171)
Used when
only UL3
is available
3 U L3
I = I L3
EQUATION1402 V1 EN
Used when
only UL2L3
phase-tophase
voltage is
available
(Equation 169)
I = IL2
U =
Used when
only UL1L2
phase-tophase
voltage is
available
Used when
only UL1
is available
I = I L1
EQUATION1400 V1 EN
(Equation 167)
3 U L1
EQUATION1398 V1 EN
(Equation 165)
U = U L 3 L1
EQUATION1396 V1 EN
(Equation 163)
Comment
(Equation 173)
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating
modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that
the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is
calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following
formulas:
P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN
(Equation 174)
814
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 175)
EQUATION1404 V1 EN
S = S =
P +Q
2
EQUATION1405 V1 EN
(Equation 176)
PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN
(Equation 177)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the
function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and
voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is
lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when
current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".
Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated
to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 455.
815
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC05000652 V2 EN
Figure 455:
Calibration curves
Low pass filtering

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P,
Q, S, U, I and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the
step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with
the following recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
(Equation 178)
EQUATION1407 V1 EN
where:
X
is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld
is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
816
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping
In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is

not present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for
current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either
current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values
for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the
measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these
values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the
possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section
"Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it
is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is
achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the
function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set
as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle
(setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for
these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally
calculated value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for
specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site.
However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power
meter with high accuracy class available.
Directionality
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and

reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is
shown in the following figure 456.
817
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Busbar
IED
Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN
Figure 456:
Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply

obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the
measurement block as an output.
15.1.2.3
Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to threephase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for
internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and
818
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below

5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 455.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section
"Measurement supervision".
15.1.2.4
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the
configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".
15.1.2.5
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or
voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but
XRANG, are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
15.1.3
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
819
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CVMMXN
I3P*
U3P*
S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
IEC10000016 V1 EN
Figure 457:
CVMMXN function block
CMMXU
I3P*
IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
IEC05000699 V2 EN
Figure 458:
CMMXU function block
VNMMXU
U3P*
UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
IEC09000850 V1 EN
Figure 459:
VNMMXU function block
820
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
VMMXU
U3P*
UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
IEC05000701 V2 EN
Figure 460:
VMMXU function block
CMSQI
I3P*
3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC05000703 V2 EN
Figure 461:
CMSQI function block
VMSQI
U3P*
3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
IEC05000704 V2 EN
Figure 462:
15.1.4
VMSQI function block

Table 539:
Name
CVMMXN Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
821
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 540:
Name
CVMMXN Output signals

Type
Description
REAL
Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE
INTEGER
Apparent Power range
P_INST
REAL
Active Power
REAL
Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE
INTEGER
Active Power range
Q_INST
REAL
Reactive Power
REAL
Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE
INTEGER
Reactive Power range
PF
REAL
Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE
INTEGER
Power Factor range
ILAG
BOOLEAN
Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD
BOOLEAN
Current is leading voltage
REAL
Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE
INTEGER
Calcuate voltage range
REAL
Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE
INTEGER
Calculated current range
REAL
System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE
INTEGER
System frequency range
Table 541:
Name
I3P
Table 542:
Name
CMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Default
-
Description
Group connection abstract block 1
CMMXU Output signals

Type
Description
IL1
REAL
IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG
INTEGER
IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL
REAL
IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL2
REAL
IL2RANG
INTEGER
IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL
REAL
IL3
REAL
IL3RANG
INTEGER
IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL
REAL
822
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 543:
Name
U3P
Table 544:
Name
VNMMXU Input signals

Type
Default
GROUP
SIGNAL
Description
VNMMXU Output signals

Type
Description
UL1
REAL
UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1RANG
INTEGER
UL1 Amplitude range
UL1ANGL
REAL
UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL2
REAL
UL2RANG
INTEGER
UL2 Amplitude range
UL2ANGL
REAL
UL3
REAL
UL3RANG
INTEGER
UL3 Amplitude range
UL3ANGL
REAL
Table 545:
Name
U3P
Table 546:
Name
VMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Default
-
Description
VMMXU Output signals

Type
Description
UL12
REAL
UL12RANG
INTEGER
UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL
REAL
UL23
REAL
UL23RANG
INTEGER
UL23ANGL
REAL
UL31
REAL
UL31RANG
INTEGER
UL31ANGL
REAL
Table 547:
Name
I3P
CMSQI Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Default
-
Description
823
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 548:
CMSQI Output signals
Name
Type
3I0
REAL
3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG
INTEGER
3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL
REAL
3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1
REAL
I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG
INTEGER
I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL
REAL
I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2
REAL
I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG
INTEGER
I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL
REAL
I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 549:
VMSQI Input signals
Name
Type
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 550:
Default
-
Description
VMSQI Output signals
Name
15.1.5
Description
Type
Description
3U0
REAL
3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG
INTEGER
3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL
REAL
3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1
REAL
U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG
INTEGER
U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL
REAL
U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2
REAL
U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG
INTEGER
U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL
REAL
U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.
Table 551:
Name
CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Step
Default
SLowLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 2000.0
Unit
%SB
0.1
80.0
Description
Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
60.0
Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
50.0
Minimum value in % of SBase
824
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Step
Default
SMax
Values (Range)
0.0 - 2000.0
Unit
%SB
0.1
200.0
Description
Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
PMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
QMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PFMin
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UMin
0.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
50.0
Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax
0.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
200.0
Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
FrMin
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
FrMax
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
70.000
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for current values in A
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Base setting for voltage value in kV
SBase
0.05 - 200000.00
MVA
0.05
2080.00
Base setting for power values in MVA
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
L1, L2, L3

voltage
825
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PowAmpFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
Amplitude factor to scale power

calculations
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Angle compensation for phase shift

between measured I & U
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.000

measurement, U and I
Table 552:
Name
CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of

range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SHiHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common

for all limits)
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
PHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
PLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
PLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits)
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
QHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
QHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
QLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
QLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits)
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PFHiHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.800
High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-0.800
Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits)
826
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
UHiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
150.0
High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
120.0
High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
80.0
Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%UB
0.1
60.0
Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits)
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
IHiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits)
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
FrHiHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
65.000
FrHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
63.000
FrLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
47.000
FrLowLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
45.000
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits)
UGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%UB
Zero point clamping in % of Ubase
IGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%IB
Zero point clamping in % of Ibase
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ur
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
827
Section 15
Monitoring
Table 553:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IL1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Operation
Off
On
Off
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base setting for current level in A
IL1Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

IL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

IL2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

IL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

IL3Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL3RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL3AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Table 554:
Name
CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IL1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IL1HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
IL1HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

30% of Ir
IL1LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL1LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
828
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IL1Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IL1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IL2HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
IL2HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
IL2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL2LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL2Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

IL3ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IL3HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
IL3HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
IL3LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL3LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL3Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL3LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

Table 555:
VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Operation
Off
On
Off
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
UL1Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
300000.000
Maximum value
829
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

UL1AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UL2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
300000.000
Maximum value
UL2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

UL2AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UL3Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
300000.000
Maximum value
UL3RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL3LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

UL3AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Table 556:
Name
VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UL1HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
260000.000
UL1HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
240000.000
UL1LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
220000.000
UL1LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
200000.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ur
UL1Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UL2HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
260000.000

830
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL2HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
240000.000
UL2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
220000.000
UL2LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
200000.000
UL2Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL3ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UL3HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
260000.000
UL3HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
240000.000
UL3LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
220000.000
UL3LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
200000.000
UL3Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
Table 557:
VMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL12DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Operation
Off
On
Off
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
UL12Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
500000.000
Maximum value
UL12RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL12AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UL23DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UL23Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
500000.000
Maximum value
UL23RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

UL31DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

831
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL31Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
500000.000
Maximum value
UL31RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Table 558:
Name
VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL12ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UL12HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
UL12HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
420000.000
UL12LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
UL12LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

100% of Ur
UL12Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL12LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

UL23ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UL23HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
UL23HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
420000.000
UL23LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
UL23LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
UL23Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL23LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

UL31ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UL31HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
UL31HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
420000.000
UL31LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
832
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UL31LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
UL31Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL31LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

Table 559:
CMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

3I0Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3I0Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Operation
Off
On
Off
3I0AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
3I0AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
3I0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

I1Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
I1Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

I1AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

I2Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value

833
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
I2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

I2AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 560:
Name
CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
3I0HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
3I0HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
3I0LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
3I0LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
3I0AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I1HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
I1HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
I1LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
I1LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

I1AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I1AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I2HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
I2HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
I2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
834
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
I2LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
I2AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I2AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
Table 561:
VMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3U0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

3U0Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3U0Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
300000.000
Maximum value
3U0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3U0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

3U0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Operation
Off
On
Off
3U0AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
3U0AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
3U0AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
3U0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

U1Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
U1Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
300000.000
Maximum value
U1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

U1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

U2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

U2Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
U2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
300000.000
Maximum value

835
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
U2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

U2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

U2AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
U2AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
U2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UAmpPreComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage

at 5% of Ir
UAmpPreComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

at 30% of Ir
UAmpPreComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

at 100% of Ir
Table 562:
Name
VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3U0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
3U0HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
260000.000
3U0HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
240000.000
3U0LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
220000.000
3U0LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
200000.000
U1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
U1HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
260000.000
U1HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
240000.000
U1LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
220000.000
U1LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
200000.000
U1AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
U1AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
U1AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
U1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
836
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
U2HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
260000.000
U2HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
240000.000
U2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
220000.000
U2LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
200000.000
U2AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
15.1.6
Technical data
Table 563:
CVMMXN technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Frequency
(0.95-1.05) fr
2.0 mHz
Voltage
(0.1-1.5) Ur
0.5% of Ur at UUr
0.5% of U at U > Ur
Connected current
(0.2-4.0) Ir
0.5% of Ir at I Ir
0.5% of I at I > Ir
Active power, P
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir
Reactive power, Q
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir
1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
Conditions:
0.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 Ur
0.2 x Ir < I < 1.2 Ir
Apparent power, S
0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir
Power factor, cos ()
0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir
15.2
Event counter CNTGGIO
15.2.1
Identification
Event counter
IEC 61850
identification
0.02
IEC 60617
identification
CNTGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00946 V1 EN
15.2.2
Introduction
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counters which are used for storing the number
of times each counter input has been activated.
837
Section 15
Monitoring
15.2.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many
times each of the inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six
inputs is updated, giving the total number of times the input has been activated, as
soon as an input is activated. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per
second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the
counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a
mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the
product. This however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several
minutes, before a new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new
CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost.
CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary
power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters
at testing.The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six
counters are set to 0.
All inputs are configured via PCM600.
15.2.3.1
Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850
client. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI
graphical display.
15.2.3.2
Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the
six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each
positive edge of the input respectively.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held.
The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters
are set to 0.
838
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
15.2.4
Function block
CNTGGIO
BLOCK
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
RESET
VALUE1
VALUE2
VALUE3
VALUE4
VALUE5
VALUE6
IEC05000345 V2 EN
Figure 463:
15.2.5
CNTGGIO function block
Input signals
Table 564:
CNTGGIO Input signals
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
COUNTER1
BOOLEAN
Input for counter1
COUNTER2
BOOLEAN
Input for counter2
COUNTER3
BOOLEAN
Input for counter3
COUNTER4
BOOLEAN
Input for counter4
COUNTER5
BOOLEAN
Input for counter5
COUNTER6
BOOLEAN
Input for counter6
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
CNTGGIO Output signals
Name
Table 566:
Description
BLOCK
Table 565:
15.2.6
Default
Type
Description
VALUE1
INTEGER
Output of counter1
VALUE2
INTEGER
Output of counter2
VALUE3
INTEGER
Output of counter3
VALUE4
INTEGER
Output of counter4
VALUE5
INTEGER
Output of counter5
VALUE6
INTEGER
Output of counter6
Setting parameters
CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name
Operation
Values (Range)
Off
On
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Off
Description
Operation Off / On
839
Section 15
Monitoring
15.2.7
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 567:
CNTGGIO technical data
Function
15.3
Range or value
Accuracy
Counter value
0-10000
Max. count up speed
10 pulses/s
Event function EVENT

Event function
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EVENT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00946 V1 EN
15.3.1
Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is
connected to the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for
LON and SPA communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.
15.3.2
The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the
state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a
state transition, for which event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to
create single events, but are also intended for double indication events.
EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical
signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the
input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal
logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of
EVENT function. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary
input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.
840
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are
treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can
be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This
can be performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It
is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each
input channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily
saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota
limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume
the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block
will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66%
of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.
841
Section 15
Monitoring
15.3.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
EVENT
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC05000697 V2 EN
Figure 464:
15.3.4
EVENT function block

Table 568:
Name
EVENT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 1
INPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 2
INPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 3
INPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 4
INPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 5
INPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 6
INPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 7
INPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 8
INPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 9
INPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 10
INPUT11
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 11
INPUT12
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 12
842
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
15.3.5
Table 569:
Type
Default
Description
INPUT13
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 13
INPUT14
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 14
INPUT15
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 15
INPUT16
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 16
Setting parameters
EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SPAChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
LON channel mask
EventMask1
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
Reporting criteria for input 1
EventMask2
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask3
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask4
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask5
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask6
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
843
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EventMask7
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask8
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask9
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask10
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask11
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask12
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask13
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask14
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask15
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask16
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal3
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal4
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal5
0 - 3600

844
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MinRepIntVal6
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal7
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal8
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal9
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal10
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal11
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal12
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal13
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal14
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal15
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal16
0 - 3600
15.4
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

Logical signal status report
15.4.1
IEC 61850
identification
BINSTATREP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a
SPA master to poll signals from various other functions.
15.4.2
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or
via SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the
input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the
input signal resets.
845
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t
t
IEC09000732 V1 EN
Figure 465:
15.4.3
BINSTATREP logical diagram
Function block
BINSTATREP
OUTPUT1
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
OUTPUT2
ÎNPUT2
OUTPUT3
ÎNPUT3
OUTPUT4
ÎNPUT4
OUTPUT5
ÎNPUT5
OUTPUT6
ÎNPUT6
OUTPUT7
ÎNPUT7
OUTPUT8
ÎNPUT8
OUTPUT9
ÎNPUT9
OUTPUT10
ÎNPUT10
OUTPUT11
ÎNPUT11
OUTPUT12
ÎNPUT12
OUTPUT13
ÎNPUT13
OUTPUT14
ÎNPUT14
OUTPUT15
ÎNPUT15
OUTPUT16
ÎNPUT16
IEC09000730 V1 EN
Figure 466:
15.4.4
BINSTATREP function block

Table 570:
Name
BINSTATREP Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Single status report input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
INPUT9
BOOLEAN

846
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
BINSTATREP Output signals
Name
Table 572:
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 571:
15.4.5
Default
INPUT10
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT10
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT13
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Name
t
15.5
Values (Range)
0.000 - 60000.000
Unit
s
Step
0.001
Default
10.000
Description
Fault locator LMBRFLO

Fault locator
IEC 61850
identification
LMBRFLO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
847
Section 15
Monitoring
15.5.1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the
fault in percent, km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by
compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double
circuit lines.
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation
of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault
current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate
the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual
fault to further increase the accuracy.
Especially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important)
where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can
be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.
15.5.2
The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
great accuracy.
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and
voltages are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used
by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report
function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the
parameter setting tool within PCM600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed
and additional fault resistance.
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
R1A+jX1A
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m
R1B+jX1B
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO
IEC05000045 V2 EN
Figure 467:
Simplified network configuration with network data, required for

settings of the fault location-measuring function
848
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due
to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of
order, and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation
of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its
also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault
can be achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a
part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and
managed via the local HMI or PCM600.
15.5.2.1
Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of doubleend infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not
done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the
amount of additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
15.5.2.2
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 468 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed
from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at
a distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of
the algorithm.
849
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
L
F
ZA
A
IA
pZL
IB
(1-p).ZL
ZB
IF
UA
RF
xx01000171.vsd
IEC01000171 V1 EN
Figure 468:
Fault on transmission line fed from both ends
From figure 468 it is evident that:

U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
(Equation 179)
EQUATION95 V1 EN
Where:
IA
is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,
IF
is the fault current and
is a relative distance to the fault
The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = -------DA
(Equation 180)
EQUATION96 V1 EN
Where:
IFA
is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and
DA
is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A
and the total fault current.
For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB
DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN
(Equation 181)
850
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA
- RF
U A = I A p Z L + ------DA
(Equation 182)
EQUATION98 V1 EN
Table 573:
Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
Fault type:
L1-N
UA
UL1A
IA
IL1A + KN x INA
IFA
3
--- D ( I L1A I 0A )
2
EQUATION110 V1 EN
L2-N
UL2A
IL2A + KN x INA
L3-N
UL3A
IL3A + KN x INA
3
--- D ( I L2A I 0A )
2
EQUATION111 V1 EN
3
--- D ( I L3A I0A )
2
EQUATION112 V1 EN
L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2N
UL1A-UL2A
IL1A - IL2A
L2-L3, L2-L3-N
UL2A-UL3A
IL2A - IL3A
L3-L1, L3-L1-N
UL3A-UL1A
IL3A - IL1A
DIL 1 L 2 A
EQUATION113 V1 EN
DIL2L3A
EQUATION114 V1 EN
DIL3L1A
EQUATION115 V1 EN
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is
equal to:
Z0L Z 1L
K N = -----------------------3 Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN
(Equation 183)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current
before the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted
into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.
For double lines, the fault equation is:
851
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
I FA
U A = I A p Z 1L + -------- RF + I 0P Z 0M
DA
(Equation 184)
EQUATION100 V1 EN
Where:
I0P
is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,
Z0M
is a mutual zero sequence impedance and
DA
is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:
( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN
The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L Z 1L
Z 0M I 0P
- + ---------------- ------K N = ----------------------3 Z1L
3 Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN
(Equation 185)
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these
two cases.
Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 182 or 184 is a function
of p, the general equation 184 can be written in the form:
2
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN
(Equation 186)
Where:
UA
ZB
- + --------------------------+1
K 1 = --------------I A ZL Z L + ZA DD
EQUATION104 V1 EN
(Equation 187)
UA
ZB
K2 = --------------- --------------------------- + 1
IA Z L Z L + Z A DD
EQUATION105 V1 EN
(Equation 188)
IF A ZA + ZB
- --------------------------- + 1
K 3 = --------------
I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
EQUATION106 V1 EN
(Equation 189)
and:
852
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
KN is calculated automatically according to equation 185.
ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 186 applies to both single
and parallel lines.
Equation 186 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
2
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN
(Equation 190)
p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN
(Equation 191)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 191,
and then inserted to equation 190. According to equation 190, the relative distance
to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.
Equation 190 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal
figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should
be selected.
If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate
the relative distance to the fault.
15.5.2.3
The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA
fault current:
U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F IA
EQUATION109 V1 EN
(Equation 192)
Where:
IA
is according to table 573.
The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is
only used if the load compensated models do not function.
853
Section 15
Monitoring
15.5.2.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs
that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.
15.5.3
Function block
LMBRFLO
PHSELL1*
FLTDISTX
PHSELL2*
CALCMADE
PHSELL3*
BCD_80
CALCDIST*
BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1
IEC05000679 V3 EN
Figure 469:
15.5.4
FLO function block

Table 574:
Name
LMBRFLO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
PHSELL1
BOOLEAN
Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2
BOOLEAN
Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3
BOOLEAN
Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST
BOOLEAN
Do calculate fault distance (release)
Table 575:
Name
LMBRFLO Output signals

Type
Description
FLTDISTX
REAL
Reactive distance to fault
CALCMADE
BOOLEAN
Fault calculation made
BCD_80
BOOLEAN
Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40
BOOLEAN
BCD_20
BOOLEAN
BCD_10
BOOLEAN
BCD_8
BOOLEAN
BCD_4
BOOLEAN
BCD_2
BOOLEAN
BCD_1
BOOLEAN
854
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
15.5.5
Table 576:
Setting parameters
LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
R1A
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
2.000
Source resistance A (near end)
X1A
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
12.000
Source reactance A (near end)
R1B
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
2.000
Source resistance B (far end)
X1B
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
12.000
Source reactance B (far end)
R1L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
2.000
Positive sequence line resistance
X1L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
12.500
Positive sequence line reactance
R0L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
8.750
Zero sequence line resistance
X0L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
50.000
Zero sequence line reactance
R0M
0.000 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
0.000
Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M
0.000 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
0.000
Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLength
0.0 - 10000.0
0.1
40.0
Length of line
Step
Default
Table 577:
LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DrepChNoIL1
1 - 30
Ch
Recorder input number recording phase

current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2
1 - 30
Ch

current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3
1 - 30
Ch

current, IL3
DrepChNoIN
0 - 30
Ch
Recorder input number recording

residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP
0 - 30
Ch
Recorder input number recording 3I0 on

parallel line
DrepChNoUL1
1 - 30
Ch

voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2
1 - 30
Ch

voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3
1 - 30
Ch

voltage, UL3
855
Section 15
Monitoring
15.5.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 578:
LMBRFLO technical data
Function
15.6
Value or range
Reactive and resistive reach
(0.001-1500.000) /phase

2.0% degrees static
angular accuracy
Conditions:
Phase selection
According to input signals
Maximum number of fault

locations
100
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

Measured value expander block
15.6.1
Accuracy
IEC 61850
identification
RANGE_XP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI
and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and highhigh limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced
to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5
binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high
limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
15.6.2
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO).
The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals
according to table 579.
856
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 579:
Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
below low-low between low

limit
low and low
limit
LOWLOW
between low
and high limit
between high- above highhigh and high high limit

limit
High
LOW
High
NORMAL
High
HIGH
High
HIGHHIGH
15.6.3
High
Function block
RANGE*
RANGE_XP
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC05000346 V2 EN
Figure 470:
15.6.4

Table 580:
Name
RANGE
Table 581:
Name
15.7
RANGE_XP function block
RANGE_XP Input signals

Type
INTEGER
Default
0
Description
Measured value range
RANGE_XP Output signals

Type
Description
HIGHHIGH
BOOLEAN
Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH
BOOLEAN
Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL
BOOLEAN
Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW
BOOLEAN
Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW
BOOLEAN
Measured value is below low-low limit
Disturbance report DRPRDRE
857
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
15.7.1
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Analog input signals
A41RADR
Disturbance report
DRPRDRE
Disturbance report
A1RADR
Disturbance report
A4RADR
Disturbance report
B1RBDR
Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with
a, maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
Event list
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
Fault locator
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AxRADR or BxRBDR
function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from
start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ringbuffer. The local HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The
disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the
disturbance handling tool.
15.7.2
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply
the operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events
in the system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
858
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Event list (EL)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip value recorder(TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)
Figure 471 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions
and function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value
recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks
(AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.
Disturbance Report
A1-4RADR
A4RADR
DRPRDRE
FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec
B1-6RBDR
Binary signals
Fault locator
Disturbance
recorder
B6RBDR
Event list
Event recorder
Indications
IEC09000336 V2 EN
Figure 471:
Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile
flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary
power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
859
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Disturbance report
Record no. N
General dist.
information
Record no. N+1
Trip
values
Indications
Record no. N+100
Event
recordings
Disturbance
recording
Fault locator
Event list
en05000125.vsd
IEC05000125 V1 EN
Figure 472:
Disturbance report structure
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new
one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of
sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time.
Figure 473 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested
for a typical configuration, that is, in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100
where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect
the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications
(IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).
Number of recordings
100
3,4 s
20 analog
96 binary
3,4 s
80
40 analog
96 binary
60
6,3 s
6,3 s
50 Hz
6,3 s
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250
300
350
400 s
en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN
Figure 473:
Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time
860
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings

total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP
or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or
remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "Indications" for more detailed
information.
Event recorder (ER)
The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see section "Event recorder" for more detailed information.
Event list (EL)
The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see section "Event list" for more detailed information.
Trip value recorder (TVR)
The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault
and during the fault, see section "Trip value recorder" for more detailed information.
Disturbance recorder (DR)
Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault, see section "Disturbance recorder" for more detailed information.
Fault locator (FL)
The fault location function calculates the distance to fault, see section "Fault
locator LMBRFLO" for more detailed information.
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all
time tagging within the disturbance report
861
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on
which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
tRecording =
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT
PostFaultRecT
3
en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN
Figure 474:
The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1
Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the
operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2
Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as
any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit
the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit
Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording
was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger
that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum
recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already
stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder

and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved
for external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input
signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).
862
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A1RADR
SMAI
External
analogue
signals
Block
^GRP2L1
AI3P
AI1
^GRP2L2
^GRP2L3
AI2
AI3
INPUT2
^GRP2N
Type
AI4
AIN
INPUT4
A2RADR
INPUT1
A3RADR
INPUT3
INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
Internal analogue signals
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
IEC10000029 V1 EN
Figure 475:
Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated
according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at
lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used).SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated
residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input
signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output
(AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
863
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary
signal is selected to be recorded when:
the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report

(Operation = Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the
local HMI (SetLED = On/Off).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are
used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local
HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition
is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies
the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or
via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger
signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the
operator's manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a
trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to
864
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the
indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the
average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in
the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a
recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering
(PostRetrig = On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete
recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be fetched.
Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance
recordings.
15.7.3
Function block
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC05000406 V3 EN
Figure 476:
DRPRDRE function block
865
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A1RADR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
IEC05000430 V3 EN
Figure 477:
A1RADR function block
A4RADR
ÎNPUT31
ÎNPUT32
ÎNPUT33
ÎNPUT34
ÎNPUT35
ÎNPUT36
ÎNPUT37
ÎNPUT38
ÎNPUT39
ÎNPUT40
IEC05000431 V3 EN
Figure 478:
A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs
B1RBDR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC05000432 V3 EN
Figure 479:
B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR B6RBDR
866
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
15.7.4

Table 582:
Name
DRPRDRE Output signals

Type
Description
DRPOFF
BOOLEAN
Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART
BOOLEAN
Disturbance recording started
RECMADE
BOOLEAN
Disturbance recording made
CLEARED
BOOLEAN
All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED
BOOLEAN
More than 80% of memory used
Table 583:
Name
A1RADR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for input 1
INPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
INPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 584:
Name
A4RADR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
INPUT31
REAL
Analogue channel 31
INPUT32
REAL
Analogue channel 32
INPUT33
REAL
Analogue channel 33
INPUT34
REAL
Analogue channel 34
INPUT35
REAL
Analogue channel 35
INPUT36
REAL
Analogue channel 36
INPUT37
REAL
Analogue channel 37
867
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Analogue channel 38
INPUT39
REAL
Analogue channel 39
INPUT40
REAL
Analogue channel 40
B1RBDR Input signals
Name
Table 586:
Name
Description
REAL
Table 585:
15.7.5
Default
INPUT38
Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 16
Setting parameters
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 9.90
0.01
0.10
Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig
Off
On
Off
Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
Reference channel (voltage), phasors,

frequency measurement
OpModeTest
Off
On
Off
Operation mode during test mode
868
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 587:
A1RADR Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for analogue channel 1
UnderTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
Use under level trig for analogue cha 1

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
Under trigger level for analogue cha 1 in

% of signal
OverTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
Use over level trig for analogue cha 1

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
Over trigger level for analogue cha 1 in

% of signal
Operation02
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp02
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp02
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation03
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp03
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp03
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
Overtrigger level for analogue cha 3 in %

of signal
Operation04
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp04
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp04
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation05
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
869
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp05
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp05
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation06
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp06
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp06
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation07
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp07
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp07
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation08
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp08
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp08
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation09
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp09
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
870
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50

% of signal
OverTrigOp09
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation10
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp10
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50
Under trigger level for analogue cha 10

in % of signal
OverTrigOp10
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Table 588:
A4RADR Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation31
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue31
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp31
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp31
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation32
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue32
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp32
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp32
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation33
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue33
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp33
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)

871
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UnderTrigLe33
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp33
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33
0 - 5000
200
Overtrigger level for analogue cha 33 in

% of signal
Operation34
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue34
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp34
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp34
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe34
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation35
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue35
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp35
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp35
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation36
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue36
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp36
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp36
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe36
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation37
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue37
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp37
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp37
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)

872
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigLe37
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation38
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue38
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp38
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp38
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe38
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation39
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue39
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp39
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp39
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Operation40
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue40
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp40
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40
0 - 200
50

in % of signal
OverTrigOp40
Off
On
Off

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40
0 - 5000
200

% of signal
Table 589:
B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope

for binary inp 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Hide
Indication mask for binary channel 1
SetLED01
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1
873
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation02
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 2
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED02
Off
On
Off
Operation03
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 3
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED03
Off
On
Off
Operation04
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 4
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED04
Off
On
Off
Operation05
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 5
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED05
Off
On
Off
Operation06
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 6
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED06
Off
On
Off
Operation07
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 7
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED07
Off
On
Off
874
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation08
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 8
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED08
Off
On
Off
Operation09
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 9
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED09
Off
On
Off
Operation10
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 10
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED10
Off
On
Off
Operation11
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 11
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED11
Off
On
Off
Operation12
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 12
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED12
Off
On
Off
Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12
Operation13
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 13
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED13
Off
On
Off
875
Section 15
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation14
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 14
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED14
Off
On
Off
Operation15
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 15
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED15
Off
On
Off
Operation16
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

for binary inp 16
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED16
Off
On
Off
FUNT1
0 - 255
FunT
Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC

-60870-5-103)
FUNT2
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT3
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT4
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT5
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT6
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT7
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT8
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT9
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT10
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT11
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT12
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
876
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FUNT13
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT14
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT15
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
FUNT16
0 - 255
FunT

-60870-5-103)
INFNO1
0 - 255
InfNo
Information number for binary channel 1

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO2
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO3
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO4
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO5
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO6
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO7
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO8
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO9
0 - 255
InfNo

(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO10
0 - 255
InfNo
Information number for binary channel

10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO11
0 - 255
InfNo

11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO12
0 - 255
InfNo

12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO13
0 - 255
InfNo

13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO14
0 - 255
InfNo

14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO15
0 - 255
InfNo

15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO16
0 - 255
InfNo

16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
877
Section 15
Monitoring
15.7.6
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 590:
DRPRDRE technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pre-fault time
(0.059.90) s
Post-fault time
(0.110.0) s
Limit time
(0.510.0) s
Maximum number of recordings
100, first in - first out
Time tagging resolution
1 ms
See table 28
Maximum number of analog inputs
30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs
96
Maximum number of phasors in the

Trip Value recorder per recording
30
Maximum number of indications in a

disturbance report
96
Maximum number of events in the

Event recording per recording
150
Maximum number of events in the

Event list
1000, first in - first out
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s

recording time and maximum number
of channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings)

at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate
1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth
(5-300) Hz
15.8
Event list
15.8.1
Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report
function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
15.8.2
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status,
the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in
chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic
signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.
878
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on
the local HMI.
The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,
which is only active during a disturbance.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND)and the event recorder
function (ER).
The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report
information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).
15.8.3
Function block
The Event list has no function block of its own.It is included in the DRPRDRE
block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.
15.8.4
Input signals
The Event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance
report function.
15.8.5
Technical data
Table 591:
technical data
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in the list
1000
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on time
synchronizing
15.9
Indications
15.9.1
Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary
and/or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals
that have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short
perspective to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display
status information about the IED and the Disturbance report function (trigged).
879
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance report function that have changed status during a disturbance.
15.9.2
The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light
In Service
Flashing light
Internal fail
Dark
No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light
A disturbance report is triggered
Flashing light
The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode
Red LED:
Steady light
Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On
Indication list:
The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder.
The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:
the signal must be connected to binary input(DRB1-6)

the DRPparameter Operation must be set On
the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog)
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when

configuring the binary inputs.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the userdefined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function
(ER).
880
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
15.9.3
Function block
The Indications function has no function block of its own. It is included in the
DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.
15.9.4
Input signals
The Indications function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.
15.9.5
Technical data
Table 592:
technical data
Function
Buffer capacity
15.10
Event recorder
15.10.1
Introduction
Value
Maximum number of indications
presented for single disturbance
96
Maximum number of recorded

disturbances
100
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or
in the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
15.10.2
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can
be generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The
internal signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary
input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are
collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are
stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording.
881
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal

appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder
function(ER).
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,
IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the local HMI or PCM600.
Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is
accessing the IED simultaneously.
15.10.3
Function block
The Event recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the
15.10.4
Input signals
The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.
15.10.5
Technical data
Table 593:
technical data
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in disturbance
report
150
Maximum number of disturbance reports
100
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on time
synchronizing
15.11
Trip value recorder
15.11.1
Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital
for the disturbance evaluation.
882
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase
angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the
IED.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
15.11.2
Trip value recorder (TVR)calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault
amplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The
parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle
reference. The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL).
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault
interception is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog
input signals. The channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog
input with the lowest number.
When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the
complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated
using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few
samples after the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on
the shape of the signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is
used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples
during one cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used
both as pre-fault and fault values.
The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function
is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is
used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER,
DR, IND, TVR and fault locator) and managed in via the local HMI or PCM600.
15.11.3
Function block
The Trip value recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the
883
Section 15
Monitoring
15.11.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR
to A3RADR (not A4RADR).
15.11.5
Technical data
Table 594:
technical data
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
30
100
15.12
15.12.1
Introduction
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system
behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a
disturbance. Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short
perspective (for example corrective actions) and long perspective (for example
functional analysis).
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary
signals connected to the Disturbance report function (maximum 40 analog and 96
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder
function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the
operation of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by
protection functions. Up to ten seconds of data before the trigger instant can be
saved in the disturbance file.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the
IED and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.
15.12.2
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog
signals. The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical
signals generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are
input channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential
communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI)
and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived
analog signals.For details, refer to section "Disturbance report DRPRDRE".
884
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a

cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old
data will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full.
The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and
the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as
long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called
the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from
analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common
for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
15.12.2.1
Memory and storage

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings
total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.
When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:
Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are
divided into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data
file (DAT).
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance, that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions (ER,
885
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
TVR and FL). The Disturbance handling tool use this information and present the
recording in a user-friendly way.
General:
Station name, object name and unit name

Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
Record number
Sampling rate
Time synchronization source
Recording times
Activated trig signal
Active setting group
Analog:
Signal names for selected analog channels

Information e.g. trig on analog inputs
Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
CT direction
Binary:
Signal names
Status of binary input signals
The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to

interpret the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system
frequency, channel info etc.
The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for
each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence
number and time stamp for each set of samples.
15.12.2.2
IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance
recordings from the IED to a master (station HSI). The standard describes how to
handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages)
using the public range and binary signals.
The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master.
When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will
appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).
To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the
first 8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the
886
Section 15
Monitoring
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
private range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to
table 595.
Table 595:
Signal
Configuration of analog channels

IL1
A1RADR
INPUT1
IL2
A1RADR
INPUT2
IL3
A1RADR
INPUT3
IN
A1RADR
INPUT4
UL1
A1RADR
INPUT5
UL2
A1RADR
INPUT6
UL3
A1RADR
INPUT7
UN
A1RADR
INPUT8
The binary signals connected to BxRBDR are reported by polling. The function
blocks include function type and information number.
15.12.3
Function block
The Disturbance recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the
DRPRDRE, AxRADR and BxRBDR block.
15.12.4

For signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".
15.12.5
Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see section "Disturbance report DRPRDRE".
15.12.6
Technical data
Table 596:
technical data
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
40
Maximum number of binary inputs
96
100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number
of channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100

280 seconds (80
887
888
Section 16
Metering
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 16
Metering
About this chapter

This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used
to meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their
setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are
16.1
Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO

Pulse-counter logic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
PCGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00947 V1 EN
16.1.1
Introduction
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The
special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be
ordered to achieve this functionality.
16.1.2
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16
binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter
values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and
is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.
889
Section 16
Metering
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental

counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit
format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled
Value (pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter
Quality consists of:
Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that
is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can
be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the
station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.
The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that
is specially adapted to the pulse counter function.
Figure 480 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs
and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
I/O-module
Pulse
INPUT OUT
Pulse length >1s
Reset counter
PulseCounter
BLOCK
INVALID
RESTART
READ_VAL
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
BI_PULSE
RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL
SMS settings
1.Operation = Off/On
2.tReporting = 0s...60min
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
EVENT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
IEC EVENT
Database
Pulse counter value:
0...2147483647
en05000744.vsd
IEC05000744 V1 EN
Figure 480:
Overview of the pulse counter function
890
Section 16
Metering
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command

blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the
local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The
signal connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive
flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module,
where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED startup, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked.
There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:
The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale),
time and status information.
16.1.3
Function block
PCGGIO
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT
INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC05000709 V3 EN
Figure 481:
PCGGIO function block
891
Section 16
Metering
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
16.1.4

Table 597:
PCGGIO Input signals
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
READ_VAL
BOOLEAN
Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE
BOOLEAN
Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Resets pulse counter value
PCGGIO Output signals
Name
Table 599:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 598:
16.1.5
Default
Type
Description
INVALID
BOOLEAN
The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART
BOOLEAN
The reported value does not comprise a complete

integration cycle
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL
BOOLEAN
A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Scaled value with time and status information
Setting parameters
PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
EventMask
NoEvents
ReportEvents
NoEvents
Report mask for analog events from

pulse counter
CountCriteria
Off
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
RisingEdge
Pulse counter criteria
Scale
1.000 - 90000.000
0.001
1.000
Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to

unit per counted value
Quantity
Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
Count
Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
tReporting
0 - 3600
60
Cycle time for reporting of counter value
892
Section 16
Metering
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
16.1.6
Technical data
Table 600:
PCGGIO technical data
Function
16.2
Setting range
Input frequency
See Binary Input Module (BIM)
Cycle time for report of

counter value
(13600) s
Function for energy calculation and demand

handling ETPMMTR
Energy calculation and demand
handling
16.2.1
Accuracy
IEC 61850
identification
ETPMMTR
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Introduction
Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate
energy consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and
export direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand
power values are also calculated by the function.
16.2.2
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the
Measurements (CVMMXN) function block are used and integrated over a selected
time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. The energy values (in MWh and
MVarh) are available as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be
connected to a pulse counter. Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse
direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset from the local HMI reset
menu or with input signal RSTACC.
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the
set time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD,
MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until
reset with input signal RSTDMD or from the local HMI reset menu.
893
Section 16
Metering
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CVMMXN
P_INST
Q_INST
ETPMMTR
P
Q
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN
Figure 482:
16.2.3
Connection of Energy calculation and demand handling function

(ETPMMTR) to the Measurements function (CVMMXN)
Function block
ETPMMTR
P
Q
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
ACCST
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC07000120 V2 EN
Figure 483:
16.2.4
ETPMMTR function block

Table 601:
Name
ETPMMTR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
REAL
Measured active power
REAL
Measured reactive power
STACC
BOOLEAN
Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC
BOOLEAN
Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD
BOOLEAN
Reset of maximum demand reading
Table 602:
Name
ETPMMTR Output signals

Type
Description
ACCST
BOOLEAN
Start of accumulating energy values.
EAFPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated reverse active energy pulse

894
Section 16
Metering
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
16.2.5
Table 603:
Type
Description
ERFPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in

set interval
EARALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in

set interval
ERFALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in

set interval
ERRALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in

set interval
EAFACC
REAL
Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC
REAL
Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC
REAL
Accumulated forward reactive energy value in

VArS
ERRACC
REAL
Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in

VArS
MAXPAFD
REAL
Maximum forward active power demand value for

set interval
MAXPARD
REAL
Maximum reverse active power demand value for

set interval
MAXPRFD
REAL
Maximum forward reactive power demand value

for set interval
MAXPRRD
REAL
Maximum reactive power demand value in

reverse direction
Setting parameters
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
StartAcc
Off
On
Off
Activate the accumulation of energy

values
tEnergy
1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
1 Minute
Time interval for energy calculation
tEnergyOnPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Energy accumulated pulse ON time in

secs
tEnergyOffPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in

secs
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for active forward

accumulated energy value
895
Section 16
Metering
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EARAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for active reverse

ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for reactive forward

ERVAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for reactive reverse

Table 604:
Name
ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EALim
0.001 10000000000.000
MWh
0.001
1000000.000
Active energy limit
ERLim
0.001 10000000000.000
MVArh
0.001
1000.000
Reactive energy limit
DirEnergyAct
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of active energy flow Forward/

Reverse
DirEnergyReac
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/

Reverse
EnZeroClamp
Off
On
On
Enable of zero point clamping detection

function
LevZeroClampP
0.001 - 10000.000
MW
0.001
10.000
Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ
0.001 - 10000.000
MVAr
0.001
10.000
Zero point clamping level at reactive

Power
EAFPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for forward active

energy
EARPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for reverse active

energy
ERFPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for forward reactive

energy
ERVPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for reverse reactive

energy
896
Section 17
Station communication
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 17
About this chapter

This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the
substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their
setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are
17.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one
or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation
Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
17.2
17.2.1
Introduction
The IED is equipped with single or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order
dependent) for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1
communication is also possible from the optical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1
protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to
exchange information and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer
communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files
uploading is provided.
897
Section 17
17.2.2
Table 605:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
GOOSE
Front
OEM311_AB
OEM311_CD
OEM311_AB
Port for GOOSE communication
17.2.3
Technical data
Table 606:
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs
100BASE-FX
17.2.4
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO,

SP16GGIO
17.2.4.1
Introduction
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) is used to send one
single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
17.2.4.2
Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O
functions (SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive
this information.
17.2.4.3
Function block
SPGGIO
BLOCK
ÎN
IEC07000124 V2 EN
Figure 484:
SPGGIO function block
898
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
SP16GGIO
BLOCK
ÎN1
ÎN2
ÎN3
ÎN4
ÎN5
ÎN6
ÎN7
ÎN8
ÎN9
ÎN10
ÎN11
ÎN12
ÎN13
ÎN14
ÎN15
ÎN16
IEC07000125 V2 EN
Figure 485:
17.2.4.4
SP16GGIO function block

Table 607:
Name
SPGGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
BOOLEAN
Input status
Table 608:
Name
SP16GGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1 status
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 status
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 status
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 status
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 status
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 status
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7 status
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8 status
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9 status
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10 status
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11 status
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12 status
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13 status
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14 status
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15 status
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16 status
899
Section 17
17.2.4.5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
17.2.5
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO

IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to
send the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in
the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect
to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
17.2.5.1
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O
functions (MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range,
as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to
other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.
17.2.5.2
Function block
MVGGIO
BLOCK
ÎN
^VALUE
RANGE
IEC05000408 V2 EN
Figure 486:
17.2.5.3
MVGGIO function block

Table 609:
Name
MVGGIO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
REAL
Analogue input value
Table 610:
Name
MVGGIO Output signals

Type
Description
VALUE
REAL
Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE
INTEGER
Range
900
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
17.2.5.4
Table 611:
Setting parameters
MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MV db
1 - 300
Type
10

MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
MV hhLim
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
90.000
High High limit
MV hLim
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
80.000
High limit
MV lLim
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
-80.000
Low limit
MV llLim
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
-90.000
Low Low limit
MV min
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
-100.000
Minimum value
MV max
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Maximum value
MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits)
17.2.6
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

17.2.6.1
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Parallel Redundancy Protocol Status
PRPSTATUS
Duo driver configuration
DUODRV
Introduction
Redundant station bus communication is used to assure communication, even
though one communication channels might not be available for some reason.
Redundant communication over station bus running IEC 61850-8-1 use both port
AB and CD on OEM module and IEC 62439-PRP protocol.
17.2.6.2
The redundant station bus communication (DUODRV) is configured using the
local HMI. The settings for DUODRV are also visible in PST in PCM600.
The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is
transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from
901
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if the
same, the last package is discarded.
PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output LAN-A-STATUS and/or LAN-B-STATUS is set to indicate error.
Station Control System
Redundancy
Supervision
Duo
Data
Data
Switch A
Switch B
1 2
1 2
Data
Data
AB
Configuration
CD
IED
OEM
DUODRV
PRPSTATUS
IEC09000758 V2 EN
Figure 487:
Redundant station bus
902
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
17.2.6.3
Function block
PRPSTATUS
LAN-A-Status
LAN-B-Status
IEC09000757 V1 EN
Figure 488:
17.2.6.4
PRPSTATUS function block
Output signals
Table 612:
PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name
17.2.6.5
Table 613:
Type
Description
LAN-A-Status
BOOLEAN
Channel A status
LAN-B-Status
BOOLEAN
Channel B status
Setting parameters
DUODRV Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IPAddress
0 - 18
IP
Address
192.168.7.10
IP-Address
IPMask
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.0
IP-Mask
17.3
17.3.1
Introduction
The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to
communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for
the communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) "CD" port.
17.3.2
The ABB merging units (MUs) are situated close to primary equipment, like circuit
breakers, isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values
from measuring transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered
data are then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC
61850-9-2LE protocol.
903
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ABB "physical MU" contains up to 3 logical MUs, each capable of sampling 4

currents and 4 voltages.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module
port "CD". For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input
module and is engineered in the very same way.
IED
Application
Station Wide
GPS Clock
IRIG-B
1344
SMAI1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
^GRP1L1
^GRP1L2
^GRP1L3
^GRP1N
TYPE
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
Preprocessing blocks
SMAI
Splitter
Electrical-toOptical Converter
MU1 (Logic MU) MU2 (Logic MU)
OEM Module
CD
IEC61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
ABB
Merging
Unit
Combi
Sensor
1PPS
ABB
Merging
Unit
1PPS
Combi
Sensor
en08000212-2.vsd
IEC08000212 V2 EN
Figure 489:
Example of signal path for sampled analog values from MU with

IRIG-B synchronization
904
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IED
Application
SMAI
Station Wide
GPS Clock
SMAI
MU1
MU2
Splitter
Electrical-toOptical Converter
1PPS
TRM module
OEM Module
CD
110 V
1A
1A
IEC61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
ABB
Merging
Unit
CT
ABB
Merging
Unit
1PPS
Combi
Sensor
CT
1PPS
Combi
Sensor
Conventional VT
en08000072-2.vsd
IEC08000072 V2 EN
Figure 490:
Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and

conventional CT/VT
The function has the following alarm signals:
905
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned. that is the

application soon needs to be restarted. The signal is raised to 2 s before the
application is restarted.
SYNCH: Indicates that the time quality of the hardware is out of the set value
from parameter synchAccLevel (1 s, 4 s or unspecified) and the parameter
AppSynch is set to Synch. In case of AppSynch is set to NoSynch the SYNCH
output will never go high.
SMPLLOST: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost/been marked
invalid/ overflow/ been marked failed, and the sample has thereafter been
substituted. When SMPLLOST is high, protection is blocked.
MUSYNCH: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received
from quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
TESTMODE: Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode. Received from
quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or
the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is
individually specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section
"Time synchronization"
Blocking condition
Blocking of protection functions is indicated by (SAMPLOST is high) or
(MUSYNCH is high and AppSynch is set to Synch) or (SYNCH is high)
Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode.
A missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore
protection functions in this case will be blocked.
17.3.3
Consequence on accuracy for power measurement

functions when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE
communication
The Power measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and
VNMMXU) contains correction factors to account for the non-linearity in the input
circuits, mainly in the input transformers, when using direct analogue connection to
the IED.
The IED will use the same correction factors also when feeding the IED with
analog signals over IEC 61850-9-2LE. Since the signals via IEC 61850-9-2LE are
not subject to the same non-linearity errors this will cause an inaccuracy in the
measured values.
For voltage signals the correction factors are less than 0.05% of the measured value
and no angle compensation why the impact on reported value can be ignored.
906
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
For current signals the correction factors will cause a not insignificant impact on
the reported values at low currents. The correction factors are +2.4% and -3.6
degrees at signal levels below 5% of set base current, +0.6% and -1.12 degrees at
signal level 30% of set base current and 0% and -0.44 degrees at signal levels
above 100% of set base current. Between the calibration points 5%, 30% and 100%
of set base current, linear interpolation is used. Since the output from the Power
measurement function is used as an input for the Energy measuring function
(ETPMMTR) the above described impact will also be valid for the output values
for ETPMMTR.
17.3.4
Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.
The signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU)
are included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In
the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input
(SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.
17.3.5
Output signals
Table 614:
Name
MU1_4I_4U Output signals

Type
Description
I1
STRING
Analogue input I1
I2
STRING
Analogue input I2
I3
STRING
Analogue input I3
I4
STRING
Analogue input I4
U1
STRING
Analogue input U1
U2
STRING
Analogue input U2
U3
STRING
Analogue input U3
U4
STRING
Analogue input U4
MUDATA
BOOLEAN
Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH
BOOLEAN
MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST
BOOLEAN
Sample lost
MUSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE
BOOLEAN
MU in test mode
907
Section 17
17.3.6
Table 615:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SVId
0 - 35
ABB_MU0101
MU identifier
SmplGrp
0 - 65535
Sampling group
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

Table 616:
Name
SynchMode
17.3.7
MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Synchronization mode
Technical data
Table 617:
Functions
Value
Protocol
IEC 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs
100BASE-FX
17.4
17.4.1
Introduction
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification
Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control
networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short
messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication
media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk
supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol
908
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the
International Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are
available. For other addresses, refer to section "Related documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
17.4.2
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of
the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where
all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The
own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127
nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for
example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus
master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short
messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking
signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as
events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of
network variables.
Introduction of LON protocol
For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and
Control, Users manual and Technical description.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON
Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a
LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a single tool program. For more
information, refer to the operator's manual.
909
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Activate LON Communication

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main menu/
Communication/ SLM configuration/ Rear optical LON port/ Horizontal
communication, where Operation must be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT
A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by
installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with
the SLDT 670 series package version 1p2 r03.
LON net address
To establish a LON connection with the 670 series IEDs, the IED has to be given a
unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is
accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.
Events and indications
Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code
44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a
signal is changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is
transmitted from terminal.
Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in
the 670 series IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses.
table 618 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks.
The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after
the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EVENT:17 has the address
1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast
loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670 series IEDs. The remaining event function
blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EVENT:10 to
EVENT:20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send
binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring
functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCGGIO:1 to PCGGIO:16 and 24 mA input
service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in
the 670 series IEDs.
910
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 618
Table 618:
Function block
LON adresses for Event functions

First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1
1024
EVENT:2
1040
EVENT:3
1056
EVENT:4
1072
EVENT:5
1088
EVENT:6
1104
EVENT:7
1120
EVENT:8
1136
EVENT:9
1152
EVENT:10
1168
EVENT:11
1184
EVENT:12
1200
EVENT:13
1216
EVENT:14
1232
EVENT:15
1248
EVENT:16
1264
EVENT:17
1280
EVENT:18
1296
EVENT:19
1312
EVENT:20
1328
Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Settings/ General Settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction as follows:
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the
event function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is
always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function
911
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection
function is event masked in the event function block.
Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.
00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from
the event function block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or
N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out
only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before
sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That
is, the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 28;
the SPA addresses are according to table 619.
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 series and 670 series
IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83).
SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the
information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and
presented for the application by a multiple command function block
(MULTICMDRCV). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event
function block (MULTICMDSND) must be set to 1. There are 10
MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. The
912
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function blocks are connected using Lon

Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for 670 series IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables
Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the
LON network Tool. For more information, refer to LNT 505 in Operation manual.
The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning, for
example, interlocking between two IEDs.
LON
BAY E1
BAY E3
MULTICMDSND: 7
MULTICMDSND: 9
BAY E4
MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN
Figure 491:
Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and

MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window.
From LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.
913
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN
Figure 492:
The network variables window in LNT
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the
drag-and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag
them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them
there; or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/
Download.
914
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN
Figure 493:
The download configuration window in LNT
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC60870-5-103/DNP

and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed
on the Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are
available depending on type of fibre. The incoming optical fibre is connected to the
RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output.
When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions
concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres. The module is
identified with a number on the label on the module.
Table 619:
SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI01
1 I 5115
SPA parameters for block

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5139

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5161

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI04
1 I 5186

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI05
1 I 5210

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI06
1 I 5234

command

915
Section 17
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI07
1 I 5258

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI08
1 I 5283

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI09
1 I 5307

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI10
1 I 5331

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI11
1 I 5355

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI12
1 I 5379

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI13
1 I 5403

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI14
1 I 5427

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI15
1 I 5451

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI16
1 I 5475

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI17
1 I 5499

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI18
1 I 5523

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI19
1 I 5545

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI20
1 I 5571

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI21
1 I 5594

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI22
1 I 5619

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI23
1 I 5643

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI24
1 I 5667

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI25
1 I 5691

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI26
1 I 5715

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI27
1 I 5739

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI28
1 I 5763

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI29
1 I 5787

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI30
1 I 5811

command
916
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI31
1 I 5835

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI32
1 I 5859

command
CANCEL
SCSWI01
1 I 5107
SPA parameters for cancel

command
CANCEL
SCSWI02
1 I 5131

command
CANCEL
SCSWI03
1 I 5153

command
CANCEL
SCSWI04
1 I 5178

command
CANCEL
SCSWI05
1 I 5202

command
CANCEL
SCSWI06
1 I 5226

command
CANCEL
SCSWI07
1 I 5250

command
CANCEL
SCSWI08
1 I 5275

command
CANCEL
SCSWI09
1 I 5299

command
CANCEL
SCSWI10
1 I 5323

command
CANCEL
SCSWI11
1 I 5347

command
CANCEL
SCSWI12
1 I 5371

command
CANCEL
SCSWI13
1 I 5395

command
CANCEL
SCSWI14
1 I 5419

command
CANCEL
SCSWI15
1 I 5443

command
CANCEL
SCSWI16
1 I 5467

command
CANCEL
SCSWI17
1 I 5491

command
CANCEL
SCSWI18
1 I 5515

command
CANCEL
SCSWI19
1 I 5537

command
CANCEL
SCSWI20
1 I 5563

command
CANCEL
SCSWI21
1 I 5586

command
CANCEL
SCSWI22
1 I 5611

command
917
Section 17
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
CANCEL
SCSWI23
1 I 5635

command
CANCEL
SCSWI24
1 I 5659

command
CANCEL
SCSWI25
1 I 5683

command
CANCEL
SCSWI26
1 I 5707

command
CANCEL
SCSWI27
1 I 5731

command
CANCEL
SCSWI28
1 I 5755

command
CANCEL
SCSWI29
1 I 5779

command
CANCEL
SCSWI30
1 I 5803

command
CANCEL
SCSWI31
1 I 5827

command
CANCEL
SCSWI32
1 I 5851

command
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01,
SELOpen+ILO=10,
SELClose+ILO=11,
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5105
SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command
before operate command
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5129

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI03
1 I 5151

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI04
1 I 5176

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI05
1 I 5200

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI06
1 I 5224

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI07
1 I 5248

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI08
1 I 5273

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI09
1 I 5297

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI10
1 I 5321

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI11
1 I 5345

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI12
1 I 5369

Close) command

918
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI13
1 I 5393

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI14
1 I 5417

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI15
1 I 5441

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI16
1 I 5465

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI17
1 I 5489

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI18
1 I 5513

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI19
1 I 5535

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI20
1 I 5561

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI21
1 I 5584

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI22
1 I 5609

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI23
1 I 5633

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI24
1 I 5657

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI25
1 I 5681

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI26
1 I 5705

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI27
1 I 5729

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI28
1 I 5753

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI29
1 I 5777

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI30
1 I 5801

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI31
1 I 5825

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI32
1 I 5849

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01,
ExcOpen+ILO=10,
ExcClose+ILO=11,
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5106
SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command
before operate command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5130

Close) command

919
Section 17
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5152

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI04
1 I 5177

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI05
1 I 5201

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI06
1 I 5225

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI07
1 I 5249

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI08
1 I 5274

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI09
1 I 5298

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI10
1 I 5322

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI11
1 I 5346

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI12
1 I 5370

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI13
1 I 5394

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI14
1 I 5418

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI15
1 I 5442

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI16
1 I 5466

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI17
1 I 5490

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI18
1 I 5514

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI19
1 I 5536

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI20
1 I 5562

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI21
1 I 5585

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI22
1 I 5610

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI23
1 I 5634

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI24
1 I 5658

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI25
1 I 5682

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI26
1 I 5706

Close) command
920
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI27
1 I 5730

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI28
1 I 5754

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI29
1 I 5778

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI30
1 I 5802

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI31
1 I 5826

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI32
1 I 5850

Close) command
Sub Value
SXCBR01
2 I 7854
SPA parameter for position to be

substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value
SXCBR02
2 I 7866

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR03
2 I 7884

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR04
2 I 7904

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR05
2 I 7923

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR06
2 I 7942

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR07
2 I 7961

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR08
2 I 7980

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR09
3I7

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR10
3 I 26

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR11
3 I 45

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR12
3 I 56

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR13
3 I 74

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR14
3 I 94

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR15
3 I 120

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR16
3 I 133

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR17
3 I 158

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR18
3 I 179

substituted

921
Section 17
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXSWI01
3 I 196

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI02
3 I 216

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI03
3 I 235

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI04
3 I 254

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI05
3 I 272

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI06
3 I 292

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI07
3 I 310

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI08
3 I 330

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI09
3 I 348

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI10
3 I 359

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI11
3 I 378

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI12
3 I 397

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI13
3 I 416

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI14
3 I 435

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI15
3 I 454

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI16
3 I 473

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI17
3 I 492

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI18
3 I 511

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI19
3 I 530

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI20
3 I 549

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI21
3 I 568

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI22
3 I 587

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI23
3 I 606

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI24
3 I 625

substituted
922
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXSWI25
3 I 644

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI26
3 I 663

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI27
3 I 682

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI28
3 I 701

substituted
Sub Enable
SXCBR01
2 I 7855
SPA parameter for substitute

enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
Sub Enable
SXCBR02
2 I 7865

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR03
2 I 7885

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR04
2 I 7903

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR05
2 I 7924

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR06
2 I 7941

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR07
2 I 7962

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR08
2 I 7979

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR09
3I8

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR10
3 I 25

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR11
3 I 46

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR12
3 I 55

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR13
3 I 75

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR14
3 I 93

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR15
3 I 121

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR16
3 I 132

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR17
3 I 159

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR18
3 I 178

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI01
3 I 197

enable command
923
Section 17
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXSWI02
3 I 215

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI03
3 I 234

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI04
3 I 252

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI05
3 I 271

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI06
3 I 290

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI07
3 I 309

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI08
3 I 328

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI09
3 I 347

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI10
3 I 360

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI11
3I 379

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI12
3 I 398

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI13
3 I 417

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI14
3 I 436

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI15
3 I 455

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI16
3 I 474

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI17
3 I 493

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI18
3 I 512

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI19
3 I 531

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI20
3 I 550

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI21
3 I 569

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI22
3 I 588

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI23
3 I 607

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI24
3 I 626

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI25
3 I 645

enable command
924
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXSWI26
3 I 664

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI27
3 I 683

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI28
3 I 702

enable command
Update Block
SXCBR01
2 I 7853
SPA parameter for update block

command
Update Block
SXCBR02
2 I 7864

command
Update Block
SXCBR03
2 I 7883

command
Update Block
SXCBR04
2 I 7905

command
Update Block
SXCBR05
2 I 7922

command
Update Block
SXCBR06
2 I 7943

command
Update Block
SXCBR07
2 I 7960

command
Update Block
SXCBR08
2 I 7981

command
Update Block
SXCBR09
3I6

command
Update Block
SXCBR10
3 I 27

command
Update Block
SXCBR11
3 I 44

command
Update Block
SXCBR12
3 I 57

command
Update Block
SXCBR13
3 I 73

command
Update Block
SXCBR14
3 I 92

command
Update Block
SXCBR15
3 I 122

command
Update Block
SXCBR16
3 I 131

command
Update Block
SXCBR17
3 I 160

command
Update Block
SXCBR18
3 I 177

command
Update Block
SXSWI01
3 I 198

command
Update Block
SXSWI02
3 I 214

command
Update Block
SXSWI03
3 I 236

command
925
Section 17
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXSWI04
3 I 253

command
Update Block
SXSWI05
3 I 273

command
Update Block
SXSWI06
3 I 291

command
Update Block
SXSWI07
3 I 311

command
Update Block
SXSWI08
3 I 329

command
Update Block
SXSWI09
3 I 349

command
Update Block
SXSWI10
3 I 358

command
Update Block
SXSWI11
3 I 377

command
Update Block
SXSWI12
3 I 396

command
Update Block
SXSWI13
3 I 415

command
Update Block
SXSWI14
3 I 434

command
Update Block
SXSWI15
3 I 453

command
Update Block
SXSWI16
3 I 472

command
Update Block
SXSWI17
3 I 491

command
Update Block
SXSWI18
3 I 510

command
Update Block
SXSWI19
3 I 529

command
Update Block
SXSWI20
3 I 548

command
Update Block
SXSWI21
3 I 567

command
Update Block
SXSWI22
3 I 586

command
Update Block
SXSWI23
3 I 605

command
Update Block
SXSWI24
3 I 624

command
Update Block
SXSWI25
3 I 643

command
926
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
17.4.3
Table 620:
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXSWI26
3 I 662

command
Update Block
SXSWI27
3 I 681

command
Update Block
SXSWI28
3 I 700

command
Setting parameters
HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Operation
Table 621:
Function
block
Unit
Off
On
Step
Default
Description
Off
Operation
ADE Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
TimerClass
Slow
Normal
Fast
Slow
Timer class
17.4.4
Technical data
Table 622:
Function
Value
Protocol
LON
Communication speed
1.25 Mbit/s
17.5
SPA communication protocol
17.5.1
Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "Related documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.
927
Section 17
17.5.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7
data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For
more information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to
Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol
The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated
need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves
and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data
to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced
polling (for example, for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends
information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all
slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive
state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found
in table 623.
Table 623:
SPA addresses for the MIM function
Function block
SPA address
MIM3-CH1
4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2
4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3
4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4
4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5
4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6
4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1
4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2
4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3
4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4
4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5
4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6
4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1
4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2
4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3
4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4
4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5
4-O-6554
928
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
SPA address
MIM5-CH6
4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1
4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2
4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3
4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4
4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5
4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6
4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1
4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2
4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3
4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4
4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5
4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6
4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1
4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2
4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3
4-O-6607
MIM8-CH4
4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5
4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6
4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1
4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2
4-O-6625
MIM9-CH3
4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4
4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5
4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6
4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1
4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2
4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3
4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4
4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5
4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6
4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1
4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2
4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3
4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4
4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5
4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6
4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1
4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2
4-O-6682
929
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
SPA address
MIM12-CH3
4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4
4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5
4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6
4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1
4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2
4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3
4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4
4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5
4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6
4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1
4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2
4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3
4-O-6721
MIM14-CH4
4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5
4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6
4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1
4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2
4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3
4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4
4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5
4-O-6744
MIM15-CH6
4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1
4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2
4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3
4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4
4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5
4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6
4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCGGIO:1 to PCGGIO:16 are
found in table 624.
Table 624:
Function block
SPA addresses for the PCGGIO function

SPA address CNT_VAL
SPA address NEW_VAL
PCGGIO:1
3-O-5834
3-O-5833
PCGGIO:2
3-O-5840
3-O-5839
PCGGIO:3
3-O-5846
3-O-5845
PCGGIO:4
3-O-5852
3-O-5851
PCGGIO:5
3-O-5858
3-O-5857
PCGGIO:6
3-O-5864
3-O-5863

930
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
SPA address CNT_VAL
SPA address NEW_VAL
PCGGIO:7
3-O-5870
3-O-5869
PCGGIO:8
3-O-5876
3-O-5875
PCGGIO:9
3-O-5882
3-O-5881
PCGGIO:10
3-O-5888
3-O-5887
PCGGIO:11
3-O-5894
3-O-5893
PCGGIO:12
3-O-5900
3-O-5899
PCGGIO:13
3-O-5906
3-O-5905
PCGGIO:14
3-O-5912
3-O-5911
PCGGIO:15
3-O-5918
3-O-5917
PCGGIO:16
3-O-5924
3-O-5923
I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module
function block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses,
refer to section "Related documents".
Single command, 16 signals
The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block
has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.
Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks;
SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 16 signals
function block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first
output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example,
output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 625.
Table 625:
SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block
SPA address CMD Input
SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1
4-S-4639
5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2
4-S-4640
5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3
4-S-4641
5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4
4-S-4642
5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5
4-S-4643
5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6
4-S-4644
5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7
4-S-4645
5-O-517

931
Section 17
Function block
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8
4-S-4646
5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9
4-S-4647
5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10
4-S-4648
5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11
4-S-4649
5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12
4-S-4650
5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13
4-S-4651
5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14
4-S-4652
5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15
4-S-4653
5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16
4-S-4654
5-O-526
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1
4-S-4672
5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2
4-S-4673
5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3
4-S-4674
5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4
4-S-4675
5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5
4-S-4676
5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6
4-S-4677
5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7
4-S-4678
5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8
4-S-4679
5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9
4-S-4680
5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10
4-S-4681
5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11
4-S-4682
5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12
4-S-4683
5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13
4-S-4684
5-O-539
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14
4-S-4685
5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15
4-S-4686
5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16
4-S-4687
5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1
4-S-4705
5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2
4-S-4706
5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3
4-S-4707
5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4
4-S-4708
5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5
4-S-4709
5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6
4-S-4710
5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7
4-S-4711
5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8
4-S-4712
5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9
4-S-4713
5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10
4-S-4714
5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11
4-S-4715
5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12
4-S-4716
5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13
4-S-4717
5-O-555
932
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function block
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14
4-S-4718
5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15
4-S-4719
5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16
4-S-4720
5-O-558
Figure 494 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
IED for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:
1 are shown in table 625.
PULSETIMER
SINGLECMD
BLOCK
INPUT
ÔUT1
ÔUT2
#1.000
OUT
To output board, CLOSE
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
PULSETIMER
AND
ÔUT7
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4N
OUT
NOUT
INPUT
#1.000
OUT
To output board, OPEN
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
SYNCH OK
IEC05000717 V2 EN
Figure 494:
Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control

of a circuit breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady
or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting /
General Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command.
Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for
example, operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented
in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on
each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The
event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events
according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest
event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
933
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Setting / General Setting / Monitoring / Event Function as follows:
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 626.
Table 626:
Event block
Status and event codes

Status
Single indication1)
Set event
Reset
event
Double indication
Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
ate 00
11
EVENT:1
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
22O1
22O2
22O3
22O4
22O5
22O6
22O7
22O8
22O9
22O10
22O11
22O12
22O13
22O14
22O15
22O16
22E33
22E35
22E37
22E39
22E41
22E43
22E45
22E47
22E49
22E51
22E53
22E55
22E57
22E59
22E61
22E63
22E32
22E34
22E36
22E38
22E40
22E42
22E44
22E46
22E48
22E50
22E52
22E54
22E56
22E58
22E60
22E62
22E0
22E4
22E8
22E12
22E16
22E20
22E24
22E28
-
22E1
22E5
22E9
22E13
22E17
22E21
22E25
22E29
-
22E2
22E6
22E10
22E14
22E18
22E22
22E26
22E30
-
22E3
22E7
22E11
22E15
22E19
22E23
22E27
22E31
-
EVENT:2
EVENT:3
EVENT:20
230..
240..
410..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
23E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events
Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as
events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the
Event function block according to figure 495.
934
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
EVENT
Block
ILRANG
PSTO
UL12RANG
UL23RANG
UL31RANG
3I0RANG
3U0RANG
FALSE
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC07000065 V2 EN
Figure 495:
17.5.2.1
Connection of protection signals for event handling
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA /IEC 60870-5-103/DNP
on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication
module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre
cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different
types are available depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of
the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the
Installation and commissioning manual for respective IEDs.
17.5.3
Design
When communicating locally with a computer (PC) in the station, using the rear
SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:
Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC
When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same
hardware and telephone modems are needed.
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600.
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required
is a front-connection cable.
935
Section 17
17.5.4
Table 627:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
SPA Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on serial line
Table 628:
Name
LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
17.5.5
Technical data
Table 629:
SPA communication protocol
Function
Value
Protocol
SPA
Communication speed
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400

Bd
Slave number
1 to 899
17.6
17.6.1
Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must
have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
17.6.2
17.6.2.1
General
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master
936
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point

principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.
Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:
Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard
part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation
The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs
with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in
the protection and control IED.
Commands in control direction
Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Info. no
Message
Supported
19
LED Reset
Yes
23
Activate setting group 1
Yes
24
Yes
25
Yes
26
Yes
937
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
16
Auto-recloser on/off
Yes
17
Teleprotection on/off
Yes
18
Protection on/off
Yes
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType. Default values are defined in private range 1 - 4. One for
each instance.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
Output signal 01
Yes
Output signal 02
Yes
Output signal 03
Yes
Output signal 04
Yes
Output signal 05
Yes
Output signal 06
Yes
Output signal 07
Yes
Output signal 08
Yes
Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Information number is defined for each input signals.
938
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Info. no.
Message
Supported
19
LED reset
Yes
20
Monitor direction blocked
No
21
TestMode
22
Local Parameter setting
23
Setting group 1 active
Yes
24
Yes
25
Yes
26
Yes
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef

Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType for each function block
instance in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 - 24. One
for each instance.
Information number is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in
range 1 - 8.
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv
Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for output signals.
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF
Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
48
Earth fault L1
No
49
Earth fault L2
No
50
Earth fault L3
No
51
Earth fault forward
Yes
52
Earth fault reverse
Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

939
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
64
Start L1
Yes
65
Start L2
Yes
66
Start L3
Yes
67
Start IN
Yes
84
General start
Yes
69
Trip L1
Yes
70
Trip L2
Yes
71
Trip L3
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes
78
Zone 1
Yes
79
Zone 2
Yes
80
Zone 3
Yes
81
Zone 4
Yes
82
Zone 5
Yes
76
Signal transmitted
Yes
77
Signal received
Yes
73
SCL, Fault location in ohm
Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential,
overcurrent and earth fault protection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
940
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Info. no.
Message
Supported
64
Start L1
Yes
65
Start L2
Yes
66
Start L3
Yes
67
Start IN
Yes
84
General start
Yes
69
Trip L1
Yes
70
Trip L2
Yes
71
Trip L3
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes
85
Breaker failure
Yes
86
Trip measuring system L1
Yes
87
Yes
88
Yes
89
Trip measuring system N
Yes
90
Over current trip I>
Yes
91
Over current trip I>>
Yes
92
Earth fault trip IN>
Yes
93
Earth fault trip IN>>
Yes
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
16
Autorecloser active
Yes
17
Teleprotection active
No
18
Protection active
No
128
CB on by Autorecloser
Yes
129
CB on by long-time AR
No
130
Autorecloser blocked
Yes
Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
941
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Measurands in public range, I103Meas

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
148
IL1
Yes
144, 145,
148
IL2
Yes
148
IL3
Yes
147
IN, Neutral current
Yes
148
UL1
Yes
148
UL2
Yes
148
UL3
Yes
145, 146
UL1-UL2
Yes
147
UN, Neutral voltage
Yes
146, 148
P, active power
Yes
146, 148
Q, reactive power
Yes
148
f, frequency
Yes
Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr

Function type parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined
in private range 25 27. One for each instance.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
Info.
Message
*1)
Meas1
Yes
Meas2
Yes
Meas3
Yes
Meas4
Yes
Meas5
Yes
Meas6
Yes
Meas7
Yes
Meas8
Yes
Meas9
Yes
Supported
1) * User defined information number
942
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be
specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the
private range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available
for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by
the master) will not be reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded
disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can
be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example,
when a disturbance is deteceted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new
disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,
some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance
recorder in 670 series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF
(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:
943
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other
information is always set (hard coded) to:
TP
Recorded fault with trip. [1]
TM
Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV
Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to

the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes
action. In 670 series FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for
each disturbance.
ASDU26
When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault
number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip
and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF
is in 670 series, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the
disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever
he connects to the corresponding input.
Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485
No
number of loads
No
Optical interface
glass fibre
Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s
Yes
19200 bit/s
Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used
Yes

944
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Supported
Connectors
connector F-SMA
No
connector BFOC/2.5
Yes
Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU
Yes
Time-tagged message
Yes
Time-tagged message with rel. time
Yes
Measurands I
Yes
Time-tagged message with rel. time
Yes
Identification
Yes
Yes
End of general interrogation
Yes
Measurands II
Yes
10
Generic data
No
11
Generic identification
No
23
List of recorded disturbances
Yes
26
Ready for transm. of disturbance data
Yes
27
Ready for transm. of a channel
Yes
28
Ready for transm of tags
Yes
29
Transmission of tags
Yes
30
Transmission fo disturbance data
Yes
31
End of transmission
Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction

ASDU
Yes
Yes
General interrogation
Yes
10
Generic data
No
20
General command
Yes
21
Generic command
No
24
Order for disturbance data transmission
Yes
25
Acknowledgement for distance data transmission
Yes
Selection of basic application functions

Test mode
No
Blocking of monitoring direction
Yes
945
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Supported
17.6.2.2
Disturbance data
Yes
Private data
Yes
Generic services
No
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP
on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication
module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre
cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different
types are available depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of
the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
17.6.3
Function block
BLOCK
FUNTYPE
I103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC05000689 V2 EN
I103CMD
BLOCK
FUNTYPE
16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC05000684 V2 EN
I103USRCMD
BLOCK
OUTPUT1
PULSEMOD
OUTPUT2
T
OUTPUT3
FUNTYPE
OUTPUT4
INFNO_1
OUTPUT5
INFNO_2
OUTPUT6
INFNO_3
OUTPUT7
INFNO_4
OUTPUT8
INFNO_5
INFNO_6
INFNO_7
INFNO_8
IEC05000693 V2 EN
946
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
21_TESTM
FUNTYPE
IEC05000688 V2 EN
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
FUNTYPE
INFNO_1
INFNO_2
INFNO_3
INFNO_4
INFNO_5
INFNO_6
INFNO_7
INFNO_8
IEC05000694 V2 EN
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
FUNTYPE
IEC05000692 V2 EN
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
FUNTYPE
IEC05000685 V2 EN
947
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
I103FLTDIS
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
73_SCL
FLTLOC
ARINPROG
FUNTYPE
IEC05000686 V2 EN
I103FLTSTD
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FUNTYPE
IEC05000687 V2 EN
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU
FUNTYPE
IEC05000683 V2 EN
948
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
FUNTYPE
IEC05000690 V2 EN
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
FUNTYPE
INFNO
IEC05000691 V2 EN
17.6.4

Table 630:
Name
BLOCK
Table 631:
Name
I103IEDCMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of commands
I103IEDCMD Output signals

Type
Description
19-LEDRS
BOOLEAN
Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1
BOOLEAN
Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2
BOOLEAN
25-GRP3
BOOLEAN
26-GRP4
BOOLEAN
Table 632:
Name
BLOCK
I103CMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of commands
949
Section 17
Table 633:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
I103CMD Output signals

Type
Description
16-AR
BOOLEAN
Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF
BOOLEAN
Information number 17, block of differential

protection
18-PROT
BOOLEAN
Information number 18, block of protection
Table 634:
Name
BLOCK
Table 635:
Name
I103USRCMD Input signals

Type
Default
BOOLEAN
Description
Block of commands
I103USRCMD Output signals

Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Command output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Command output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Command output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Command output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Command output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Command output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Command output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Command output 8
Table 636:
Name
I103IED Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS
BOOLEAN
Information number 19, reset LEDs
23_GRP1
BOOLEAN
Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2
BOOLEAN
25_GRP3
BOOLEAN
26_GRP4
BOOLEAN
21_TESTM
BOOLEAN
Information number 21, test mode is active
Table 637:
Name
I103USRDEF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary signal input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
950
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Table 638:
Name
I103SUPERV Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
32_MEASI
BOOLEAN
Information number 32, measurand supervision of

I
33_MEASU
BOOLEAN
Information number 33, measurand supervision of

U
37_IBKUP
BOOLEAN
Information number 37, I high-high back-up

protection
38_VTFF
BOOLEAN
Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA
BOOLEAN
Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL
BOOLEAN
Information number 47, group alarm
Table 639:
Name
I103EF Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
51_EFFW
BOOLEAN
Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV
BOOLEAN
Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
Table 640:
Name
I103FLTDIS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
64_STL1
BOOLEAN
Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2
BOOLEAN
66_STL3
BOOLEAN
67_STIN
BOOLEAN
Information number 67, start residual current IN
84_STGEN
BOOLEAN
Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1
BOOLEAN
Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2
BOOLEAN
71_TRL3
BOOLEAN
68_TRGEN
BOOLEAN
Information number 68, trip general
74_FW
BOOLEAN
Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV
BOOLEAN
Information number 75, reverse/bus

951
Section 17
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Type
Default
Description
78_ZONE1
BOOLEAN
Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2
BOOLEAN
80_ZONE3
BOOLEAN
81_ZONE4
BOOLEAN
82_ZONE5
BOOLEAN
76_TRANS
BOOLEAN
Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV
BOOLEAN
Information number 77, signal recevied
73_SCL
REAL
Information number 73, fault location in ohm
FLTLOC
BOOLEAN
Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLOCALCMADE)
ARINPROG
BOOLEAN
Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 641:
Name
I103FLTSTD Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
64_STL1
BOOLEAN
65_STL2
BOOLEAN
66_STL3
BOOLEAN
67_STIN
BOOLEAN
Information number 67, start residual curent IN
84_STGEN
BOOLEAN
Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1
BOOLEAN
70_TRL2
BOOLEAN
71_TRL3
BOOLEAN
68_TRGEN
BOOLEAN
Information number 68, trip general
74_FW
BOOLEAN
Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV
BOOLEAN
Information number 75, reverse/bus
85_BFP
BOOLEAN
Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1
BOOLEAN
Information number 86, trip measuring system

phase L1
87_MTRL2
BOOLEAN

phase L2
88_MTRL3
BOOLEAN

phase L3
89_MTRN
BOOLEAN

neutral N
90_IOC
BOOLEAN
Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC
BOOLEAN
Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF
BOOLEAN
Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF
BOOLEAN
Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG
BOOLEAN
Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
952
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 642:
Name
I103AR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
16_ARACT
BOOLEAN
Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON
BOOLEAN
Information number 128, circuit breaker on by autorecloser
130_UNSU
BOOLEAN
Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing
Table 643:
Name
I103MEAS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of service value reporting
IL1
REAL
0.0
Service value for current phase L1
IL2
REAL
0.0
IL3
REAL
0.0
IN
REAL
0.0
Service value for residual current IN
UL1
REAL
0.0
Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2
REAL
0.0
UL3
REAL
0.0
UL1L2
REAL
0.0
Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN
REAL
0.0
Service value for residual voltage UN
REAL
0.0
Service value for active power
REAL
0.0
Service value for reactive power
REAL
0.0
Service value for system frequency
Table 644:
Name
I103MEASUSR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of service value reporting
INPUT1
REAL
0.0
Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2
REAL
0.0
INPUT3
REAL
0.0
INPUT4
REAL
0.0
INPUT5
REAL
0.0
INPUT6
REAL
0.0
INPUT7
REAL
0.0
INPUT8
REAL
0.0
INPUT9
REAL
0.0
953
Section 17
17.6.5
Table 645:
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Setting parameters
IEC60870-5-103 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SlaveAddress
0 - 255
30
Slave address
BaudRate
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on serial line
RevPolarity
Off
On
On
Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTime
1.0 - 3600.0
0.1
5.0
Cyclic reporting time of measurments
Table 646:
Name
FUNTYPE
Table 647:
Name
FUNTYPE
Table 648:
Name
I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
FunT
Step
1
Default
255
Description
Function type (1-255)
I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
FunT
Step
1
Default
1
Description
I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PULSEMOD
0-1
Mode
Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number for output 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Table 649:
Name
FUNTYPE
I103IED Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
FunT
Step
1
Default
1
Description
954
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 650:
I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number for binary input 1

(1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo

(1-255)
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo

(1-255)
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo

(1-255)
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo

(1-255)
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo

(1-255)
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo

(1-255)
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo

(1-255)
Table 651:
I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
FUNTYPE
Table 652:
1 - 255
Values (Range)
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
Values (Range)
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
Default
1
Description
Unit
FunT
Step
1
Default
160
Description
Unit
FunT
Step
1
Default
128
Description
I103FLTSTD Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
FUNTYPE
Table 655:
Step
I103FLTDIS Non group settings (basic)
Name
Table 654:
FunT
I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name
Table 653:
Unit
1 - 255
Unit
FunT
Step
1
Default
1
Description
I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name
FUNTYPE
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
FunT
Step
1
Default
1
Description
955
Section 17
Table 656:
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
RatedIL1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated current phase L1
RatedIL2
1 - 99999
3000
RatedIL3
1 - 99999
3000
RatedIN
1 - 99999
3000
Rated residual current IN
RatedUL1
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
Rated voltage for phase L1
RatedUL2
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
RatedUL3
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
RatedUL1-UL2
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Rated voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
RatedUN
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
Rated residual voltage UN
RatedP
0.00 - 2000.00
MW
0.05
1200.00
Rated value for active power
RatedQ
0.00 - 2000.00
MVA
0.05
1200.00
Rated value for reactive power
RatedF
50.0 - 60.0
Hz
10.0
50.0
Rated system frequency
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
Table 657:
Name
I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
25
INFNO
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number for measurands

(1-255)
RatedMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Rated value for measurement on input 1
RatedMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur3
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
956
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
17.6.6
Technical data
Table 658:
IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed
9600, 19200 Bd
17.7
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV
17.7.1
Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK
^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
ÂPP1_OP
ÂPP1_CL
APP1VAL
ÂPP2_OP
ÂPP2_CL
APP2VAL
ÂPP3_OP
ÂPP3_CL
APP3VAL
ÂPP4_OP
ÂPP4_CL
APP4VAL
ÂPP5_OP
ÂPP5_CL
APP5VAL
ÂPP6_OP
ÂPP6_CL
APP6VAL
ÂPP7_OP
ÂPP7_CL
APP7VAL
ÂPP8_OP
ÂPP8_CL
APP8VAL
ÂPP9_OP
ÂPP9_CL
APP9VAL
ÂPP10_OP
ÂPP10_CL
APP10VAL
ÂPP11_OP
ÂPP11_CL
APP11VAL
ÂPP12_OP
ÂPP12_CL
APP12VAL
ÂPP13_OP
ÂPP13_CL
APP13VAL
ÂPP14_OP
ÂPP14_CL
APP14VAL
ÂPP15_OP
ÂPP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL
IEC07000048 V2 EN
Figure 496:
GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

957
Section 17
17.7.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 659:
Name
BLOCK
Table 660:
Name
GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Type
Description
RESREQ
BOOLEAN
Reservation request
RESGRANT
BOOLEAN
Reservation granted
APP1_OP
BOOLEAN
Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL
BOOLEAN
Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL
BOOLEAN
Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP
BOOLEAN
APP2_CL
BOOLEAN
APP2VAL
BOOLEAN
APP3_OP
BOOLEAN
APP3_CL
BOOLEAN
APP3VAL
BOOLEAN
APP4_OP
BOOLEAN
APP4_CL
BOOLEAN
APP4VAL
BOOLEAN
APP5_OP
BOOLEAN
APP5_CL
BOOLEAN
APP5VAL
BOOLEAN
APP6_OP
BOOLEAN
APP6_CL
BOOLEAN
APP6VAL
BOOLEAN
APP7_OP
BOOLEAN
APP7_CL
BOOLEAN
APP7VAL
BOOLEAN
APP8_OP
BOOLEAN
APP8_CL
BOOLEAN
APP8VAL
BOOLEAN
APP9_OP
BOOLEAN
APP9_CL
BOOLEAN
APP9VAL
BOOLEAN
APP10_OP
BOOLEAN
APP10_CL
BOOLEAN
APP10VAL
BOOLEAN

958
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
17.7.3
Table 661:
Type
Description
APP11_OP
BOOLEAN
APP11_CL
BOOLEAN
APP11VAL
BOOLEAN
APP12_OP
BOOLEAN
APP12_CL
BOOLEAN
APP12VAL
BOOLEAN
APP13_OP
BOOLEAN
APP13_CL
BOOLEAN
APP13VAL
BOOLEAN
APP14_OP
BOOLEAN
APP14_CL
BOOLEAN
APP14VAL
BOOLEAN
APP15_OP
BOOLEAN
APP15_CL
BOOLEAN
APP15VAL
BOOLEAN
COM_VAL
BOOLEAN
Receive communication status is valid
Setting parameters
GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name
Operation
Values (Range)
Off
On
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Off
Description
Operation Off/On
959
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
17.8
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV
17.8.1
Function block
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK
ÔUT1
OUT1VAL
ÔUT2
OUT2VAL
ÔUT3
OUT3VAL
ÔUT4
OUT4VAL
ÔUT5
OUT5VAL
ÔUT6
OUT6VAL
ÔUT7
OUT7VAL
ÔUT8
OUT8VAL
ÔUT9
OUT9VAL
ÔUT10
OUT10VAL
ÔUT11
OUT11VAL
ÔUT12
OUT12VAL
ÔUT13
OUT13VAL
ÔUT14
OUT14VAL
ÔUT15
OUT15VAL
ÔUT16
OUT16VAL
IEC07000047 V2 EN
Figure 497:
17.8.2
GOOSEBINRCV function block

Table 662:
Name
BLOCK
Table 663:
Name
GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
OUT1VAL
BOOLEAN
Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
OUT2VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
OUT3VAL
BOOLEAN
960
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
17.8.3
Table 664:
Type
Description
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
OUT4VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
OUT5VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
OUT6VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
OUT7VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
OUT8VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
OUT9VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary output 10
OUT10VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
OUT11VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
OUT12VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary output 13
OUT13VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary output 14
OUT14VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary output 15
OUT15VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary output 16
OUT16VAL
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name
Operation
17.9
Values (Range)
Off
On
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Off
Description
Operation Off/On
Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV,

MULTICMDSND
961
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
17.9.1
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Multiple command and transmit
MULTICMDRCV
Multiple command and transmit
MULTICMDSND
Introduction
The IED can be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from
other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/
inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control
purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate
with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block
with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
17.9.2
Two multiple transmit function blocks MULTICMDSND:1 and MULTICMDSND:
2 and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MULTICMDSND:3 to
MULTICMDSND:10 are available in the IED.
Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple
command block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network
Tool (LNT).
Twelve multiple command function blocks MULTICMDRCV:1 to
MULTICMDRCV:12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function
blocks MULTICMDRCV:13 to MULTICMDRCV:60 with slower execution time
are available in the IED.
Multiple command function block MULTICMDRCV has 16 outputs combined in
one block, which can be controlled from other IEDs.
The output signals, here OUTPUT1 to OUTPUT16, are then available for
configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the
binary outputs of the IED.
MULTICMDRCV also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to
0 if the block does not receive data within set maximum time.
17.9.3
Design
17.9.3.1
General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on
the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from PCM600.
962
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
17.9.4
0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station
level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values
sent from the station level.
2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from
the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic
connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer
than the execution cycle time for the command function block.
Function block
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK
ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
IEC06000007 V2 EN
Figure 498:
MULTICMDRCV function block
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK
ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC06000008 V2 EN
Figure 499:
MULTICMDSND function block
963
Section 17
17.9.5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Table 665:
Name
BLOCK
Table 666:
Name
MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of function
MULTICMDSND Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Table 667:
Name
MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Type
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
MultiReceive error
NEWDATA
BOOLEAN
New data is received
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
964
Section 17
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUTPUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
VALID
BOOLEAN
Output data is valid
Table 668:
MULTICMDSND Output signals
Name
Type
ERROR
17.9.6
Table 669:
Description
OUTPUT10
Description
BOOLEAN
MultiSend error
Setting parameters
MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.050 - 200.000
0.001
11.000
Maximum cycle time between receptions

of input data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum cycle time between receptions

of input data
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output signals
tPulseTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Pulse length for multi command outputs
Table 670:
MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
5.000
Maximum time interval between

transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum time interval between

transmission of output data
965
966
Section 18
Remote communication
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 18
About this chapter

This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware
functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function
blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
18.1

18.1.1
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
BinSignReceive
BinSignTransm
Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection,
or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 670 series
IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any
purpose, for example, communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or
other binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCM (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to four short range, medium range or long range
LDCM.
18.1.2
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms
(same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format
used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).
967
Section 18
Start
flag
8 bits
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Information
n x 16 bits
CRC
Stop
flag
16 bits
8 bits
en01000134.vsd
IEC01000134 V1 EN
Figure 500:
Data message structure
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in
the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16
definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a
separate addressing is included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from
the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC
function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the
evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and
eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are
represented as sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data
capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which
gives the capacity of 192 signals.
968
Section 18
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
18.1.3
Function block
LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000043 V2 EN
LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044 V2 EN
Figure 501:
LDCMRecBinStat function blocks
LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451 V2 EN
Figure 502:
18.1.4
LDCMRecBinStat function block

Table 671:
Name
LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals

Type
Description
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT
BOOLEAN
Detected error in remote end with incoming

message
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
No carrier is detected in the incoming message
969
Section 18
Name
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Type
Description
NOMESS
BOOLEAN
No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN
Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
Low signal level on the receive link
Table 672:
Name

Type
Description
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
YBIT
BOOLEAN

message
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
NOMESS
BOOLEAN

message
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
TRDELERR
BOOLEAN
Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR
BOOLEAN
Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN

message
REMGPSER
BOOLEAN
Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization
SUBSTITU
BOOLEAN
Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
Table 673:
Name

Type
Description
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
YBIT
BOOLEAN

message
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
NOMESS
BOOLEAN

message
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
TRDELERR
BOOLEAN
Transmission time is longer than permitted
970
Section 18
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
18.1.5
Table 674:
Type
Description
SYNCERR
BOOLEAN
Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN

message
REMGPSER
BOOLEAN
Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization
SUBSTITU
BOOLEAN
Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number used for line differential

communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,

1=High
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100
Time delay before communication error

signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100
Reset delay before communication error

signal is reset
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 675:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On

2=OutOfService
NAMECH1
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH1
User define string for analogue input 1
TerminalNo
0 - 255

communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
NAMECH2
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH2
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode when GPS

synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave

0=Slave, 1=Master

971
Section 18
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NAMECH3
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH3
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower

1=High
NAMECH4
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH4
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for transmitted current

values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100

signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100

signal is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before switching in

redundant channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
ms
100
Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
ms
0.01
0.00
Asymmetric delay when communication

use echo synch.
AnalogLatency
2 - 20
Latency between local analogue data

and transmitted
remAinLatency
2 - 20
Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
ms
20
Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
us
600
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
us
300
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
Table 676:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On

2=OutOfService
NAMECH1
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH1
TerminalNo
0 - 255

communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
NAMECH2
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH2
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode when GPS

synchroniation signal is lost
972
Section 18
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave

0=Slave, 1=Master
NAMECH3
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH3
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower

1=High
NAMECH4
0 - 13
LDCM#-CH4
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for transmitted current

values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100

signal is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100

signal is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before switching in

redundant channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
ms
100
Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
ms
0.01
0.00
Asymmetric delay when communication

use echo synch.
AnalogLatency
2 - 20
Latency between local analogue data

and transmitted
remAinLatency
2 - 20
Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
ms
20
Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
us
600
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
us
300
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
973
Section 18
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
18.2
Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit
18.2.1
Function block
LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N
IEC10000017 V1 EN
Figure 503:
LDCMTransmit function block
The function blocks are not represented in the Application

Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is
visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool
when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function
selector tool.
18.2.2

Table 677:
Name
LDCMTRN Input signals

Type
Default
Description
CT1L1
STRING
Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to

remote end
CT1L2
STRING

remote end
CT1L3
STRING

remote end
CT1N
STRING
Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N

to remote end
CT2L1
STRING

remote end
CT2L2
STRING

remote end
CT2L3
STRING

remote end
CT2N
STRING
Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N

to remote end
974
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 19
IED hardware
About this chapter

This chapter describes the different hardware modules available in the IED. The
descriptions includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of
connection terminals and modules.
19.1
Overview
19.1.1
Variants of case and local HMI display size
xx04000458.ep
IEC04000458 V1 EN
Figure 504:
1/2 19 case with medium local HMI display.
975
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
xx04000459.ep
IEC04000459 V1 EN
Figure 505:
1/2 19 case with small local HMI display.
IEC05000762 V1 EN
Figure 506:
xx05000763.eps
IEC05000763 V1 EN
Figure 507:
976
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
xx04000460.ep
IEC04000460 V1 EN
Figure 508:
xx04000461.eps
IEC04000461 V1 EN
Figure 509:
977
Section 19
IED hardware
19.1.2
Table 678:
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Case from the rear side

Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X51

and X52
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM
X312, 313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC 2 670 1.2 PG V1 EN
978
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 679:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11

MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to

X101 and X102
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC 3 670 1.2 PG V1 EN
979
Section 19
IED hardware
Table 680:
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11

MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and

X72
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM
X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411
1MRK002801-AC 4 670 1.2 PG V1 EN
980
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 681:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM,
SOM, IOM or
MIM

and X162
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or
GTM
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC 5 670 1.2 PG V1 EN
981
Section 19
IED hardware
Table 682:
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM,
SOM, IOM or
MIM

and X132
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or
GTM
X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411
1MRK002801-AC 6 670 1.2 PG V1 EN
19.2
Hardware modules
19.2.1
Overview
Table 683:
Basic modules
Module
Description
Combined backplane module (CBM)
A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals

between modules in an IED. Only the TRM (when
included) is not connected directly to this board.
Universal backplane module (UBM)
A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED

backplane with connectors for TRM (when
included), ADM etc.
Power supply module (PSM)
Including a regulated DC/DC converter that

supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
Numerical module (NUM)
An internal fail alarm output is available.
Module for overall application control. All

information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
982
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Module
Description
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push

button keyboard and an ethernet connector used
to connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM)
Transformer module that galvanically separates

the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It
has 12 analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Table 684:
Application specific modules
Module
Description
Binary input module (BIM)
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM)
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole

command outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10

outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM),

short range, medium range, long range, X21
Modules used for digital communication to remote

terminal.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3

communication modules (SLM)
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103/DNP3

communication
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
mA input module (MIM)
Analog input module with 6 independent,

galvanically separated channels.
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Used to provide the IED with GPS time

synchronization.
Static output module (SOM)
Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change

over output relays.
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling

both pulse-width modulated signals and
amplitude modulated signals and one is used for
optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.
19.2.2
Combined backplane module (CBM)
19.2.2.1
Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.
19.2.2.2
Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The
CBM backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able
to communicate with CAN based modules.
983
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal
Fail signal IRF.
19.2.2.3
Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM:
with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending

on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two
are used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two
TRMs. See figure 511
with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending
on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is
used by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 510
Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors
are connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.
2
en05000516.vsd
IEC05000516 V1 EN
Figure 510:
CBM for 1 TRM.
Pos Description
1
CAN slots
CPCI slots
984
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
en05000755.vsd
IEC05000755 V1 EN
Figure 511:
CBM for 2 TRM.
Pos Description
1
CAN slots
CPCI slots
en05000756.vsd
IEC05000756 V1 EN
Figure 512:
CBM position, rear view.
Pos Description
1
CBM
985
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.3
Universal backplane module (UBM)
19.2.3.1
Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is
mounted above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
19.2.3.2
Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the
transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical
processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on
the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM
which provides the signal path to the NUM board.
19.2.3.3
Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion
module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
The UBM exists in 2 versions.
for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 514
for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 515.
The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The
48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.
986
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
TRM
ADM
NUM
AD Data
X1
X2
X3
X4
RS485
X10
X10
Ethernet
Front
LHMI connection
port
Ethernet
X5
en05000489.vsd
IEC05000489 V1 EN
Figure 513:
UBM block diagram.
en05000757.vsd
IEC05000757 V1 EN
Figure 514:
UBM for 1 TRM.
en05000758.vsd
IEC05000758 V1 EN
Figure 515:
UBM for 2 TRM.
987
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
en05000759.vsd
IEC05000759 V1 EN
Figure 516:
UBM position, rear view.
Pos Description
1
UBM
19.2.4
Numeric processing module (NUM)
19.2.4.1
Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all
protection functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM
is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.
19.2.4.2
Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-theshelf compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with
the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
988
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP
slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a
flash file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup
of the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.
19.2.4.3
Block diagram
Compact
Flash
Logic
PMC
connector
Memory
Ethernet
UBM
connector
PC-MIP
PCI-PCIbridge
Backplane
connector
North
bridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN
Figure 517:
Numeric processing module block diagram

989
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.5
Power supply module (PSM)
19.2.5.1
Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output
is available.
19.2.5.2
Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different
DC input voltage ranges see table 685. The power supply module contains a builtin, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the
terminal and the external battery system.
Power
supply
Filter
Backplane connector
Input connector
Block diagram
Supervision
99000516.vsd
IEC99000516 V1 EN
Figure 518:
19.2.5.3
PSM Block diagram.
Technical data
Table 685:
PSM - Power supply module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input)
EL = (24 - 60) V
EL = (90 - 250) V
EL 20%
EL 20%
Power consumption
50 W typically
Auxiliary DC power in-rush
< 5 A during 0.1 s
990
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.6
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "Local HMI" for information.
19.2.7
Transformer input module (TRM)
19.2.7.1
Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
19.2.7.2
Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of
the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input
transformers.
Basic versions:
6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

12 current channels
6 current channels
The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs
are selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with
current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to
limitations in overload characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs SMAI".
991
Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.7.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 686:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
Ir = 1 or 5 A
Operative range
(0-100) x Ir
Permissive overload
4 Ir cont.
100 Ir for 1 s *)
Burden
< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A
Ac voltage
Ur = 110 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
< 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency
fr = 50/60 Hz
*)
Nominal range
(0.2-40) Ir
0.5288 V
5%
max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Table 687:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
Ir = 1 or 5 A
Permissive overload
1.1 Ir cont.
1.8 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 1 A
1.6 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 5 A
Burden
< 350 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 200 mVA at Ir = 1 A
Ac voltage
Ur = 110 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
< 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency
fr = 50/60 Hz
Nominal range
(0-1.8) Irat Ir = 1 A
(0-1.6) Irat Ir = 5 A
0.5288 V
5%
992
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.8
Analog digital conversion module, with time

synchronization (ADM)
19.2.8.1
Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 688. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM
board. The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
Table 688:
PC-MIP cards
PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PMC cards
LDCM
SLM
LR-LDCM
OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM
OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485
19.2.8.2
Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from
the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the
electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts
with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit
dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
993
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
AD1
AD2
1.2v
AD3
AD4
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN
Figure 519:
The ADM layout
994
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.9
Binary input module (BIM)
19.2.9.1
Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the
inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely
programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the
functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and eventrecording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation
of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
19.2.9.2
Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage
level of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs SMBI".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a
hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Figure 520 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four
voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand
disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
995
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
18
24/30V
48/60V
110/125V
220/250V
xx06000391.vsd
IEC06000391 V1 EN
Figure 520:
Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Guaranteed operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via
the CAN-bus on the backplane.
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 521 and 522.
996
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
[mA]
30 / 50
1
35
70
[ms]
en07000104-2.vsd
IEC07000104 V2 EN
Figure 521:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the two standard

versions of BIM.
[mA]
30
1
3.5
7.0
[ms]
en07000105.vsd
IEC07000105 V1 EN
Figure 522:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
997
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Process connector
Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Microcontroller
Opto isolated input
Memory
Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Backplane connector
Opto isolated input
CAN
Process connector
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
99000503.vsd
IEC99000503 V1 EN
Figure 523:
Block diagram of the Binary input module.
998
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.9.3
Technical data
Table 689:
BIM - Binary input module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency
10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator
Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz
Table 690:
BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency
10 pulses/s max
Balanced counter input frequency
40 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator
Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz
19.2.10
Binary output modules (BOM)
19.2.10.1
Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip
output or any signaling purpose.
19.2.10.2
Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 524.
999
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal
on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to
breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of
the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel
reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".
Output module
3
xx00000299.vsd
IEC00000299 V1 EN
Figure 524:
Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
1000
Section 19
IED hardware
Relay
Relay
Relay
Process connector
Relay
Relay
Relay
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Microcontroller
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Memory
Relay
Backplane connector
Relay
CAN
Process connector
Relay
Relay
99000505.vsd
IEC99000505 V1 EN
Figure 525:
19.2.10.3
Block diagram of the Binary Output Module
Technical data
Table 691:
BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity
Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs
24
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min
1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity

Continuous
1s
8A
10 A
1001
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
19.2.11
Static binary output module (SOM)
19.2.11.1
Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over
output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
19.2.11.2
Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:
An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM

IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
The following parts are supervised:
Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure
1002
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Drive &
Read back
Process connector
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Codeflash
Drive &
Read back
MCU
Drive &
Read back
CANdriver
Drive &
Read back
DC/DC
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Internal_fail_n
AC_fail_n
RCAN_ID
Sync
Drive &
Read back
Backplane connector
Process connector
Drive &
Read back
Reset
Drive &
Read back
en07000115.vsd
IEC07000115 V1 EN
Figure 526:
Block diagram of the static output module
1003
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC09000974 V1 EN
Figure 527:
SOM Static output principle
IEC09000975 V1 EN
Figure 528:
19.2.11.3
Connection diagram of the static output module
Technical data
Table 692:
SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity
Static binary output trip
Rated voltage
48 - 60 VDC
110 - 250 VDC
Number of outputs
Impedance open state
~300 k
~810 k
Test voltage across open contact,

1 min
No galvanic separation
No galvanic separation
Current carrying capacity:

1004
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Static binary output trip
Continuous
5A
5A
1.0s
10A
10A
0.2s
30A
30A
1.0s
10A
10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

40ms
48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
60V / 0,75A
125V / 0.35A
Making capacity at capacitive load

with the maximum capacitance of
0.2 F :
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time
Table 693:
<1ms
<1ms
SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2):

Electromechanical relay outputs
Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage
250V AC/DC
Number of outputs
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min
1000V rms
Current carrying capacity:

Continuous
8A
1.0s
10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the

maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s
30A
1.0s
10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms
48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0,35A
220V / 0,2A
250V / 0.15A
19.2.12
Binary input/output module (IOM)
19.2.12.1
Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any
signaling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for
applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary
inputs cater for required binary input information.
1005
Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.12.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
521. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 520.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output
relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output
contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common
and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output
channels, see figure 529.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix
for binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
1006
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V1 EN
Figure 529:
Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds

to rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named
XB to rear position X32, X42, and so on
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.
1007
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN
Figure 530:
19.2.12.3
IOM with MOV protection, relay example
Technical data
Table 694:
IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
110/125 V
220/250 V
Table 695:
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and signal relays
Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)
Binary outputs
10
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact,

1 min
1000 V rms
800 V DC

Continuous
1s
8A
10 A
8A
10 A
Making capacity at inductive load

with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos >

0.4
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

< 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load
10 nF
1008
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 696:
IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 60255-23)
Fast signal relays (parallel

reed relay)
Binary outputs
IOM: 10
IOM: 2
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open

contact, 1 min
250 V rms
250 V DC

Continuous
1s
8A
10 A
8A
10 A
Making capacity at inductive

loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos

j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/

R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load
10 nF
19.2.13
mA input module (MIM)
19.2.13.1
Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to
+20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
transducers. The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
19.2.13.2
Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs SMMI".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D
converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are
calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a
non-volatile memory on the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The
module communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.
1009
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Protection
& filter
Protection
& filter
Volt-ref
DC/DC
Volt-ref
DC/DC
Volt-ref
DC/DC
Volt-ref
DC/DC
Optoisolation
DC/DC
Optoisolation
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Memory
Optoisolation
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Protection
& filter
Optoisolation
A/D Converter
A/D Converter
Protection
& filter
Optoisolation
A/D Converter
DC/DC
Microcontroller
Backplane connector
Protection
& filter
Optoisolation
A/D Converter
CAN
Process connector
Protection
& filter
99000504.vsd
IEC99000504 V1 EN
Figure 531:
19.2.13.3
MIM block diagram
Technical data
Table 697:
MIM - mA input module
Quantity:
Rated value:
Nominal range:
Input resistance
Rin = 194 Ohm
Input range
5, 10, 20mA
0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption
each mA-board
each mA input
2W
0.1 W
1010
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.14
Serial and LON communication module (SLM)
19.2.14.1
Introduction
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC
60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical
communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is
used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port or
dedicated IEC 60870-5-103 port depending on ordered SLM module) and one port
is dedicated for LON communication.
19.2.14.2
Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations
of optical fiber connectors, see figure 532. The plastic fiber connectors are of snapin type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
IEC05000760 V1 EN
Figure 532:
The SLM variants, component side view
Snap in connector for plastic fiber
ST connector for glass fiber
LON port
SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port or dedicated IEC 60870-5-103 port depending on

ordered SLM module
1011
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IEC05000761 V1 EN
Figure 533:
The SLM layout overview, component side view
Receiver, LON
Transmitter, LON
Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear
side of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and
contact 1 in the lowest position.
19.2.14.3
Technical data
Table 698:
SLM LON port
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget
Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)

Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)
Fibre diameter
Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
1012
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 699:
SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget
Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *)

Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)
Fibre diameter
Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fibre: 1 mm
19.2.15
Galvanic RS485 communication module
19.2.15.1
Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0
communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a
balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a
multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires
however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for
RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are
slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.
19.2.15.2
Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 534:
PCI-con
PCIController
Local bus
to
wishbone
Status
Register
ID-chip
Control
Register
UART
RS485
tranceiver
Isolation
Rx
6-pole-connector
PCI-bus
Tx
Isolation
Isolation
Termination
Info
Register
Isolated
DC/DC
Soft
ground
2-pole
connector
PCI-con
Internal
bus
Wishbone interconnect switch
FPGA
32 MHz
IEC06000516 V1 EN
Figure 534:
The internal structure of the RS485 card
RS485 connector pinouts
The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 535) are presented in
table 700:
1013
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 700:
The arrangement for the pins
Pin
Name 2-wire
Name 4-wire
Description
RS485+
TX+
Receive/transmit high or transmit high
RS485
TX
Receive/transmit
Term
T-Term
Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver

in 2wir case) (connect to TX+)
N.A.
R-Term
Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX

+)
N.A.
RX
Receive low
N.A.
RX+
Receive high
Angle
bracket
Screw
terminal
X3
Screw
terminal
X1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
RS485
PWB
Backplane
IEC06000517 V1 EN
Figure 535:
RS485 connector
2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5
Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3
Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6
Soft ground connector pinouts
A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:
Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .
Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV
1014
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.15.3
Technical data
Table 701:
Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity
Range or value
Communication speed
240019200 bauds
External connectors
RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector
19.2.16
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
19.2.16.1
Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication
buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol (OEM rear port A,
B). The process bus use the IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The
module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.
19.2.16.2
Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems
according to IEC6185081 have been implemented.
19.2.16.3
Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine
card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single
channel or double channel unit.
PCI - bus Connector
100Base-FX
Transmitter
EEPROM
Ethernet Controller
ST fiber optic
connectors
100Base-FX
Receiver
PCI - PCI Bridge
100Base-FX
Transmitter
ID chip
Ethernet Controller
EEPROM
IO - bus Connector
100Base-FX
Receiver
ST fiber optic
connectors
en04000472.vsd
IEC04000472 V1 EN
Figure 536:
OEM block diagram.
1015
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
ID chip
LED
Transmitter
IO bus
Receiver
Ethernet cont.
25MHz oscillator
LED
Transmitter
Ethernet cont.
25MHz oscillator
PCI to PCI
bridge
PCI bus
Receiver
en05000472.vsd
IEC05000472 V1 EN
Figure 537:
19.2.16.4
OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels
Technical data
Table 702:
OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity
Rated value
Number of channels
1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC61850-8-1 and port C, D

for IEC 61850-9-2LE)
Standard
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber
62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length
1300 nm
Optical connector
Type ST
Communication speed
Fast Ethernet 100 MB
19.2.17
Line data communication module (LDCM)
19.2.17.1
Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 538.
Line data communication module LDCM
Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.
1016
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.
Never look into the laser beam.
19.2.17.2
Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:
the ADM
the NUM
ID
16.000
MHz
32,768
MHz
ST
IO-connector
ST
en07000087.vsd
IEC07000087 V1 EN
Figure 538:
The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two
PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector
1017
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X1
2.5V
ADN
2841
DS
3904
PCI9054
TQ176
FPGA
256 FBGA
MAX
3645
DS
3904
ID
3
2
en06000393.vsd
IEC06000393 V1 EN
Figure 539:
19.2.17.3
The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width

format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
Technical data
Table 703:
Line data communication module
Characteristic
Type of LDCM
Range or value
Short range (SR)
Type of fibre
Graded-index
multimode
62.5/125 m or
50/125 m
Singlemode 9/125
m
Singlemode 9/125 m
Wave length
850 nm
1310 nm
1550 nm
Optical budget
Graded-index
multimode 62.5/125
mm,
13 dB (typical
distance about 3
km *)
9 dB (typical
distance about 2
km *)
22 dB (typical
distance 80 km *)
26 dB (typical distance 110 km *)
Optical connector
Type ST
Type FC/PC
Type FC/PC
Protocol
C37.94
C37.94
implementation **)
C37.94 implementation **)
Data transmission
Synchronous
Synchronous
Synchronous
Transmission rate /
Data rate
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Clock source
Internal or
derived from
received signal
Internal or derived
from received signal
Internal or derived from received

signal
Graded-index
multimode 50/125
mm
Medium range (MR)
Long range (LR)

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94
1018
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.18
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)
19.2.18.1
Introduction
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:
19.2.18.2
Line differential protection

Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN
Figure 540:
Overview of the X.21 LDCM module
1019
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1
1
15
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN
Figure 541:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The X.21 LDCM module external connectors
Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

Ground pin
Soft ground pin, see figure 542
X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27)
balanced version
I/O
100kW
100nF
Soft ground
en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN
Figure 542:
Schematic view of soft ground
Grounding
At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IOground can be tested.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1.
2.
3.
Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2

direct to the chassi.
No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 541
1020
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
X.21 connector
Table 704:
19.2.18.3
Pinout for the X.21 communication connector
Pin number
Signal
Shield (ground)
TXD A
Control A
RXD A
Signal timing A
Ground
TXD B
10
Control B
11
RXD B
13
Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15
Not used
Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is
64 kbit/s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The
transmission is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a
device is a DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and
when the signal is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be
inverted in the control register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE
Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.
1021
Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.18.4
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Technical data
Table 705:
Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity
Range or value
Connector, X.21
Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection
2 pole screw terminal
Standard
CCITT X21
Communication speed
64 kbit/s
Insulation
1 kV
Maximum cable length
100 m
19.2.19
19.2.19.1
Introduction
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS STconnector output.
19.2.19.2
Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots.
The antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time
data is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output
connector is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.
1022
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Controller
Selector
PCI
GPS- receiver
UART-core
PCI- core
FPGA
PCI
Antenna
connector
Receiver
memory
Stripline( 50 Ohms)
Wishbone bus
Registers
Optical
PPS
transmitter
TSU
IO
Transmitter
Driver
JTAG
connector
Configmemory
OSC
ID- chip
IEC09000980 V1 EN
Figure 543:
19.2.19.3
Block diagram of the GCM
Technical data
Table 706:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Receiver
1s relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new

position or after power loss longer than 1 month
<30 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss

longer than 48 hours
<15 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss

shorter than 48 hours
<5 minutes
19.2.20
GPS antenna
19.2.20.1
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.
19.2.20.2
Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or
on an antenna mast. See figure 544
1023
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
2
3
xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN
Figure 544:
Antenna with console
where:
1
GPS antenna
TNC connector
Console, 78x150 mm
Mounting holes 5.5 mm
Tab for securing of antenna cable
Vertical mounting position
Horizontal mounting position
Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight
visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of
50% clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.
1024
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
99001046.vsd
IEC99001046 V1 EN
Figure 545:
Antenna line-of-sight
Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a
male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose
cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.
19.2.20.3
Technical data
Table 707:
GPS Antenna and cable
Function
Value
Max antenna cable attenuation
26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance
50 ohm
Lightning protection
Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector
SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end
1025
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.2.21
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B
19.2.21.1
Introduction
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of
the IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
Optical connection (ST) for 1344 IRIG-B support.
19.2.21.2
Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input
type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.
STconnector
FPGA
PCI-con
32 MHz
OPTO_INPUT
PCI-bus
Registers
PCI-con
PCI-Controller
IRIGDecoder
ID-chip
Capture1
IRIG_INPUT
ZXING
Amplitude
modulator
Isolated
receiver
IO-con
Capture2
BNCconnector
4 mm barrier
Zero-cross
detector
MPPS
PPS
TSU
CMPPS
Isolated
DC/DC
5 to +- 12V
en06000303.vsd
IEC06000303 V1 EN
Figure 546:
IRIG-B block diagram
1026
Section 19
IED hardware
A1
C
C
Y2
DC//DC
ST
A1
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
3
2
en06000304.vsd
IEC06000304 V1 EN
Figure 547:
19.2.21.3
IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input
Technical data
Table 708:
IRIG-B
Quantity
Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B
Number of channels PPS
Electrical connector IRIG-B
BNC
Optical connector PPS and IRIG-B
Type ST
Type of fibre
62.5/125 m multimode fibre
Pulse-width modulated
5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
low level
high level
1-3 Vpp
3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
1027
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.3
Dimensions
19.3.1
Case without rear cover
A
D
C
xx08000164.vsd
IEC08000164 V1 EN
Figure 548:
Case without rear cover
1028
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
K
F
G
H
J
xx08000166.vsd
IEC08000166 V1 EN
Figure 549:
Case size (mm) A
Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

E
6U, 1/2 x 19
265.9
223.7
201.1
252.9
205.7
190.5
203.7
187.6
6U, 3/4 x 19
265.9
336.0
201.1
252.9
318.0
190.5
316.0
187.6
6U, 1/1 x 19
265.9
448.3
201.1
252.9
430.3
190.5
428.3
465.1
187.6
482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit
1029
Section 19
IED hardware
19.3.2
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Case with rear cover
C
xx08000163.vsd
IEC08000163 V1 EN
Figure 550:
Case with rear cover
1030
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
K
F
G
H
J
xx08000165.vsd
IEC08000165 V1 EN
Figure 551:
Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit
xx05000503.vsd
IEC05000503 V1 EN
Figure 552:
Case size (mm) A
Rear cover case with details

E
6U, 1/2 x 19
265.9
223.7
242.1
255.8
205.7
190.5
203.7
228.6
6U, 3/4 x 19
265.9
336.0
242.1
255.8
318.0
190.5
316.0
228.6
6U, 1/1 x 19
265.9
448.3
242.1
255.8
430.3
190.5
428.3
465.1
228.6
482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.
1031
Section 19
IED hardware
19.3.3
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Flush mounting dimensions
E
D
xx08000162.vsd
IEC08000162 V1 EN
Figure 553:
Case size
Tolerance
Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm)
A
+/-1
B
+/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19"
210.1
254.3
4.0-10.0
12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19"
322.4
254.3
4.0-10.0
12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19"
434.7
254.3
4.0-10.0
12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover
1032
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.3.4
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions
xx06000182.vsd
IEC06000182 V1 EN
Figure 554:
A 1/2 x 19 size 670 series IED side-by-side with RHGS6.
C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN
Figure 555:
Case size (mm) A

Tolerance
1
B
1
Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
C
1
D
1
E
1
F
1
G
1
6U, 1/2 x 19
214.0
259.3
240.4
190.5
34.4
13.2
6.4 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19
326.4
259.3
352.8
190.5
34.4
13.2
6.4 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19
438.7
259.3
465.1
190.5
34.4
13.2
6.4 diam
1033
Section 19
IED hardware
19.3.5
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Wall mounting dimensions
A
B
E
en04000471.vsd
IEC04000471 V1 EN
Figure 556:
Case size (mm)
Wall mounting
6U, 1/2 x 19
292.0
267.1
272.8
390.0
243.0
6U, 3/4 x 19
404.3
379.4
272.8
390.0
243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19
516.0
491.1
272.8
390.0
243.0
19.3.6
External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection
WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high
voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by
national low/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a
protective cover or in a separate box!
1034
Section 19
IED hardware
[6.97]
[4.02]
[1.48
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
[18.31]
[0.33]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
Dimension
mm [inches]
xx06000232.eps
IEC06000232 V1 EN
Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit
[7.50]
[10.47]
[1.50]
Figure 557:
[18.31]
[0.33]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
[inches]
en06000234.eps
IEC06000234 V1 EN
Figure 558:
Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
19.4
Mounting alternatives
19.4.1
Flush mounting
19.4.1.1
Overview
The flush mounting kit are utilized for case sizes:
1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)
1035
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class
IP54 protection.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs
when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained
when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted

sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.
1036
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.4.1.2
Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1
5
2
6
3
xx08000161.vsd
IEC08000161 V1 EN
Figure 559:
Flush mounting details.
PosNo Description
Quantity Type
Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and front plate.
Fastener
Groove
Screw, self tapping
2.9x9.5 mm
Joining point of sealing strip
Panel
1037
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.4.2
19 panel rack mounting
19.4.2.1
Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening
screws for the angles.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19
or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.
When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that

follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1038
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.4.2.2
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

2
1a
1b
xx08000160.vsd
IEC08000160 V1 EN
Figure 560:
Pos
19 panel rack mounting details
Description
Quantity
Type
1a, 1b
Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to

the left or right side of the case.
Screw
M4x6
19.4.3
Wall mounting
19.4.3.1
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
1039
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows
the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions
than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for communication
modules with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP3 and LON communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet
module (OEM) and Line data communication module (LDCM).
19.4.3.2
Mounting procedure for wall mounting

3
4
2
1
5
6
xx04000453.vs d
DOCUMENT127716-IMG2265 V1 EN
Figure 561:
Wall mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Bushing
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M6x12 or
corresponding
1040
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
19.4.3.3
Mounting bar
Screw
M5x8
Side plate
How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover, which is recommended to
use with this type of mounting. See figure 562.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.
View from above
3
80 mm
en06000135.vsd
IEC06000135 V1 EN
Figure 562:
How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo
Description
Type
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M5x8
Rear protection cover
19.4.4
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting
19.4.4.1
Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-byside up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
1041
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.
19.4.4.2
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1
xx04000456.vsd
IEC04000456 V1 EN
Figure 563:
19.4.4.3
Side-by-side rack mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12
depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test
switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type
for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip IEDs.
1042
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
xx06000180.vsd
IEC06000180 V1 EN
Figure 564:
IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch
and a RX2 terminal base
19.4.5
Side-by-side flush mounting
19.4.5.1
Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is
required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side
mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out
is 19.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is
obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the
IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted
IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.
1043
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.
19.4.5.2
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1
3
4
xx06000181.vsd
IEC06000181 V1 EN
Figure 565:
Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x

19 IED).
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
19.5
Technical data
19.5.1
Enclosure
Table 709:
Material
Case
Steel sheet
Front plate
Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment
Aluzink preplated steel
Finish
Light grey (RAL 7035)
1044
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 710:
Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front
IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Rear, sides, top and

bottom
IP20
Table 711:
Weight
Case size
19.5.2
Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19
10 kg
6U, 3/4 x 19
15 kg
6U, 1/1 x 19
18 kg
Connection system
Table 712:
CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type
Rated voltage and current
Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for

ring lug terminals
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
Table 713:
Binary I/O connection system
Connector type
Rated voltage
Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type
250 V AC
2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for

ring lug terminals
300 V AC
3 mm2 (AWG14)
Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered

for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.
19.5.3
Influencing factors
Table 714:
Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter
Reference value
Nominal range
Influence
Ambient temperature,
operate value
+20 C
-10 C to +55 C
0.02% /C
Relative humidity
Operative range
10%-90%
0%-95%
10%-90%
Storage temperature
-40 C to +70 C
1045
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 715:
Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on
Reference value
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage

Operative range
max. 2%
Full wave rectified
Within nominal range Influence

15% of EL
0.01% /%
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate

value
20% of EL
0.01% /%
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage
24-60 V DC 20%
90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption
interval
050 ms
Table 716:
0 s
Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time
<180 s
Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)
Dependence on
19.5.4
No restart
Within nominal range
Influence
Frequency dependence,
operate value
fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
1.0% / Hz
Frequency dependence
for distance protection
operate value
fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
2.0% / Hz
Harmonic frequency
dependence (20%
content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr
1.0%
Harmonic frequency
dependence for distance
protection (10% content)
6.0%
Harmonic frequency
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
5.0%
Type tests according to standard

Table 717:
Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
Type test values
Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance
2.5 kV
IEC 60255-22-1
100 kHz slow damped

oscillatory wave immunity
test
2.5 kV
IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
Ring wave immunity test,

100 kHz
2-4 kV
IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
Surge withstand capability

test
2.5 kV, oscillatory

4.0 kV, fast transient
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
1046
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Test
Type test values
Reference standards
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Fast transient disturbance
4 kV
IEC 60255-22-4, Class A
Surge immunity test
1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms

high energy
IEC 60255-22-5
Power frequency immunity

test
150-300 V, 50 Hz
IEC 60255-22-7, Class A
Conducted common mode

immunity test
15 Hz-150 kHz
Power frequency magnetic

field test
1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic

field test
100 A/m
IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz
IEC 60255-22-3
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
35 V/m
26-1000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
Conducted electromagnetic
field disturbance
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 60255-22-6
Radiated emission
30-1000 MHz
IEC 60255-25
Conducted emission
0.15-30 MHz
IEC 60255-25
Table 718:
1.4-2.7 GHz
Insulation
Test
Type test values
Dielectric test
2.0 kV AC, 1 min.
Impulse voltage test
5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance
>100 MW at 500 VDC
Table 719:
Reference standard
IEC 60255-5
Environmental tests
Test
Type test value
Reference standard
Cold test
Test Ad for 16 h at -25C
IEC 60068-2-1
Storage test
Test Ad for 16 h at -40C
IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat test
Test Bd for 16 h at +70C
IEC 60068-2-2
Damp heat test, steady state
Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C

and humidity 93%
IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat test, cyclic
Test Db for 6 cycles at +25

to +55 C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)
IEC 60068-2-30
1047
Section 19
IED hardware
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 720:
CE compliance
Test
According to
Immunity
EN 50263
Emissivity
EN 50263
Low voltage directive
EN 50178
Table 721:
Mechanical tests
Test
Type test values
Reference standards
Vibration response test
Class II
IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test
Class II
IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test
Class II
IEC 60255-21-3
1048
Section 20
Labels
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 20
Labels
About this chapter

This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them.
20.1
Labels on IED
Front view of IED
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN
1049
Section 20
Labels
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Product type, description and serial number
Order number, dc supply voltage and rated

frequency
Optional, customer specific information
Manufacturer
Transformer input module, rated currents

and voltages
Transformer designations
Ordering and serial number
IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN
IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN
1050
Section 20
Labels
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Rear view of IED
1
2
3
4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN
Warning label
Caution label
Class 1 laser product label
IEC06000575 V1 EN
Warning label
1051
1052
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 21
Connection diagrams
This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical
connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical
connections to the IED.
1053
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 1 V1 EN
1054
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 2 670 1.2 V1 EN
1055
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 3 670 1.2 V1 EN
1056
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 4 670 1.2 V1 EN
1057
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 5 670 1.2 V1 EN
1058
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 6 670 1.2 V1 EN
1059
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 7 670 1.2 V1 EN
1060
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 8 670 1.2 V1 EN
1061
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 9 670 1.2 V1 EN
1062
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 10 670 1.2 V1 EN
1063
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 11 670 1.2 V1 EN
1064
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 12 670 1.2 V1 EN
1065
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 13 670 1.2 V1 EN
1066
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 14 670 1.2 V1 EN
1067
Section 21
Connection diagrams
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
1MRK002801-AC 15 670 1.2 V1 EN
1068
Section 22
Inverse time characteristics
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 22
About this chapter

This chapter describes current and voltage dependant time functionality. Both
ANSI and IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.
22.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at
different points in the network different time delays for the different protections are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
operating in series.
I>
I>
I>
xx05000129.vsd
IEC05000129 V1 EN
Figure 566:
Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3
Time
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN
Figure 567:
Definite time overcurrent characteristics
1069
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN
Figure 568:
Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance
time and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of
following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset times of the protections
Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.
1070
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A1
B1
I>
I>
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132.vsd
IEC05000132 V1 EN
Figure 569:
Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
t=0
is The fault occurs
t=t1
is Protection B1 trips
t=t2
is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay

(instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault
current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker.
The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in
time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1
will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit
breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted.
The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum
opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of
protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when
the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the
following applications:
1071
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for
other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to
assure the release function.
22.2
22.2.1
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the
component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the
current level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is
reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the
hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are
chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 193.
A
k
t[ s ] =
+
B
i p
-C
in >
(Equation 193)
EQUATION1189 V1 EN
where:
p, A, B, C
are constants defined for each curve type,
in>
is the set start current for step n,
is set time multiplier for step n and
is the measured current.
1072
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can
be seen:
i p
(top - B k )
- C = Ak
in >
(Equation 194)
EQUATION1190 V1 EN
where:
top
is the operating time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils
according to equation 195, in addition to the constant time delay:
i p
in > - C dt A k
0
(Equation 195)
EQUATION1191 V1 EN
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
i( j ) p
- C A k
j =1 in >
Dt
(Equation 196)
EQUATION1192 V1 EN
where:
j=1
is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been

detected, that is, when
i
in >
>1
EQUATION1193 V1 EN
Dt
is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip

time equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j)
is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the
IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 570.
1073
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Operate
time
tMin
IMin
Current
IEC05000133 V2 EN
Figure 570:
Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse
time curve for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note
that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time
multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical
ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 198:
k
t[ s ] =
in >
0.339 - 0.235
i
EQUATION1194 V1 EN
(Equation 198)
where:
in>
is the set start current for step n
is set time multiplier for step n
is the measured current
1074
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex

protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for
sensitive residual earth-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive
earth faults. The curve is described by equation 199:
k in >
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
EQUATION1195 V1 EN
(Equation 199)
where:
in>
is the set start current for step n,
is set time multiplier for step n and
is the measured current
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse
time curve according to the general equation 200.
t[ s ] =
+ Bk
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1196 V1 EN
(Equation 200)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the
possibility to choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current
drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the
current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after
fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the
hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 201.
1075
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
tr
k
t [s] =
2
i
-1
in >
(Equation 201)
EQUATION1197 V2 EN
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr
and cr must be given, see equation 202:
tr
k
t [s] =
pr
i
- cr
in >
EQUATION1198 V2 EN
(Equation 202)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the
operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay
and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay
is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay
for that stage to zero.
1076
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
22.3
Inverse characteristics
Table 722:
ANSI Inverse time characteristics
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
Accuracy
k = (0.05-999) in steps of
0.01 unless otherwise stated
ANSI Extremely Inverse
A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI/IEEE C37.112,
class 5 + 40 ms
ANSI Very inverse
A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,

tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse
A=0.0086, B=0.0185,
P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse
A=0.0515, B=0.1140,
P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,

tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,

tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse
k=(0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
+ B k
EQUATION1249-SMALL V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
tr
2
-1
I = Imeasured/Iset
1077
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 723:
IEC Inverse time characteristics
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
Accuracy
k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% of set time 10

ms
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC 60255-3, class 5 +

40 ms
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse
A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse
A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse
A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic
Operate characteristic:
k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps
of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of
0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001
t =
A
P
k
( I - 1)
I = Imeasured/Iset
t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B k
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
IEC 60255, class 5 + 40

ms
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 724:
RI and RD type inverse time characteristics
Function
Range or value
RI type inverse characteristic

1
t =
0.339 -
Accuracy
k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
IEC 60255-3, class 5 +

40 ms
k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
IEC 60255-3, class 5 +

40 ms
0.236
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
I
k
I = Imeasured/Iset
1078
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 725:
Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in
steps of 0.01 unless
otherwise stated
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
U -U >
U>
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in
otherwise stated
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
2.0
- 0.035
Type C curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in
otherwise stated
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
3.0
- 0.035
Programmable curve:
t =
kA
B U - U >
U >
-C
+D
k = (0.05-1.10) in
otherwise stated
A = (0.005-200.000)
in steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in
steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000)
in steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001
1079
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 726:
Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in
otherwise stated
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
U < -U
U<
U< = Uset
U = UVmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
k 480
32 U < -U - 0.5
U <
2.0
+ 0.055
k = (0.05-1.10) in
otherwise stated
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Programmable curve:
kA
+D
t =
P
U < -U
-C
B
U <

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
k = (0.05-1.10) in
otherwise stated
A = (0.005-200.000)
in steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in
steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000)
in steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001
1080
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Table 727:
Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
U -U >
U>
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
2.0
- 0.035
Type C curve:
t =
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k 480
32 U - U > - 0.5
U >
3.0
- 0.035
Programmable curve:
t =
kA
B U - U >
U >
-C
+D
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001
1081
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070750 V2 EN
Figure 571:
ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics
1082
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070751 V2 EN
Figure 572:
ANSI Very inverse time characteristics
1083
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070752 V2 EN
Figure 573:
ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics
1084
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070753 V2 EN
Figure 574:
ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics
1085
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070817 V2 EN
Figure 575:
ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics
1086
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070818 V2 EN
Figure 576:
ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics
1087
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070819 V2 EN
Figure 577:
ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics
1088
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070820 V2 EN
Figure 578:
IEC Normal inverse time characteristics
1089
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070821 V2 EN
Figure 579:
IEC Very inverse time characteristics
1090
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070822 V2 EN
Figure 580:
IEC Inverse time characteristics
1091
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070823 V2 EN
Figure 581:
IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics
1092
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070824 V2 EN
Figure 582:
IEC Short time inverse time characteristics
1093
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070825 V2 EN
Figure 583:
IEC Long time inverse time characteristics
1094
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070826 V2 EN
Figure 584:
RI-type inverse time characteristics
1095
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
A070827 V2 EN
Figure 585:
RD-type inverse time characteristics
1096
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
Figure 586:
Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection
1097
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
Figure 587:
Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection
1098
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
Figure 588:
Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection
1099
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
Figure 589:
Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection
1100
Section 22
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
Figure 590:
Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection
1101
1102
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
Section 23
Glossary
About this chapter

This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in
ABB technical documentation.
AC
Alternating current
ACT
Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter
Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS
Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI
Analog input
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AR
Autoreclosing
ArgNegRes
Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDir
Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT
Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD
Adaptive signal detection
AWG
American Wire Gauge standard
BBP
Busbar protection
BFP
Breaker failure protection
BI
Binary input
BIM
Binary input module
BOM
Binary output module
BOS
Binary outputs status
BR
External bistable relay
BS
British Standards
BSR
Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST
Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94
IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals

between IEDs
CAN
Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for

serial communication
CB
Circuit breaker
1103
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
CBM
Combined backplane module
CCITT
Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and

Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM
CAN carrier module
CCVT
Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C
Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS
Combined megapulses per second
CMT
Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Codirectional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves

two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information
in both directions
COMTRADE
Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves

four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting
data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
CPU
Central processor unit
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
CROB
Control relay output block
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CVT
Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR
Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA
Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US

developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL
Dead bus dead line
DBLL
Dead bus live line
DC
Direct current
DFC
Data flow control
DFT
Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch
Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI
Digital input
DLLB
Dead line live bus
1104
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
DNP
Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std.

1379-2000
DR
DRAM
Dynamic random access memory
DRH
Disturbance report handler
DSP
Digital signal processor
DTT
Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network
Extra high voltage network
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
(Electric Motive Force)
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EnFP
End fault protection
EPA
Enhanced performance architecture
ESD
FCB
Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20
Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,

data and protection signals
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus
Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of

up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703
Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by

local telephone companies. Can be transported over
balanced and unbalanced lines
GCM
Communication interface module with carrier of GPS

receiver module
GDE
Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI
General interrogation command
GIS
Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE
Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS
Global positioning system
GTM
GPS Time Module
HDLC protocol
High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC

standard
HFBR connector
type
Plastic fiber connector
HMI
Human-machine interface
1105
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
HSAR
High speed autoreclosing
HV
High-voltage
HVDC
High-voltage direct current
IDBS
Integrating deadband supervision
IEC
International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6
IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6:

Requirements for protective current transformers for
transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial

master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850
Substation automation communication standard
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12
A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on

twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1
PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.

References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IED
Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS
Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM
Binary input/output module
Instance
When several occurrences of the same function are available

in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces.
The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of
information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a
type of function.
IP
1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP

protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard
IP 20
Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IP 40
IP 54
IRF
Internal failure signal
1106
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
IRIG-B:
InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,

standard 200
ITU
International Telecommunications Union
LAN
Local area network
LIB 520
High-voltage software module
LCD
Liquid crystal display
LDCM
Line differential communication module
LDD
Local detection device
LED
Light-emitting diode
LNT
LON network tool
LON
Local operating network
MCB
Miniature circuit breaker
MCM
Mezzanine carrier module
MIM
Milli-ampere module
MPM
Main processing module
MVB
Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally

developed for use in trains.
NCC
National Control Centre
NUM
Numerical module
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OEM
Optical ethernet module
OLTC
On-load tap changer
OV
Over-voltage
Overreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching
when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it
should not have seen it.
PCI
Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM
Pulse code modulation
PCM600
Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP
Mezzanine card standard
PISA
Process interface for sensors & actuators
PMC
PCI Mezzanine card

1107
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
POR
Permissive overreach
POTT
Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near

proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
Power supply module
PST
Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio
Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT
Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC
Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA
RFPP
Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
RFPE
Resistance for phase-to-earth faults
RISC
Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value
Root mean square value
RS422
A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital

data in point-to-point connections
RS485
Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC
Real-time clock
RTU
Remote terminal unit
SA
Substation Automation
SBO
Select-before-operate
SC
Switch or push button to close
SCS
Station control system
SCADA
Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT
System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU
Service data unit
SLM
Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC/

DNP3 communication.
SMA connector
Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant

impedance.
SMT
Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS
Station monitoring system
SNTP
Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize

computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
1108
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the

required accuracy.
SPA
Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave

protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY
Switch for CB ready condition
ST
Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint
Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC
Static VAr compensation
TC
Trip coil
TCS
Trip circuit supervision
TCP
Transmission control protocol. The most common transport

layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de

facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet
working and encompasses both network layer and transport
layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at
specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the
entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon
these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF
Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TNC connector
Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance

version of a BNC connector
TPZ, TPY, TPX,

TPS
Current transformer class according to IEC
UMT
User management tool
Underreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
U/I-PISA
Process interface components that deliver measured voltage

and current values
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,

maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated
dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC
is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the
addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize
it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the
eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5
1109
Section 23
Glossary
1MRK 505 222-UEN B
degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular rotation, on

which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is
expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian
calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where
it is also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu
time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which
stands for longitude zero.
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
Weak end infeed logic
VT
Voltage transformer
X.21
A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom

equipment
3IO
Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the

residual or the earth-fault current
3UO
Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as

the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
1110
1111
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters, Sweden
Phone
+46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Fax
+46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
1MRK 505 222-UEN B Copyright 2011 ABB. All rights reserved.
Contact us

1mrk505222-Uen B en Technical Reference Manual Red670 1.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1mrk505222-Uen B en Technical Reference Manual Red670 1.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion 670 series

Line differential protection RED670

Document ID: 1MRK 505 222-UEN

Copyright 2011 ABB. All rights reserved

Technical reference manual

Input and output signals.........................................................56

Basic IED functions........................................................67

Test mode functionality TEST..........................................................90

Input and output signals............................................................151

Impedance protection ..................................................155

Technical reference manual

Minimum operate currents....................................................206

Technical reference manual

Operating quantity within the function..................................378

Technical reference manual

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................491

Section 10 Multipurpose protection................................................509

Section 11 Secondary system supervision.....................................535

Section 13 Scheme communication...............................................711

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual

Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC..............................................761

Input and output signals............................................................894

Section 17 Station communication.................................................897

Section 18 Remote communication................................................967

Section 19 IED hardware...............................................................975

Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1005

Case without rear cover...........................................................1028

Section 21 Connection diagrams.................................................1053

1MRK 505 222-UEN B

About this chapter

Introduction to the technical reference manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED

Planning & purchase

The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting

1MRK 505 222-UEN B

manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,

About the technical reference manual

1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Logic describes trip logic and related functions.

1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Input and output signals

Logic diagram example with -int signals

1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Input and output signals

Example of a function block

1MRK 505 222-UEN B

Documents related to RED670

1MRK 505 223-UEN

Installation and commissioning manual

1MRK 505 224-UEN

Technical reference manual

1MRK 505 222-UEN

1MRK 505 225-UEN

Product guide customized

1MRK 505 226-BEN

Product guide pre-configured

1MRK 505 228-BEN

Product guide IEC 61850-9-2